RTN 980 IDU Hardware Description (V100R003C00 - 01)

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System
V100R003C00
IDU Hardware Description
Issue 01
Date 2010-12-30
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Issue 01 (2010-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
IDU Hardware Description About This Document
About This Document
Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name Version
OptiX RTN 980 V100R003C00
iManager U2000 V100R003C00
Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l Network planning engineer

l Hardware installation engineer
l Installation and commissioning engineer
l Field maintenance engineer
l Data configuration engineer
l System maintenance engineer
Before reading this document, you need to be familiar with the following:
l Basics of digital microwave communication

l Basics of the OptiX RTN 980
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk,

which if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
Issue 01 (2010-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

About This Document IDU Hardware Description
Symbol Description
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level

of risk, which if not avoided, could result in
minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation,

which if not avoided, could result in
equipment damage, data loss, performance
degradation, or unexpected results.
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a

problem or save time.
Provides additional information to emphasize

or supplement important points of the main
text.
General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.
Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in

boldface. For example, log in as user root.
Italic Book titles are in italics.

Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are in
Courier New.
Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic Command arguments are in italics.
[] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.
{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. One item is selected.
iv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 01 (2010-12-30)

IDU Hardware Description About This Document
[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.
{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

are in boldface. For example, click OK.
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Update History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Thus, the latest document issue contains all
updates made in previous issues.
Updates in Issue 01 (2010-12-30) Based on Product Version V100R003C00

This document is the first release of the V100R003C00 version.
Issue 01 (2010-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

IDU Hardware Description Contents
Contents
About This Document...................................................................................................................iii

1 Introduction.................................................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Network Application.......................................................................................................................................1-2
1.2 Components.....................................................................................................................................................1-3
1.3 Radio Link Forms............................................................................................................................................1-7
2 Chassis..........................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Chassis Structure.............................................................................................................................................2-2
2.2 Installation Mode.............................................................................................................................................2-2
2.3 IDU Labels......................................................................................................................................................2-3
3 Boards...........................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Board Appearance...........................................................................................................................................3-3
3.2 Board List........................................................................................................................................................3-4
3.3 CSHN..............................................................................................................................................................3-7
3.3.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................3-8
3.3.2 Functions and Features...........................................................................................................................3-8
3.3.3 Working Principle................................................................................................................................3-14
3.3.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-18
3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF Card...................................................................................................................3-27
3.3.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-29
3.3.7 Types of SFP Modules.........................................................................................................................3-31
3.3.8 Board Parameter Settings.....................................................................................................................3-31
3.3.9 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................3-32
3.4 IF1.................................................................................................................................................................3-35
3.4.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-35
3.4.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-36
3.4.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-37
3.4.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-42
3.4.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-44
3.5 IFU2..............................................................................................................................................................3-47
Issue 01 (2010-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

Contents IDU Hardware Description

3.5.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-54
3.5.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-56
3.6 IFX2..............................................................................................................................................................3-60
3.6.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-67
3.6.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-70
3.7 ISU2..............................................................................................................................................................3-74
3.7.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-81
3.7.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-83
3.8 ISX2..............................................................................................................................................................3-88
3.8.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-96
3.8.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-99
3.8.6 Board Parameter Settings...................................................................................................................3-101
3.8.7 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................3-101
3.9 EM6T/EM6F...............................................................................................................................................3-104
3.9.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................3-105
3.9.2 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................3-105
3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................3-108
3.9.4 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................3-110
3.9.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................3-115
3.9.6 Board Feature Code............................................................................................................................3-116
3.9.7 Board Parameter Settings...................................................................................................................3-116
3.9.8 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................3-117
3.10 SL1D.........................................................................................................................................................3-119
3.10.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-119
3.10.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-119
viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 01 (2010-12-30)

3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................3-121

3.10.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-123
3.10.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-125
3.10.6 Board Feature Code..........................................................................................................................3-126
3.10.7 Board Parameter Settings.................................................................................................................3-127
3.10.8 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................3-127
3.11 ML1/MD1.................................................................................................................................................3-128
3.11.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-133
3.11.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-136
3.12 SP3S/SP3D................................................................................................................................................3-139
3.12.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-143
3.12.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-147
3.13 AUX..........................................................................................................................................................3-149
3.13.3 Working Principle............................................................................................................................3-150
3.13.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-152
3.13.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-154
3.14 PIU............................................................................................................................................................3-157
3.14.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-160
3.14.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-161
3.15 FAN...........................................................................................................................................................3-162
Issue 01 (2010-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix

3.15.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-165

3.15.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-166
4 Accessories...................................................................................................................................4-1
4.1 E1 Panel...........................................................................................................................................................4-2
4.2 PDU.................................................................................................................................................................4-4
4.2.1 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................4-4
4.2.2 Functions and Working Principle...........................................................................................................4-5
4.2.3 Power Distribution Mode.......................................................................................................................4-6
5 Cables...........................................................................................................................................5-1
5.1 Power Cable....................................................................................................................................................5-3
5.2 PGND Cable....................................................................................................................................................5-4
5.2.1 IDU PGND Cable...................................................................................................................................5-4
5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable...........................................................................................................................5-5
5.3 IF Jumper.........................................................................................................................................................5-5
5.4 XPIC Cable.....................................................................................................................................................5-6
5.5 Fiber Jumper....................................................................................................................................................5-7
5.6 E1 Cables.........................................................................................................................................................5-9
5.6.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment..................................................................................5-10
5.6.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel....................................................................................................5-13
5.7 Orderwire Cable............................................................................................................................................5-15
5.8 Network Cable...............................................................................................................................................5-16
A Parameters Description...........................................................................................................A-1
A.1 Parameters for Network Management...........................................................................................................A-2
A.1.1 Parameters for NE Management...........................................................................................................A-2
A.1.2 Parameters for Communications Management...................................................................................A-17
A.1.3 Parameters for Network Security Management..................................................................................A-40
A.2 Radio Link Parameters................................................................................................................................A-44
A.2.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation.........................................A-45
A.2.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC............................................................................A-49
A.2.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create.................................................................................A-57
A.2.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection..............................................................................................A-58
A.2.5 Parameter: IF 1+1 Protection_Create.................................................................................................A-59
A.2.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection..........................................................................................A-61
A.2.7 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration....................................................................A-64
A.3 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters....................................................................................................A-74
A.3.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_Creation...................................................................................A-74
A.3.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP...................................................................................................A-77
A.3.3 Parameter Description: Ring MSP_Creation......................................................................................A-81
A.3.4 Parameter Description: Ring MSP.....................................................................................................A-83
A.4 SDH/PDH Service Parameters....................................................................................................................A-84
x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 01 (2010-12-30)

A.4.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation..........................................................A-85

A.4.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP Service Creation..................................A-87
A.4.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Converting Normal Services Into SNCP Services
......................................................................................................................................................................A-91
A.4.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration..........................................................................A-95
A.4.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control..................................................................................A-97
A.4.6 Parameter Description: TU_AIS Insertion.......................................................................................A-100
A.5 Parameters for Board Interfaces................................................................................................................A-101
A.5.1 PDH Port Parameters........................................................................................................................A-102
A.5.2 Parameters for the Ports on Ethernet Boards....................................................................................A-106
A.5.3 Serial Port Parameters......................................................................................................................A-118
A.5.4 Microwave Interface Parameters......................................................................................................A-120
A.5.5 IF Board Parameters.........................................................................................................................A-129
A.5.6 ODU Parameters...............................................................................................................................A-141
A.5.7 Parameters for SDH Interface Boards..............................................................................................A-148
A.5.8 Parameters for PDH Interface Boards..............................................................................................A-151
A.5.9 Parameters for Overhead..................................................................................................................A-154
A.6 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Featureson the Packet Plane...........................................A-159
A.6.1 Parameters for Ethernet Services......................................................................................................A-159
A.6.2 Parameters for Ethernet Protocols....................................................................................................A-208
A.6.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM....................................................................................................A-251
A.6.4 QoS Parameters................................................................................................................................A-263
A.7 RMON Parameters....................................................................................................................................A-301
A.7.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics Group.......................................................A-301
A.7.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Group..........................................................A-302
A.7.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Control Group............................................A-303
A.7.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting........................................................A-304
A.8 Parameters for MPLS/PWE3 Services......................................................................................................A-306
A.8.1 MPLS Tunnel Parameters.................................................................................................................A-306
A.8.2 CES Parameters................................................................................................................................A-380
A.8.3 ATM Parameters..............................................................................................................................A-402
A.9 Clock Parameters.......................................................................................................................................A-454
A.9.1 Parameter Description: Frequency Selection Mode.........................................................................A-454
A.9.2 Physical Clock Parameters...............................................................................................................A-455
A.9.3 CES ACR Clock Parameters............................................................................................................A-474
A.10 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces...........................................................................A-475
A.10.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General...................................................................................A-476
A.10.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced................................................................................A-478
A.10.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port...........................................................................A-478
A.10.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port................................................................A-479
A.10.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface...........................................................A-480
B Board Loopback Types............................................................................................................ B-1
Issue 01 (2010-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xi

C Indicators of Boards................................................................................................................. C-1

D Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board...............................................................D-1
E Glossary.......................................................................................................................................E-1
E.1 0-9...................................................................................................................................................................E-2
E.2 A-E.................................................................................................................................................................E-2
E.3 F-J.................................................................................................................................................................E-11
E.4 K-O...............................................................................................................................................................E-16
E.5 P-T................................................................................................................................................................E-22
E.6 U-Z...............................................................................................................................................................E-31
xii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 01 (2010-12-30)

IDU Hardware Description Figures
Figures
Figure 1-1 Microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 980..................................................1-3
Figure 1-2 IDU 980..............................................................................................................................................1-4
Figure 1-3 Direct mounting..................................................................................................................................1-6
Figure 1-4 Separate mounting..............................................................................................................................1-6
Figure 2-1 Chassis structure of the IDU 980........................................................................................................2-2
Figure 2-2 Positions of the IDU 980 labels..........................................................................................................2-5
Figure 3-1 Appearance of an IFU2 board.............................................................................................................3-3
Figure 3-2 Bar code..............................................................................................................................................3-3
Figure 3-3 IDU slot layout...................................................................................................................................3-4
Figure 3-4 Functional block diagram of the CSHN...........................................................................................3-15
Figure 3-5 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit.........................................................................3-17
Figure 3-6 Front panel of the CSHN..................................................................................................................3-18
Figure 3-7 Front view of the RJ45 connector.....................................................................................................3-21
Figure 3-8 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM port and the EXT port...........................................3-23
Figure 3-9 Ports of the SFP optical module.......................................................................................................3-26
Figure 3-10 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card.....................................................................................3-28
Figure 3-11 Slots for the CSHN in the IDU chassis...........................................................................................3-30
Figure 3-12 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHN...........................................................................3-30
Figure 3-13 Functional block diagram of the IF1..............................................................................................3-38
Figure 3-14 Front panel of the IF1.....................................................................................................................3-42
Figure 3-15 Slots for the IF1 in the IDU chassis................................................................................................3-44
Figure 3-16 Logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS..............................................................................................3-45
Figure 3-17 Functional block diagram of the IFU2...........................................................................................3-51
Figure 3-18 Front panel of the IFU2..................................................................................................................3-54
Figure 3-19 Slots for the IFU2 in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-56
Figure 3-20 Logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS...........................................................................................3-57
Figure 3-21 Functional block diagram of the IFX2...........................................................................................3-64
Figure 3-22 Front panel of the IFX2..................................................................................................................3-67
Figure 3-23 Slots for the IFX2 in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-70
Figure 3-24 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFX2.............................................................................3-71
Figure 3-25 Functional block diagram of the ISU2...........................................................................................3-78
Figure 3-26 Front panel of the ISU2..................................................................................................................3-81
Figure 3-27 Slots for the ISU2 in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-83
Issue 01 (2010-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiii

Figures IDU Hardware Description
Figure 3-28 Logical slots of the ISU2 on the NMS...........................................................................................3-84

Figure 3-29 Functional block diagram of the ISX2........................................................................................... 3-93
Figure 3-30 Front panel of the ISX2..................................................................................................................3-97
Figure 3-31 Slots for the ISX2 in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-99
Figure 3-32 Logical slots of the ISX2 on the NMS.........................................................................................3-100
Figure 3-33 Functional block diagram.............................................................................................................3-108
Figure 3-34 Front panel of the EM6T..............................................................................................................3-110
Figure 3-35 Front panel of the EM6F..............................................................................................................3-111
Figure 3-36 Front view of the RJ45 connector.................................................................................................3-113
Figure 3-37 Ports of the SFP optical module...................................................................................................3-115
Figure 3-38 Slots for the EM6T/EM6F in the IDU chassis.............................................................................3-115
Figure 3-39 Logical slots of the EM6T/EM6F on the NMS............................................................................3-116
Figure 3-40 Functional block diagram of the SL1D........................................................................................3-121
Figure 3-41 Front panel of the SL1D...............................................................................................................3-123
Figure 3-42 Slots for the SL1D in the IDU chassis..........................................................................................3-125
Figure 3-43 Logical slots of the SL1D on the NMS........................................................................................3-126
Figure 3-44 Functional block diagram of the ML1/MD1................................................................................3-131
Figure 3-45 Front panel of the ML1.................................................................................................................3-133
Figure 3-46 Front panel of the MD1................................................................................................................3-133
Figure 3-47 Front view of an Anea 96 connector.............................................................................................3-134
Figure 3-48 Slots for the ML1/MD1 in the IDU chassis..................................................................................3-137
Figure 3-49 Logical slots of the ML1/MD1 on the NMS................................................................................3-137
Figure 3-50 Functional block diagram of the SP3S/SP3D...............................................................................3-141
Figure 3-51 Front panel of the SP3S................................................................................................................3-143
Figure 3-52 Front panel of the SP3D...............................................................................................................3-143
Figure 3-53 Front view of an Anea 96 connector.............................................................................................3-145
Figure 3-54 Slots for the SP3S/SP3D in the IDU chassis................................................................................3-147
Figure 3-55 Logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMS...............................................................................3-148
Figure 3-56 Functional block diagram of the AUX.........................................................................................3-151
Figure 3-57 Front panel of the AUX................................................................................................................3-152
Figure 3-58 Front view of the RJ45 connector.................................................................................................3-153
Figure 3-59 Slots for the AUX in the IDU chassis...........................................................................................3-155
Figure 3-60 Logical slots of the AUX on the NMS.........................................................................................3-155
Figure 3-61 Functional block diagram of the PIU...........................................................................................3-159
Figure 3-62 Front panel of the PIU..................................................................................................................3-160
Figure 3-63 Slots for the PIU in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-161
Figure 3-64 Logical slots of the PIU on the NMS...........................................................................................3-162
Figure 3-65 Functional block diagram of the FAN..........................................................................................3-164
Figure 3-66 Front panel of the FAN.................................................................................................................3-165
Figure 3-67 Slot for the FAN in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-166
Figure 3-68 Logical slot of the FAN on the NMS...........................................................................................3-167
Figure 4-1 Front panel of an E1 panel..................................................................................................................4-2
xiv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 01 (2010-12-30)

IDU Hardware Description Figures
Figure 4-2 Front view of an E1 port (E1 panel)...................................................................................................4-3

Figure 4-3 Front panel of the PDU.......................................................................................................................4-4
Figure 4-4 Functional block diagram of the PDU................................................................................................4-6
Figure 4-5 Interior of the PDU in DC-C mode ...................................................................................................4-7
Figure 4-6 Interior of the PDU in DC-I mode .....................................................................................................4-7
Figure 5-1 Power cable.........................................................................................................................................5-3
Figure 5-2 IDU PGND cable................................................................................................................................5-4
Figure 5-3 E1 panel PGND cable.........................................................................................................................5-5
Figure 5-4 IF jumper............................................................................................................................................5-6
Figure 5-5 XPIC cable..........................................................................................................................................5-7
Figure 5-6 LC/PC connector................................................................................................................................5-8
Figure 5-7 SC/PC connector.................................................................................................................................5-9
Figure 5-8 FC/PC connector.................................................................................................................................5-9
Figure 5-9 E1 cable connected to the external equipment.................................................................................5-10
Figure 5-10 E1 cable connected to the E1 panel................................................................................................5-14
Figure 5-11 Orderwire cable..............................................................................................................................5-16
Figure 5-12 Network cable.................................................................................................................................5-18
Issue 01 (2010-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xv

IDU Hardware Description Tables
Tables
Table 1-1 Introduction of the IDU 980.................................................................................................................1-4

Table 1-2 RTN 600 ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 980.............................................................................1-5
Table 1-3 RTN XMC ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 980..........................................................................1-5
Table 1-4 Radio link forms of the OptiX RTN 980.............................................................................................1-7
Table 2-1 Description of the IDU labels..............................................................................................................2-3
Table 3-1 List of IDU boards...............................................................................................................................3-5
Table 3-2 Functions and features that the CSHN supports..................................................................................3-8
Table 3-3 MPLS/PWE3 functions......................................................................................................................3-10
Table 3-4 QoS functions.....................................................................................................................................3-10
Table 3-5 Ethernet service functions..................................................................................................................3-11
Table 3-6 STM-1/4 service functions.................................................................................................................3-13
Table 3-7 Status explanation for indicators on the CSHN.................................................................................3-19
Table 3-8 Description of the clock ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports.............................................3-21
Table 3-9 Pin assignments for the NMS/COM port...........................................................................................3-21
Table 3-10 Pin assignments for the EXT port....................................................................................................3-22
Table 3-11 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector............................................................3-22
Table 3-12 Pin assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port.........................................................................................3-23
Table 3-13 Pin assignments for the MON/TOD2 port.......................................................................................3-24
Table 3-14 Buttons.............................................................................................................................................3-25
Table 3-15 Description of the service ports on the CSHN.................................................................................3-26
Table 3-16 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode....................................................................3-27
Table 3-17 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode...............................................................3-27
Table 3-18 Setting DIP switches........................................................................................................................3-28
Table 3-19 Slot allocation...................................................................................................................................3-30
Table 3-20 Types of SFP modules that the GE port supports............................................................................3-31
Table 3-21 Types of SFP modules that the STM-1/4 optical port supports.......................................................3-31
Table 3-22 Performance of the GE optical interface .........................................................................................3-32
Table 3-23 GE electric interface performance....................................................................................................3-33
Table 3-24 STM-1 optical interface performance..............................................................................................3-33
Table 3-25 STM-4 optical interface performance..............................................................................................3-34
Table 3-26 Clock timing and synchronization performance..............................................................................3-34
Table 3-27 Mechanical behavior........................................................................................................................3-35
Table 3-28 Functions and features that the IF1 supports....................................................................................3-36
Issue 01 (2010-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xvii

Tables IDU Hardware Description
Table 3-29 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IF1.......................................................................3-38

Table 3-30 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IF1.....................................................................3-41
Table 3-31 Status explanation for indicators on the IF1....................................................................................3-42
Table 3-32 Description of the Ports ...................................................................................................................3-43
Table 3-33 Slot allocation ..................................................................................................................................3-45
Table 3-34 SDH/PDH microwave work modes (IF1 board)..............................................................................3-46
Table 3-35 IF performance.................................................................................................................................3-46
Table 3-36 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem.................................................................3-47
Table 3-38 Functions and features that the IFU2 supports.................................................................................3-48
Table 3-39 Ethernet service functions that the IFU2 supports...........................................................................3-50
Table 3-40 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IFU2....................................................................3-52
Table 3-41 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IFU2..................................................................3-53
Table 3-42 Status explanation for indicators on the IFU2..................................................................................3-55
Table 3-45 Integrated IP microwave work modes (IFU2 board).......................................................................3-58
Table 3-49 Functions and features that the IFX2 supports.................................................................................3-61
Table 3-50 Ethernet service functions that the IFX2 supports...........................................................................3-63
Table 3-51 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IFX2....................................................................3-64
Table 3-52 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IFX2..................................................................3-66
Table 3-53 Status explanation for indicators on the IFX2..................................................................................3-68
Table 3-54 Description of the ports....................................................................................................................3-69
Table 3-56 Integrated IP microwave work modes (IFX2 board).......................................................................3-72
Table 3-60 Functions and features that the ISU2 supports.................................................................................3-75
Table 3-61 Ethernet service functions that the ISU2 supports...........................................................................3-77
Table 3-62 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ISU2....................................................................3-78
Table 3-63 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ISU2..................................................................3-80
Table 3-64 Status explanation for indicators on the ISU2..................................................................................3-81
Table 3-67 SDH/PDH microwave work modes (ISU2/ISX2 board).................................................................3-85
Table 3-68 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2 board, Native E1 + Ethernet service).......................3-85
Table 3-69 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2 board, Native STM-1 + Ethernet service)................3-87
xviii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 01 (2010-12-30)


Table 3-73 Functions and features that the ISX2 supports.................................................................................3-89
Table 3-74 Ethernet service functions that the ISX2 supports...........................................................................3-91
Table 3-75 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ISX2....................................................................3-93
Table 3-76 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ISX2.................................................................. 3-95
Table 3-77 Status explanation for indicators on the ISX2..................................................................................3-97
Table 3-78 Description of the ports....................................................................................................................3-98
Table 3-79 Slot allocation ................................................................................................................................3-100
Table 3-80 SDH/PDH microwave work modes (ISU2/ISX2 board)...............................................................3-101
Table 3-81 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISX2 board, Native E1 + Ethernet service).....................3-101
Table 3-82 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISX2 board, Native STM-1 + Ethernet service)..............3-102
Table 3-83 IF performance...............................................................................................................................3-103
Table 3-84 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem...............................................................3-103
Table 3-85 Mechanical behavior......................................................................................................................3-104
Table 3-86 Functions and features that the EM6T/EM6F supports.................................................................3-105
Table 3-87 Signal processing in the receive direction......................................................................................3-109
Table 3-88 Signal processing in the transmit direction....................................................................................3-109
Table 3-89 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6T/EM6F..................................................................3-111
Table 3-90 Description of the ports on the EM6T............................................................................................3-112
Table 3-91 Description of the ports on the EM6F............................................................................................3-112
Table 3-92 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode..................................................................3-113
Table 3-93 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode.............................................................3-114
Table 3-94 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector..........................................................3-114
Table 3-95 Slot configuration for the EM6T/EM6F........................................................................................3-116
Table 3-96 Board feature code of the EM6F....................................................................................................3-116
Table 3-97 Performance of the GE optical interface .......................................................................................3-117
Table 3-98 GE electric interface performance..................................................................................................3-118
Table 3-99 FE electric interface performance..................................................................................................3-118
Table 3-100 Mechanical behavior ...................................................................................................................3-118
Table 3-101 Functions and features that the SL1D supports............................................................................3-119
Table 3-102 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SL1D...............................................................3-121
Table 3-103 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SL1D.............................................................3-122
Table 3-104 Status explanation for indicators on the SL1D............................................................................3-123
Table 3-105 Description of the ports ...............................................................................................................3-124
Table 3-106 Slot allocation...............................................................................................................................3-126
Table 3-107 Board feature code of the SL1D...................................................................................................3-126
Table 3-108 STM-1 optical interface performance..........................................................................................3-127
Table 3-109 Mechanical behavior....................................................................................................................3-128
Table 3-110 Functions and features that the ML1/MD1 supports....................................................................3-129
Table 3-111 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ML1/MD1.......................................................3-131
Table 3-112 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ML1/MD1.....................................................3-132
Issue 01 (2010-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xix

Table 3-113 Status explanation for indicators on the ML1/MD1....................................................................3-133

Table 3-114 Description of the ports on the ML1............................................................................................3-134
Table 3-115 Description of the ports on the MD1............................................................................................3-134
Table 3-116 Pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector.................................................................................3-135
Table 3-118 Board feature code of the ML1/MD1...........................................................................................3-138
Table 3-119 E1 interface performance.............................................................................................................3-138
Table 3-120 Mechanical behavior....................................................................................................................3-139
Table 3-121 Functions and features that the SP3S/SP3D supports..................................................................3-140
Table 3-122 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SP3S/SP3D.....................................................3-141
Table 3-123 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SP3S/SP3D....................................................3-142
Table 3-124 Status explanation for indicators on the SP3S/SP3D...................................................................3-143
Table 3-125 Description of the ports on the SP3S...........................................................................................3-144
Table 3-126 Description of the ports on the SP3D...........................................................................................3-144
Table 3-127 Pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector.................................................................................3-145
Table 3-129 Board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D.........................................................................................3-148
Table 3-130 E1 interface performance.............................................................................................................3-149
Table 3-132 Functions and features that the AUX supports............................................................................3-150
Table 3-133 Status explanation for indicators on the AUX.............................................................................3-152
Table 3-134 Description of the auxiliary ports and management ports............................................................3-153
Table 3-135 Pin assignments for the F1/S1 port..............................................................................................3-153
Table 3-136 Pin assignments for the ALMI port..............................................................................................3-154
Table 3-137 Pin assignments for the ALMO port............................................................................................3-154
Table 3-139 Orderwire interface performance.................................................................................................3-156
Table 3-140 Synchronous data interface performance.....................................................................................3-156
Table 3-141 Asynchronous data interface performance...................................................................................3-157
Table 3-143 Functions and features that the PIU supports...............................................................................3-158
Table 3-144 Status explanation for indicators on the PIU................................................................................3-160
Table 3-145 Description of the ports on the PIU..............................................................................................3-160
Table 3-146 Technical specifications for the PIU............................................................................................3-162
Table 3-147 Functions and features that the FAN supports.............................................................................3-163
Table 3-148 Adjustment of the fan rotating speed...........................................................................................3-164
Table 3-149 Status explanation for indicators on the FAN..............................................................................3-166
Table 3-150 Technical specifications for the FAN...........................................................................................3-167
Table 4-1 Port description of an E1 panel............................................................................................................4-2
Table 4-2 Pin assignments for an E1 port (E1 panel)...........................................................................................4-3
Table 4-3 Ports on the PDU..................................................................................................................................4-5
Table 5-1 Power cable specifications...................................................................................................................5-3
xx Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 01 (2010-12-30)

Table 5-2 Types of fiber jumpers.........................................................................................................................5-7

Table 5-3 Pin assignments for a 75-ohm E1 cable.............................................................................................5-11
Table 5-4 Pin assignments for a 120-ohm E1 cable...........................................................................................5-12
Table 5-5 Pin assignments for the E1 cable terminated with an Anea 96 connector and a DB37 connector
.............................................................................................................................................................................5-14
Table 5-6 Pin assignments for the orderwire cable............................................................................................ 5-16
Table 5-7 Pin assignments for MDIs..................................................................................................................5-16
Table 5-8 Pin assignments for MDI-Xs..............................................................................................................5-17
Table 5-9 Pin assignments for the straight-through cable..................................................................................5-18
Table 5-10 Pin assignments for the crossover cable...........................................................................................5-18
Table A-1 Parameters on the main interface...................................................................................................A-101
Table A-2 Methods used by Ethernet interfaces to process data frames.........................................................A-113
Table A-3 Data frame processing....................................................................................................................A-123
Table A-4 Service direction of UNI-UNI........................................................................................................A-160
Table A-5 Service direction of UNI-NNI (carried by PWs)............................................................................A-165
Table A-6 Service direction of UNI-NNI (carried by QinQ links)..................................................................A-168
Table A-7 Service direction of NNI-NNI........................................................................................................A-170
Table A-8 CES services...................................................................................................................................A-332
Table A-9 E-Line services...............................................................................................................................A-333
Table A-10 ATM services...............................................................................................................................A-334
Table A-11 CES services.................................................................................................................................A-334
Table A-12 E-Line services.............................................................................................................................A-335
Table A-27 Mapping relationship between ATM service types, traffic types, and traffic parameters...........A-419
Table A-28 Mapping relationship between ATM service types, ATM traffic types, and traffic parameters
..........................................................................................................................................................................A-424
Table B-1 Loopback types that service interface boards support........................................................................B-1
Table C-1 Status explanation for indicators on the CSHN..................................................................................C-1
Table C-2 Status explanation for indicators on the IF1.......................................................................................C-3
Issue 01 (2010-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxi

Table C-3 Status explanation for indicators on the IFU2....................................................................................C-4

Table C-4 Status explanation for indicators on the ISU2....................................................................................C-5
Table C-5 Status explanation for indicators on the IFX2....................................................................................C-7
Table C-6 Status explanation for indicators on the ISX2....................................................................................C-8
Table C-7 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6T/EM6F.......................................................................C-9
Table C-8 Status explanation for indicators on the SL1D.................................................................................C-11
Table C-9 Status explanation for indicators on the SP3S/SP3D.......................................................................C-11
Table C-10 Status explanation for indicators on the ML1/MD1.......................................................................C-12
Table C-11 Status explanation for indicators on the AUX................................................................................C-12
Table C-12 Status explanation for indicators on the PIU..................................................................................C-13
Table C-13 Status explanation for indicators on the FAN................................................................................C-13
Table D-1 Weight and power consumption of each board..................................................................................D-1
xxii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 01 (2010-12-30)

IDU Hardware Description 1 Introduction
1 Introduction
About This Chapter
The OptiX RTN 980 is one of the series products of the OptiX RTN 900 radio transmission
system.
1.1 Network Application

The OptiX RTN 900 is a new generation split microwave transmission system developed by
Huawei. It can provide a seamless microwave transmission solution for a mobile communication
network or private network.
1.2 Components
The OptiX RTN 980 adopts a split structure. The system consists of the IDU 980 and the ODU.
An ODU is connected to an IDU through an IF cable.
1.3 Radio Link Forms
The OptiX RTN 980 provides the radio links of different forms by flexibly configuring different
IF boards and ODUs to meet the requirements of different microwave application scenarios.
Issue 01 (2010-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1-1

1 Introduction IDU Hardware Description
1.1 Network Application

The OptiX RTN 900 is a new generation split microwave transmission system developed by
Huawei. It can provide a seamless microwave transmission solution for a mobile communication
network or private network.
OptiX RTN 900 Product Family

The OptiX RTN 900 products are available in three types: OptiX RTN 910, OptiX RTN 950,
and OptiX RTN 980. The users can choose an appropriate type based on the actual requirements.
l The IDU of the OptiX RTN 910 is 1U high and supports one or two IF boards.
l The IDU of the OptiX RTN 950 is 2U high and supports one to six IF boards.
l The IDU of the OptiX RTN 980 is 5U high and supports one to fourteen IF boards.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 900 series products support the same IF boards and service interface boards.
The OptiX RTN 900 products provide several types of service interfaces and facilitate
installation and flexible configuration. It can provide a solution that is integrated with the TDM
microwave, Hybrid microwave, and Packet microwave based on the network requirements. It
supports the smooth upgrade from the TDM microwave to the Hybrid microwave, and from the
Hybrid microwave to the Packet microwave. The solution can evolve based on the service
changes that occur due to radio mobile network evolution. Thus, this solution can meet the
transmission requirements of not only 2G and 3G networks, but also future LTE and 4G
networks.
OptiX RTN 980

Figure 1-1 shows the microwave transmission solution that is provided by the OptiX RTN
980.
The OptiX RTN 980 is the large-capacity nodal microwave equipment at the convergence layer,
supports the convergence of up to 14 microwave links, and supports multiple protection
schemes.Figure 1-1 shows the microwave transmission solution that is provided by the OptiX
RTN 980.
1-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 01 (2010-12-30)

Figure 1-1 Microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 980
Raido trassmission network Regional

backhaul
network
STM-1/4
STM-1/4 TDM Network
(SDH)
STM-1/4
Packet Network FE/GE

GE (PTN)
ATM
FE/GE
FE/GE Ethernet Network
(Metro)
Radio link Cable/fiber
OptiX RTN 980 OptiX RTN 910/950 RNC BSC
NOTE
l In the solution, the OptiX RTN 980 can be connected to the RNC and BSC directly or through the regional
backhaul network.
l The OptiX RTN 980 provides a wide range of interfaces and service bearer technologies to adapt to the
regional backhaul network. The regional backhaul network can be a time-division multiplexing (TDM)
network or packet switching network (PSN).
The OptiX RTN 980 supports the pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) technology, and therefore
TDM and ATM services can be backhauled through a PSN.
1.2 Components
The OptiX RTN 980 adopts a split structure. The system consists of the IDU 980 and the ODU.
An ODU is connected to an IDU through an IF cable.

IDU 980
The IDU 980 is the indoor unit of an OptiX RTN 980 system. It accesses services, performs
services processing and IF processing, and provides system control and communication function.
Table 1-1 lists the basic features of the IDU 980.
Table 1-1 Introduction of the IDU 980

Item Performance
Chassis height 5U
Pluggable Supported
Number of microwave 1 to 14
directions
RF configuration mode 1+0 non-protection configuration

N+0 non-protection configuration
1+1 protection configuration
N+1 protection configuration
XPIC configuration
Figure 1-2 IDU 980
ODU
The ODU is the outdoor unit of the OptiX RTN 900. It performs frequency conversion and
amplification of signals.

NOTE
Unlike the other frequency bands that use 14 MHz, 28 MHz, or 56 MHz channel spacing, the 18 GHz
frequency band uses 13.75 MHz, 27.5 MHz, or 55 MHz channel spacing correspondingly.
Table 1-2 RTN 600 ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 980
Item Description
Standard Power High Power ODU Low Capacity for

ODU PDH ODU
ODU type SP, SPA HP LP
Frequency band 7/8/11/13/15/18/23/ 6/7/8/10/10.5/11/13/ 7/8/11/13/15/18/23

26/38 GHz (SP 15/18/23/26/28/32/3 GHz
ODU) 8 GHz
6/7/8/11/13/15/18/2
3 GHz (SPA ODU)
Microwave QPSK/16QAM/ QPSK/16QAM/ QPSK/16QAM

modulation mode 32QAM/64QAM/ 32QAM/64QAM/
128QAM/256QAM 128QAM/256QAM
(SP)
QPSK/16QAM/
32QAM/64QAM/
128QAM (SPA)
Channel spacing 3.5/7/14/28 MHz 7/14/28/40/56 MHz 3.5/7/14/28 MHz

(6/7/8/10/11/13/15/1
8/23/26/28/32/38
GHz)
7/14/28 MHz (10.5
GHz)
Table 1-3 RTN XMC ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 980
Item Description
High Power ODU Low Capacity for PDH

ODU
ODU type XMC-2 XMC-1
Frequency band 7/8/13/15/18/23 GHz 7/8/13/15/18/23 GHz
Microwave modulation QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/ QPSK/16QAM

mode 64QAM/128QAM/256QAM
Channel spacing 7/14/28/56 MHz 3.5/7/14/28 MHz

(7/13/15/18/23 GHz)
7/14/28/40/56 MHz (8 GHz)

There are two methods of mounting the ODU and the antenna: direct mounting and separate
mounting.
l The direct mounting method is normally adopted when a small-diameter and single-
polarized antenna is used. In this situation, if one ODU is configured for one antenna, the
ODU is directly mounted at the back of the antenna. If two ODUs are configured for one
antenna, an RF signal combiner/splitter (hereinafter referred to as a hybrid coupler) must
be mounted to connect the ODUs to the antenna. Figure 1-3 shows the direct mounting
method.
Figure 1-3 Direct mounting
l The separate mounting method is adopted when a double-polarized antenna or big-diameter

and single-polarized antenna is used. Figure 1-4 shows the separate method. In this
situation, a hybrid coupler can be mounted. That is, two ODUs share one feed boom.
Figure 1-4 Separate mounting
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980 provides an entire frequency band antenna solution, and supports the single-polarized
antenna and dual-polarized antenna with a diameter of 0.3 m to 3.7 m and the corresponding feeder system.

1.3 Radio Link Forms

The OptiX RTN 980 provides the radio links of different forms by flexibly configuring different
IF boards and ODUs to meet the requirements of different microwave application scenarios.
Table 1-4 Radio link forms of the OptiX RTN 980

Radio Link Form Type of the Type of the IF Type of the ODU
Control, Board
Switching, and
Timing Board
Low-capacity PDH CSHN IF1 Low capacity for

microwave PDH ODU
SDH/PDH CSHN IF1 Standard power

microwave ODU or high power
ODU
High-capacity SDH CSHN ISU2 Standard power

ODU
High-capacity SDH CSHN ISX2 Standard power

supporting XPIC ODU
Hybrid/Packet CSHN IFU2/ISU2 Standard power

ODU
Hybrid/Packet CSHN IFX2/ISX2 Standard power

supporting XPIC ODU

IDU Hardware Description 2 Chassis
2 Chassis
About This Chapter
The IDU of the OptiX RTN 980 is a 5U chassis. It can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and
on several different types of racks, cabinets, and surfaces.
2.1 Chassis Structure

The dimensions (H x W x D) of the IDU 980 chassis are 225 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm. The IDU
980 chassis has a ten-layered structure that is air cooled.
2.2 Installation Mode
The IDU 980 can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and on several different types of racks,
cabinets, and surfaces.
2.3 IDU Labels
Product nameplate labels, qualification card labels, ESD protection labels, grounding labels,
laser safety class labels, high temperature warning labels, and operation warning labels, and
other types of labels are affixed in their respective positions on the IDU chassis or boards. Adhere
to the warnings and instructions on the labels when performing various types of tasks in order
to avoid bodily injury or damage to the equipment.

2 Chassis IDU Hardware Description
2.1 Chassis Structure

The dimensions (H x W x D) of the IDU 980 chassis are 225 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm. The IDU
980 chassis has a ten-layered structure that is air cooled.
Figure 2-1 shows the chassis structure of the IDU 980.
Figure 2-1 Chassis structure of the IDU 980
2.2 Installation Mode

The IDU 980 can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and on several different types of racks,
cabinets, and surfaces.
The IDU 980 can be installed:

l In a 300 mm European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI) cabinet
l In a 600 mm ETSI cabinet
l In a 450 mm 19-inch cabinet

l In a 600 mm 19-inch cabinet

l In a 19-inch open rack
l In an outdoor cabinet for wireless equipment
2.3 IDU Labels

Product nameplate labels, qualification card labels, ESD protection labels, grounding labels,
laser safety class labels, high temperature warning labels, and operation warning labels, and
other types of labels are affixed in their respective positions on the IDU chassis or boards. Adhere
to the warnings and instructions on the labels when performing various types of tasks in order
to avoid bodily injury or damage to the equipment.
Label Description
Table 2-1 provides the description of the labels on the IDU chassis and boards. Actual labels
may vary depending on the configurations of the chassis and boards.
Table 2-1 Description of the IDU labels

Label Label Name Description
ESD protection Indicates that the

label equipment is
sensitive to static
electricity.
Grounding label Indicates the

grounding position
of the IDU chassis.
Fan warning label Warns you not to

touch fan leaves
when the fan is
rotating.
High temperature Indicates that the

warning label board surface
temperature may
exceed 70°C when
the ambient
temperature is
higher than 55°C.
Wear protective
gloves to handle
the board.

2 Chassis IDU Hardware Description
Label Label Name Description
Power caution label Instructs you to

read related
instructions before
performing any
power-related
tasks.
For details, see
Labels in 3.14.4
Front Panel.
合格证/QUALIFICATION CARD
Qualification card Indicates that the
label equipment has
HUAWEI
been quality
华为技术有限公司
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.
中国制作
MADE IN CHINA
checked.
RoHS label Indicates that the

equipment
complies with the
related
requirements
specified in the
RoHS directive.
Product nameplate Indicates the

label product name and
certification.
Operation guidance Instructs you to

label slightly pull the
switch lever
PULL outwards before
setting the switch
to the "I" or "O"
position.
Label Position
Figure 2-2 shows the positions of the labels on the chassis of the IDU 980.

Figure 2-2 Positions of the IDU 980 labels
! 22kg(48.41b)
合格证/QUALIFICATION CARD
HUAWEI
华为技术有限公司中国制作
HUAW EI TE CHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD. MADE IN CHINA
CAUTION
WARNING
Hazardous moving
parts,keep fingers -48V OUTPUT
and other body
parts away. TURN OFF POWER BEFORE
严禁在风扇旋转时接
触扇叶！ DISCONNECTING IF CABLE

IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
3 Boards
About This Chapter
The IDU 980 supports the following types of boards: system control, switching, and timing
boards, IF boards, Ethernet boards, SDH boards, PDH boards, power supply boards, and fan
boards.
3.1 Board Appearance

The dimensions (H x W x D) of the board in the extended slot of the IDU 980 chassis are 19.82
mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm. The dimensions (H x W x D) of the system control, switching,
and timing board in the IDU 980 are 23.60 mm x 378.40 mm x 205.70 mm.
3.2 Board List
The IDU 980 provides various functions with different boards inserted.
3.3 CSHN
The CSHN is the integrated system control, switching, and timing board.
3.4 IF1
The IF1 is a medium-capacity SDH IF board. The IF1 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.
3.5 IFU2
The IFU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode. The IFU2 uses the
DC-I power distribution mode.
3.6 IFX2
The IFX2 is a universal IF board that supports the XPIC function in Integrated IP radio mode.
The IFX2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.
3.7 ISU2
The ISU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode
at the same time. The ISU2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.
3.8 ISX2
The ISX2 is a universal XPIC IF board and provides the XPIC function for signals transmitted/
received in Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode. The ISX2 uses the DC-I power
distribution mode.
3.9 EM6T/EM6F
The EM6T/EM6F is an FE/GE interface board, which provides four FE electrical ports and two
GE ports. The EM6T has similar functions to the EM6F. The only difference is as follows: The

3 Boards IDU Hardware Description
GE ports on the EM6T use fixed electrical ports whereas the GE ports on the EM6F use the SFP
modules and therefore can function as two optical or electrical ports. The GE electrical ports on
the EM6F and the EM6T are compatible with the FE electrical ports.
3.10 SL1D
The SL1D is a 2xSTM-1 optical interface board.
3.11 ML1/MD1
The ML1 is a 16xSmart E1 service processing board. The MD1 is a 32xSmart E1 service
processing board.
3.12 SP3S/SP3D
The SP3S is a 16xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. The SP3D is a 32xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm
tributary board.
3.13 AUX
The AUX is an auxiliary management interface board of the OptiX RTN 980. One NE can house
only one AUX.
3.14 PIU
The PIU is the power interface board. The OptiX RTN 980 supports two PIUs, each of which
accesses one -48 V/-60 V DC power supply.
3.15 FAN
The FAN is a fan board that dissipates heat generated in the chassis through air cooling.

3.1 Board Appearance

The dimensions (H x W x D) of the board in the extended slot of the IDU 980 chassis are 19.82
mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm. The dimensions (H x W x D) of the system control, switching,
and timing board in the IDU 980 are 23.60 mm x 378.40 mm x 205.70 mm.
NOTE
The depth of the board refers to the distance between the front panel and the end of the PCB.
Board Appearance
Figure 3-1 shows the appearance of an IFU2 board in an IDU 980 chassis.
Figure 3-1 Appearance of an IFU2 board
Bar Code
The front panel of a board has two ejector levers and two captive screws. The ejector levers help
you remove or insert a board. The captive screws fasten a board to the chassis. A board bar code
(as shown in Figure 3-2) is attached to one of the ejector levers.
Figure 3-2 Bar code

Bar code
0514721055000015-SL91EM6F01
① ② ③ ④
① Internal code
② Board version
③ Board name
④ Board feature code

NOTE
Only the bar codes of some boards contain board feature codes, which further classify boards. For example,
the feature codes of some boards using SFP modules (such as EM6F) indicate the type of SFP module
being used, and the feature codes of some other boards providing E1 ports (such as SP3S) indicate the
impedance of E1 ports.
3.2 Board List

The IDU 980 provides various functions with different boards inserted.
Figure 3-3 IDU slot layout
Slot 26 (PIU) Slot 27 (PIU)
Slot 13 (EXT) Slot 14 (EXT)

Slot 28 Slot 20 (CSHN)
(FAN)
Slot 15 (CSHN)
NOTE
The EXT represents an extended slot, which can be inserted with various IF boards and interface boards.

Table 3-1 List of IDU boards

Board Full
Name Spelling Valid Slot Description
CSHN Hybrid Slot 15/20 l Supports the TDM cross-connect

control, function, provides 128x128 VC-4 higher
switching, order cross-connections and VC-12/VC-3
and timing lower order cross-connections equivalent
board to 32x32 VC-4s.
l Supports the 22 Gbit/s packet switching
function.
l Performs system communication and
control.
l Processes clocks and provides one clock
input/output interface.
l Provides one network management
interface, one network management serial
port, and one NE cascading interface.
l Uses the SFP module to provide two
STM-1 or STM-4 optical interfaces.
l Provides two GE interfaces (Each GE
interface can use an RJ-45 electrical
interface or an SFP optical interface
independently.)
ISU2 Universal IF Slot 1 to slot l Provides one IF interface

board 14 l Supports integrated IP microwave and
SDH microwave. The supported service
modes can be Native E1+Ethernet, Native
STM-1+Ethernet or SDH (1xSTM-1 or
2xSTM-1).
l Supports AM function.
l Supports highly efficient encapsulation
technology
ISX2 Universal Slot 1 to slot l Provides one IF interface

XPIC IF 14 l Supports integrated IP microwave and
board SDH microwave. The supported service
modes can be Native E1+Ethernet, Native
STM-1+Ethernet or SDH (1xSTM-1 or
2xSTM-1).
l Supports the XPIC function.
l Supports highly efficient encapsulation
technology

Board Full
IF1 SDH IF Slot 1 to slot l Provides one IF interface.

board 14 l Supports the TU-based PDH microwave
solution and the STM-1-based SDH
microwave solution.
IFU2 Universal IF Slot 1 to slot l Provides one IF interface.

board 14 l Supports the integrated IP microwave .
IFX2 Universal Slot 1 to slot l Provides one IF interface.

XPIC IF 14 l Supports the integrated IP microwave .
board
l Supports the XPIC function.
l Supports the AM function.
SL1D 2xSTM-1 Slot 1 to slot Uses the SFP module to provide two STM-1
interface 14 optical interfaces.
board
EM6T 6 Port RJ45 Slot 1 to slot l Provides four FE electrical interfaces.

Ethernet/ 14 l Provides two GE electrical interfaces that
Gigabit are compatible with the FE electrical
Ethernet interface.
Interface
Board
EM6F 4 Port RJ45 + Slot 1 to slot l Provides four FE electrical interfaces.

2 Port SFP 14 l Uses the SFP module to provide two GE
Fast optical or electrical interfaces. The GE
Ethernet/ electrical interfaces are compatible with
Gigabit the FE electrical interfaces.
Ethernet
Interface
Board
ML1 16xE1 Slot 1 to slot l Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm

(smart) 14 smart E1 interfaces.
tributary l Supports CES E1, IMA E1, and fractional
board E1.
MD1 32xE1 Slot 1 to slot l Provides thirty-two 75-ohm or 120-ohm

(smart) 14 smart E1 interfaces.
tributary l Supports CES E1, IMA E1, and fractional
board E1.
SP3S 16xE1 Slot 1 to slot Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm TDM

tributary 14 E1 interfaces.
board

Board Full
SP3D 32xE1 Slot 1 to slot Provides thirty-two 75-ohm or 120-ohm

tributary 14 TDM E1 interfaces.
board
AUX Auxiliary Slot 1 to slot Provides one orderwire interface, one

interface 14 asynchronous data interface, one
board synchronous data interface, and four-input
and two-output external alarm interfaces.
PIU Power board Slot 26 or Provides one -48 V/-60 V DC power input.
slot 27
FAN Fan board Slot 28 Cools and ventilates the IDU.
3.3 CSHN
The CSHN is the integrated system control, switching, and timing board.
3.3.1 Version Description

The functional version of the CSHN is SLB1.
3.3.2 Functions and Features
The CSHN provides 22 Gbit/s packet switching, full time division cross-connection, system
control and communication, and clock processing functions. The CSHN provides GE service
ports, STM-1/4 service ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports.
3.3.3 Working Principle
The CSHN consists of the system control and communication unit, packet switching unit, cross-
connect unit, clock unit, service interface unit, and auxiliary interface unit.
3.3.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, buttons, service ports, tact switches, clock ports, auxiliary ports, and
management ports on the front panel.
3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF Card
This board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF card.
3.3.6 Valid Slots
The CSHN can be inserted in slots 15 and 20. For the NMS to manage function units on the
CSHN, the function units are mapped into specific logical boards and allocated proper logical
slots on the NMS.
3.3.7 Types of SFP Modules
The GE port and STM-1/4 optical port on the CSHN board support multiple types of SFP
modules.
3.3.8 Board Parameter Settings
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSHN.
3.3.9 Technical Specifications

This section describes the board specifications, including the packet switching capacity, cross-
connection capability, performance of Ethernet ports, STM-1/4 ports, clocks, and wayside
service port, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

The functional version of the CSHN is SLB1.

The CSHN provides 22 Gbit/s packet switching, full time division cross-connection, system
control and communication, and clock processing functions. The CSHN provides GE service
ports, STM-1/4 service ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports.
Table 3-2 lists the functions and features that the CSHN supports.
Table 3-2 Functions and features that the CSHN supports
Function and Feature Board
Basic functions Switching Supports 22 Gbit/s packet switching function.

capability
Cross-connect l Supports higher order cross-connections, which are

capacity equivalent to 128x128 VC-4s.
l Supports full time division lower order cross-
connections (equivalent to 32x32 VC-4s) at the
VC-12 or VC-3 level.
System control Manages, monitors, and controls the running status of

and the IDU, and works as a communication service unit
communication between the NMS and boards to help the NMS to
control and manage the NE.
Clock Clock Provides the system clock and frame headers for
synchronization service signals and overhead signals for the other
at the physical boards when tracking an appropriate clock source.
layer The tracked clock source can be any of the following:
l External clock
l SDH line clock
l PDH tributary clock
l Clock at the air interface
l Synchronous Ethernet clock
Clock Supports the following clock protection schemes:

protection l Protection based on clock source priorities
l Protection by running the SSM protocol
l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol
l 1+1 backup for the system clock
DCN Outband DCN Supports a maximum of 33 DCCs.

Inband DCN Supports the inband DCN function. The DCN

bandwidth is configurable.
Protection 1+1 hot backup Supported
MPLS/PWE3 functions Supported
See Table 3-3.
QoS functions Supported
See Table 3-4.
Ethernet service functions Supported
See Table 3-5.
STM-1/4 service functions Supported
See Table 3-6.
Auxiliary ports Ethernet NM 1

and port
management
ports NM serial port 1
NE cascading 1
port
OM Warm reset and Supported

cold reset
In-service Supported
FPGA loading
Board Supported
manufacturing
information
query
Board Supported
temperature
detection
Board voltage Supported

detection
Detection of Supported
indicators on the
other boards
Hot swapping Supported

function
Pluggable CF Supported
card

The packet switching unit of the CSHN works with its service interface unit or a service board
to implement MPLS/PWE3 functions. Table 3-3 provides details about these functions.
Table 3-3 MPLS/PWE3 functions

MPLS tunnel Setup mode Static LSPs
Protection 1:1 MPLS tunnel APS
OAM Supports the following OAM functions:

l MPLS OAM that complies with ITU-T Y.1711
l LSP ping and LSP traceroute functions
PWE3 Service Supports the following service categories:

categories l CES services
l ATM PWE3 services
l ETH PWE3 services
Setup mode Static PWs
Protection 1:1 PW APS
OAM Supports the following OAM functions:

l VCCV
l PW OAM that complies with ITU-T Y.1711.
l PW ping and PW traceroute functions
MS-PW Supported
Configurable Supported
bandwidth
The packet switching unit of the CSHN works with its service interface unit or a service board
to implement QoS functions. Table 3-4 provides details about these functions.
Table 3-4 QoS functions

Function and Board
Feature
DiffServ Supports simple traffic classification by specifying PHB service

classes for service flows based on their QoS information (C-VLAN
priorities, S-VLAN priorities, DSCP values, or MPLS EXP values)
carried by the packets.

Function and Board

Feature
Ethernet complex Supports traffic classification based on C-VLAN IDs, S-VLAN IDs,
traffic classification C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN
priorities, S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or DSCP values carried
by packets.
CAR Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at ports.
Shaping Provides traffic shaping for a specific port, prioritized queue, or traffic
flow.
Queue scheduling Supports the following queue scheduling policies:

policies l SP
l WRR
l SP+WRR
The Ethernet service interface unit of the CSHN works with its packet switching unit to
implement Ethernet service functions. Table 3-5 provides details about these functions.
Table 3-5 Ethernet service functions

Basic functions Receives/Transmits GE service signals and works with

the packet switching unit to process the received GE
service signals.
Port GE electrical 2
specifications port (fixed):
10/100/1000BA
SE-T(X)
GE port: SFP 2
optical module
(1000BASE-SX
and 1000BASE-
LX)
Port attributes Working mode l The GE electrical port supports 10M full-duplex,
100M full-duplex, 1000M full-duplex, and auto-
negotiation.
l The GE optical port supports 1000M full-duplex
and auto-negotiation.
TAG attribute l Sets and queries the TAG attribute of an Ethernet

port.
l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access,
or hybrid.

Jumbo frame Supports jumbo frames with a maximum frame length

of 9600 bytes.
Traffic control Supports the port-based traffic control function that

function complies with IEEE 802.3x.
Services E-Line services Supports the following types of E-Line services:

l E-Line services based on ports
l E-Line services based on port+VLAN
l E-Line services carried by QinQ links
l E-Line services carried by PWs
E-LAN services Supports the following types of E-LAN services:

l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges
LAG Inter-board Supported

LAG
Intra-board Supported
LAG
ERPS Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T

G.8032/Y.1344.
Spanning tree protocol Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the
CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions
equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol.
LPT Supported
ETH OAM IEEE 802.1ag Supports the following IEEE 802.1ag OAM functions:
OAM l Management of OAM maintenance points
l Continuity check test
l Loopback test
l Link trace test
IEEE 802.3ah Supports the following IEEE 802.3ah OAM functions:

OAM l OAM automatic discovery
l Link performance monitoring
l Fault detection
l Remote loopback test
l Loopback detection and blocking of a port being
looped back
RMON Supported

Clock Clock source Synchronous Ethernet (not supported by the SFP

electrical module)

DCN Inband DCN Each GE port provides one inband DCN channel.
OAM Loopback Supports the following loopback types:

l Inloops at the PHY layer of Ethernet ports
l Inloops at the MAC layer of Ethernet ports
Warm reset Supported
Query of SFP Supported

module
information
Table 3-5 provides details about the STM-1/4 service functions that the CSHN supports.
Table 3-6 STM-1/4 service functions
Basic functions Receives and transmits 2xSTM-1/4 signals.
Service categories l STM-1

l STM-4
Port specifications l STM-1: Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2

l STM-4: S-4.1, L-4.1, and L-4.2
l The performance characteristics of the ports comply
with ITU-T G.957 and the jitter performance of the
ports complies with ITU-T G.823.
DCN Outband DCN Supported
Protection Linear Supported

multiplex
section
protection
(MSP)
Ring MSP Supported
SNCP Supported
Clock Clock source Each line port provides one SDH line clock signal.


OM Loopback Supports the following loopback types:

l Inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths
l Inloops and outloops at STM-1/4 optical ports
Cold reset and Supported

warm reset
Setting of the Supported

on/off state of a
laser
ALS functiona Supported
Query of SFP Supported

optical module
information
NOTE
a: The ALS function is implemented as follows:

l When the optical module detects the R_LOS alarm at the receive port and the alarm persists for 500
ms, the laser at the specific transmit port is automatically shut down.
l The laser starts to launch laser pulses at a specified interval; that is, the laser emits light for two seconds
and stops emission for 60 seconds.
l After the R_LOS alarm is cleared, the laser works properly and emits continuous light.

The CSHN consists of the system control and communication unit, packet switching unit, cross-
connect unit, clock unit, service interface unit, and auxiliary interface unit.

Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3-4 Functional block diagram of the CSHN

Backplane
GE bus Packet GE bus Ethernet service board/

GE signal GE signal
switching unit Packet switching unit of
access unit
the paired board
VC-4
STM-1/4 signal signal Cro ss- VC-4 signal TDM service unit/
STM-1/4 signal processing Cross-connect unit of
connectunit
unit the paired board
Control bus
Ethernet NM port Clock signal received

NM serial port System control and from other boards
Clock unit
communication Clock signal provided
NE cascading port unit to other boards
System control and
FE signal communication unit
Clock signal Clock signal

received from provided to
the service the other
unit on the units on the
board board
Clock/Time External clock signal
port
Power -48 V 1
supply -48 V 2
3.3 V power supplied to the
unit
other units on the board
System Control and Communication Unit

The system control and communication unit consists of the CPU unit and logic control unit. The
system control and communication unit performs the following functions:
l The CPU unit controls and manages the other units on the board and collects alarms and
performance events using the control bus.
l The CPU unit controls and manages the other boards in the IDU and collects alarms and
performance events using the control bus.
l The CPU unit controls and manages the ODU by transmitting the ODU control signal to
the SMODEM unit in the IF board over the control bus in the backplane.
l The CPU unit enables the packet switching unit using the control bus to groom Ethernet
service packets.
l The CPU unit processes Ethernet protocol packets from the packet switching unit using the
control bus.

l The CPU unit processes network management messages in DCCs using the logic control
unit.
l The CPU unit communicates with the NMS by its Ethernet NM port and NE cascading
port.
l The CPU unit implements software loading by reading information from the CF card with
the bus.
l The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and enables
FPGA loading.
l The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads between the auxiliary interface unit,
the CPU unit, and other boards. This helps to achieve the following purposes:
– Adding or dropping DCC information processed by the CPU unit
– Adding or dropping orderwire and asynchronous data services
– Exchanging the orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between different lines
l The system control and communication unit on a CSHN board communicates with the
system control and communication unit on the paired CSHN board by carrying FE signals
over the communication bus in the backplane. In this manner, 1+1 hot backup between
paired boards is achieved.
Packet Switching Unit

The packet switching unit grooms services and processes protocols for Ethernet services
(including Native Ethernet services and MPLS/PWE3 packets carried over Ethernet).
l After receiving services from the Ethernet interface unit on the board or a service board,
the packet switching unit grooms the services based on the configurations that are delivered
by the system control and communication unit.
l After receiving protocol packets from the Ethernet interface unit on the board or a service
board, the packet switching unit transmits the protocol packets to the system control and
communication unit for processing. After processing, the system control and
communication unit sends the protocol packets back to the packet switching unit. The
packet switching unit transmits the protocol packets to the Ethernet interface unit or the
service board.
l The packet switching unit exchanges data service signals with the packet switching unit of
the paired board over the GE pass-through bus.
Cross-Connect Unit
The cross-connect unit grooms services over the entire system using the higher order cross-
connect module and the lower order cross-connect module. Figure 3-5 shows the functional
block diagram of the cross-connect unit.

Figure 3-5 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit
Source TDM SinkTDM

service unit service unit
Higher order
cross-connect
module
HOXC
Lower order
cross-connect
module
LOXC
The source TDM service unit transmits VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect module
over VC-4 buses. If the VC-4 signals carry only VC-4 services, the higher order cross-connect
module processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the sink TDM service unit.
If the VC-4 signals include VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order cross-connect module
grooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect module. The lower order
cross-connect module processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and then transmits the services
back to the higher order cross-connect module. The higher order cross-connect module processes
the services and then transmits the services to the sink TDM service unit.
The cross-connect unit exchanges TDM service signals with the cross-connect unit of the paired
board over the TDM pass-through bus.
GE Signal Access Unit

The GE signal access unit allows access of two GE optical signals or two GE electrical signals
and works with the Layer 2 switching unit to provide Ethernet service processing functions.
l In the receive direction: After performing O/E conversion, restructuring, decoding, and
serial/parallel conversion for GE optical signals or after performing restructuring, decoding,
and serial/parallel conversion for GE electrical signals, the GE signal access unit extracts
framed GE signals by delimiting frames and adding preambles. The GE signal access unit
also performs CRC checks and Ethernet performance measurement.
l In the transmit direction: After delimiting frames, adding preambles, calculating CRC
codes, and measuring Ethernet performance, the GE signal access unit performs parallel/
serial conversion and encoding and then transmits GE signals to the GE electrical port or
the GE optical port after performing E/O conversion.
STM-1/4 Signal Processing Unit

The STM-1/4 signal processing unit transmits/receives and processes two STM-1/4 signals,
extracts clock signals, restores data, scrambles/descrambles data, processes overheads, and
processes pointers.
l In the receive direction, the STM-1/4 signal processing unit performs the following
functions:

– Regenerates STM-1/4 signals and performs O/E conversion.

– Restores and descrambles clock data.
– Extracts and processes overhead bytes, adjusts AU pointer, and sends pointer indication
signals and VC-4 signal to the cross-connect unit.
l In the transmit direction, the STM-1/4 signal processing unit performs the following
functions:
– Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals from the cross-connect unit and
processes clock signals.
– Sets AU pointers and overhead bytes.
– Scrambles signals and performs E/O conversion.
Clock Unit
The clock unit selects an appropriate clock source from external clock sources or service clock
sources at service ports based on clock priorities. Locking the clock source by means of the
phase-locked loop, the clock unit provides the system clock and frame headers for service signals
and overhead signals to other units on the system control, switching, and timing board and the
other boards.
Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit combines and then converts the -48 V power inputs into the power supply
required by the chips of the other units on the local board.
3.3.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, buttons, service ports, tact switches, clock ports, auxiliary ports, and
management ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-6 Front panel of the CSHN

1 2 GE1
CSHN
TX RX
PROG
SYNC
LINK1
LINK2
STAT
ACT1
ACT2
LOS1
LOS2
CRIT
ACT
SRV
MAJ
MIN
1 2 1 2
GE SYS STM-1/4 GE
CF RCV RST LAMP NMS/COM EXT CLK/TOD1 MON/TOD2 GE2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1. Indicators 2. Buttons 3. Clock ports, auxiliary

ports, and management ports
4. STM-1/4 optical ports 5. GE optical service ports 6. GE electrical service ports

(using SFP optical modules) (using SFP optical modules) (fixed)
7. Tact switches - -

Indicators
Table 3-7 Status explanation for indicators on the CSHN

Indicator State Meaning
STAT On (green) The board is working properly.
On (red) The board hardware is faulty.
Off l The board is not working.

l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the
board.
PROG Blinks on (green) and off at Software is being loaded to the board
100 ms intervals during the power-on or resetting process
of the board.
Blinks on (green) and off at The board software is in BIOS boot state
of the board.
On (green) The upper layer software is being

initialized.
Blinks on (red) and off at The BOOTROM self-check fails during

100 ms intervals the power-on or resetting process of the
board.
On (red) The memory self-check fails or loading

upper layer software fails during the
power-on or resetting process of the
board.
The logic file or upper layer software is
lost during the running process of the
board.
The pluggable storage card is faulty.
Off The software is running properly.
SYNC On (green) The clock is working properly.
On (red) The clock source is lost or a clock

switchover occurs.
SRV On (green) The system is working properly.
On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in the

system.
On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm occurs in the

system.
Off There is no power supplied to the system.

ACT On (green) In a 1+1 protected system, the board

works as the active one.
In an unprotected system, the board has
been activated.
Off In a 1+1 protected system, the board

works as the standby one.
In an unprotected system, the board is not
activated.
LOS1 On (red) The first optical port on the line is

reporting the R_LOS alarm.
Off The first optical port on the line is free of

R_LOS alarms.
LOS2 On (red) The second optical port on the line is

Off The second optical port on the line is free

of R_LOS alarms.
LINK1 On (green) The connection at the GE1 port is

working properly.
Off The connection at the GE1 port is

interrupted.
ACT1 On or blinking (yellow) Data is being transmitted or received at

the GE1 port.
Off No data is being transmitted or received

at the GE1 port.

working properly.

interrupted.

the GE2 port.

at the GE2 port.
CRIT On (red) A critical alarm occurs on the NE.
MAJ On (orange) A major alarm occurs on the NE.
MIN On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs on the NE.

Clock Ports, Auxiliary Ports, and Management Ports
Table 3-8 Description of the clock ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports
Port Description Connector Type
NMS/COM Ethernet NM port/NM serial port
EXT NE cascading port
CLK/TOD1 External clock port, time port 1 (2048 kbit/s or RJ45

2048 kHz), wayside E1 port
MON/TOD2 RS485 monitoring port/Time port 2
NOTE
l The external clock port and wayside E1 port share one port physically. This port can also transparently
transmit DCC bytes, orderwire overhead bytes, and synchronous/asynchronous data overhead bytes.
This port, however, can implement only one of the preceding functions at a time.
l The RS485 monitoring port and time port 2 share one port physically.
l The RS485 monitoring port is reserved and is not used in this product version.
l Time ports TOD1 and TOD2 are reserved for running the high-precision time protocol (IEEE 1588
protocol) and are not used in this product version.
Auxiliary ports and management ports use RJ45 connectors. The pin assignments for the ports,
however, are different. Figure 3-7 shows the front view of the RJ45 connector.
Figure 3-7 Front view of the RJ45 connector
87654321
Table 3-9 Pin assignments for the NMS/COM port
Port Pin Signal
1 Transmitting data (+)
2 Transmitting data (-)
3 Receiving data (+)

NMS/COM
4 Grounding end of the NM serial port
5 Receive end of the NM serial port
6 Receiving data (-)

Port Pin Signal
7 Not defined
8 Transmit end of the NM serial port
Table 3-10 Pin assignments for the EXT port

Port Pin Signal
1 Transmitting data (+)
2 Transmitting data (-)
EXT 3 Receiving data (+)
6 Receiving data (-)
4, 5, 7, 8 Not defined
NOTE
The EXT port supports the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MD/MDI-X modes; that is, the EXT port can transmit
data through pins 3 and 6 and receive data through pins 1 and 2.
The RJ45 connector has two indicators. Table 3-11 provides status explanation for these
indicators.
Table 3-11 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector
LINK (green) On The link is working properly.
Off The link is interrupted.
ACT (yellow) On or blinking The port is transmitting or receiving

data.
Off The port is not transmitting or

receiving data.
NOTE
The NMS/COM port and the EXT port are equivalent to two ports on a hub. This means that no external
Ethernet link should be configured between the two ports during the networking process; otherwise, an
Ethernet loop will be formed. As a result, a broadcast storm is generated on the network, leading to repeated
resetting of NEs.
Figure 3-8 shows the two common incorrect connections.

Figure 3-8 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM port and the EXT port
1 2 GE1
CSHN
TX RX
PROG
SYNC
LINK1
LINK2
STAT
ACT1
ACT2
LOS1
LOS2
CRIT
ACT
SRV
MAJ
MIN
1 2 1 2
GE SYS STM-1/4 GE
LAN
1 2 GE1
CSHN
TX RX
PROG
SYNC
LINK1
LINK2
STAT
ACT1
ACT2
LOS1
LOS2
CRIT
ACT
SRV
MAJ
MIN
1 2 1 2
GE SYS STM-1/4 GE
The clock port (CLK) and the high-precision time port (TOD1) use different pins of the same
RJ45 connector. Table 3-12 provides details about the pin assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port.
The CLK/TOD1 port can work only in one mode at one time and does not support two or more
modes at the same time.
Table 3-12 Pin assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port

Pin Working Mode
External External External External External

Clock Time Time Time Input Time
Input Output (DCLS) Output
(1PPS + (1PPS + (DCLS)
Time Time
Informati Information
on) )
1 CLK Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined

receiving (-)
2 CLK Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined

receiving (+)
3 Not defined 1PPS signal 1PPS signal DCLS time DCLS time
input (-) output (-) signal input signal output
(RS-422 (RS-422 (-) (-)
level) level) (RS-422 (RS-422
level) level)
4 CLK Grounding Grounding Grounding Grounding

transmitting end end end end
(-)
5 CLK Grounding Grounding Grounding Grounding

transmitting end end end end
(+)

Pin Working Mode
External External External External External

Clock Time Time Time Input Time
Input Output (DCLS) Output
Time Time
on) )
6 Not defined 1PPS signal 1PPS signal DCLS time DCLS time
input (+) output (+) signal input signal output
(RS-422 (RS-422 (+) (+)
level) level) (RS-422 (RS-422
level) level)
7 Not defined Time Time Not defined Not defined

information information
input (-) output (-)
(RS-422 (RS-422
level) level)
8 Not defined Time Time Not defined Not defined

information information
input (+) output (+)
(RS-422 (RS-422
level) level)
The RS485 monitoring port and the external time port share the MON/TOD2 port physically.
Table 3-13 provides details about the pin assignments for the MON/TOD2 port.
Table 3-13 Pin assignments for the MON/TOD2 port

Pin Working Mode
External External External External RS485

Time Time Time Input Time Monitoring
Input Output (DCLS) Output Port
Time Time
on) )
1 Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined
2 Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined

Pin Working Mode
External External External External RS485

Time Time Time Input Time Monitoring
Input Output (DCLS) Output Port
Time Time
on) )
3 1PPS signal 1PPS signal DCLS time DCLS time RS485

input (-) output (-) signal input signal output receiving
(RS-422 (RS-422 (-) (-) signal (-)
level) level) (RS-422 (RS-422 (RS-422
level) level) level)
4 Grounding Grounding Grounding Grounding Grounding

end end end end end
5 Grounding Grounding Grounding Grounding Grounding

end end end end end
6 1PPS signal 1PPS signal DCLS time DCLS time RS485

input (+) output (+) signal input signal output receiving
(RS-422 (RS-422 (+) (+) signal (+)
level) level) (RS-422 (RS-422 (RS-422
7 Time Time Not defined Not defined RS485

information information transmitting
input (-) output (-) signal (-)
(RS-422 (RS-422 (RS-422
8 Time Time Not defined Not defined RS485

information information transmitting
input (+) output (+) signal (+)
(RS-422 (RS-422 (RS-422
Buttons
Table 3-14 Buttons

Button Name Description
CF RCV CF configuration restoration After this button is pressed and held for
button eight seconds, the board automatically
restores the NE database from the CF
card.

Button Name Description
RST Warm reset button After this button is pressed, a warm

reset is performed on the board.
LAMP Indicator test button After this button is pressed, the

indicators on all the boards of the NE
become on.
Tact Switches
There is a tact switch near each ejector lever on the front panel of the board. When removing a
board, you can rotate the ejector levers only after pushing the tact switches to the middle
positions. In addition, pushing tact switches can trigger working/protection switching.
Service Ports
Table 3-15 Description of the service ports on the CSHN

2xSTM-1 STM-1/4 optical port LC SFP optical module
2xGE GE optical port LC SFP optical module
2xGE GE electrical ports (fixed) RJ45
NOTE
The four GE ports share two GE channels. That is, the GE1 ports share one GE channel and the GE2 ports
share the other GE channel. Only one of the two ports that share one GE channel can transmit/receive
services at one time.
SFP optical modules are used to provide GE optical ports and STM-1/4 optical ports; one SFP
optical module provides one TX port and one RX port. For details, see Figure 3-9, in which TX
represents the transmit port and RX represents the receive port.
Figure 3-9 Ports of the SFP optical module
TX RX
The GE electrical ports support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes. Table 3-16
and Table 3-17 provide the pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in different modes.

Table 3-16 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode
Pin 1000BASE-T
Signal Function
1 BIDA+ Bidirectional data wire A (+)
2 BIDA- Bidirectional data wire A (-)
3 BIDB+ Bidirectional data wire B (+)
4 BIDC+ Bidirectional data wire C (+)
5 BIDC- Bidirectional data wire C (-)
6 BIDB- Bidirectional data wire B (-)
7 BIDD+ Bidirectional data wire D (+)
8 BIDD- Bidirectional data wire D (-)
Table 3-17 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode
Pin 1000BASE-T
Signal Function
1 BIDB+ Bidirectional data wire B (+)
2 BIDB- Bidirectional data wire B (-)
3 BIDA+ Bidirectional data wire A (+)
4 BIDD+ Bidirectional data wire D (+)
5 BIDD- Bidirectional data wire D (-)
6 BIDA- Bidirectional data wire A (-)
7 BIDC+ Bidirectional data wire C (+)
8 BIDC- Bidirectional data wire C (-)
The RJ45 connector has two indicators. The status explanation for the two indicators is the same
as that for the indicators on the RJ45 connector of the NMS/COM port.
3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF Card

This board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF card.
NE databases, system parameters (including NE-IP, NE-ID, and subnet mask), software
packages, and NE logs are stored on the CF card. After you press the CRV button on the system
control, switching, and timing board and hold it for eight seconds, the data stored on the CF card
will be loaded to the board. To synchronize the NE databases, system parameters, and NE logs

on the system control, switching, and timing board to the CF card, enable the regular backup
function.
NOTE
The software packages on the CF card are synchronized with those on the system control, switching, and timing
board during package diffusion. Therefore, automatic backup mechanisms or manual operations are not needed
to synchronize software packages on the system control, switching, and timing board and the CF card. If the
system control, switching, and timing board and the CF card have different software packages or data, the
SWDL_PKGVER_MM alarm will be reported.
Figure 3-10 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card
1 2 3 4
ON DIP
1. DIP switches 2. CF card
Table 3-18 Setting DIP switches
Setting of DIP Switchesa Meaning
1 2 3 4
0 0 0 0 Indicates that the board works with the

watchdog enabled.
0 0 0 1 The value is reserved.
0 0 1 0 Indicates that a memory self-check is

running.
0 0 1 1 Indicates that the board is being debugged.
0 1 0 0 Indicates that the board works with the

watchdog disabled and a full memory check
is running.
0 1 0 1 Indicates the BIOS holdover state.

Setting of DIP Switchesa Meaning
1 2 3 4
0 1 1 0 Indicates the BIOS exhibition state.
0 1 1 1 The value is reserved. (By default, this value

indicates that the board works with the
watchdog enabled.)
1 0 0 0 The value is reserved. (By default, this value

indicates that the board works with the
watchdog enabled.)
1 0 0 1 Restores the data of the CF card.
1 0 1 0 Erases data in the system parameter area.
1 0 1 1 Erases databases.
1 1 0 0 Erases NE software, including patches.
1 1 0 1 Erases databases and NE software, including

patches.
1 1 1 0 Erases all data in the file system.
1 1 1 1 Erases all the data except for the board

manufacturing information.
NOTE
a: When a DIP switch is set to the side with the numbers "1, 2, 3, 4", it represents binary digit 1. When a
DIP switch is set to the side with the letters "ON DIP", it represents binary digit 0.
3.3.6 Valid Slots

The CSHN can be inserted in slots 15 and 20. For the NMS to manage function units on the
CSHN, the function units are mapped into specific logical boards and allocated proper logical
slots on the NMS.

Figure 3-11 Slots for the CSHN in the IDU chassis
Slot 26 (PIU-A) Slot 27 (PIU-B)

Slot Slot 13 (EXT) Slot 14 (EXT)
28
(FAN) Slot 11 (EXT) Slot 12 (EXT)
Slot 20 (CSHN )
Slot 15 (CSHN )
Figure 3-12 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHN
Slot 26 (PIU-A) Slot 27 (PIU-B)

Slot Slot 13 (EXT) Slot 14 (EXT)
28
(FAN) Slot 11 (EXT) Slot 12 (EXT)
Slot 20 (CSHN ) Slot 21 (SL4D) Slot 22 (EG2D)
Slot 15 (CSHN ) Slot 16 (SL4D) Slot 17 (EG2D)
Table 3-19 Slot allocation

Item Description
Slot allocation priority Slot 15 > Slot 20

3.3.7 Types of SFP Modules

The GE port and STM-1/4 optical port on the CSHN board support multiple types of SFP
modules.
Table 3-20 Types of SFP modules that the GE port supports

Part Number Type
34060286 1000BASE-SX
34060473 1000BASE-LX
Table 3-21 Types of SFP modules that the STM-1/4 optical port supports
Part Number Type
34060287 Ie-1
34060276 S-1.1
34060281 L-1.1
34060282 L-1.2
34060277 S-4.1
34060280 L-4.1
34060284 L-4.2

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSHN.
Related References
A.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting
A.9.2.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table
A.9.2.10 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status
A.10.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General
A.10.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port
A.10.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port
A.10.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface
A.5.2.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes
A.5.2.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control
A.5.2.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes
A.5.2.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Layer 3 Attributes

A.5.2.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes

A.5.7.1 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces
A.5.9.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead
A.5.9.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs

This section describes the board specifications, including the packet switching capacity, cross-
connection capability, performance of Ethernet ports, STM-1/4 ports, clocks, and wayside
service port, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Packet Switching Capacity

The CSHN supports a 22 Gbit/s packet switching capacity.
Cross-Connection Capability
l Supports higher order cross-connections, which are equivalent to 128x128 VC-4s.
l Supports lower order cross-connections, which are equivalent to 32x32 VC-4s.
Ethernet Port Performance

Ethernet port performance complies with IEEE 802.3. The following tables provide the
specifications of GE optical ports, GE electrical ports, and FE electrical ports.
Table 3-22 Performance of the GE optical interface
Item Performance
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 1000
Classification code 1000Base-SX 1000Base-LX
Fiber type Multiple-mode optical Single-mode optical

fiber fiber
Transmission distance (km) 0.5 10
Operating wavelength (nm) 770 to 860 1270 to 1355
Mean launched power (dBm) -9 to -3 -9 to -3
Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) -17 -20
Minimum overload (dBm) 0 -3
Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 9.5 9.5
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980 uses SFP modules for providing GE optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFP
modules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.

Table 3-23 GE electric interface performance
Item Performance
Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 10 (10BASE-T)

100 (100BASE-TX)
1000 (1000BASE-T)
Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)

MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)
4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T)
Interface type RJ-45
STM-1 Optical Interface Performance

The performance of the STM-1 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957/G.825. The
following table provides the primary performance.
Table 3-24 STM-1 optical interface performance
Item Performance
Classification code Ie-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2
Fiber type Multi-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode

fiber fiber fiber fiber
Transmission distance 2 15 40 80
(km)
Operating wavelength 1270 to 1380 1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580
(nm)
Mean launched power -19 to -14 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0

(dBm)
Receiver minimum -30 -28 -34 -34

sensitivity (dBm)
Minimum overload (dBm) -14 -8 -10 -10
Minimum extinction ratio 10 8.2 10 10

(dB)
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980 uses SFP modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFP
modules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.


Item Performance
Classification code S-4.1 L-4.1 L-4.2
Fiber type Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode

fiber fiber fiber
Transmission distance (km) 15 40 80
Operating wavelength (nm) 1274 to 1356 1280 to 1335 1480 to 1580
Mean launched power (dBm) -15 to -8 -3 to 2 -3 to 2
Minimum receiver sensitivity -28 -28 -28

(dBm)
Minimum overload (dBm) -8 -8 -8
Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 8.2 10 10
NOTE
SDH optical interface boards use SFP modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different types
of SFP modules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.
Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance

Clock timing and synchronization performance meets related ITU-T Recommendations.
Table 3-26 Clock timing and synchronization performance
Item Performance
External synchronization 2048 kbit/s (compliant with ITU-T G.703 §9), or 2048 kHz
source (compliant with ITU-T G.703 §13)
Frequency accuracy Compliant with ITU-T G.813
Pull-in, hold-in, and pull-out

ranges
Noise generation
Noise tolerance
Noise transfer

Item Performance
Transient response and

holdover performance
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-27 Mechanical behavior

Item Performance
Dimensions (H x W x D) 23.60 mm x 378.40 mm x 205.70 mm
Weight 1.60 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 37.0 W
3.4 IF1
The IF1 is a medium-capacity SDH IF board. The IF1 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.

The functional version of the IF1 is SL91.
The IF1 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
3.4.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This section describes how to process one IF signal, and it serves as an example to describe the
working principle and signal flow of the IF1.
3.4.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, an IF port, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.
3.4.5 Valid Slots
The IF1 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS are the same as
the physical slots.
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IF1.
This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance,
modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

The functional version of the IF1 is SL91.


The IF1 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
Table 3-28 lists the functions and features that the IF1 supports.
Table 3-28 Functions and features that the IF1 supports

Basic functions l Receives and transmits one IF signal.

l Provides management channels to the ODU.
l Supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
Radio type TU/STM-1-based radio
Radio work mode See Technical Specifications of the IF1.
Protection 1+1 HSB/FD/ Supported

SD protection
N+1 protection Supported
SNCP Supported
License Supports control on the air interface capacity by using

the license file.
Clock Clock source Clock at the air interface

l Protection by running the SSM protocol (supported
only in SDH radio mode)
(supported only in SDH radio mode)
DCN Inband DCN Not supported
Outband DCN l The PDH radio mode supports one DCC that is
composed of one DCC byte if the capacity is less
than 16xE1.
l The PDH radio mode supports one DCC that is
composed of three DCC bytes if the capacity is
equal to or more than 16xE1.
l The SDH radio mode supports one DCC that is
composed of three DCC bytes, nine DCC bytes, or
twelve DCC bytes.


l Inloops at IF ports
l Outloops at IF ports
l Inloops at composite ports
l Outloops at composite ports
Warm reset and Supported

cold reset
FPGA loading
Board Supported
manufacturing
information
query
Board Supported
temperature
detection
Board power Supported

detection

This section describes how to process one IF signal, and it serves as an example to describe the
working principle and signal flow of the IF1.

Figure 3-13 Functional block diagram of the IF1

Backplane
ODU control signal

SMODEM System control and
unit HSM signal bus communication unit
Paired board
L og ic p roc e s s ing u nit

MU X / DE MU X u nit
processing Service bus
Cross-connect unit
Co m bin e r
in te rfa c e
IF Microwave MODEM
u nit
unit
IF
frame signal unit Overhead bus

System control and
communication unit
Control bus
System control and
communication unit
Logic
control unit
-48 V power supplied to the ODU -48 V

Power
+3.3 V power supplied to the other supply
units on the board unit +3.3 V
Clock signal provided to the Clock

other units on the board unit System clock signal
Signal Processing in the Receive Direction
Table 3-29 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IF1
Step Function Unit Processing Flow
1 Combiner interface Divides the received IF signals into ODU control signals
unit and microwave service signals.
2 SMODEM unit l Demodulates ODU control signals.

l Transmits the ODU control signals to the serial port
of the CPU unit of the system control and
communication unit.
3 IF processing unit l Controls the level of service signals through the

automatic gain control (AGC) circuit.
l Filters signals.
l Performs A/D conversion.

4 MODEM unit l Performs digital demodulation.

l Performs time domain adaptive equalization.
l Performs FEC decoding and generates specific
alarms.
5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Synchronizes frames and detects R_LOS and R_LOF

(for SDH microwave alarms.
signal processing) l Performs descrambling.
l Checks B1 and B2 bytes and generates specific alarms
and performance events.
l Checks link IDs and generates specific alarms.
l Checks the M1 byte and bits 6-8 of the K2 byte, and
generates specific alarms and performance events.
l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and
reports the SSM status to the system control and
communication unit.
l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned
microwave messages and reports the changes to the
system control and communication unit over the
control bus.
l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes
including F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and K
bytes to form a 2 Mbit/s overhead signal and transmits
the 2 Mbit/s overhead signal to the logic processing
unit.
l Extracts wayside service bytes to form another 2 Mbit/
s overhead signal and transmits the 2 Mbit/s overhead
signal to the logic processing unit.
l Adjusts AU pointers and generates specific
performance events.
l Checks higher order path overheads and generates
specific alarms and performance events.
l Transmits pointer indication signals and VC-4 signals
to the logic processing unit.

MUX/DEMUX unit l Detects microwave frame headers in PDH radio mode

(for PDH microwave and generates specific alarms and performance events.
signal processing) l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames in PDH radio
mode and generates specific alarms and performance
events.
l Checks link IDs in microwave frames in PDH radio
mode and generates specific alarms and performance
events.
microwave messages in PDH radio mode and reports
the changes to the system control and communication
unit over the control bus.
including F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytes in
microwave frames in PDH radio mode to form a 2
Mbit/s overhead signal and transmits the 2 Mbit/s
overhead signal to the logic processing unit.
l Adjusts TU pointers.
l Maps TU-12s in microwave frames in PDH radio
mode to the specific positions in VC-4s.
6 Logic processing l Processes clock signals.

unit l Multiplexes 2 Mbit/s overhead signals into 8 Mbit/s
overhead signals and transmits the 8 Mbit/s overhead
signals to the system control and communication unit.
(Each 2 Mbit/s overhead signal uses a 2 Mbit/s
timeslot in the bandwidth of an 8 Mbit/s overhead
signal.)
l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
to the cross-connect unit.
NOTE
In 1+1 FD/SD mode, the MUX/DEMUX unit transmits service signals over the HSM bus to the MUX/DEMUX
unit of the paired board. The main MUX/DEMUX unit selects the higher quality signals for subsequent
processing.

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction
Table 3-30 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IF1


unit l Demultiplexes 2 Mbit/s overhead signals from 8 Mbit/
s overhead signals.
l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
from the cross-connect unit.
2 MUX/DEMUX unit l Sets higher order path overheads.

(for SDH microwave l Sets AU pointers.
signal processing)
l Sets multiplex section overhead bytes.
l Sets regenerator section overhead bytes.
l Performs scrambling.
MUX/DEMUX unit l Demaps TU-12s from the VC-4 signals.

(for PDH microwave l Sets the microwave frame overheads in PDH radio
signal processing) mode.
3 MODEM unit l Performs FEC coding.

l Performs digital modulation.
4 IF processing unit l Performs D/A conversion.

l Performs analog modulation.
5 SMODEM unit Modulates the ODU control signals transmitted from the
system control and communication unit.
6 Combiner interface Combines the ODU control signals, microwave service

unit signals, and -48 V power supplies and transmits the
combined signals to the IF cable.
Control Signal Processing

The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit.
The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the
control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the
CPU unit over the control bus.
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system
control and communication unit.
Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit performs the following functions:

l Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power
supply bus in the backplane and supplies -48 V power to the ODU after performing DC-
DC conversion.
l Receives the +3.3 V power from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies the
+3.3 V power to the other units on the board.
Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.
3.4.4 Front Panel

Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-14 Front panel of the IF1

ODU-PWR
IF1
IF1
WARNING
IF
STAT
I O
ODU
LINK
RMT
-48V OUTPUT
ACT
SRV
TURN OFF POWER BEFORE
DISCONNECTING IF CABLE
PULL
Indicators
Table 3-31 Status explanation for indicators on the IF1

STAT On (green) The board is working

properly.

l There is no power
supplied to the board.
SRV On (green) The services are normal.
On (red) A critical or major alarm

occurs in the services.
On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm

Off The services are not

configured.
LINK On (green) The radio link is normal.

On (red) The radio link is faulty.
ODU On (green) The ODU is working

properly.
On (red) l The ODU is reporting

critical or major alarms.
l There is no power
supplied to the ODU.
On (yellow) The ODU is reporting minor

alarms.
Blinks on (yellow) and off at The antennas are not aligned.

300 ms intervals
RMT On (yellow) The remote equipment is

reporting defects.
Off The remote equipment is free

of defects.
ACT On (green) l In a 1+1 protected system,

the board works as the
active one.
l In an unprotected system,
the board has been
activated.
Off l In a 1+1 protected system,

standby one.
the board is not activated.
Ports
Table 3-32 Description of the Ports

Port Description Connector Type Corresponding
Cable
IF IF port TNC IF jumperb
ODU-PWRa ODU power switch - -

NOTE
a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To turn on or turn off the switch, you need to
first pull the switch lever slightly outwards. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is
open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.
b: A 5D IF cable is connected to an IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required.
Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance
label on the front panel.
The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed
70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. If surface temperature reaches this
level, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board.
The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the
IF cable is removed.
The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before
the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.
3.4.5 Valid Slots

The IF1 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS are the same as
the physical slots.
Figure 3-15 Slots for the IF1 in the IDU chassis
Slot 13 (IF1) Slot 14 (IF1)
Slot Slot 11 (IF1) Slot 12 (IF1)

28
(FAN)
Slot 20
Slot 15
An ODU is not allocated a physical slot but it has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot
number of the ODU is equal to the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the
ODU plus 50.

Figure 3-16 Logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS
Slot 63 (ODU) Slot 64 (ODU)

Slot Slot 14 (IF1)
Slot 13 (IF1)
28
(FAN) Slot 11 (IF1) Slot 12 (IF1)
Slot 20 Slot 21 Slot 22

Item Description
Slot allocation priority Slots 3 and 5 > Slots 7 and 9 > Slots 1 and 2 > Slots 8
and 10 > Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 11 and 13 > Slots 12 and
14
NOTE
Use two IF boards in paired slots to configure a 1+1 FD/SD IF protection group. Specifically, slots 1 and
2, slots 3 and 5, slots 4 and 6, slots 7 and 9, slots 8 and 10, slots 11 and 13, and slots 12 and 14 are paired
slots respectively.

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IF1.
Related References
A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute

A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute


Radio Work Modes
Table 3-34 SDH/PDH microwave work modes (IF1 board)
Service Capacity Modulation Mode Channel Spacing (MHz)
4xE1 QPSK 7
4xE1 16QAM 3.5
8xE1 QPSK 14 (13.75)
8xE1 16QAM 7
16xE1 QPSK 28 (27.5)
16xE1 16QAM 14 (13.75)
22xE1 32QAM 14 (13.75)
26xE1 64QAM 14 (13.75)
35xE1 16QAM 28 (27.5)
44xE1 32QAM 28 (27.5)
53xE1 64QAM 28 (27.5)
STM-1 128QAM 28 (27.5)
NOTE
l The channel spacings 13.75 MHz and 27.5 MHz are applied to the 18 GHz frequency band.
l The channel spacings listed in the table are the minimum channel spacings supported by the product. The
channel spacings larger than the values are also supported.
IF Performance
Table 3-35 IF performance
Item Performance
IF signal Transmit frequency 350

of the IF board
(MHz)

Item Performance
Receive frequency of 140

the IF board (MHz)
ODU O&M signal Modulation mode ASK
Transmit frequency 5.5

of the IF board
(MHz)
the IF board (MHz)
Interface impedance (ohm) 50
Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem
Table 3-36 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem

Item Performance
Encoding mode l Reed-Solomon (RS) encoding for PDH microwave signals

l Trellis-coded modulation (TCM) and RS two-level encoding for
SDH microwave signals
Adaptive time- Supported

domain equalizer for
baseband signals
Mechanical Behavior

Item Performance
Weight 0.72 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 12 W
3.5 IFU2
The IFU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode. The IFU2 uses the
DC-I power distribution mode.


The functional version of the IFU2 is SL91.
The IFU2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves
as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFU2.
3.5.4 Front Panel
3.5.5 Valid Slots
The IFU2 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS are the same
as the physical slots.
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFU2.

The functional version of the IFU2 is SL91.

The IFU2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
Table 3-38 lists the functions and features that the IFU2 supports. The IFU2 needs to work with
the packet switching unit to implement Ethernet service functions.
Table 3-38 Functions and features that the IFU2 supports

Radio type Integrated IP radio

NOTE
The Integrated IP radio is compatible with the Hybrid radio
and the Packet radio.
Service categories Native E1 + Ethernet

NOTE
Ethernet services can be native Ethernet services or packet
services that are encapsulated into PWE3 packets.

AM Supported
E1 priority Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode with native

TDM services being E1 services
Radio work mode See Technical Specifications of the IFU2.

SD protection
SNCP for TDM Supported

services
License Air interface Supported

capacity license
AM license Supported
Clock at the Clock source Clock at the air interface

physical layer
DCN Inband DCN Supported.

The DCN bandwidth is configurable.
Outband DCN Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC

bytes.
Ethernet service functions See Table 3-39.
MPLS functions See the description of MPLS/PWE3 functions provided

in the section for the system control, switching, and
PWE3 functions timing board.

l Inloops and outloops at IF ports
l Inloops and outloops at composite ports
l Inloops at the MAC layer of IF_ETH ports
NOTE
An IF_ETH port is an internal Ethernet port on the IF board
operating in Integrated IP radio mode and is used to receive
or transmit Ethernet services transmitted in Integrated IP
radio mode.

warm reset

FPGA loading
PRBS BER test Supported

at IF ports
Board Supported
manufacturing
information
query
Board Supported
temperature
detection

detection
Table 3-39 Ethernet service functions that the IFU2 supports

Ethernet E-Line services Supports the following types of E-Line services:

services l E-Line services based on ports


G.8032/Y.1344.
OAM Supports the IEEE 802.1ag OAM and IEEE 802.3ah

OAM.

of 9600 bytes.
LAG Supported

QoS See the description of QoS functions provided in the

section for the system control, switching, and timing
board.
RMON Supported

as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFU2.
Figure 3-17 Functional block diagram of the IFU2

Backplane
ODU control signal
unit communication unit
HSM signal bus
Paired board
Service bus
processing
Cross-connect unit
MU X /D E M U X u nit
Logic
Overhead bus
unit
System control and
interface unit
processing
Combiner
IF MODEM communication unit

Microwave frame
unit
IF
unit
signal
Ethernet
GE bus
processing Packet switching unit
unit
Control bus
System control and
communication unit
Logic
control unit
-48 V power supplied to the ODU -48 V1

Power
supply
+3.3 V power supplied to the other
unit -48 V2
units on the board
+3.3 V power supplied to the +3.3 V

monitoring circuit

System clock signal
other units on the board unit

Table 3-40 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IFU2


l Transmits the ODU control signals to the system
3 IF processing unit l Filters signals.

l Performs ADC sampling.

alarms.
5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Detects microwave frame headers in Integrated IP

radio mode and generates specific alarms and
performance events.
l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames in Integrated
IP radio mode and generates specific alarms and
performance events.
l Checks link IDs in microwave frames in Integrated IP
performance events.
microwave messages in Integrated IP radio mode and
reports the changes to the system control and
communication unit over the control bus.
including F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and SSM
bytes in microwave frames in Integrated IP radio mode
to form a 2 Mbit/s overhead signal and transmits the
2 Mbit/s overhead signal to the logic processing unit.
l Maps E1 service signals in Integrated IP radio mode
to the specific positions in VC-4s and then transmits
the VC-4s to the logic processing unit.
l Transmits Ethernet service signals in Integrated IP
radio mode to the Ethernet processing unit.
6 Ethernet processing l Processes the GE signals received from the MUX/

unit DEMUX unit.
l Sends the processed signals to the main and standby
packet switching units.


signal.)
to the main and standby cross-connect units.
NOTE
processing.
Table 3-41 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IFU2


s overhead signals.
2 Ethernet processing l Receives GE signal from the packet switching unit.

unit l Processes GE signals.
3 MUX/DEMUX unit l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals.

l Sets the microwave frame overheads in Integrated IP
radio mode.
l Combines the E1 signals, Ethernet signals, and
microwave frame overheads to form microwave
frames.


l Filters signals.
l Amplifies signals.



Power Supply Unit

DC conversion.
supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the IFU2 after
performing DC-DC conversion.
Clock Unit
3.5.4 Front Panel

Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-18 Front panel of the IFU2

ODU-PWR
IFU2
IFU2
WARNING
IF
STAT
I O
LINK
ODU
RMT
-48V OUTPUT
ACT
SRV

PULL

Indicators
Table 3-42 Status explanation for indicators on the IFU2


l There is no power supplied to the board.

services.

services.
Off The services are not configured.
ODU On (green) The ODU is working properly.
On (red) l The ODU is reporting critical or major

alarms.
l There is no power supplied to the ODU.
On (yellow) The ODU is reporting minor alarms.
Blinks on (yellow) The antennas are not aligned.

and off at 300 ms
intervals
RMT On (yellow) The remote equipment is reporting defects.
Off The remote equipment is free of defects.
ACT On (green) l In a 1+1 protected system, the board

l In an unprotected system, the board has
been activated.
Off l In a 1+1 protected system, the board

l In an unprotected system, the board is not
activated.

Ports

Cable
NOTE
Labels
3.5.5 Valid Slots

The IFU2 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS are the same
Figure 3-19 Slots for the IFU2 in the IDU chassis

Slot Slot 13 (IFU2) Slot 14 (IFU2)
28
(FAN) Slot 11 (IFU2) Slot 12 (IFU2)
Slot 9 (IFU2) Slot 10 (IFU2)
Slot 20
Slot 15

ODU plus 50.
Figure 3-20 Logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS

Slot Slot 13 (IFU2) Slot 14 (IFU2)
28
(FAN) Slot 11 (IFU2) Slot 12 (IFU2)
Item Description
14
NOTE
slots respectively.


This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFU2.
Related References
A.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes
A.5.4.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes
A.5.4.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes
A.5.4.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes

Radio Work Modes
Table 3-45 Integrated IP microwave work modes (IFU2 board)
Native Ethernet Maximum

Throughput Number of E1s in
Channel Spacing (Mbit/s) Hybrid
(MHz) Modulation Mode microwave
7 QPSK 9 to 12 5
7 16QAM 20 to 24 10
7 32QAM 24 to 29 12
7 64QAM 31 to 37 15
7 128QAM 37 to 44 18
7 256QAM 43 to 51 21
14 (13.75) QPSK 20 to 23 10
14 (13.75) 16QAM 41 to 48 20
14 (13.75) 32QAM 50 to 59 24
14 (13.75) 64QAM 65 to 76 31
14 (13.75) 128QAM 77 to 90 37
14 (13.75) 256QAM 90 to 104 43

Native Ethernet Maximum

28 (27.5) QPSK 41 to 48 20
28 (27.5) 16QAM 82 to 97 40
28 (27.5) 32QAM 108 to 125 50
28 (27.5) 64QAM 130 to 150 64
28 (27.5) 128QAM 160 to 180 75
28 (27.5) 256QAM 180 to 210 75
56 (55) QPSK 82 to 97 40
56 (55) 16QAM 165 to 190 75
56 (55) 32QAM 208 to 240 75
56 (55) 64QAM 260 to 310 75
56 (55) 128QAM 310 to 360 75
56 (55) 256QAM 360 to 420 75
NOTE
l The channel spacings 13.75 MHz, 27.5 MHz, and 55 MHz are applied to the 18 GHz frequency band.
l E1 services need to occupy the corresponding bandwidth of the service capacity. The bandwidth remaining
after the E1 service capacity is subtracted from the service capacity can be provided for Ethernet services.
IF Performance
Item Performance

of the IF board
(MHz)

the IF board (MHz)

of the IF board
(MHz)

Item Performance
the IF board (MHz)
Item Performance
Encoding mode LDPC encoding

baseband signals
Mechanical Behavior
Item Performance
Dimensions 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight 0.79 kg
Power Consumption
3.6 IFX2
The IFX2 is a universal IF board that supports the XPIC function in Integrated IP radio mode.
The IFX2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.

The functional version of the IFX2 is SL91.
The IFX2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. The IFX2 supports cross-polarization interference
cancellation (XPIC) processing for IF signals.

as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFX2.
3.6.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, an IF port, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on the
front panel.
3.6.5 Valid Slots
The IFX2 can be inserted in slot 1-14. The logical slots of the IFX2 on the NMS are the same
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFX2.

The functional version of the IFX2 is SL91.

The IFX2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. The IFX2 supports cross-polarization interference
cancellation (XPIC) processing for IF signals.
Table 3-49 lists the functions and features that the IFX2 supports.
Table 3-49 Functions and features that the IFX2 supports


Radio type Integrated IP radio

NOTE
Integrated IP radio is compatible with Hybrid radio and Packet
radio.
Service categories Native E1 + Ethernet

NOTE
Ethernet services can be Native Ethernet services or packet
AM Supported
E1 priority Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode, in which

native TDM services are E1 services
XPIC Supported
Radio work mode See Technical Specifications of the IFX2.


SD protection
SNCP for TDM Supported

services

capacity license
Clock at the Clock source Clock at an air interface

physical layer
DCN Inband DCN Supported.

The DCN bandwidth is configurable.
Outband DCN Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC

bytes.
Ethernet service features See Table 3-50.
MPLS functions See the description of the MPLS/PWE3 functions that

the system control, switching, and timing board
PWE3 functions supports.

l Inloops and outloops at multiplexing ports
NOTE
radio mode.

warm reset
FPGA loading

at IF ports

Board Supported
manufacturing
information
query
Board Supported
temperature
detection
Board voltage Supported

detection
Table 3-50 Ethernet service functions that the IFX2 supports




G.8032/Y.1344.
ETH-OAM Supports IEEE 802.1ag OAM and IEEE 802.3ah

OAM.

of 9600 bytes.
LAG Supported
QoS See the description of the QoS functions that the system
control, switching, and timing board supports.
RMON Supported


as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFX2.
Figure 3-21 Functional block diagram of the IFX2

Backplane
ODU control signal System control and
SMODEM
communication unit
unit
HSM signal bus

Paired board
Service bus
processing
Cross-connect unit
MU X/D E MU X u nit
Logic
Overhead bus
unit
p ro c es s in g
C o m bin er
in te rfa c e
System control and

IF Microwave frame MODEM
un it
un it
communication unit
IF
signal unit
Ethernet GE bus
Paired XPIC unit
board
XPIC signal
Control bus
System control and
communication unit
Logic
control unit

Power
supply
+3.3 V power supplied to the other unit -48 V2
units on the board
+3.3 V power supplied to the

+3.3 V
monitoring circuit

Table 3-51 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IFX2



3 IF processing unit l Performs ADC sampling.

l Filters the received signals and splits the signals to two
channels of signals.
– Performs A/D conversion for one channel of
filtered signals and transmits the converted signals
to the MODEM unit.
– Outputs the other channel of filtered signals as the
XPIC signals.
l Performs A/D conversion for XPIC signals
transmitted from the paired IFX2 and transmits the
converted signals to the MODEM unit.
4 MODEM unit l Performs XPIC operations for IF signals.

l Performs digital demodulation by using XPIC IF
signals transmitted from the paired IFX2 as reference
signals.
alarms.
5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Detects microwave frame headers in Integrated IP

performance events.
l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames in Integrated
IP radio mode and generates specific alarms and
performance events.
l Checks link IDs in microwave frames in Integrated IP
radio mode and generates specific alarms.
microwave messages in Integrated IP radio mode and
reports the changes to the system control and
communication unit over the control bus.
including F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and SSM
bytes in microwave frames in Integrated IP radio mode
to form a 2 Mbit/s overhead signal and transmits the
2 Mbit/s overhead signal to the logic processing unit.
l Maps E1 service signals in Integrated IP radio mode
to the specific positions in VC-4s and then transmits
the VC-4s to the logic processing unit.
l Transmits Ethernet service signals in Integrated IP
radio mode to the Ethernet processing unit.

unit DEMUX unit.


signal.)
NOTE
processing.
Table 3-52 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IFX2


s overhead signals.
2 Ethernet processing l Receives GE signals from the packet switching unit.

3 MUX/DEMUX unit l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals.

l Sets the microwave frame overheads in Integrated IP
radio mode.
l Combines the E1 signals, Ethernet signals and
microwave frame overheads to form microwave
frames.


l Filters signals.



Power Supply Unit

DC conversion.
supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the IFX2 after
Clock Unit
3.6.4 Front Panel

front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-22 Front panel of the IFX2

ODU-PWR
IFX2
IFX2
WARNING
IF
STAT
XPIC
I O
LINK
ODU
RMT
-48V OUTPUT
ACT
SRV

PULL X-IN X-OUT

Indicators
Table 3-53 Status explanation for indicators on the IFX2

XPIC On (green) The XPIC input signal is

normal.
On (red) The XPIC input signal is lost.
Off The XPIC function is

disabled.

properly.

l There is no power



configured.

properly.

l There is no power

alarms.

300 ms intervals

reporting defects.


of defects.

active one.
the board has been
activated.

standby one.
Ports
Table 3-54 Description of the ports

Cable
X-IN XPIC signal input SMA XPIC cable

port
X-OUT XPIC signal output SMA

port
NOTE
Labels

3.6.5 Valid Slots

The IFX2 can be inserted in slot 1-14. The logical slots of the IFX2 on the NMS are the same
Figure 3-23 Slots for the IFX2 in the IDU chassis

Slot Slot 13 (IFX2) Slot 14 (IFX2)
28
(FAN) Slot 11 (IFX2) Slot 12 (IFX2)
Slot 9 (IFX2) Slot 10 (IFX2)
Slot 20
Slot 15
ODU plus 50.

Figure 3-24 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFX2

Slot Slot 13 (IFX2) Slot 14 (IFX2)
28
(FAN) Slot 11 (IFX2) Slot 12 (IFX2)

Item Description
14
NOTE
slots respectively.
NOTE
One IFX2 pair must be installed on the same row or adjacently in the same column.


This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFX2.
Related References

Radio Work Modes
Table 3-56 Integrated IP microwave work modes (IFX2 board)
Ethernet Maximum
28 (27.5) QPSK 41 to 48 19
28 (27.5) 16QAM 84 to 97 40
28 (27.5) 32QAM 103 to 120 49
28 (27.5) 64QAM 130 to 150 63
28 (27.5) 128QAM 160 to 180 75
28 (27.5) 256QAM 180 to 210 75
56 (55) QPSK 83 to 97 39
56 (55) 16QAM 165 to 190 75
56 (55) 32QAM 210 to 245 75
56 (55) 64QAM 260 to 305 75
56 (55) 128QAM 310 to 360 75
56 (55) 256QAM 360 to 410 75

NOTE
IF Performance

Item Performance

of the IF board
(MHz)

the IF board (MHz)

of the IF board
(MHz)
the IF board (MHz)

Item Performance

baseband signals
Mechanical Behavior

Item Performance
Dimensions 193.80 mm (width) x 225.80 mm (depth) x 19.82 mm (height)

Item Performance
Weight 0.80 kg
Power Consumption
3.7 ISU2
The ISU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode
at the same time. The ISU2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.
The functional version of the ISU2 is SL91.
The ISU2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the ISU2.
3.7.4 Front Panel
3.7.5 Valid Slots
The ISU2 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the ISU2 on the NMS are the same
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ISU2.

The functional version of the ISU2 is SL91.

The ISU2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
Table 3-60 lists the functions and features that the ISU2 supports. The ISU2 needs to work with
the packet switching unit to implement Ethernet service functions.

Table 3-60 Functions and features that the ISU2 supports


Radio type l Integrated IP radio

l SDH radio
NOTE
The Integrated IP radio is compatible with the Hybrid radio
Service categories in Integrated IP l Native E1 + Ethernet

radio mode l Native STM-1 + Ethernet
NOTE
Service categories in SDH radio l STM-1

mode l 2xSTM-1
AM Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode
High-efficiency encapsulation Supports high-efficiency encapsulation for L2 Ethernet

packets and L3 IP packets.
E1 priority Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode with native

Radio work mode See Technical Specifications of the ISU2.
Link-level 1+1 HSB/FD/ Supported

protection SD protection
LAG protection Supported

at air interfaces
Service protection SNCP


capacity license

physical layer


DCN Inband DCN Supported
Outband DCN l Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC

bytes for each channel in Integrated IP radio mode.
l Supports one DCC that is composed of D1-D3
bytes, D4-D12 bytes, or D1-D12 bytes, for each
channel in SDH radio mode.

NOTE
radio mode.

warm reset
FPGA loading

at IF ports
Board Supported
manufacturing
information
query
Board Supported
temperature
detection

detection

Table 3-61 Ethernet service functions that the ISU2 supports




G.8032/Y.1344.

OAM.

of 9600 bytes.
LAG Supported

board.
RMON Supported

as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the ISU2.
NOTE
The ISU2 adopts the same principle to process signals transmitted/received in Integrated IP radio mode
and signals transmitted/received in SDH radio mode. The difference is with regard to the microwave frame
structure and processed service categories.

Figure 3-25 Functional block diagram of the ISU2

Backplane
ODU control signal
HSM signal bus
Paired board
Service bus
processing
Cross-connect unit
Logic
unit
MUX/DEMUX unit
Overhead bus
MODEM unit
IF processing
interface unit
System control and

Combiner
IF Microwave communication unit

unit
frame signal
processing
Ethernet
GE bus
unit
Packet switching unit
Control bus
System control and
communication unit
Logic
control unit

Power
+3.3 V power supplied to supply
unit -48 V2
the other units on the board
+3.3 V power supplied to +3.3 V

the monitoring circuit
Clock
Clock signal provided to the System clock signal
unit
Table 3-62 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ISU2


3 IF processing unit l Filters signals.

l Performs ADC sampling.


alarms.
5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Detects microwave frame headers and generates

l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames and generates
l Checks link IDs in microwave frames and generates
control bus.
microwave frames to form a 2 Mbit/s overhead signal
and transmits the 2 Mbit/s overhead signal to the logic
processing unit.
l Maps E1 service signals to the specific positions in
VC-4s and then transmits the VC-4s to the logic
processing unit, if native TDM services in Integrated
IP radio mode are E1 services.
l Demaps VC-4s from STM-1 service signals and then
transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit, if
native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are
STM-1 services.
l Transmits Ethernet service signals to the Ethernet
processing unit.

unit DEMUX unit.

signal.)

NOTE
processing.
Table 3-63 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ISU2


s overhead signals.

3 MUX/DEMUX unit l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals that are
from the logic processing unit, if native TDM services
in Integrated IP radio mode are E1 services.
l Adds overheads to the VC-4 signals that are from the
logic processing unit to form STM-1 signals, if native
TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are STM-1
services.
l Sets microwave frame overheads.
l Combines the E1/STM-1 signals, Ethernet signals,
and microwave frame overheads to form microwave
frames.


l Filters signals.



Power Supply Unit

DC conversion.
supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the ISU2 after
Clock Unit
3.7.4 Front Panel

Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-26 Front panel of the ISU2

ODU-PWR
ISU2
ISU2
WARNING
IF
STAT
I O
LINK
ODU
RMT
-48V OUTPUT ACT
SRV

PULL
Indicators
Table 3-64 Status explanation for indicators on the ISU2

properly.

l There is no power




configured.

properly.

l There is no power

alarms.

300 ms intervals

reporting defects.

of defects.

active one.
the board has been
activated.

standby one.

Ports

Cable
NOTE
Labels
3.7.5 Valid Slots

The ISU2 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the ISU2 on the NMS are the same
Figure 3-27 Slots for the ISU2 in the IDU chassis

Slot Slot 13 (ISU2) Slot 14 (ISU2)
28
(FAN) Slot 11 (ISU2) Slot 12 (ISU2)
Slot 9 (ISU2) Slot 10 (ISU2)
Slot 20
Slot 15

ODU plus 50.
Figure 3-28 Logical slots of the ISU2 on the NMS

Slot Slot 13 (ISU2) Slot 14 (ISU2)
28
(FAN) Slot 11 (ISU2) Slot 12 (ISU2)

Item Description
14
NOTE
slots respectively.


This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ISU2.
Related References

Radio Work Modes
Table 3-67 SDH/PDH microwave work modes (ISU2/ISX2 board)
STM-1 128QAM 28 (27.5)
2×STM-1 128QAM 56 (55)
Table 3-68 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2 board, Native E1 + Ethernet service)
Channel Spacing Modulation Mode Ethernet Maximum

(MHz) Throughput Number of E1s in
(Mbit/s) Hybrid
microwave
7 QPSK 10 to 13 5
7 16QAM 21 to 25 9
7 32QAM 25 to 30 11
7 64QAM 31 to 39 15
7 128QAM 37 to 46 17
7 256QAM 43 to 53 20


(Mbit/s) Hybrid
microwave
14 (13.75) QPSK 21 to 26 10
14 (13.75) 16QAM 41 to 51 20
14 (13.75) 32QAM 52 to 64 24
14 (13.75) 64QAM 66 to 81 31
14 (13.75) 128QAM 77 to 95 36
14 (13.75) 256QAM 89 to 110 42
28 (27.5) QPSK 41 to 51 20
28 (27.5) 16QAM 83 to 103 40
28 (27.5) 32QAM 108 to 133 50
28 (27.5) 64QAM 133 to 164 64
28 (27.5) 128QAM 157 to 193 75
28 (27.5) 256QAM 183 to 225 75
56 (55) QPSK 83 to 103 40
56 (55) 16QAM 167 to 206 75
56 (55) 32QAM 208 to 256 75
56 (55) 64QAM 265 to 326 75
56 (55) 128QAM 312 to 385 75
56 (55) 256QAM 363 to 447 75
40 QPSK 57 to 70 27
40 16QAM 115 to 142 55
40 32QAM 149 to 183 71
40 64QAM 183 to 226 75
40 128QAM 217 to 268 75
40 256QAM 252 to 310 75

Table 3-69 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2 board, Native STM-1 + Ethernet
service)
Channel Spacing Modulation Mode Ethernet
(MHz) Throughput Number of STM-1
(Mbit/s) Services
28 (27.5) 128QAM 157 to 193 1
28 (27.5) 256QAM 183 to 225 1
40 64QAM 183 to 226 1
40 128QAM 217 to 268 1
40 256QAM 252 to 310 1
56 (55) 16QAM 167 to 206 1
56 (55) 32QAM 208 to 256 1
56 (55) 64QAM 265 to 326 1
56 (55) 128QAM 312 to 385 1
56 (55) 256QAM 363 to 447 1
NOTE
IF Performance

Item Performance

of the IF board
(MHz)

the IF board (MHz)

of the IF board
(MHz)

Item Performance
the IF board (MHz)
Item Performance

baseband signals
Mechanical Behavior
Item Performance
Dimensions (H x W 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

x D)
Weight 0.60 kg
Power Consumption
3.8 ISX2
The ISX2 is a universal XPIC IF board and provides the XPIC function for signals transmitted/
received in Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode. The ISX2 uses the DC-I power
distribution mode.

The functional version of the ISX2 is SL91.
The ISX2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. In addition, the ISX2 provides the cross-

polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) function for IF signals by transmitting/receiving

XPIC reference signals.
as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the ISX2.
3.8.4 Front Panel
front panel.
3.8.5 Valid Slots
The ISX2 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the ISX2 on the NMS are the same
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ISX2.

The functional version of the ISX2 is SL91.

The ISX2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. In addition, the ISX2 provides the cross-
polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) function for IF signals by transmitting/receiving
XPIC reference signals.
Table 3-73 lists the functions and features that the ISX2 supports. The ISX2 needs to work with
the packet switching unit to implement Ethernet service functions and packet service functions.
Table 3-73 Functions and features that the ISX2 supports


Radio type l Integrated IP radio

l SDH radio
NOTE
The integrated IP radio is compatible with the Hybrid radio

Service categories in Integrated IP l Native E1 + Ethernet

radio mode l Native STM-1 + Ethernet
NOTE
Service categories in SDH radio l STM-1

mode l 2xSTM-1
AM Supported only in integrated IP radio mode
High-efficiency encapsulation Supports high-efficiency encapsulation for L2 Ethernet

packets and L3 IP packets.
E1 priority Supported only in integrated IP radio mode with native

XPIC Supported
Radio work mode See Technical Specifications of the ISX2.
Link-level 1+1 HSB/FD/ Supported

protection SD protection
LAG protection Supported

at air interfaces
Native TDM Service E1 services and STM-1 services

services categories
Service SNCP
protection


capacity license

physical layer
DCN Inband DCN Supported

Outband DCN l Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC

bytes for each channel in Integrated IP radio mode.
l Supports one DCC that is composed of D1-D3
bytes, D4-D12 bytes, or D1-D12 bytes, for each
channel in SDH radio mode.

NOTE
radio mode.

warm reset
FPGA loading

at IF ports
Board Supported
manufacturing
information
query
Board Supported
temperature
detection

detection
Table 3-74 Ethernet service functions that the ISX2 supports





G.8032/Y.1344.

OAM.

of 9600 bytes.
LAG Supported

board.
RMON Supported

as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the ISX2.
NOTE
The ISX2 adopts the same principle to process signals transmitted/received in Integrated IP radio mode
and signals transmitted/received in SDH radio mode. The difference is with regard to the microwave frame
structure and processed service types.

Figure 3-29 Functional block diagram of the ISX2

Backplane
ODU control signal System control and
SMODEM
communication unit
unit
HSM signal bus

Paired board
Service bus
processing
Cross-connect unit
MU X/D E MU X u nit
Logic
Overhead bus
unit
p ro c es s in g
C o m bin er
in te rfa c e
System control and

IF Microwave frame MODEM
un it
un it communication unit
IF
signal unit
Ethernet GE bus
Paired XPIC unit
board
XPIC signal
Control bus
System control and
communication unit
Logic
control unit

Power
supply
+3.3 V power supplied to the other unit -48 V2
units on the board
+3.3 V power supplied to the

+3.3 V
monitoring circuit

Table 3-75 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ISX2



3 IF processing unit l Performs ADC sampling.

l Filters the received signals and splits the signals to two
channels of signals.
– Performs A/D conversion for one channel of
filtered signals and transmits the converted signals
to the MODEM unit.
– Outputs the other channel of filtered signals as the
XPIC signals.
l Performs A/D conversion for XPIC signals
transmitted from the paired ISX2 and transmits the
converted signals to the MODEM unit.
4 MODEM unit l Performs XPIC operations for IF signals.

l Performs digital demodulation by using XPIC IF
signals transmitted from the paired ISX2 as reference
signals.
alarms.
5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Detects microwave frame headers and generates

l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames and generates
l Checks link IDs in microwave frames and generates
control bus.
microwave frames to form a 2 Mbit/s overhead signal
and transmits the 2 Mbit/s overhead signal to the logic
processing unit.
l Maps E1 service signals to the specific positions in
VC-4s and then transmits the VC-4s to the logic
processing unit, if native TDM services in Integrated
IP radio mode are E1 services.
l Demaps VC-4s from STM-1 service signals and then
transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit, if
native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are
STM-1 services.
l Transmits Ethernet service signals to the Ethernet
processing unit.


unit DEMUX unit.

signal.)
NOTE
processing.
Table 3-76 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ISX2

s overhead signals.

3 MUX/DEMUX unit l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals that are
from the logic processing unit, if native TDM services
in Integrated IP radio mode are E1 services.
l Adds overheads to the VC-4 signals that are from the
logic processing unit to form STM-1 signals, if native
TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are STM-1
services.
l Sets microwave frame overheads.
l Combines the E1/STM-1 signals, Ethernet signals,
and microwave frame overheads to form microwave
frames.



l Filters signals.


Power Supply Unit

DC conversion.
supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the ISU2 after
Clock Unit
3.8.4 Front Panel

front panel.

Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-30 Front panel of the ISX2

ODU-PWR
ISX2
ISX2
WARNING
IF
STAT
XPIC
I O
LINK
ODU
RMT
-48V OUTPUT
ACT
SRV
PULL X-IN X-OUT
Indicators
Table 3-77 Status explanation for indicators on the ISX2


normal.

disabled.

properly.

l There is no power



configured.

properly.


l There is no power

alarms.

300 ms intervals

reporting defects.

of defects.

active one.
the board has been
activated.

standby one.
Ports

Cable
X-IN XPIC signal input SMA XPIC cable

port
X-OUT XPIC signal output SMA

port

NOTE
Labels
3.8.5 Valid Slots

The ISX2 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the ISX2 on the NMS are the same
Figure 3-31 Slots for the ISX2 in the IDU chassis

S lot Slot 13 (ISX2) Slot 14 (ISX2)
28
(FAN) Slot 11 (ISX2) Slot 12 (ISX2)
Slot 9 (ISX2) Slot 10 (ISX2)
Slot 20
Slot 15
ODU plus 50.

Figure 3-32 Logical slots of the ISX2 on the NMS
Slot Slot 13 (ISX2) Slot 14 (ISX2)

28
(FAN) Slot 11 (ISX2) Slot 12 (ISX2)
Item Description
14
NOTE
slots respectively.

NOTE
One ISX2 pair for implementing the XPIC function must be installed on the same row or adjacently in the
same column.

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ISX2.
Related References

Radio Work Modes
Table 3-80 SDH/PDH microwave work modes (ISU2/ISX2 board)
STM-1 128QAM 28 (27.5)
2×STM-1 128QAM 56 (55)
Table 3-81 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISX2 board, Native E1 + Ethernet service)

(Mbit/s) Hybrid
microwave
28 (27.5) QPSK 41 to 51 20
28 (27.5) 16QAM 83 to 103 40
28 (27.5) 32QAM 108 to 133 50
28 (27.5) 64QAM 133 to 164 64


(Mbit/s) Hybrid
microwave
28 (27.5) 128QAM 157 to 193 75
28 (27.5) 256QAM 183 to 225 75
56 (55) QPSK 83 to 103 40
56 (55) 16QAM 167 to 206 75
56 (55) 32QAM 208 to 256 75
56 (55) 64QAM 265 to 326 75
56 (55) 128QAM 312 to 385 75
56 (55) 256QAM 363 to 447 75
40 QPSK 57 to 70 27
40 16QAM 115 to 142 55
40 32QAM 149 to 183 71
40 64QAM 183 to 226 75
40 128QAM 217 to 268 75
40 256QAM 252 to 310 75
Table 3-82 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISX2 board, Native STM-1 + Ethernet
service)
(Mbit/s) Services
28 (27.5) 128QAM 157 to 193 1
28 (27.5) 256QAM 183 to 225 1
40 64QAM 183 to 226 1
40 128QAM 217 to 268 1
40 256QAM 252 to 310 1
56 (55) 16QAM 167 to 206 1
56 (55) 32QAM 208 to 256 1
56 (55) 64QAM 265 to 326 1
56 (55) 128QAM 312 to 385 1


(Mbit/s) Services
56 (55) 256QAM 363 to 447 1
NOTE
IF Performance
Item Performance

of the IF board
(MHz)

the IF board (MHz)

of the IF board
(MHz)
the IF board (MHz)
Item Performance

baseband signals

Mechanical Behavior

Item Performance
Dimensions (H x W 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

x D)
Weight 0.60 kg
Power Consumption
3.9 EM6T/EM6F
The EM6T/EM6F is an FE/GE interface board, which provides four FE electrical ports and two
GE ports. The EM6T has similar functions to the EM6F. The only difference is as follows: The
GE ports on the EM6T use fixed electrical ports whereas the GE ports on the EM6F use the SFP
modules and therefore can function as two optical or electrical ports. The GE electrical ports on
the EM6F and the EM6T are compatible with the FE electrical ports.

The functional version of the EM6T/EM6F is SL91.
The EM6T/EM6F receives/transmits, processes, and converges four FE signals and two GE
signals.
This section describes how to process one GE signal on the EM6T, and it serves as an example
to describe the working principle and signal flow of the EM6T/EM6F.
3.9.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, FE service ports, and GE service ports on the front panel.
3.9.5 Valid Slots
The EM6T/EM6F can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the EM6T/EM6F on the
NMS are the same as the physical slots.
3.9.6 Board Feature Code
The board feature code of the EM6F indicates the type of SFP module. The board feature code
refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code.
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EM6T/EM6F.
This section describes the board specifications, including the GE port performance, FE port
performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.


The functional version of the EM6T/EM6F is SL91.

The EM6T/EM6F receives/transmits, processes, and converges four FE signals and two GE
signals.
Table 3-86 lists the functions and features that the EM6T/EM6F supports. The EM6T/EM6F
needs to work with the packet switching unit of the system control, switching, and timing board
to implement Ethernet service functions.
Table 3-86 Functions and features that the EM6T/EM6F supports
EM6T EM6F
Basic functions Receives/Transmits FE/GE service signals and works

with the packet switching unit to process the received
FE/GE service signals.
Port FE electrical Provides four Provides four

specifications port 10/100BASE-T(X) ports. 10/100BASE-T(X) ports.
GE port Provides two Provides two GE ports by

10/100/1000BASE-T(X) using SFP modules of any
ports (fixed). of the following types:
l 1000BASE-SX
l 1000BASE-LX
l 10/100/1000BASE-T
(X)
Backplane bus bandwidth 1 Gbit/s 1 Gbit/s
Port attributes Working mode l The FE port supports 10M full-duplex, 10M half-
duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, and
auto-negotiation.
l The GE electrical port supports 10M full-duplex,
10M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M half-
duplex, 1000M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation.
l The GE optical port supports 1000M full-duplex
and auto-negotiation.
TAG attributes l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access,
or hybrid.
l Sets and queries the TAG attribute of an Ethernet
port.

of 9600 bytes.

EM6T EM6F
Traffic control Supports the port-based traffic control function that

function complies with IEEE 802.3x.
Services E-Line services Supports the following types of E-Line services:

l E-Line services based on ports
l E-Line services based on port+QinQ

LAG Inter-board Supported Supported

LAG
Intra-board Supported Supported

LAG

G.8032/Y.1344.
LPT Supported Supported
QoS DiffServ Supports simple traffic classification by specifying

PHB service classes for service flows based on their
QoS information (C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN
priorities, and DSCP values) carried by the packets.
Complex traffic Supports traffic classification at Ethernet ports based

classification on C-VLAN IDs, S-VLAN IDs, C-VLAN priorities, S-
VLAN priorities, C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN priorities,
S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or DSCP values
carried by packets.
CAR Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at ports.
Shaping Supports traffic shaping for a specific port, prioritized

queue, or traffic flow.
Queue Supports the following queue scheduling policies:

scheduling l SP
policies
l WRR
l SP+WRR

EM6T EM6F
ETH OAM IEEE 802.1ag Supports the following IEEE 802.1ag OAM functions:
OAM l Management of OAM maintenance points
l Continuity check test
l Loopback test
l Link trace test
IEEE 802.3ah Supports the following IEEE 802.3ah OAM functions:

OAM l OAM automatic discovery
l Link performance monitoring
l Fault detection
l Remote loopback test
l Loopback detection and blocking of a port being
looped back
RMON Supported Supported
Clock Clock source Synchronous Ethernet Synchronous Ethernet

(not supported by the SFP
electrical module)

DCN Inband DCN Each FE/GE port provides one inband DCN channel.
OAM Loopback Supports the following loopback types:

l Inloops at the PHY layer of Ethernet ports
l Inloops at the MAC layer of Ethernet ports
Warm reset and Supported Supported

cold reset
Board Supported Supported

manufacturing
information
query
Board voltage Supported Supported

detection
Board Supported Supported

temperature
detection

EM6T EM6F
Query of SFP Not supported Supported

module
information

This section describes how to process one GE signal on the EM6T, and it serves as an example
to describe the working principle and signal flow of the EM6T/EM6F.
Figure 3-33 Functional block diagram

Backplane
GE signal
GE signal
Control signal Ethernet Ethernet
access unit
Ethernet signal Logic signal
processing processing Packet switching unit
unit unit
FE signal Control signal
access unit
FE signal
Control bus of the board
Control bus
Logic System control and
control unit communication unit
-48 V1
+3.3 V power supplied Power
to the board supply unit
-48 V2
+3.3 V backup power

supplied to the board +3.3 V
Clock signal provided to the Clock unit System clock signal


Table 3-87 Signal processing in the receive direction

1 GE signal access l Receives/Transmits GE/FE signals.

unit/FE signal access l Performs restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel
unit conversion for GE/FE signals.
l Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping,
CRC checks, and Ethernet performance measurement
for frame signals.
2 Ethernet processing l Adds tags identifying ingress ports to Ethernet data

unit frames.
l Processes VLAN tags in Ethernet data frames.
l Processes labels in MPLS/PWE3 packets.
l Performs QoS processing such as traffic classification
and CAR traffic monitoring for Ethernet data frames.
l Forwards Ethernet data frames to the logic processing
unit.
3 Logic processing Transmits Ethernet data frames to the main and standby
unit packet switching units.
Table 3-88 Signal processing in the transmit direction

1 Logic processing unit l Selects Ethernet data frames from the packet
switching unit.
l Transmits Ethernet data frames to the Ethernet
processing unit.
2 Ethernet processing l Processes labels in MPLS/PWE3 packets.

unit l Processes VLAN tags in Ethernet data frames.
l Performs QoS processing such as traffic shaping and
queue scheduling for Ethernet data frames.
l Forwards Ethernet data frames to proper egress ports
based on egress tags contained in the Ethernet data
frames.

3 GE signal access l Performs frame delimitation, preamble addition, CRC

unit/FE signal access code computing, and Ethernet performance
unit measurement.
l Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for
Ethernet data frames, and sends out the generated GE/
FE signals through Ethernet ports.

The Ethernet processing unit controls the FE/GE signal access unit by using management control
signals.
The logic control unit controls the Ethernet processing unit and logic processing unit over the
control bus on the board.
The logic control unit communicates with the main and standby system control and
communication units over the system control bus. The configuration data and query commands
from the system control and communication unit are issued to the various units of the board
through the logic control unit. The command response reported by each unit on the board, and
the alarms and performance events are reported to the system control and communication unit
also through the logic control unit.
Power Supply Unit

l Receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power supplies
into +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board.
l Receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane, which functions as a +3.3 V power
backup for the other units on the board.
Clock Unit
3.9.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, FE service ports, and GE service ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-34 Front panel of the EM6T

EM6T
EM6T
PROG
STAT
SRV
GE1 GE2 FE1 FE2 FE3 FE4

Figure 3-35 Front panel of the EM6F
EM6F
EM6F
CLASS1
LASER
LINK1
LINK2
PROG
STAT
SRV
PRODUCT
GE1 GE2 FE1 FE2 FE3 FE4
Indicators
Table 3-89 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6T/EM6F


system.
On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs in the system.
PROG Blinks on (green) and off at Software is being loaded to the board during
board.
300 ms intervals during the power-on or resetting process of
the board.
On (green) The upper layer software is being initialized.
Blinks on (red) and off at 100 The BOOTROM self-check fails during the
ms intervals power-on or resetting process of the board.

upper layer software fails during the power-
on or resetting process of the board.
The logic file or upper layer software is lost
during the running process of the board.
LINK1a On (green) The GE1 port is connected correctly and is

not receiving or transmitting data.

Blinking (yellow) The GE1 port is receiving or transmitting

data.
Off The GE1 port is not connected or is

connected incorrectly.

Flashing (green) The GE2 port is receiving or transmitting

data.

NOTE
a: The LINK1 and LINK2 indicators are available only on the EM6F and indicate the states of the
corresponding GE optical ports.
Ports
Table 3-90 Description of the ports on the EM6T

Cable
FE1 FE service port
FE2
FE3
RJ45 Network cable
FE4
GE1 GE service port (fixed

electrical port)
GE2
Table 3-91 Description of the ports on the EM6F

Cable
FE1 FE service port
FE2
RJ45 5.8 Network Cable
FE3
FE4


Cable
GE1 GE service port (using SFP RJ45 SFP electrical 5.5 Fiber Jumper/5.8
modules) module or LC SFP Network Cable
GE2 optical module
The performance of the FE service ports on the EM6T/EM6F complies with the 10/100BASE-
T(X) standard; the performance of the GE service ports on the EM6T complies with the
10/100/1000BASE-T(X) standard; the performance of the GE service ports on the EM6F
complies with the 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) standard if SFP electrical modules are used. All
service ports support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes. For the pin assignments
for the ports, see Table 3-92 and Table 3-93. For the front view of an RJ45 connector, see
Figure 3-36.
87654321
Table 3-92 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode
Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T
Signal Function Signal Function
1 TX+ Transmitting data (+) BIDA+ Bidirectional data wire A

(+)
2 TX- Transmitting data (-) BIDA- Bidirectional data wire A

(-)
3 RX+ Receiving data (+) BIDB+ Bidirectional data wire B

(+)
4 Reserved - BIDC+ Bidirectional data wire C

(+)
5 Reserved - BIDC- Bidirectional data wire C

(-)
6 RX- Receiving data (-) BIDB- Bidirectional data wire B

(-)
7 Reserved - BIDD+ Bidirectional data wire D

(+)

8 Reserved - BIDD- Bidirectional data wire D

(-)
Table 3-93 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode

(+)

(-)

(+)

(+)

(-)

(-)

(+)

(-)
Each FE/GE service port has two indicators. For status explanation for these indicators, see
Table 3-94.
Table 3-94 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector
LINK (green) On The link is working properly.
Off The link is interrupted.
ACT (yellow) On or blinking The port is transmitting or receiving

data.
Off The port is not transmitting or

receiving data.

SFP optical modules are used to provide GE service ports on the EM6F; one SFP optical module
provides one TX port and one RX port. For details, see Figure 3-37, in which TX represents the
transmit port and RX represents the receive port.
Figure 3-37 Ports of the SFP optical module
TX RX
Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel of the EM6F.
The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical port is CLASS 1.
That is, the maximum launched optical power of the optical port is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).
3.9.5 Valid Slots

The EM6T/EM6F can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the EM6T/EM6F on the
NMS are the same as the physical slots.
Figure 3-38 Slots for the EM6T/EM6F in the IDU chassis

Slot Slot 13 (EM6T/EM6F) Slot 14 (EM6T/EM6F)
28
(FAN) Slot 11 (EM6T/EM6F) Slot 12 (EM6T/EM6F)
Slot 9 (EM6T/EM6F) Slot 10 (EM6T/EM6F)
Slot 20
Slot 15

Figure 3-39 Logical slots of the EM6T/EM6F on the NMS

Slot Slot 13 (EM6T/EM6F) Slot 14 (EM6T/EM6F)
28
(FAN) Slot 11 (EM6T/EM6F) Slot 12 (EM6T/EM6F)
Table 3-95 Slot configuration for the EM6T/EM6F

Item Description
Slot allocation priority Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 8 and 10 > Slots 1 and 2 >
Slots 7 and 9 > Slots 3 and 5 > Slots 12 and 14 >
Slots 11 and 13

The board feature code of the EM6F indicates the type of SFP module. The board feature code
Table 3-96 Board feature code of the EM6F

Board Feature Code Module Type Part Number of the
Module
01 1000BASE-SX 34060286
02 1000BASE-LX 34060473
03 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) 34100052

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EM6T/EM6F.

Related References
A.5.2.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes
A.5.2.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control
A.5.2.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes
A.5.2.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Layer 3 Attributes
A.5.2.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes

This section describes the board specifications, including the GE port performance, FE port
performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Performance of GE Optical Ports

The GE optical ports on the EM6T/EM6F comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists
the main specifications for the GE optical ports.
Table 3-97 Performance of the GE optical interface
Item Performance
Classification code 1000Base-SX 1000Base-LX
Fiber type Multiple-mode optical Single-mode optical

fiber fiber
Transmission distance (km) 0.5 10
Operating wavelength (nm) 770 to 860 1270 to 1355
Mean launched power (dBm) -9 to -3 -9 to -3
Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) -17 -20
Minimum overload (dBm) 0 -3
Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 9.5 9.5
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980 uses SFP modules for providing GE optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFP
modules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.
Performance of GE Electrical Ports

The GE electrical ports on the EM6T/EM6F comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists
the main specifications for the GE electrical ports.

Table 3-98 GE electric interface performance
Item Performance

100 (100BASE-TX)
1000 (1000BASE-T)

4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T)
Performance of FE Electrical Ports

The FE electrical ports on the EM6T/EM6F comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists
the main specifications for the FE electrical ports.
Table 3-99 FE electric interface performance
Item Performance

100 (100BASE-TX)

Mechanical Behavior
Item Performance
EM6T EM6F
Dimensions 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm (depth)
Weight 0.37 kg 0.40 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption of the EM6T: < 10.4 W
Power consumption of the EM6F: < 11.3 W

3.10 SL1D
The SL1D is a 2xSTM-1 optical interface board.

The functional version of the SL1D is SL91.
The SL1D receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 optical signals.
This section describes how to process one STM-1 signal, and it serves as an example to describe
the working principle and signal flow of the SL1D.
3.10.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, STM-1 optical ports, and a label on the front panel.
3.10.5 Valid Slots
The SL1D can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the SL1D on the NMS are the same
The board feature code of the SL1D indicates the type of SFP optical module. The board feature
code refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code.
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SL1D.
This section describes the board specifications, including the STM-1 optical port performance,
board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

The functional version of the SL1D is SL91.

The SL1D receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 optical signals.
Table 3-101 lists the functions and features that the SL1D supports.
Table 3-101 Functions and features that the SL1D supports
Basic functions Receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 optical signals.
Optical port specifications l Adopts the SFP optical module and supports the
optical ports of Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 types.
l The characteristics of all the optical ports comply
with ITU-T G.957.

Protection Linear MSP Supported
SNCP Supported
Clock Clock source Each line port provides one SDH line clock signal.

DCN Outband DCN Supported

l Outloops at optical ports
l Inloops at optical ports
l Outloops on VC-4 paths
l Inloops on VC-4 paths
Warm reset and Supported

cold reset
Setting of the Supported

on/off state of a
laser
ALS functiona Supported
FPGA loading
Board Supported
manufacturing
information
query
Detection and Supported

query of SFP
optical module
information
NOTE
a: The ALS function is implemented as follows:

l When the optical module detects the R_LOS alarm at the receive port and the alarm persists for 500
ms, the laser at the specific transmit port is automatically shut down.
l The laser starts to launch laser pulses at a specified interval; that is, the laser emits light for two seconds
and stops emission for 60 seconds.
l After the R_LOS alarm is cleared, the laser works properly and emits continuous light.


This section describes how to process one STM-1 signal, and it serves as an example to describe
the working principle and signal flow of the SL1D.
Figure 3-40 Functional block diagram of the SL1D

Backplane
O/E conversion unit
Logic processing
processing unit
Cro ss-
STM-1 Service bu s
Overhead
connect unit
unit
STM-1 System control and
Overhead bu s
communication unit
System control and

Control bu s communication unit
Logic control
unit
Power supplied to the

+3.3 V

System clock s ignal
Table 3-102 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SL1D

1 O/E conversion unit l Regenerates STM-1 optical signals.

l Detects R_LOS alarms.
l Converts STM-1 optical signals into electrical signals.

2 Overhead processing l Restores clock signals.

unit l Aligns frames and detects R_LOS and R_LOF alarms.
l Performs descrambling.
l Checks B1 and B2 bytes and generates specific alarms
and performance events.
l Checks the M1 byte and bits 6-8 of the K2 byte, and
generates specific alarms and performance events.
l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and
reports the SSM status to the system control and
communication unit.
including F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and K
bytes to form a 2 Mbit/s overhead signal and transmits
the 2 Mbit/s overhead signal to the logic processing
unit.
l Adjusts AU pointers and generates specific
performance events.
l Checks higher order path overheads and generates
to the logic processing unit.

signal.)
to the cross-connect unit.
Table 3-103 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SL1D


s overhead signals.

2 Overhead processing l Sets higher order path overheads.

unit l Sets AU pointers.
l Sets multiplex section overhead bytes.
l Sets regenerator section overhead bytes.
l Performs scrambling.
3 O/E conversion unit l Converts electrical signals into optical signals.

control and communication unit and enables FPGA loading.
Clock Unit
3.10.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, STM-1 optical ports, and a label on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-41 Front panel of the SL1D

SL1D
SL1D
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
LOS1
LOS2
STAT
SRV
TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2
Indicators
Table 3-104 Status explanation for indicators on the SL1D

properly.


l There is no power



configured.
LOS1 On (red) The first optical port of the

SL1D is reporting the
R_LOS alarm.
Off The first optical port of the

SL1D is free of R_LOS
alarms.
LOS2 On (red) The second optical port of the

R_LOS alarm.
Off The second optical port of the

alarms.
Ports

Cable
TX1 Transmit port of the LC (SFP) Fiber jumper

first STM-1 optical
port
RX1 Receive port of the

first STM-1 optical
port
TX2 Transmit port of the LC (SFP)

second STM-1
optical port


Cable
RX2 Receive port of the

second STM-1
optical port
Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel.
The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical port is CLASS 1.
That is, the maximum launched optical power of the optical port is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).
3.10.5 Valid Slots

The SL1D can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the SL1D on the NMS are the same
Figure 3-42 Slots for the SL1D in the IDU chassis

Slot Slot 13 (SL1D) Slot 14 (SL1D)
28
(FAN) Slot 11 (SL1D) Slot 12 (SL1D)
Slot 9 (SL1D) Slot 10 (SL1D)
Slot 20
Slot 15

Figure 3-43 Logical slots of the SL1D on the NMS

Slot Slot 13 (SL1D) Slot 14 (SL1D)
28
(FAN) Slot 11 (SL1D) Slot 12 (SL1D)

Item Description
13

The board feature code of the SL1D indicates the type of SFP optical module. The board feature
Table 3-107 Board feature code of the SL1D

Feature Code Type of Optical Module Part Number of the
Optical Module
01 Ie-1 34060287
02 S-1.1 34060276
03 L-1.1 34060281
04 L-1.2 34060282


This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SL1D.
Related References
A.5.7.1 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces
A.5.9.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead

This section describes the board specifications, including the STM-1 optical port performance,
board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Item Performance
Classification code Ie-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2
Fiber type Multi-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode

fiber fiber fiber fiber
Transmission distance 2 15 40 80
(km)
Operating wavelength 1270 to 1380 1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580
(nm)
Mean launched power -19 to -14 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0

(dBm)
Receiver minimum -30 -28 -34 -34

sensitivity (dBm)
Minimum overload (dBm) -14 -8 -10 -10
Minimum extinction ratio 10 8.2 10 10

(dB)
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980 uses SFP modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFP
modules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.

Mechanical Behavior
Item Performance
Weight 0.30 kg
Power Consumption
3.11 ML1/MD1
The ML1 is a 16xSmart E1 service processing board. The MD1 is a 32xSmart E1 service
processing board.

The functional version of the ML1 is SL92. The functional version of the MD1 is SL91.
The ML1 receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The MD1 receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.
This section describes how to process one E1 signal, and it serves as an example to describe the
working principle and signal flow of the ML1/MD1.
3.11.4 Front Panel
There are indicators and E1 ports on the front panel.
3.11.5 Valid Slots
The ML1/MD1 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the ML1/MD1 on the NMS
are the same as the physical slots.
The board feature code of the ML1/MD1 indicates the port impedance. The board feature code
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ML1/MD1.
This section describes the board specifications, including the E1 port performance, board
mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

The functional version of the ML1 is SL92. The functional version of the MD1 is SL91.


The ML1 receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The MD1 receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.
Table 3-110 lists the functions and features that the ML1/MD1 supports.
Table 3-110 Functions and features that the ML1/MD1 supports

ML1 MD1
Basic functions Receives and transmits E1 signals, and supports

flexible configuration of E1 service categories.
E1 service categories Supports the following E1 service categories:

l CES E1
l ATM/IMA E1
Port 75-ohm/120- 16 32
specifications ohm E1 port
Fractional E1 Supports transparent service transmission at the 64

kbit/s level.
ATM/IMA Maximum 64
number of ATM
services
Maximum 256
number of ATM
connections
ATM traffic Supported

management
ATM Supports the following ATM encapsulation modes:

encapsulation l N-to-one VPC
mode
l N-to-one VCC
l One-to-one VPC
l One-to-one VCC
Maximum 31
number of
concatenated
ATM cells
ATM OAM F4 (VP level) and F5 (VC level)
Maximum 16 32
number of IMA
groups

ML1 MD1
Maximum 16
number of
members in an
IMA group
CES Maximum 16 32
number of
services
Encapsulation Supports the following encapsulation modes:

mode l CESoPSN
l SAToP
Service Point-to-point services

category
Compression of Supported (applicable to CESoPSN only)

idle slots
Jitter buffering 375-16000

time (us)
Packet loading 125-5000

time (us)
CES ACR Supported
Retiming Supported
Clock protection Supports clock protection based on clock source

priorities.
OM Loopback Supports inloops and outloops at E1 tributary ports.

warm reset
PRBS tests at E1 Supported

ports
Board Supported
manufacturing
information
query

working principle and signal flow of the ML1/MD1.

Figure 3-44 Functional block diagram of the ML1/MD1

Backplane
processing unit
processing unit
E1 interface unit
Service
Signal
Service
Logic
GE bus Packet switching unit
bus
E1
Control bus System control and

communication unit
Logic
control unit
+3.3 V power Power -48 V1

supplied to the board supply unit -48 V2
+3.3 V backup power
+3.3 V
supplied to the board
Clock signal provided to Clock
unit System clock signal
the other units of the board
Table 3-111 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ML1/MD1
1 Signal interface unit l Receives external E1 signals.

l Matches the resistance.
l Equalizes signals.
l Converts the level.
l Recovers clock signals.
l Buffers the received data.
l Performs HDB3/B8ZS/AMI decoding.
2 Service processing l Frames E1 signals.

unit l Performs CES emulation or processes ATM/IMA
services.
l Encapsulates PWE3 services and converts the PWE3
services into Ethernet services.

4 Logic processing l Implements the conversion from the internal service

unit bus into the GE bus in the backplane.
l Sends service signals to the packet switching unit.
Table 3-112 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ML1/MD1
1 Logic processing l Receives service signals from the packet switching

unit unit.
l Implements the conversion from the GE bus in the
backplane into the internal service bus.
2 Service processing l Decapsulates service signals.

unit l Re-forms CES packets or processes ATM/IMA
services.
l Converts signals into E1 signals and sends the E1
signals to the signal interface unit.
3 Signal interface unit l Performs HDB3/B8ZS/AMI coding.

l Performs clock re-timing.
l Performs pulse shaping.
l Drives the line.
l Sends E1 signals to a port.

Power Supply Unit


Clock Unit
3.11.4 Front Panel

Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-45 Front panel of the ML1

ML1
16
STAT
E1 1
SRV
Figure 3-46 Front panel of the MD1

MD1
16 32
STAT
SRV
1 17
Indicators
Table 3-113 Status explanation for indicators on the ML1/MD1

properly.

l There is no power




configured.
Ports
Table 3-114 Description of the ports on the ML1

Port Description Connector Corresponding Cable
Type
1 to 16 The first to sixteenth Anea 96 5.6.1 E1 Cable Connected to

E1 ports the External Equipment or
5.6.2 E1 Cable Connected to
the E1 Panel
Table 3-115 Description of the ports on the MD1

Type
1 to 16 The first to sixteenth Anea 96 5.6.1 E1 Cable Connected to

the E1 Panel
17 to 32 The seventeenth to Anea 96 5.6.1 E1 Cable Connected to

thirty-second E1 the External Equipment or
ports 5.6.2 E1 Cable Connected to
the E1 Panel
The ports on the ML1/MD1 use the Anea 96 connector. Figure 3-47 shows the front view of an
Anea 96 connector and Table 3-116 provides the pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector.
Figure 3-47 Front view of an Anea 96 connector

POS.1
POS.96

Table 3-116 Pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector

Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 The first received E1 25 The first transmitted E1 differential

differential signal (+) signal (+)

differential signal (-) signal (-)
3 The second received E1 27 The second transmitted E1 differential


5 The third received E1 29 The third transmitted E1 differential


7 The fourth received E1 31 The fourth transmitted E1 differential


9 The fifth received E1 33 The fifth transmitted E1 differential


11 The sixth received E1 35 The sixth transmitted E1 differential


13 The seventh received E1 37 The seventh transmitted E1

differential signal (+) differential signal (+)

differential signal (-) differential signal (-)
15 The eighth received E1 39 The eighth transmitted E1 differential


17 The ninth received E1 41 The ninth transmitted E1 differential



19 The tenth received E1 43 The tenth transmitted E1 differential


21 The eleventh received E1 45 The eleventh transmitted E1


23 The twelfth received E1 47 The twelfth transmitted E1


49 The thirteenth received E1 73 The thirteenth transmitted E1


51 The fourteenth received E1 75 The fourteenth transmitted E1


53 The fifteenth received E1 77 The fifteenth transmitted E1


55 The sixteenth received E1 79 The sixteenth transmitted E1


3.11.5 Valid Slots

The ML1/MD1 can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the ML1/MD1 on the NMS

Figure 3-48 Slots for the ML1/MD1 in the IDU chassis

Slot Slot 13 (ML1/MD1) Slot 14 (ML1/MD1)
28
(FAN) Slot 11 (ML1/MD1) Slot 12 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 9 (ML1/MD1) Slot 10 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 20
Slot 15
Figure 3-49 Logical slots of the ML1/MD1 on the NMS

Slot Slot 13 (ML1/MD1) Slot 14 (ML1/MD1)
28
(FAN) Slot 11 (ML1/MD1) Slot 12 (ML1/MD1)


Item Description
13

The board feature code of the ML1/MD1 indicates the port impedance. The board feature code
Table 3-118 Board feature code of the ML1/MD1

Board Feature Code Port Impedance (Ohm)
A 75
B 120

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ML1/MD1.
Related References
A.5.1.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Basic Attributes
A.5.1.2 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Advanced Attributes

E1 Interface Performance
Table 3-119 E1 interface performance

Item Performance
Code pattern HDB3
Impedance (ohm) 75 120
Wire pair in each One coaxial wire pair One symmetrical wire pair
transmission direction

Mechanical Behavior

Item Performance
ML1 MD1
Dimensions (H x W x 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

D)
Power Consumption
Power consumption of the ML1: < 6.9 W
Power consumption of the MD1: < 11.0 W
3.12 SP3S/SP3D
The SP3S is a 16xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. The SP3D is a 32xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm
tributary board.

The functional version of the SP3S is SL91. The functional version of the SP3D is TNH1.
The SP3S receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The SP3D receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.
working principle and signal flow of the SP3S/SP3D.
3.12.4 Front Panel
3.12.5 Valid Slots
The SP3S/SP3D can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMS
The board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D indicates the E1 port impedance. The board feature
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SP3S/SP3D.


The functional version of the SP3S is SL91. The functional version of the SP3D is TNH1.

The SP3S receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The SP3D receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.
Table 3-121 lists the functions and features that the SP3S/SP3D supports.
Table 3-121 Functions and features that the SP3S/SP3D supports

SP3S SP3D
Basic functions Receives and transmits E1 signals.
Port 75-ohm/120- 16 32
specifications ohm E1 port
Clock Clock source Supports a tributary clock source extracted from the
first or fifth E1 signal.
Clock Supports clock protection based on clock source

protection priorities.
E1 retiming Supported
function
OM Loopback Supports inloops and outloops at E1 tributary ports.

warm reset
PRBS tests at E1 Supported

ports
Board Supported
manufacturing
information
query

working principle and signal flow of the SP3S/SP3D.

Figure 3-50 Functional block diagram of the SP3S/SP3D

Backplane
E1 signal Service bus
Logic processing
Demapping unit
E1
Interface unit
Codec unit
Mapping/
unit
Cross-connect unit
E1
Control bus System control and

communication unit
Logic
control
unit
-48 V1
+3.3 V power Power
supplied to the board supply unit -48 V2
+3.3 V backup power

+3.3 V
supplied to the board
Clock signal provided to the Clock System clock signal

Table 3-122 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SP3S/SP3D

1 Interface unit External E1 signals are coupled by the transformer and

then transmitted to the board.
2 Codec unit l Equalizes the received signals.

l Recovers clock signals.
l Detects T_ALOS alarms.
l Performs HDB3 decoding.

3 Mapping/ l Asynchronously maps signals into C-12s.

Demapping unit l Adds path overhead bytes to C-12s to form VC-12s.
l Processes pointers to form TU-12s.
l Performs byte interleaving for three TU-12s to form
one TUG-2.
l Performs byte interleaving for seven TU-2s to form
one TUG-3.
l Performs byte interleaving for three TU-3s to form
one C-4.
l Adds higher order path overhead bytes to one C-4 to
form one VC-4.

unit l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
Table 3-123 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SP3S/SP3D

unit l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
2 Mapping/ l Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4.

Demapping unit l Demultiplexes seven TUG-2s from one TUG-3.
l Demultiplexes three VC-12s from one TUG-2.
l Processes path overheads and pointers and detects
l Extracts E1 signals.
3 Codec unit Performs HDB3 coding.
4 Interface unit E1 signals are coupled by the transformer and then

transmitted to an external cable.


Power Supply Unit

Clock Unit
3.12.4 Front Panel

Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-51 Front panel of the SP3S

SP3S
SP3S
STAT
E1
SRV
1-16
Figure 3-52 Front panel of the SP3D

SP3D
SP3D
21 42
STAT
SRV
1 22
Indicators
Table 3-124 Status explanation for indicators on the SP3S/SP3D

properly.


l There is no power



configured.
Ports
Table 3-125 Description of the ports on the SP3S

Type
1-16 The first to sixteenth Anea 96 5.6.1 E1 Cable Connected to

the E1 Panel
Table 3-126 Description of the ports on the SP3D

Type
1-21 The first to sixteenth Anea 96 5.6.1 E1 Cable Connected to

the E1 Panel
22-42 The seventeenth to Anea 96 5.6.1 E1 Cable Connected to

thirty-second E1 the External Equipment or
ports 5.6.2 E1 Cable Connected to
the E1 Panel
NOTE
On the OptiX RTN 980, only ports 1-16 and 22-37 of the SP3D are used. Ports 1-16 correspond to E1
signals 1-16 and ports 22-37 correspond to E1 signals 17-32.

The ports on the SP3S/SP3D use Anea 96 connectors. Figure 3-53 shows the front view of an
Anea 96 connector and Table 3-127 provides the pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector.
Figure 3-53 Front view of an Anea 96 connector

POS.1
POS.96
Table 3-127 Pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector


































3.12.5 Valid Slots

The SP3S/SP3D can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMS
Figure 3-54 Slots for the SP3S/SP3D in the IDU chassis

Slot Slot 13 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 14 (SP3S/SP3D)
28
(FAN) Slot 11 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 12 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 9 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 10 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 20
Slot 15

Figure 3-55 Logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMS

Slot Slot 13 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 14 (SP3S/SP3D)
28
(FAN) Slot 11 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 12 (SP3S/SP3D)
Item Description
13

The board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D indicates the E1 port impedance. The board feature
Table 3-129 Board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D
Board Feature Code Port Impedance (Ohm)
A 120
B 75

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SP3S/SP3D.

Related References
A.5.8.1 Parameter Description: PDH Interfaces

E1 Interface Performance
Table 3-130 E1 interface performance

Item Performance
Code pattern HDB3
Impedance (ohm) 75 120
Wire pair in each One coaxial wire pair One symmetrical wire pair
Mechanical Behavior

Item Performance
SP3S SP3D
Dimensions (H x W x 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

D)
Power Consumption
Power consumption of the SP3S: < 5.7 W
Power consumption of the SP3D: < 9.6 W
3.13 AUX
The AUX is an auxiliary management interface board of the OptiX RTN 980. One NE can house
only one AUX.

The functional version of the AUX is SL91.

The AUX provides the system with one orderwire phone port, one synchronous data port, one
asynchronous data port, and one four-input/two-output external alarm port.
The AUX consists of the orderwire unit, logic control unit, and clock unit.
3.13.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, management ports, and auxiliary ports on the front panel.
3.13.5 Valid Slots
The AUX can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the AUX on the NMS are the same
This section describes the board specifications, including auxiliary port performance, board

The functional version of the AUX is SL91.

The AUX provides the system with one orderwire phone port, one synchronous data port, one
asynchronous data port, and one four-input/two-output external alarm port.
Table 3-132 lists the functions and features that the AUX supports.
Table 3-132 Functions and features that the AUX supports

Orderwire phone port 1
Synchronous data port 1

The transmission rate of the port is 64 kbit/s and its
specifications comply with ITU-T G.703.
Asynchronous data port 1

The transmission rate of the port is equal to or less than 19.2
kbit/s and the interfacing level complies with RS-232.
External alarm port Four inputs and two outputs
Hot swapping function Supported
Power detection Supported

The AUX consists of the orderwire unit, logic control unit, and clock unit.

Figure 3-56 Functional block diagram of the AUX

Backplane
Power
+3.3 V
supply unit
Power dip
4-input/2-output alarm port detection signal
One orderwire phone port Orderwire

System bus
unit Logic control System control and
64 kbit/s synchronous data port
19.2 kbit/s asynchronous data port
Clock unit Clock Board status System control and

detection unit communication unit
signal
Power Supply Unit

l Receives the +3.3 V power supply from the backplane and supplies it to the other units on
the AUX.
l Receives and shuts down control signals.
Orderwire Unit
l Supports the input of four channels of alarms.
l Supports the output of two channels of alarms.
l Provides one orderwire port.
l Provides one 64 kbit/s synchronous transparent data port.
l Provides one 19.2 kbit/s asynchronous transparent data port.
NOTE
The 64 kbit/s synchronous data port can transparently transmit orderwire byte. One port, however, can implement
only one of the two functions: 64 kbit/s synchronous data port and transparent transmission of orderwire byte.
Logic Control Unit

l Provides an interface with the CPU unit and works with the CPU unit to implement the
board control function.
l Processes orderwire bytes and overhead bytes.
l Processes clock signals.
l Provides board status information.
l Checks the status of the main and standby system control, switching, and timing boards.
l Checks the status of the main and standby clocks.
l Supports the switching of system clock reference sources automatically and by running
specific commands.
l Supports the detection and reporting of the key clock status of each board in the system.

Board Status Detection Unit

l Detects board performance data such as board voltage.
l Stores board manufacturing information.
Clock Unit
Provides clock signals to the logic control unit.
3.13.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, management ports, and auxiliary ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-57 shows the appearance of the front panel of the AUX.
Figure 3-57 Front panel of the AUX

AUX
STAT
SRV
F1/S1 PHONE ALMO ALMI
Indicators
Table 3-133 Status explanation for indicators on the AUX

board.

system.

system.

Auxiliary Ports and Management Ports
Table 3-134 Description of the auxiliary ports and management ports
F1/S1 Synchronous/Asynchronous data port RJ45
ALMI Alarm input port
ALMO Alarm output port
PHONE Orderwire phone port
The auxiliary ports and management ports use RJ45 connectors. The pin assignments for the
ports, however, are different. Figure 3-58 shows the front view of the RJ45 connector.
87654321
Table 3-135 provides the pin assignments for the F1/S1 port.
Table 3-135 Pin assignments for the F1/S1 port
Port Pin Signal
F1/S1 1 Transmitting asynchronous data signals
2 Grounding end
3 Receiving asynchronous data signals
4 Transmitting synchronous data signals (TIP)
5 Transmitting synchronous data signals (RING)
6 Grounding end
7 Receiving synchronous data signals (TIP)
8 Receiving synchronous data signals (RING)
For the pin assignments for the ALMI and ALMO ports, see Table 3-136 and see Table
3-137.

Table 3-136 Pin assignments for the ALMI port

Port Pin Signal
ALMI 1 The first external alarm input signal
2 Grounding end for the first external alarm input signal
3 The second external alarm input signal
4 The third external alarm input signal
5 Grounding end for the third external alarm input signal
6 Grounding end for the second external alarm input

signal
7 The forth external alarm input signal
8 Grounding end for the forth external alarm input signal
Table 3-137 Pin assignments for the ALMO port

Port Pin Signal
ALMO 1 The first external alarm output signal (+)
2 The first external alarm output signal (-)
3 The second external alarm output signal (+)
4 The first external alarm output signal (+)
5 The first external alarm output signal (-)
6 The second external alarm output signal (-)
7 The second external alarm output signal (+)
8 The second external alarm output signal (-)
3.13.5 Valid Slots

The AUX can be inserted in slots 1-14. The logical slots of the AUX on the NMS are the same

Figure 3-59 Slots for the AUX in the IDU chassis

Slot Slot 13 (AUX) Slot 14 (AUX)
28
(FAN) Slot 11 (AUX) Slot 12 (AUX)
Slot 9 (AUX) Slot 10(AUX)
Slot 20
Slot 7 (AUX) Slot 8 (AUX)
Slot 15
Figure 3-60 Logical slots of the AUX on the NMS

Slot Slot 13 (AUX) Slot 14 (AUX)
28
(FAN) Slot 11 (AUX) Slot 12 (AUX)

Item Description
13


This section describes the board specifications, including auxiliary port performance, board
Orderwire Interface Performance
Table 3-139 Orderwire interface performance

Item Performance
Transmission path Uses the E1 and E2 bytes in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-
defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.
Orderwire type Addressing call
Wire pair in each One symmetrical wire pair

Impedance (ohm) 600
NOTE
The OptiX RTN equipment also supports the orderwire group call function. For example, when an OptiX RTN
equipment calls the number of 888, the orderwire group call number, all the OptiX RTN equipment orderwire
phones in the orderwire subnet ring until a phone is answered. Then, a point-to-point orderwire phone call is
established.
Synchronous Data Interface Performance
Table 3-140 Synchronous data interface performance

Item Performance
Transmission path Uses the F1 byte in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-defined
byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.
Interface type Codirectional
Interface characteristics Meets the ITU-T G.703 standard.

Asynchronous Data Interface
Table 3-141 Asynchronous data interface performance
Item Performance
Transmission path Uses the user-defined byte of the SDH overhead or the
Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) ≤ 19.2
Interface characteristics Meets the RS-232 standard.
Mechanical Behavior
Item Performance
Weight 0.27 kg
Power Consumption
3.14 PIU
The PIU is the power interface board. The OptiX RTN 980 supports two PIUs, each of which
accesses one -48 V/-60 V DC power supply.

The functional version of the PIU is SLB1.
The PIU supports power access, power protection, surge protection status monitoring, power
detection, filtering, and information reporting.
The PIU consists of the protection and detection unit, power detection unit, DC/DC unit, EMI
filtering unit, and communication control unit.
3.14.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, power access ports, and a label on the front panel.
3.14.5 Valid Slots
The PIU can be inserted in slots 26 and 27.

This section describes the board specifications, including input voltage, board mechanical
behavior, and board power consumption.

The functional version of the PIU is SLB1.

The PIU supports power access, power protection, surge protection status monitoring, power
detection, filtering, and information reporting.
Table 3-143 lists the functions and features that the PIU supports.
Table 3-143 Functions and features that the PIU supports

Basic functions Power access Two PIUs are provided and each accesses one -48 V
DC or -60 V DC power input.
Power output The PIU provides other boards with +3.3 V power or
-48 V power.
Protection Protection Supports 1+1 HSB protection.
Power l Protection against overcurrent

protection l Protection against short circuits
Surge Supported
protection
Power detection Supported
Surge protection status monitoring Supported
EMI filtering Supported

The PIU consists of the protection and detection unit, power detection unit, DC/DC unit, EMI
filtering unit, and communication control unit.

Figure 3-61 shows the functional block diagram of the PIU.

Figure 3-61 Functional block diagram of the PIU

Backplane
-48 V/-60 V -48 V Board operating in distributed

Protection and EMI filtering power supply mode
detection unit unit -48 V
Power Fan
detection unit
Detection +5.0 V
signal
+3.3 V +3.3 V
Detection DC/DC unit Other boards
signal Communication
control unit Detection signal System control and
communication unit
Protection and Detection Unit

The protection and detection unit primarily protects and detects the PIU. It performs the
following functions:
l Provides protection against lightning strike and surge.
l Detects whether the surge-protection circuit fails and reports a surge-protection failure
alarm.
l Monitors PIU temperature in real time and reports it to the system control and
communication unit through the communication control unit.
l Detects whether -48 V power is available.
l Performs start-delay and mis-connection prevention functions.
Power Detection Unit

The power detection unit detects the voltage, current, and power consumption, and reports the
information to the system control unit through the communication control unit.
EMI Filtering Unit

The EMI filtering unit performs electro-magnetic interference (EMI) filtering and low-frequency
interference filtering.
DC/DC Unit
The DC/DC unit converts the input -48 V power into the voltages that each part of the system
requires. The DC/DC unit performs the following functions:
l Converts -48 V power into +3.3 V power and supplies +3.3 V power to the communication
control unit of the PIU.
l Converts -48 V power into +3.3 V power and supplies +3.3 V power to other boards.
l Converts -48 V power into +5.0 V power and supplies +5.0 V power to the power detection
unit of the PIU.
Communication Control Unit

The communication control unit achieves communication between the system control and
communication unit and the PIU and reports the following information to the system control
and communication unit:

l PIU manufacturing information

l PCB version information
l Power detection information
l Surge-protection failure information
l PIU temperature
3.14.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, power access ports, and a label on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-62 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PIU.
Figure 3-62 Front panel of the PIU

NEG(-) RTN(+)
PIU
ALM
PWR
-48V/-60V
Indicators
Table 3-144 Status explanation for indicators on the PIU
Indicator Status Description
PWR On (green) The power supply is normal.
Off There is no power supply.
ALM On (orange) The board is in the initialization state.
On (red) An alarm is reported on the PIU.
Off No alarm occurs.
Ports
The PIU accesses one power supply. Table 3-145 lists the types of the ports on the PIU and their
respective usage.
Table 3-145 Description of the ports on the PIU
Port Port Connector Type Corresponding Cable

Description
NEG -48 V power M6 screws, which can be 5.1 Power Cable

(-) input port installed with OT terminals

Port Port Connector Type Corresponding Cable

Description
RTN BGND power

(+) input port
Labels
Caution label for power operations: prompting you to read the operation guide before any power
operations.
CAUTION
Do not remove or install a PIU while the equipment is powered on. That is, turn off all the power
supplies of the PIU before removing or installing it.
3.14.5 Valid Slots

The PIU can be inserted in slots 26 and 27.
Figure 3-63 Slots for the PIU in the IDU chassis

Slot 28 Slot 20 (CSHN)
(FAN)
Slot 15 (CSHN)

Figure 3-64 Logical slots of the PIU on the NMS

Slot Slot 13 Slot 14
28
(FAN) Slot 11 Slot 12
Slot 9 Slot 10
SlotT 7 Slot 8
Slot 5 Slot 6
Slot 3 Slot 4
Slot 1 Slot 2

This section describes the board specifications, including input voltage, board mechanical
behavior, and board power consumption.
Table 3-146 lists the technical specifications for the PIU.
Table 3-146 Technical specifications for the PIU

Item Performance
Weight 1.00 kg
Power consumption < 29.7 W
Input voltage -38.4 V to -72.0 V
3.15 FAN
The FAN is a fan board that dissipates heat generated in the chassis through air cooling.

The functional version of the FAN is SLBE1.
The FAN adjusts the fan rotating speed, and detects and reports the fan status.

The FAN consists of the fan unit, power unit, and communication monitoring unit.
3.15.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, an ESD wrist strap jack, and labels on the front panel.
3.15.5 Valid Slots
The FAN can be inserted in slot 28 in the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the FAN on the NMS
is the same as the physical slot.
This section describes the board specifications, including board mechanical behavior and board
power consumption.

The functional version of the FAN is SLBE1.

The FAN adjusts the fan rotating speed, and detects and reports the fan status.
Table 3-147 lists the functions and features that the FAN supports.
Table 3-147 Functions and features that the FAN supports

Power input
Accesses the -48 V power from the PIU through the power
bus in the backplane.
Number of fans 9
Intelligent fan speed Supported

adjustment
Protection Provides start-delay for the power supply of the fans, protects
fans against overcurrent, and filters out high-frequency
signals.
OM l Reports the information about the fan rotating speed,

alarms, version number, and board in-position status.
l Provides alarm indicators.

The FAN consists of the fan unit, power unit, and communication monitoring unit.
Figure 3-65 shows the functional block diagram of the FAN.

Figure 3-65 Functional block diagram of the FAN

Backplane
-48 V
-48 V
Fan unit Power unit
-48 V
Communication
detection signal
Communication
Communication detection signal System control and
monitoring unit communication unit
Power Unit
l Receives -48 V power from the backplane.
l Provides the fan power with the following functions: start-delay, filtering, supply
combining, and overcurrent protection.
Fan Unit
Nine air-cooling fans dissipate the heat generated by the system.
When one fan fails, the fan unit ensures that the system can operate in a short term under an
environmental temperature of 40°C.
Communication Monitoring Unit

l Detects the manufacturing information, PCB version information, and environmental
temperature of the FAN, and reports the information to the system control and
communication unit.
l Detects the fan rotating speed and adjusts the speed according to the pulse-width
modulation signal from the system control and communication unit.
The system adjusts the fan rotating speed based on the working temperature, as listed in
Table 3-148.
Table 3-148 Adjustment of the fan rotating speed
Working Temperature Rotating Speed
≤ 25°C 3600 rounds/minute
25°C to 60°C Linear increase in accordance with the

temperature
≥ 60°C 10800 rounds/minute

3.15.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, an ESD wrist strap jack, and labels on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-66 shows the appearance of the front panel of the FAN.
Figure 3-66 Front panel of the FAN
OptiX RTN 980

28 26 PIU 27 PIU
13 EXT 14 EXT
11 EXT 12 EXT
9 EXT 10 EXT
F 20
NCS
A
7 EXT 8 EXT
N 15
NCS
5 EXT 6 EXT
3 EXT 4 EXT
1 EXT 2 EXT
FAN
CAUTION
Hazardous
moving parts,keep
fingers and other
body parts away.
严禁在风扇旋转时
接触扇叶！

Indicators
Table 3-149 Status explanation for indicators on the FAN

FAN On (green) The fan is working properly.
On (red) The fan is faulty.
Off The fan is not powered on or is not installed.
ESD Wrist Strap Jack

An ESD wrist strap needs to be connected to the ESD wrist strap jack to achieve the proper
grounding of the human body.
Labels
The front panel of the FAN has the following labels:
l ESD protection label: indicates that the equipment is static-sensitive.
l Fan warning label: warns you not to touch fan leaves when a fan is rotating.
3.15.5 Valid Slots

The FAN can be inserted in slot 28 in the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the FAN on the NMS
is the same as the physical slot.
Figure 3-67 Slot for the FAN in the IDU chassis
Slot 13 Slot 14
Slot 11 Slot 12
Slot 9 Slot 10
Slot 28 Slot 20
(FAN)
Slot 7 Slot 8
Slot 15
Slot 5 Slot 6
Slot 3 Slot 4
Slot 1 Slot 2

Figure 3-68 Logical slot of the FAN on the NMS

Slot Slot 13 Slot 14
28
(FAN) Slot 11 Slot 12
Slot 9 Slot 10
SlotT 7 Slot 8
Slot 5 Slot 6
Slot 3 Slot 4
Slot 1 Slot 2

This section describes the board specifications, including board mechanical behavior and board
power consumption.
Table 3-150 lists the technical specifications for the FAN.
Table 3-150 Technical specifications for the FAN

Item Performance
Weight 1.66 kg
Power consumption < 15.8 W (room temperature)

< 151.2 W (high temperature)

IDU Hardware Description 4 Accessories
4 Accessories
About This Chapter
The accessories of the OptiX RTN 980 include the E1 panel and the power distribution unit
(PDU). Select appropriate accessories based on the requirements.
4.1 E1 Panel
When an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, install an E1 panel in the cabinet and this E1
panel functions as a DDF for the IDU.
4.2 PDU
A PDU is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet to distribute the input power supply to devices
in the cabinet.

4 Accessories IDU Hardware Description
4.1 E1 Panel
When an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, install an E1 panel in the cabinet and this E1
panel functions as a DDF for the IDU.
The dimensions (H x W x D) of the E1 panel are 42 mm x 483 mm x 33 mm. An E1 panel
provides cable distribution for 16 E1s.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 4-1 Front panel of an E1 panel

R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 R10 R11 R12 R13 R14 R15 R16
1-8
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 T16 9-16
Ports
Table 4-1 Port description of an E1 panel

T1-T16 Transmit ports for the first to BNC

sixteenth E1 ports (connected
to external equipment)
R1-R16 Receive ports for the first to

sixteenth E1 ports (connected
to external equipment)
1-8 The first to eighth E1 ports DB37

(connected to an IDU)
9-16 The ninth to sixteenth E1

ports (connected to an IDU)
Grounding bolt Connecting a PGND cable -
NOTE
The port impedance of each E1 port on an E1 panel is 75 ohms.
Figure 4-2 shows the front view of an E1 port that is connected to an IDU. Table 4-2 provides
the pin assignments for the E1 port.

Figure 4-2 Front view of an E1 port (E1 panel)
Pos. 1
Pos. 37
Table 4-2 Pin assignments for an E1 port (E1 panel)
20 The first E1 received differential 21 The first E1 transmitted

signal (+) differential signal (+)
2 The first E1 received differential 3 The first E1 transmitted

signal (-) differential signal (-)
22 The second E1 received 23 The second E1 transmitted

4 The second E1 received 5 The second E1 transmitted

24 The third E1 received differential 25 The third E1 transmitted

6 The third E1 received differential 7 The third E1 transmitted

26 The fourth E1 received 27 The fourth E1 transmitted

8 The fourth E1 received 9 The fourth E1 transmitted

36 The fifth E1 received differential 35 The fifth E1 transmitted

17 The fifth E1 received differential 16 The fifth E1 transmitted

34 The sixth E1 received differential 33 The sixth E1 transmitted

15 The sixth E1 received differential 14 The sixth E1 transmitted

32 The seventh E1 received 31 The seventh E1 transmitted

13 The seventh E1 received 12 The seventh E1 transmitted


30 The eighth E1 received 29 The eighth E1 transmitted

11 The eighth E1 received 10 The eighth E1 transmitted

Others Reserved - -
4.2 PDU
A PDU is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet to distribute the input power supply to devices
in the cabinet.
4.2.1 Front Panel

There are input power terminals, PGND terminals, output power terminals, and power switches
on the front panel of a PDU.
4.2.2 Functions and Working Principle
After implementing simple power distribution, a PDU feeds power to devices in a cabinet.
4.2.3 Power Distribution Mode
A PDU supports DC-C and DC-I power distribution. The DC-C power distribution is the default
mode.
4.2.1 Front Panel

There are input power terminals, PGND terminals, output power terminals, and power switches
on the front panel of a PDU.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 4-3 Front panel of the PDU

1 2 3 4
1 2 3
OUTPUT
4
A B
1 2
OUTPUT
3 4
ON ON
RTN1(+) RTN2(+) NEG1(-) NEG2(-)
OFF OFF
INPUT
20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A
5 6
1. Output power terminals (A) 2. PGND terminals

3. Input power terminals 4. Output power terminals (B)

5. Power switches (A) 6. Power switches (B)
Ports
Table 4-3 Ports on the PDU
Position Port Description
Output power + Power output (+)

terminals (A)
- Power output (-)
PGND Wiring terminal For connecting PGND cables

terminals for a two-hole
OT terminal
Input power RTN1(+) The first power input (+)

terminals
RTN2(+) The second power input (+)
NEG1(-) The first power input (-)
NEG2(-) The second power input (-)
Output power + Power output (+)

terminals (B)
- Power output (-)
Power 20 A Switches for power outputs

switches (A) The fuse capacity is 20 A. The switches from the left to
the right correspond to output power terminals 1 to 4 on
side A.
Power 20 A Switches for power outputs

switches (B) The fuse capacity is 20 A. The switches from the left to
the right correspond to output power terminals 1 to 4 on
side B.
4.2.2 Functions and Working Principle

After implementing simple power distribution, a PDU feeds power to devices in a cabinet.
Functions
l The PDU supports two -48 V/-60 V DC power inputs.
l Each input power supply provides four outputs.
l The fuse capacity of the switch for each power output is 20 A.
l The PDU supports DC-C and DC-I power distribution.

Working Principle
A PDU consists of input terminals, output terminals, and circuit breakers and it performs simple
distribution operations for the input power.
Figure 4-4 Functional block diagram of the PDU
OUTPUT A
+
SW1 1
-
+
2
SW2 -
INPUT
+
3
SW3 -
RTN1(+)
+
BGND 4
SW4
-
RTN2(+)
OUTPUT B
NEG1(-) +
SW1 1
BGND -
NEG2(-) +
2
SW2 -
+
SW4 3
-
+
PGND SW4 4
-
4.2.3 Power Distribution Mode

A PDU supports DC-C and DC-I power distribution. The DC-C power distribution is the default
mode.
A short-circuit copper bar inside a PDU controls the power distribution mode of the PDU.
DC-C Power Distribution Mode

To use DC-C power distribution, use the short-circuit copper bar to short-circuit terminal RTN1
(+), terminal RTN2(+), and PGND terminals.

Figure 4-5 Interior of the PDU in DC-C mode
DC-I Power Distribution Mode

To use DC-I power distribution, remove the short-circuit copper bar.
Figure 4-6 Interior of the PDU in DC-I mode

IDU Hardware Description 5 Cables
5 Cables
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the purpose, appearance, and pin assignments of various cables used on
the IDU 980.
5.1 Power Cable

A power cable connects the PIU board in the IDU to a power supply device (for example, a PDU
on top of the cabinet) for access of the -48 V power to the IDU.
5.2 PGND Cable
PGND cables are available in two categories: IDU PGND cables and E1 panel PGND cables.
5.3 IF Jumper
An IF jumper connects the IDU to an IF cable. The IF jumper works with the IF cable to transmit
IF signals and O&M signals in addition to supplying -48 V power between the ODU and the
IDU.
5.4 XPIC Cable
An XPIC cable transmits reference IF signals between the two XPIC boards in an XPIC
workgroup to implement the XPIC function.
5.5 Fiber Jumper
A fiber jumper transmits optical signals. One end of the fiber jumper has an LC/PC connector
that is connected to an SDH optical port or GE optical port on the OptiX RTN 980. The connector
at the other end of the fiber jumper depends on the type of the optical port on the equipment to
be connected.
5.6 E1 Cables
E1 cables are available in two categories: E1 cable (Anea 96) connected to the external equipment
and E1 cable connected to the E1 panel.
5.7 Orderwire Cable
An orderwire cable connects an orderwire phone to the equipment. Both ends of the orderwire
cable are terminated with an RJ11 connector. The other end of the orderwire cable is connected
to the port of the orderwire phone.
5.8 Network Cable

5 Cables IDU Hardware Description
A network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cable are
terminated with an RJ45 connector.

5.1 Power Cable

A power cable connects the PIU board in the IDU to a power supply device (for example, a PDU
on top of the cabinet) for access of the -48 V power to the IDU.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-1 Power cable
Table 5-1 Power cable specifications

Model Cable Terminal
6 mm2 Power cable, 450 V/750 Naked crimping terminal, OT, 6 mm2, M6, tin
power cable V, H07Z-K UL3386, 6 plating, 12-10 AWG, yellow
and terminal mm2, blue/black, low
smoke zero Halogen
cable
10 mm2 Power cable, 450 V/750 Naked crimping terminal, OT, 10 mm2, M6, tin
power cable V, H07Z-K UL3386, 10 plating, naked ring terminal
and terminal mm2, blue/black, low
smoke zero Halogen
cable
NOTE
For the OptiX RTN 980, power cables with a 6 mm2 cross-sectional area can extend for a maximum distance
of 10 m, and power cables with a 10 mm2 cross-sectional area can extend for a maximum distance of 15 m.

5.2 PGND Cable

PGND cables are available in two categories: IDU PGND cables and E1 panel PGND cables.
5.2.1 IDU PGND Cable

An IDU PGND cable connects the left ground point of the IDU to the ground point of external
equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the IDU and external equipment
share the same ground.
5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable
An E1 panel PGND cable connects the right ground nut of the E1 panel to the ground point of
external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the E1 panel and
external equipment share the same ground.
5.2.1 IDU PGND Cable

An IDU PGND cable connects the left ground point of the IDU to the ground point of external
equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the IDU and external equipment
share the same ground.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-2 IDU PGND cable

Main label
1 Cable tie H.S.tube
1. Bare crimping terminal, OT 2. Bare crimping terminal, OT
Pin Assignments
None.

5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable

An E1 panel PGND cable connects the right ground nut of the E1 panel to the ground point of
external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the E1 panel and
external equipment share the same ground.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-3 E1 panel PGND cable

Main label
Bare crimping terminal, OT
Pin Assignments
None.
5.3 IF Jumper
An IF jumper connects the IDU to an IF cable. The IF jumper works with the IF cable to transmit
IF signals and O&M signals in addition to supplying -48 V power between the ODU and the
IDU.
An IF jumper is a 2 m RG-223 cable. One end of the IF jumper has a type-N connector that is
connected to the IF cable. The other end of the IF jumper has a TNC connector that is connected
to the IF board.
NOTE
l A 5D IF cable is directly connected to the IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required.

l If an RG-8U or 1/2-inch IF cable is used, an IF jumper is required to connect the RG-8U or 1/2-inch
IF cable to the IF board.

Cable Diagram
Figure 5-4 IF jumper

1
H.S.tube 2 PCS 2
L = 3 cm
2000 mm
1. RF coaxial cable connector, TNC, male 2. RF coaxial cable connector, type-N, female
Pin Assignments
None.
5.4 XPIC Cable

An XPIC cable transmits reference IF signals between the two XPIC boards in an XPIC
workgroup to implement the XPIC function.
An XPIC cable is an RG316 cable that has SMA connectors at both ends. One end of the XPIC
cable is connected to the X-IN port of one XPIC board in an XPIC workgroup, and the other
end of the XPIC cable is connected to the X-OUT port of the other XPIC board in the same
XPIC work group.
When the XPIC function is disabled for XPIC boards, an XPIC cable is used to connect the X-
IN port to the X-OUT port on the same XPIC board to loop back signals.
XPIC cables are available in the following types:
l XPIC cables with angle connectors: These XPIC cables are long and used to connect two
XPIC boards in the horizontal direction, for example, XPIC boards in slots 3 and 4.
l XPIC cables with straight connectors: These XPIC cables are short and used to connect
two XPIC boards in the vertical direction, for example, IFX2 boards in slots 3 and 5. These
XPIC cables are also used to connect the X-IN port to the X-OUT port on the same XPIC
board to loop back signals.

Cable Diagram
Figure 5-5 XPIC cable

1
1
L1
2
2
L2
1. Coaxial cable connector, SMA, angle, male 2. Coaxial cable connector, SMA, straight, male
Pin Assignments
None.
5.5 Fiber Jumper

A fiber jumper transmits optical signals. One end of the fiber jumper has an LC/PC connector
that is connected to an SDH optical port or GE optical port on the OptiX RTN 980. The connector
at the other end of the fiber jumper depends on the type of the optical port on the equipment to
be connected.
Types of Fiber Jumpers
Table 5-2 Types of fiber jumpers
Connector 1 Connector 2 Cable
LC/PC FC/PC 2 mm single-mode fiber
2 mm multi-mode fiber
LC/PC SC/PC 2 mm single-mode fiber

Connector 1 Connector 2 Cable
LC/PC LC/PC 2 mm single-mode fiber
NOTE
For the OptiX RTN 980, multi-mode fibers are required to connect to 1000BASE-SX GE optical ports.
Fiber Connectors
The following figures show three common types of fiber connectors, namely, LC/PC connector,
SC/PC connector, and FC/PC connector.
Figure 5-6 LC/PC connector

Figure 5-7 SC/PC connector
Figure 5-8 FC/PC connector
5.6 E1 Cables
E1 cables are available in two categories: E1 cable (Anea 96) connected to the external equipment
and E1 cable connected to the E1 panel.
5.6.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment

An E1 cable that is connected to the external equipment is used when the IDU needs to directly
receive E1 signals from or transmits E1 signals to external equipment.
5.6.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel

An E1 cable that is connected to the E1 panel is used when the E1 panel functions as a DDF.
One end of the E1 cable has an Anea 96 connector that is connected to an E1 port on the IDU.
The other end of the E1 cable has a DB37 connector that is connected to the E1 panel.
5.6.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment

An E1 cable that is connected to the external equipment is used when the IDU needs to directly
receive E1 signals from or transmits E1 signals to external equipment.
Each E1 cable that is connected to the external equipment can transmit a maximum of 16 E1
signals. There are two types of E1 cables that are connected to the external equipment: 75-ohm
coaxial cables and 120-ohm twisted pair cables.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-9 E1 cable connected to the external equipment
Main label
1
W
X1 A
ViewA Pos.96
Cable connector, Anea,
96-pin,female
Pos.1
1. Cable connector, Anea 96, female
NOTE
l A 120-ohm E1 cable and a 75-ohm E1 cable have the same appearance.

l The core diameter of a 75-ohm E1 cable is 1.6 mm. Therefore, use a crimping tool with an opening of
2.5 mm (0.098-inch) to attach the end of the 75-ohm E1 cable on the DDF frame with a 75-1-1 coaxial
connector.

Pin Assignments
Table 5-3 Pin assignments for a 75-ohm E1 cable

Pin W Remark Pin W Remark
s s
Core Serial Core Serial
No. No.
1 Tip 1 R0 25 Tip 2 T0
2 Ring 26 Ring
3 Tip 3 R1 27 Tip 4 T1
4 Ring 28 Ring
5 Tip 5 R2 29 Tip 6 T2
6 Ring 30 Ring
7 Tip 7 R3 31 Tip 8 T3
8 Ring 32 Ring
9 Tip 9 R4 33 Tip 10 T4
10 Ring 34 Ring
11 Tip 11 R5 35 Tip 12 T5
12 Ring 36 Ring
13 Tip 13 R6 37 Tip 14 T6
14 Ring 38 Ring
15 Tip 15 R7 39 Tip 16 T7
16 Ring 40 Ring
18 Ring 17 R8 42 Ring 18 T8
17 Tip 41 Tip
20 Ring 19 R9 44 Ring 20 T9
19 Tip 43 Tip
22 Ring 21 R10 46 Ring 22 T10
21 Tip 45 Tip
24 Ring 23 R11 48 Ring 24 T11
23 Tip 47 Tip
50 Ring 25 R12 74 Ring 26 T12
49 Tip 73 Tip

Pin W Remark Pin W Remark

s s
Core Serial Core Serial
No. No.
52 Ring 27 R13 76 Ring 28 T13
51 Tip 75 Tip
54 Ring 29 R14 78 Ring 30 T14
53 Tip 75 Tip
56 Ring 31 R15 80 Ring 32 T15
55 Tip 79 Tip
Shell Braid Shell Braid
Table 5-4 Pin assignments for a 120-ohm E1 cable

Pin W Rema Tape Pin W Rema Tape
rks Color rks Color
Color Relati Color Relati
of the onshi of the onshi
Core p Core p
1 White Twiste R0 Blue 25 White Twiste T0 Blue

d pair d pair
2 Blue 26 Orang
e
3 White Twiste R1 27 White Twiste T1

d pair d pair
4 Green 28 Brown
5 White Twiste R2 29 Red Twiste T2

d pair d pair
6 Grey 30 Blue
7 Red Twiste R3 31 Red Twiste T3

d pair d pair
8 Orang 32 Green
e

d pair d pair
10 Brown 34 Grey
11 Black Twiste R5 35 Black Twiste T5

d pair d pair
12 Blue 36 Orang
e

d pair d pair
14 Green 38 Brown

Pin W Rema Tape Pin W Rema Tape

rks Color rks Color
Color Relati Color Relati
of the onshi of the onshi
Core p Core p
15 Black Twiste R7 39 Yello Twiste T7

d pair w d pair
16 Grey 40 Blue
17 White Twiste R8 Orang 41 White Twiste T8 Orang

d pair e d pair e
18 Blue 42 Orang
e
19 White Twiste R9 43 White Twiste T9

d pair d pair
20 Green 44 Brown
21 White Twiste R10 45 Red Twiste T10

d pair d pair
22 Grey 46 Blue

d pair d pair
24 Orang 48 Green
e

d pair d pair
50 Brown 74 Grey

d pair d pair
52 Blue 76 Orang
e

d pair d pair
54 Green 78 Brown
55 Black Twiste R15 79 Yello Twiste T15

d pair w d pair
56 Grey 80 Blue
5.6.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel

An E1 cable that is connected to the E1 panel is used when the E1 panel functions as a DDF.
One end of the E1 cable has an Anea 96 connector that is connected to an E1 port on the IDU.
The other end of the E1 cable has a DB37 connector that is connected to the E1 panel.
Each E1 cable can transmit 16 E1 signals. The port impedance of the E1 cable is 75 ohms.

Cable Diagram
Figure 5-10 E1 cable connected to the E1 panel
X1: Cable connector, Anea 96, female X2/X3: Cable connector, type D, 37 male
Label 1: "CHAN 0-7" Label 2: "CHAN 8-15"
Pin Assignments
Table 5-5 Pin assignments for the E1 cable terminated with an Anea 96 connector and a DB37
connector
Wire Connecto Connecto Remarks Connecto Connecto Remarks
r X1 r X2/X3 r X1 r X2/X3
W1 X1.2 X2.20 R0 X1.10 X2.36 R4
X1.1 X2.2 X1.9 X2.17
X1.26 X2.21 T0 X1.34 X2.35 T4
X1.25 X2.3 X1.33 X2.16
X1.4 X2.22 R1 X1.12 X2.34 R5
X1.3 X2.4 X1.11 X2.15
X1.28 X2.23 T1 X1.36 X2.33 T5
X1.27 X2.5 X1.35 X2.14
X1.6 X2.24 R2 X1.14 X2.32 R6

Wire Connecto Connecto Remarks Connecto Connecto Remarks

r X1 r X2/X3 r X1 r X2/X3
X1.5 X2.6 X1.13 X2.13
X1.30 X2.25 T2 X1.38 X2.31 T6
X1.29 X2.7 X1.37 X2.12
X1.8 X2.26 R3 X1.16 X2.30 R7
X1.7 X2.8 X1.15 X2.11
X1.32 X2.27 T3 X1.40 X2.29 T7
X1.31 X2.9 X1.39 X2.10
W2 X1.18 X3.20 R8 X1.50 X3.36 R12
X1.17 X3.2 X1.49 X3.17
X1.42 X3.21 T8 X1.74 X3.35 T12
X1.41 X3.3 X1.73 X3.16
X1.20 X3.22 R9 X1.52 X3.34 R13
X1.19 X3.4 X1.51 X3.15
X1.44 X3.23 T9 X1.76 X3.33 T13
X1.43 X3.5 X1.75 X3.14
X1.22 X3.24 R10 X1.54 X3.32 R14
X1.21 X3.6 X1.53 X3.13
X1.46 X3.25 T10 X1.78 X3.31 T14
X1.45 X3.7 X1.77 X3.12
X1.24 X3.26 R11 X1.56 X3.30 R15
X1.23 X3.8 X1.55 X3.11
X1.48 X3.27 T11 X1.80 X3.29 T15
X1.47 X3.9 X1.79 X3.10
5.7 Orderwire Cable

An orderwire cable connects an orderwire phone to the equipment. Both ends of the orderwire
cable are terminated with an RJ11 connector. The other end of the orderwire cable is connected
to the port of the orderwire phone.

Cable Diagram
Figure 5-11 Orderwire cable

1 Main label
6 6
1 1
X1 X2
1. Orderwire port, RJ11 connector
Pin Assignments
Table 5-6 Pin assignments for the orderwire cable
Connector X1 Connector X2 Function
X1.3 X2.3 Tip
X1.4 X2.4 Ring
5.8 Network Cable

A network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cable are
terminated with an RJ45 connector.
Two types of interfaces use RJ45 connectors, which are medium dependent interfaces (MDIs)
and MDI-Xs. MDIs are used by terminal equipment, for example, network card. The pin
assignments for MDIs are provided in Table 5-7. MDI-Xs are used by network equipment. The
pin assignments for MDI-Xs are provided in Table 5-8.
Table 5-7 Pin assignments for MDIs

(+)

(-)

(+)


(+)

(-)

(-)

(+)

(-)
Table 5-8 Pin assignments for MDI-Xs


(+)

(-)

(+)

(+)

(-)

(-)

(+)

(-)
Straight-through cables are used between MDIs and MDI-Xs, and crossover cables are used
between MDIs or between MDI-Xs. The only difference between straight-through cables and
crossover cables is with regard to the pin assignment.
The NMS/COM port, NE port, and Ethernet electrical service ports of the OptiX RTN 980
support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MD/MDI-X modes. Straight-through cables and crossover

cables can be used to connect the NMS/COM port, EXT port, and Ethernet electrical service
ports to MDIs or MDI-Xs.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-12 Network cable

1
Label 1 Main label Label 2
8 8
1 1
1. Network port connector, RJ45
Pin Assignments
Table 5-9 Pin assignments for the straight-through cable
Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relation
X1.1 X2.1 White/Orange Twisted pair
X1.2 X2.2 Orange
X1.3 X2.3 White/Green Twisted pair
X1.6 X2.6 Green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair
X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue
X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown Twisted pair
X1.8 X2.8 Brown
Table 5-10 Pin assignments for the crossover cable
X1.6 X2.2 Orange Twisted pair
X1.3 X2.1 White/Orange
X1.1 X2.3 White/Green Twisted pair
X1.2 X2.6 Green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair

X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue
X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown Twisted pair
X1.8 X2.8 Brown

IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
A Parameters Description
This topic describes the parameters used in this document.
A.1 Parameters for Network Management

This topic describes the parameters that are related to network management.
A.2 Radio Link Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio links.
A.3 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to multiplex section protection (MSP).
A.4 SDH/PDH Service Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to SDH/PDH services.
A.5 Parameters for Board Interfaces
This topic describes the parameters that are related to board interfaces.
A.6 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Featureson the Packet Plane
This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet services and Ethernet featureson the packet
plane, including service parameters, protocol parameters, OAM parameters, Ethernet port
parameters, and QoS parameters.
A.7 RMON Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON performances.
A.8 Parameters for MPLS/PWE3 Services
This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS/PWE3 services.
A.9 Clock Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to clocks.
A.10 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the orderwire and auxiliary interfaces.
Issue 01 (2010-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-1

A Parameters Description IDU Hardware Description
A.1 Parameters for Network Management

This topic describes the parameters that are related to network management.
A.1.1 Parameters for NE Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing network elements (NEs).
A.1.2 Parameters for Communications Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for communications management.
A.1.3 Parameters for Network Security Management
This topic describes the parameters that are related to network security management.
A.1.1 Parameters for NE Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing network elements (NEs).
Parameter Description: NE Searching

This topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for NEs.
Navigation Path
Choose File > Discovery > NE from the Main Menu.
A-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 01 (2010-12-30)

Parameters for the Search Field

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Address Type IP Address of GNE IP Address Range of GNE l If the OSI protocol is
NSAP Address used on the DCN, you
can search for an NE
IP Address Range of GNE based on NSAP
Address only.
l If the IP protocol is
used on the DCN, you
can search for an NE
based on IP Address
of GNE or IP Address
Range of GNE.
l To search for all the
NEs that communicate
with the gateway NE,
select IP Address
Range of GNE.
l To select the gateway
NE only, select IP
Address of GNE.
NOTE
If Address Type is set to IP
Address of GNE or IP
Address Range of GNE,
and if the U2000 (server)
and the gateway NE are
located in different network
segments, ensure that the
U2000 and relevant routers
are configured with the IP
routes for the network
segment in which the
U2000 and gateway NE are
located.
If Address Type is set to
NSAP Address, ensure that
the OSI protocol stack is
installed.

Search Address - - l If Address Type is set

to IP Address of
GNE, enter the IP
address of the gateway
NE, such as 129.9.x.x.
l If Address Type is set
to IP Address Range
of GNE, enter the
number of the IP
network segment in
which the gateway NE
is located, such as
129.9.255.255.
l If Address Type is set
to NSAP Address,
enter the NSAP
address of the gateway
NE.
User Name - - This parameter specifies

the user name of the
gateway NE.
Password - - This parameter specifies

the password of the
gateway NE.

Parameter for Searching for NEs

Create NE after search Selected Deselected l To create NEs in

Deselected batches, it is
recommended that you
select Create NE
after search. The NEs
are automatically
created after they are
found.
l After Create NE after
search is selected,
enter NE User and
Password that are
used for creating an
NE.
NOTE
If only Create NE after
search is selected, Search
for NE is selected
automatically.
NE User - - l This parameter

specifies the user name
to be entered when an
NE is created.
l This parameter is valid
only when Create NE
after search is
selected.
Password - - l This parameter

specifies the password
NE is created.
only when Create NE
after search is
selected.

Upload after create Selected Deselected l This parameter

Deselected specifies whether to
automatically upload
the NE data after the
NE is found and
created.
l If only Upload after
create is selected,
Search for NE and
Create NE after
search are selected
automatically.
Parameter for the Found NEs

NE ID - - This parameter indicates

the ID of the found NE,
which consists of
extended ID and NE ID.
For example, in the case of
NE9-25, the value 9
indicates the extended ID,
and the value 25 indicates
the NE ID.
GNE Address - - This parameter indicates

the address of the gateway
NE that is connected to the
found NE.
GNE ID - - This parameter indicates

the ID of the gateway NE
that is connected to the
found NE.
Created As GNE Yes Yes l This parameter

No specifies the password
NE is created.
only when Create NE
after search is
selected.

Connection Mode Common Common The communication

Security SSL between the client and the
server is encrypted if this
parameter is set to
Security SSL.
Port - 1400 This parameter specifies

the communication port.
NE Status Created - This parameter indicates

Uncreated whether the found NE is
created.
Parameter Description: NE Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are related to NE creation.
Navigation Path
1. In the Physical ViewPhysical Root, right-click New > NE.
2. Choose RTN Series > OptiX RTN 980 from the Object Tree.
Parameters on the Main Interface

Type - - This parameter indicates

the type of the NE to be
created.
ID 1 to 49135 - l The ID refers to the

basic ID. If the
extended ID is not
used, the basic ID of an
NE must be unique on
the networks that are
managed by the same
NMS.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
NOTE
The NE ID consisting of the
basic ID and extended ID
identifies an NE on the
NMS.

Extended ID 1 to 254 9 If the number of existing

NEs does not exceed the
range represented by the
basic ID, do not change
the extended ID.
Name - - l This parameter

specifies the name of
the NE.
l After you specifies the
name of the NE, the
name is displayed
under the icon of the
NE.
Remarks - - This parameter specifies

the remarks of the NE.
Gateway Type Non-Gateway Non-Gateway l This parameter is set to

Gateway Gateway if the new
NE is a gateway NE.
l This parameter is set to
Non-Gateway if the
new NE is a non-
gateway NE.
according to the DCN
planning if the new NE
can function as a
gateway NE or a non-
gateway NE.
Affiliated Gateway - - This parameter indicates

the gateway NE of the new
NE when Gateway Type
is set to Non-Gateway.
Affiliated Gateway IP IP l This parameter needs

Protocol OSI to be set when
Gateway Type is set
to Gateway.
l When the OSI over
DCC solution is used,
this parameter is set to
OSI.
l In other cases, this
parameter is set to IP.

IP Address - - This parameter indicates

the IP address of the new
NE. This parameter needs
to be set when Affiliated
Gateway Protocol is set
to IP.
Connection Mode Common Common The communication

Security SSL between the client and the
server is encrypted if this
parameter is set to
Security SSL.
Port - 1400 This parameter specifies

the communication port.
NE User - - This parameter specifies

the user name to be
entered when an NE is
created.
Password - - This parameter specifies

the password to be entered
when an NE is created.
NSAP Address - - This parameter indicates

the NSAP address of the
new NE. This parameter
needs to be set when
Affiliated Gateway
Protocol is set to OSI.
You need to set the area ID
only, and the other parts
are automatically
generated by the NE.
Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDs

This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs.
Navigation Path
1. In the Main Topology, right-click the NE whose ID needs to be modified.
2. Choose Object Attributes.
3. Click Modify NE ID.

Parameters for Changing NE IDs

New ID - - l The new ID refers to

the basic ID. If the
extended ID is not
used, the basic ID of an
NE must be unique on
the networks that are
managed by the same
NMS.
according to the
NOTE
The NE ID consisting of the
basic ID and extended ID
identifies an NE on the
NMS.
New Extended ID 1 to 254 9 If the number of existing

NEs does not exceed the
range represented by the
basic ID, do not change
the extended ID.
Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization

This topic describes the parameters that are used for synchronizing the time of NEs.
Navigation Path
1. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from
the Main Menu.
2. Click the NE Time Synchronization tab.
Parameters for NE Time Synchronization

NE Name - - This parameter indicates

the name of the NE.
NE ID - - This parameter indicates

the ID of the NE.

Synchronous Mode Standard NTP Null l If this parameter is set

NM to NM, the NE
synchronizes the time
Null of the NMS server.
l If this parameter is set
to Standard NTP, the
NE synchronizes the
Network Time
Protocol (NTP) server
through the standard
NTP.
Standard NTP Enabled Disabled This parameter is valid

Authentication Disabled only when Synchronous
Mode is set to Standard
NTP.
Parameters for the Standard NTP Server

Standard NTP Server NE ID NE ID l If the NE functions as

Identifier IP the gateway NE, this
l If the NE functions as
a non-gateway NE and
communicates with
the gateway NE
through the HWECC
protocol, this
parameter is set to NE
ID.
a non-gateway NE and
communicates with
the gateway NE
through the IP
protocol, this

Standard NTP Server - - l If the NE functions as

the gateway NE, this
parameter is set to the
IP address of the
external NTP server.
a non-gateway NE,
the ID or IP address of
the gateway NE.
Standard NTP Server 0 to 1024 0 l If the NTP server does

Key not need to
authenticated, this
parameter is set to the
value "0".
l If the NTP server
needs to be
authenticated, the
authentication is
performed according
to the allocated key of
the NTP server. In this
case, the NE
authenticates the NTP
server based on the key
and the corresponding
password (specified in
the management of the
standard NTP key).
Parameters for Setting Automatic Synchronization

Synchronization - - l This parameter

Starting Time specifies the start time
of the synchronization
period. After this
parameter is specified,
the NMS and the NE
synchronize the time
once at the intervals of
Synchronization
Period(days).
l It is recommended that
you use the default
value.

DST Selected Deselected l This parameter

Deselected indicates whether
Synchronization
Starting Time is the
daylight saving time.
according to the actual
situation.
Synchronization Period 1 to 300 1 l This parameter

(days) indicates the period of
synchronizing the time
of the NE with the time
of the NMS.
you use the default
value.
Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE Time

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for localization management of the NE
time.
Navigation Path
1. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Localization
Management from the Main Menu.
2. Select the NE for time localization management from the Object Tree, and then click
Parameters for Localization Management of the NE Time

NE - - This parameter indicates the name of the

NE.
TimeZone - - This parameter indicates the time zone.
DST - - This parameter indicates whether DST is

enabled.

Parameters for Time Zone

Time Zone - - l After the time zone is changed, the

current time of the NE is changed
accordingly.
l This parameter is set according to the
place where the NE is located.
DST Selected Deselected l The parameters related to daylight

Deselected saving time can be valid only when this
parameter is selected.
situation whether daylight saving time is
used in the place where the NE is located.
Offset 1 to 120 - This parameter specifies the offset value of

Unit: minute(s) the daylight saving time.
Start Rule WEEK WEEK This parameter specifies the method of

DATE adjusting the daylight saving time.
Start Time - - This parameter specifies the start daylight

saving time.
End Rule WEEK WEEK This parameter specifies the method of

DATE adjusting the daylight saving time.
End Time - - This parameter specifies the end daylight

saving time.
Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the standard NTP key.
Navigation Path
1. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from
the Main Menu.
2. Click the Standard NTP Key Management tab.


Key 1 to 1024 - l This parameter

indicates the key for
NTP authentication.
according to the
requirements of the
Password - - l This parameter

indicates the password
that corresponds to
Key.
according to the
requirements of the
Trusted Yes Yes l When this parameter is

No set to No, the key
verification is not
trusted. After
receiving the key, the
NE rejects the clock
synchronization
service.
l When this parameter is
set to Yes, the key
verification is trusted.
After receiving the
key, the NE provides
the clock
synchronization
service.
l After receiving an
unknown or incorrect
key, the NE rejects the
clock synchronization
service. Hence, it is
set a trusted key only.
Parameter Description: License Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the license.

Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > License
Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the License Management tab.
Parameters for Managing Licenses

Board - - This parameter displays the boards that need

to be supported by licenses.
File Type - - This parameter displays the license type

corresponding to each board.
Capacity - - This parameter displays the capacity of each

board.
Load Yes - This parameter displays whether the

No corresponding license file is loaded to each
board.
Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions of NEs

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for automatically disabling the functions
of an NE.
Navigation Path
1. On the Main Topology, choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Automatic
Disabling of NE Function.
2. Select the NE whose functions need to be automatically disabled from the Object Tree, and
then click .
Parameters for Automatically Disabling the Functions of NEs

NE Name - - This parameter indicates the name of the

NE.
NE Type OptiX RTN 980 - This parameter indicates the type of the NE.
Operation Type - - This parameter indicates the type of the

operation, such as loopback, and shutdown
of the laser.
Auto Disabling Disabled Enabled This parameter specifies whether to

Enabled automatically disable the operations such as
loopback, and shutdown of the laser.

Auto Disabling 1 to 2880 5 This parameter specifies the time of

Time(min) automatically disabling the operations such
as loopback, and shutdown of the laser.
A.1.2 Parameters for Communications Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for communications management.
Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting

This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE communication setting.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication >
Communication Parameters from the Function Tree.
Parameters for NE Communication Setting

IP Address - Before delivery, the In the HWECC solution, an IP address is set

IP address of the NE according to the following rules:
is set to 129.9.0.x. l The IP address, subnet mask, and default
The letter x indicates gateway of the gateway NE should meet
the basic ID. the planning requirements of the
external DCN.
Gateway IP - 0.0.0.0
Address l If an NE uses the extended ECC, the IP
address must be in the same network
Subnet Mask - 255.255.0.0 segment.
l The IP address of other NEs should be
set according to the NE ID. In this case,
the IP address of an NE should be set in
the format of 0x81000000+ID. That is,
if the ID is 0x090001, the IP address
should be set to 129.9.0.1.
Extended ID 1 to 254 9 l Do not change the extended ID when the

number of actual NEs does not exceed
the range permitted by the basic NE ID.
l It is recommended that this parameter
takes the default value.

Connection Mode Common + Security Common + Security l Specifies the connection mode that the
SSL SSL gateway NE allows the NMS to use for
Common connecting to the gateway NE.
Security SSL l If the gateway NE has no special
security requirement for connection to
the NMS, Connection Mode can be set
to Common.
l If the gateway NE requests secure
connection to the NMS for preventing
information interception and cracking,
Connection Mode needs to be set to
Security SSL.
l If NE communication security level
needs to be the same as NMS
communication security level,
Connection Mode needs to be set to
Common + Security SSL.
l The default parameter value is
recommended unless the gateway NE
requires that the NMS use the SSL
connection mode.
l The parameter value takes effect only
when it is set for a gateway NE and the
gateway NE is connected to the NMS by
means of the IP protocol.
Related Concepts
Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate Configuration

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the DCC rate.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCC
2. Click the DCC Rate Configuration tab.

Parameters for DCC Rate Configuration

Port - - This parameter indicates the port that is

connected to the DCC channel.
NOTE
On the NMS interface, the first interface on the
system control, switching, and clock board (like )
corresponds to its external clock interface.
Enabled/Disabled Enabled Enabled It is recommended that you use the default

Disabled value, except for the following cases:
l If the port is connected to the other ECC
subnet, Enabled/Disabled is set to
Disabled.
l If the port is connected to a third-party
network and does not exchange the
network management information with
other ports, Enabled/Disabled is set to
Disabled.
Channel D1-D3 D1-D1 (for the PDH It is recommended that you use the default
D4-D12 radio whose value, except for the following cases:
transmission l If the IP over DCC or OSI over DCC
D1-D12 capacity is less than solution is adopted, Channel Type for
D1-D1 16xE1) the SDH line ports is set to a value that
D1-D3 (for other is the same as the value for third-party
cases) network.
l If the DCC transparent transmission
solution is adopted, the value of
Channel Type for the SDH line ports
should not conflict with the value that is
set for the third-party network.
DCC Resources - - This parameter indicates the DCC

resources.
Communication - - This parameter indicates the

Status communication status.
Protocol Type HWECC HWECC It is recommended that you use the default
TCP/IP value, except for the following cases:
OSI l If the IP over DCC solution is adopted,
Protocol Type is set to TCP/IP.
l If the OSI over DCC solution is adopted,
Protocol Type is set to OSI.
LAPD Role User User l This parameter is valid only when

Network Protocol Type is set to OSI.
l In the case of a DCC channel, LAPD
Role must be set to User for one end and
must be set to Network for the other end.

LAPD MTU - - Displays the maximum LAPD packet size.
Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent Transmission

Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for DCC transparent transmission management.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCC
2. Click the DCC Transparent Transmission Management tab.
3. Click Create.
Parameters for DCC Transparent Transmission Management

Source Timeslot/ - - This parameter specifies the source timeslot

Porta or port.
Transparent D1 - l Only one overhead byte can be selected

Transmission of D2 each time.
Overhead Bytes at l X1, X2, X3, and X4 indicate the
Source Port D3
customized overhead bytes that are used
D4 for transmitting asynchronous data
D5 services.
D6 l An overhead byte cannot be a byte that
D7 is used. For example, an overhead byte
cannot be a byte in the used DCC
D8
channel.
D9
D10
D11
D12
E1
E2
F1
K1
K2
X1
X2
X3
X4

Sink Timeslot/ - - This parameter specifies the sink timeslot or

Porta port.
Transparent D1 - l Only one overhead byte can be selected

Transmission of D2 each time.
Overhead Bytes at l An overhead byte cannot be a byte that
Sink Port D3
is used. For example, an overhead byte
D4 cannot be a byte in the used DCC
D5 channel.
D6 l Generally, Transparent Transmission
D7 of Overhead Bytes at Sink Port can be
set to a value that is the same as or
D8
different from the value in the case of
D9 Transparent Transmission of
D10 Overhead Bytes at Source Port.
D11
D12
E1
E2
F1
K1
K2
X1
X2
X3
X4
NOTE
a. A bidirectional cross-connection is set up between the source port and the sink port. Hence, a port functions
the same regardless of the source port or sink port.
Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECC

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the extended ECCs of Ethernet ports.
Navigation Path
Click an NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > ECC Management from the
Function Tree.

Parameters for the ECC Extended Mode

ECC Extended Auto mode Auto mode It is recommended that you use the default
Mode Specified mode value.
Parameters for Setting the Server

IP - - This parameter indicates the IP address of

the server.
Port 1601 to 1699 0 l This parameter is valid only when ECC

Extended Mode is set to Specified
mode.
l This parameter can be set only when the
NE functions as the server of the
extended ECC. In normal cases, the NE
that is close to the NMS functions as the
server.
l This parameter can be set to any value
from 1601 to 1699.
Parameters for Setting the Client

Opposite IP - 0.0.0.0 l This parameter is valid only when ECC

Extended Mode is set to Specified
Port 1601 to 1699 0 mode.
l This parameter can be set only when the
NE functions as the client of the
extended ECC. Except for the NE that
functions as the server, all other NEs that
use the extended ECC can function as the
client.
l Opposite IP and Port are respectively
set to the IP address of the server NE and
the specified port number.
Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE ECC link management.

Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > NE ECC
Link Management from the Function Tree.
Parameter for NE ECC Link Management

Destination NE - - This parameter specifies the sink NE of the

ECC connection.
Transfer NE - - This parameter specifies the next transfer

NE and the direction of the ECC route.
Distance 0 to 64 - l This parameter specifies the number of

NEs (excluding the source NE and sink
NE) through which the ECC route
passes, namely, the number of ECC
packet forwarding attempts. The value
can be set to a value that is greater than
the number of actual ECC packet
forwarding attempts. If the value is set to
a value that is less than the number of
actual ECC packet forwarding attempts,
however, the destination NE fails to be
accessed.
l If the value is set to 0, it indicates that the
source NE is adjacent to the destination
NE.
Level 4 - l This parameter indicates that multiple

5 ECC routes from the source NE to the
destination NE may be available. An
ECC route of a higher priority is selected
to transmit the packets to the destination
NE.
l If the ECC route is generated
automatically, the priority is 4.
l If the ECC route is added manually, the
priority is 5.
Mode Manual - This parameter indicates the ECC routing

Automatic mode.
SCC No. - - This parameter specifies the physical port

through which the ECC route passes. The
value of this parameter is automatically
assigned the NE.

Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for IP route management.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP
Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the IP Route Management tab.
Parameters for IP Route Management

Destination - - This parameter indicates the destination

Address address of the packets. This parameter can
be set to a valid IP address of class A, B, or
C only, but cannot be set to the IP address
of the local host or the loopback address
with the 127 field.
Subnet Mask - - This parameter indicates the subnet mask of

the destination address of the packets.
Gateway - - This parameter indicates the IP address of

the gateway on the subnetwork where the
NE is located, namely, the IP address of the
next hop of the packets.
Protocol DIRECT - l DIRECT: indicates the route between

STATIC the local NE and an adjacent NE.
OSPF l STATIC: indicates the route that is
created manually.
RIP
l OSPF: indicates the route between the
OSPF_ASE local NE and a non-adjacent NE.
OSPF_NSSA l RIP: indicates the route that is
discovered by the routing information
protocol.
l OSPF_ASE: indicates the route whose
Destination Address is beyond the
OSPF domain.
l OSPF_NSSA: indicates the route whose
Destination Address is in a not so
stubby area (NSSA).
l A route can be deleted in the case of
STATIC only, but cannot be edited in
the other cases.
l Compared with a dynamic route, a static
route has a higher priority. If any conflict
occurs, the static route is preferred.

Interface - - This parameter indicates the interface that is

used on the route. Interface is a concept
specified in the TCP/IP protocol stack. In
the TCP/IP protocol stack, you can create
multiple types of interface, such as a
loopback interface (namely, the interface
whose IP address is 127.0.0.1), an Ethernet
interface, and PPP interface. Each interface
must have a unique interface name.
Metric 0 to 65535 - This parameter indicates the maximum

number of routers through which the
packets are transmitted. Metric is used to
indicate the overhead bytes that are
transmitted to the destination address. The
smaller the value, the less the overhead
bytes. If multiple routes can reach the same
destination address, a route whose overhead
is less is preferred to transmit the packets.
Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management

Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for new static IP routes.
Navigation Path
2. Click the IP Route Management tab.
3. Click New.
Parameters for Creating IP Routes

Destination - - This parameter specifies the destination

Address address of the packets. This parameter can
be set to a valid IP address of class A, B, or
C only, but cannot be set to the IP address
of the local host or the loopback address
with the 127 field.
Subnet Mask - - This parameter indicates the subnet mask of

the destination address of the packets.

Gateway - - This parameter specifies the IP address of

the gateway on the subnetwork where the
NE is located, namely, the IP address of the
next hop of the packets.
Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF Parameter Settings

This topic describes the parameters that are used for OSPF settings.
Navigation Path
2. Click the OSPF Parameter Settings tab.
OSPF Parameters
Area - 0.0.0.0 l The OSPF protocol supports the division

of NEs into multiple areas. Only the NEs
in the same area can transmit the OSPF
packets to each other to generate the
route.
l When setting the area for the NEs, you
need to set the NEs that run the OSPF
protocol to the same area.
DCC Hello Timer 1 to 255 10 l DCC Hello Timer(s) specifies the Hello
(s) packet timer at the DCC interface.
l The Hello packets are used for detecting
the neighbor router on the network that
is connected to the router. By
periodically transmitting the hello
packets, you can determine whether the
interface on the neighbor router is still in
the active status.
l DCC Hello Timer(s) determines the
interval for the hello packet timer to
transmit the hello packets.
l In the case of two interconnected NEs,
DCC Hello Timer(s) must be set to the
same value.

DCC Neighbor 1 to 65535 40 l DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) specifies

Dead Time(s) the dead time of a neighbor router at the
DCC interface.
l If the local router fails to receive the
hello packets from the connected
neighbor router within the time specified
in DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s), it
considers that the neighbor router is
unavailable.
l DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) should
be set to a value that is a minimum of
twice the value of DCC Hello Timer
(s).
l In the case of adjacent NEs, DCC
Neighbor Dead Time(s) must be set to
the same value. Otherwise, the OSPF
protocol fails to operate normally.
DCC 1 to 65535 5 DCC Retransmission Timer(s) specifies

Retransmission the interval for transmitting a request
Timer(s) through the DCC interface to retransmit the
link state advertisement (LSA) packets.
DCC Delay(s) 1 to 3600 1 l DCC Delay(s) specifies the delay time

to transmit the LSA packets through the
DCC interface.
l The LSA packets in the LSA database of
the local router are aged as the time
elapses, but are not aged when they are
being transmitted on the network.
Hence, before the LSA packets are
transmitted, you need to increase the age
of the LSA packets based on the value of
DCC Delay(s).

LAN Hello Timer 1 to 255 10 l DCC Hello Timer(s) specifies the hello
(s) packet timer at the LAN interfaces.
l The hello packets are used for detecting
the neighbor router on the network that
is connected to the router. By
periodically transmitting the hello
packets, you can determine whether the
interface on the neighbor router is still in
the active status.
l LAN Hello Timer(s) determines the
interval for the hello packet timer of the
NE to transmit the hello packets.
l In the case of two interconnected NEs,
LAN Hello Timer(s) must be set to the
same value.
LAN Neighbor 1 to 65535 40 l LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s) specifies

Dead Time(s) the dead time of a neighbor router at the
LAN interface.
l If the local router fails to receive the
hello packets from the connected
neighbor router within the time specified
in LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s), it
considers that the neighbor router is
unavailable.
l LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s) should be
set to a value that is a minimum of two
times the value of LAN Neighbor Dead
Time(s).
l In the case of adjacent NEs, DCC
Neighbor Dead Time(s) must be set to
the same value. Otherwise, the OSPF
protocol fails to operate normally.
LAN 1 to 65535 5 LAN Retransmission Timer(s) specifies

Retransmission the time for transmitting a request for
Timer(s) retransmission of the LSA packets through
the LAN interface.

LAN Delay(s) 1 to 3600 1 l LAN Delay(s) specifies the delay time

to transmit the LSA packets through the
LAN interface.
l The LSA packets in the LSA database of
the local router are aged as the time
elapses, but are not aged when they are
being transmitted on the network.
Hence, before the LSA packets are
transmitted, you need to increase the age
of the LSA packets based on the value of
LAN Delay(s).
OSPF Status Enabled Disabled l Specifies whether to enable the OSPF.

Disabled l Set this parameter as required.
STUB Area Enabled Disabled l Specifies whether to enable the STUB

Disabled Area.
l Set this parameter as required.
NSSA Area Enabled Disabled l Specifies whether to enable the NSSA

Disabled Area.
Direct route Enabled Disabled l Specifies whether to enable the Direct

Disabled route.
l Direct route: the route detected by the
link layer protocol.
Static route Enabled Disabled l Specifies whether to enable the Static

Disabled route.
l Static route: the route manually
configured by the network
administrator.
RIP route Enabled Disabled l Specifies whether to enable the RIP

Disabled route.
l RIP route: the route detected by the
routing protocol.
Opaque LSA of Enabled Disabled l Specifies whether to enable the Opaque

External Network Disabled LSA of External Network Port.
Port l Set this parameter as required.

LAN Interface Enabled Disabled l Specifies whether to enable the OSPF at

Disabled the Ethernet NM interface.
l If this parameter is set to Enabled, it
indicates that the Ethernet NM interface
is interconnected with other equipment.
Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARP

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the proxy ARP.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Proxy ARP tab.
Parameters for configuring the proxy ARP

Proxy ARP Disabled Disabled l The proxy ARP enables the NEs in the
Enabled same network segment but different
domains to communicate with each
other.
l To realize communication between such
NEs, the source NE sends the ARP
broadcast packet to address the route to
the destination NE. The NE with the
proxy ARP function enabled checks the
routing table after sensing the ARP
broadcast packet. If the routing table
contains the destination address that the
ARP broadcast packet looks for, the NE
returns an ARP spoofing packet, which
enables the NE that sends the ARP
broadcast packet to consider that the
MAC address of the NE that returns the
ARP spoofing packet is the MAC
address of the destination NE. In this
manner, the packet that is to be sent to
the destination NE is first sent to the NE
with the proxy ARP function enabled
and then forwarded to the destination
NE.

Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer Parameter

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the network layer of the OSI protocol
model.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > OSI
2. Click the Network Layer Parameters tab.
Network Layer Parameters


NE.
Configuration Role ES L1 l Configuration Role cannot be set to

L1 ES.
L2 l An NE whose Configuration Role is set
to L1 cannot function as a neighbor of an
NE in the other area. It uses a route in the
local area only and access the other area
by distributing the default route of the
nearest L2 NE.
l An NE whose Configuration Role is set
to L2 can function as a neighbor of an
NE in the other area and can use a route
in the backbone area. The backbone area
is a collection that is formed by
consecutive L2 NEs. That is, the L2 NE
of all the roles must be consecutive
(connected to each other).
Current Role - - This parameter indicates the current role.
Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing Table

This topic describes the parameters that are related to OSI routing tables.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Routing Table tab.

Parameters for Routing Tables

Port - - This parameter indicates the port used for

OSI communication.
Data Link Layer - - This parameter indicates the protocol that is

used at the data link layer.
Adjacency No. - - l This parameter specifies the identifier of

the adjacency that is set up by two NEs
through the OSI protocol. One adjacency
number corresponds to an OSI
adjacency.
l The value is dynamically allocated by
the NE.
Adjacency Type - - This parameter indicates the type of the

adjacency.
Adjacency State - - This parameter indicates the state of the

adjacency.
Peer End Area ID - - This parameter indicates the area ID that is

contained in the NSAP address of the
opposite NE.
Peer End System - - This parameter indicates the system ID of

ID the opposite NE. Generally, the system ID
is the MAC address.
Parameters for L1 and L2 Routing Tables

Destination Area - - This parameter indicates the area ID of the

ID destination NE.
Destination SYSID - - This parameter indicates the system ID of

the destination NE. Generally, the system
ID is the MAC address.
Metric - - This parameter indicates the number of hops

that reach the destination NE or destination
area.
Adjacency No.1 - - This parameter indicates the number of the

adjacent link that is connected to the
destination NE.
Adjacency No.2 - - This parameter indicates the number of the

adjacent link that is connected to the
destination NE.

Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Tunnel

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the OSI tunnels.
Navigation Path
2. Click the OSI Tunnel tab.
Parameters for OSI Tunnel Attributes

Remote IP Address - - This parameter indicates the IP address of

the opposite end of the OSI tunnel.
LAPD Actor User User l This parameter specifies the LAPD

Network actor.
l If the adjacent NEs run the OSI protocol,
they can perform the LAPD negotiation
only when the LAPD actor is set to
User at one end and is set to Network at
the other end.
Efficient LAPD - - This parameter indicates whether the

Enable current LAPD is enabled.
Configurable Enabled Enabled This parameter specifies whether the LAPD

LAPD Enable Disabled is enabled.
LAPD Parameters
Remote IP Address - - This parameter indicates the IP address of

the opposite end of the OSI tunnel.

L2 Wait Time to 1 to 20 1 l This parameter specifies L2 Wait Time

Retry(s) to Retry(s).
l L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) indicates the
interval for retransmitting packets at the
LAPD link layer.
l L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) needs to be
set according to the network situation. If
the network is in good situation, L2 Wait
Time to Retry(s) can be set to a smaller
value. Otherwise, it is recommended that
you set L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) to a
greater value.
l This parameter needs to be set according
to the planning information. In normal
cases, it is recommended that you use the
default value.
L2 Retry Times 2 to 6 3 l This parameter specifies L2 Retry

Times.
l L2 Retry Times indicates the maximum
number of packet retransmission
attempts at the LAPD link layer.
l L2 Retry Times needs to be set
according to the network situation. If the
network is in good situation, L2 Retry
Times can be set to a smaller value.
Otherwise, it is recommended that you
set L2 Retry Times to a greater value.
default value.

L3 Hello Timer(s) 1 to 100 3 l This parameter specifies L3 Hello

Timer(s).
l L3 Hello Timer(s) indicates the Hello
packet timer at the LAPD link network
layer. It is used for periodical
transmission of the Hello packets.
l The Hello timer determines the interval
for transmitting the Hello packets once.
L3 Hello Timer(s) needs to be set
network is in good situation, L3 Hello
Timer(s) can be set to a greater value.
set L3 Hello Timer(s) to a smaller value.
default value.
L3 ES Timer(s) 1 to 200 50 l This parameter specifies L3 ES Timer

(s).
l L3 ES Timer(s) indicates the ES
configuration timer at the LAPD link
network layer. It is used for setting the
time to transmit the configuration
information on the ES route.
l L3 ES Timer(s) needs to be set
network is in good situation, L3 ES
Timer(s) can be set to a greater value.
set L3 Hello Timer(s) to a smaller value.
default value.

L3 IS Timer(s) 1 to 200 10 l This parameter specifies L3 IS Timer

(s).
l L3 IS Timer(s) indicates the IS
configuration timer at the LAPD link
network layer. It is used for setting the
time to transmit the configuration
information through the L1/L2 router.
l L3 IS Timer(s) needs to be set according
to the network situation. If the network
is in good situation, L3 IS Timer(s) can
be set to a greater value. Otherwise, it is
recommended that you set L3 IS Timer
(s) to a smaller value.
default value.
L3 Hold Timer(s) 2 to 63 5 l This parameter specifies L3 Hold Timer

(s).
l L3 Hold Timer(s) indicates the hold
timer at the LAPD link network layer.
l L3 Hold Timer(s) needs to be set
network is in good situation, L3 Hold
Timer(s) can be set to a smaller value.
set L3 IS Timer(s) to a greater value.
default value.
COST 1 to 63 20 l This parameter specifies COST.

l COST indicates the overhead value of
the virtual LAPD that corresponds to the
OSI tunnel.
l The overhead value determines whether
this link is perverted. If the overhead
value is smaller, this link has a higher
priority to be selected.
l This parameter needs to set according to
the planning information.
Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for bandwidth management of the inband DCN.

Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCN
2. Click the Bandwidth Management tab.
Parameters for Bandwidth Management

Ethernet Board 2 to 4094 4094 l The equipment on the traditional DCN

VLAN ID can be connected to the NMS through the
SCC board, but the OptiX RTN 980 can
also be connected to the NMS through an
Ethernet interface. If an Ethernet port is
used to carry the network management
information, the NE differentiates the
network management information and
Ethernet service information according
to the VLAN ID.
l If the default VLAN ID of the inband
DCN conflicts with the VLAN ID in the
service, the VLAN ID of the inband DCN
can be changed manually. The same
VLAN ID must be, however, is used on
the network-wide inband DCN.
Bandwidth(Kbit/s) 64 to 1000 512 Specifies the bandwidth for inband DCN

messaging on the Ethernet link.
E1 Port - - The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this

Bandwidth(Kbit/s) parameter.
Tunnel Bandwidth - - The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this
(Kbit/s) parameter.
IF Port Bandwidth 64 to 1000 512 Specifies the bandwidth for inband DCN
(Kbit/s) messaging on the radio link.
Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting

This topic describes the parameters that are used for setting ports of the inband DCN.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCN
2. Click the Port Settings tab.

Parameters for Setting Ports

Port Name - - This parameter indicates the port name.
Enabled Status Enabled Enabled l Specifies the enabling status of the port.
Disabled l The network management information
can be transmitted over the inband DCN
when the DCN function is enabled for
the ports at both ends of a link.
Parameter Description: DCN Management_Protocol Setting

This topic describes the parameters that are used for setting a protocol of the inband DCN.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree, and then choose
Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Protocol Settings tab.
Parameters for Setting a Protocol

Port Name - - Displays the port name.
Protocol Type IP IP l If the values of Protocol Type are

HWECC different from each other, the equipment
at both ends cannot be interconnected
with each other. Therefore, Protocol
Type must be set to the same value for
the equipment at both ends of a link.
to the planning information. Generally,
it is recommended that you set this
parameter to IP.
Parameter Description: DCN Management_Access Control

This section describes the parameters for configuring access control.
Navigation Path
l In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose
Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree.
l Click the Access Control tab.

Parameters
Port Name - - Displays the Ethernet ports that support this

function.
Enabled Status Disabled Disabled l Specifies the enabling status of the port.
Enabled l If this parameter is set to Enabled, this
port can be used to support access of the
management information from the
NMS.
l If this parameter is set to Disabled, this
port cannot be used to support access of
the management information from the
NMS.
IP Address - 0.0.0.0 Specifies the IP address of the port.
Subnet Mask - 0.0.0.0 Specifies the submask of the port.
Parameter Description: Access Control

This topic describes the parameters that are used for access control of the NMS.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > Access
Control from the Function Tree.
Parameters for Ethernet Access Control

The First Network Enabled Enabled After The First Network Port is set to
Port Disabled Enabled for Ethernet access, the NE can
access the NMS through the Ethernet port.
Parameters for Access Control over Serial Ports

Enable Serial Port Selected Selected After Enable Serial Port Access is
Access Deselected selected, the NE can access the NMS or
command lines through the serial port.
Access Command Selected Deselected If Access Command Line is selected, the

Line Deselected serial interface can be used to access the
command line terminal.

Access NM Selected Selected If Access NM is selected, the serial interface

Deselected can be used to access the NMS.
Baud Rate 1200 9600 l This parameter specifies the data

2400 transmission rate in the communications
through serial ports.
4800
9600 rate of the serial port at the opposite end,
19200 and the rates at both ends must be the
38400 same.
57600
115200
A.1.3 Parameters for Network Security Management

This topic describes the parameters that are related to network security management.
Parameter Description: NE User Management

This topic describes the parameters that are related to NE user management.
Navigation Path
1. Select the required NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > NE
User Management from the Function Tree.
A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful.
2. Close the dialog box.
Parameters for NE user management

NE - - Displays the current NE

name.
NE User - - Displays the registered NE

user name.
User Level - - Displays the registered NE

user level.
NE User Flag - - Displays whether an

registered NE user is
logged in.

Parameter Description: NE User Management_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an NE user.
Navigation Path
1. Select the required NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > NE
User Management from the Function Tree.A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the
operation is successful.
2. Close the dialog box.
3. Click Add.

NE User - - Specifies the name of a

registered NE user.
NOTE
The name of an NE cannot
contain any space or
Chinese characters.

User Level Monitor Level Monitor Level l Displays the registered

Operation Level NE user level.
Maintenance Level l A Debug Level NE
user has all security
System Level and configuration
Debug Level authorities, and has the
right to run debugging
commands.
l A System Level NE
user has all security
and configuration
authorities.
l A Maintenance
Level NE user has
some security
authorities, some
configuration
authorities, the
communication setting
authority, and the log
management
authority.
l An Operation Level
NE user has all fault
performance
authorities, some
security authorities,
and some
configuration
authorities.
l A Monitor Level NE
user has the right to use
all query commands, to
log in, to log out, and to
change its own
password.

NE User Flag LCT NE User LCT NE User l Specifies the NE user

EMS NE User flag.
CMD NE User l LCT NE User
indicates NE users for
General NE User NE management on
the U2000 Local Craft
Terminal (U2000
LCT).
l EMS NE User
NE management on
the U2000.
l CMD NE User
NE management on
the CMD.
l General NE User
all NMS types.
Detailed Description - - Describes a configured

NE user.
New Password - - l Specifies the password

for a new NE user.
Confirm Password - - Enter the same value as

New Password.
Wether the password is Yes Yes Specifies whether the

allowed to be modified No password of a registered
immediately NE user can be changed.
Parameter Description: LCT Access Control

This topic describes the parameters that are used for LCT access control.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > LCT Access
Parameters for LCT Access Control


NE.

LCT Access Access Allowed Access Allowed l No NMS user logs in to the NE. In this
Control Switch Disable Access case, when the LCT requests an LCT
user to log in to the NE, the NE does not
check the status of LCT Access Control
Switch, and directly allows the LCT user
to log in to the NE.
l An NMS user first logs in to the NE. In
this case, when the LCT requests an LCT
user to log in to the NE, the NE
determines whether to allow the LCT
user to log in to the NE through the LCT
according to the status of LCT Access
Control Switch.
l An LCT user first logs in to the NE. In
this case, when the NMS requests an
NMS user to log in to the NE, the NMS
user can directly log in to the NE. After
the NMS user successfully logs in to the
NE, the online LCT user is not affected.
l When both the LCT user and NMS user
log in to the NE, the online LCT user is
not affected after LCT Access Control
Switch is set to Disable Access.
A.2 Radio Link Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio links.
A.2.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.
A.2.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC
A.2.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF N+1 protection group.
A.2.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection
This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF N+1 protection.
A.2.5 Parameter: IF 1+1 Protection_Create
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF 1+1 protection group.
A.2.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection
This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF 1+1 protection.
A.2.7 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IF/ODU.


Workgroup_Creation
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the XPIC tab.
3. Click New.
Parameters
IF Channel 28M - l This parameter specifies the working

Bandwidth 40M bandwidth of the radio link.
56M l When this parameter is set to 56M, the
high-power ODU must be used.
NOTE
The IFX2 board does not support the value
40M.
Polarization - - l This parameter indicates the polarization

direction-V direction of a radio link.
l It is recommended that you set the IF port
Polarization
on the XPIC IF board that has a smaller
direction-H
slot number to Link ID-V and the IF port
on the other XPIC IF board to Link ID-
H.
Link ID-V 1 to 4094 1 l Set Link ID-V and Link ID-H.

l A link ID is an identifier of a radio link
Link ID-H 2
and is used to prevent the radio links
between sites from being wrongly
connected.
l When the link ID received by an NE is
different from the link ID set for the NE,
the NE reports an MW_LIM alarm and
inserts the AIS.
l These two parameters are set according
to the planning information. These two
parameters must be set to different
values, but Link ID-V must be set to the
same value at both ends of a link and
Link ID-H must also be set to the same
value at both ends of a link.

Transmit Power - - l This parameter specifies the transmit

(dBm) power of an ODU. The value of this
parameter must not exceed the rated
power range supported by the ODU.
l It is recommended that you set the
transmit power of the ODU to the same
value at both ends of a radio link.
l Consider the receive power of the ODU
at the opposite end when you set this
parameter. Ensure that the receive power
of the ODU at the opposite end can
ensure stable radio services.
Maximum - - l This parameter specifies the maximum

Transmit Power transmit power of the ODU. This
(dBm) parameter cannot be set to a value that
exceeds the nominal power rang of the
ODU in the guaranteed capacity
modulation module..
l This parameter is set to limit the
maximum transmit power of the ODU
within this preset range.
l The maximum transmit power adjusted
by using the ATPC function should not
exceed this value.
Transmission - - l This parameter indicates the channel

Frequency(MHz) central frequency.
l The value of this parameter must not be
less than the sum of the lower transmit
frequency limit supported by the ODU
and a half of the channel spacing, and
must not be more than the difference
between the upper transmit frequency
limit supported by the ODU and a half of
the channel spacing.

T/R Spacing(MHz) - - l This parameter specifies the spacing

between the transmit frequency and the
receive frequency of an ODU to prevent
mutual interference between the
transmitter and the receiver.
l If Station Type of the ODU is TX
high, the transmit frequency is one T/R
spacing higher than the receive
frequency. If Station Type of the ODU
is TX low, the transmit frequency is one
T/R spacing lower than the receive
frequency.
l If the ODU supports only one T/R
spacing, set this parameter to 0,
indicating that the T/R spacing
supported by the ODU is used.
l A valid T/R spacing value is determined
by the ODU itself, and the T/R spacing
should be set according to the technical
specifications of the ODU.
l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be
set to the same value at both the ends of
a radio link.
Transmission unmute unmute l When this parameter is set to mute, the

Status mute ODU does not transmit microwave
signals but can normally receive
microwave signals.
l When this parameter is set to unmute,
the ODU normally transmits and
receives microwave signals.
l In normal cases, this parameter is set to
unmute.

ATPC Enabled Disabled Disabled l This parameter specifies whether the

Enabled ATPC function is enabled.
l When this parameter is set to Enabled
and if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB
higher or lower than the central value
between the ATPC upper threshold and
the ATPC lower threshold at the receive
end, the receiver notifies the transmitter
to decrease or increase the transmit
power until the RSL is within the range
that is 2 dB higher or lower than the
central value between the ATPC upper
threshold and the ATPC lower threshold.
l The settings of the ATPC attributes must
be consistent at both ends of a radio link.
l In the case of areas where fast fading
severely affects the radio transmission, it
is recommended that you set this
parameter to Disabled.
l During the commissioning process, set
this parameter to Disabled to ensure that
the transmit power is not changed. After
the commissioning, re-set the ATPC
attributes.
ATPC Upper - -45.0 l The central value between the ATPC

Threshold(dBm) upper threshold and the ATPC lower
threshold is set as the expected receive
ATPC Lower - -70.0 power.
Threshold(dBm)
l It is recommended that you set ATPC
Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of
the planned central value between the
ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC
lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC
Lower Threshold(dBm) to the
difference between the planned central
value between the ATPC upper
threshold and the ATPC lower threshold
and 10 dB.
l You can set the ATPC upper threshold
only when ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable Status is set to
Disabled.

ATPC Automatic Disabled Disabled l This parameter specifies whether the

Threshold Enable Enabled automatic threshold function is enabled.
Status l If this parameter is set to Enabled, the
equipment automatically uses the preset
ATPC upper and lower thresholds
according to the work mode of the radio
link.

Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link
2. Click the XPIC tab.

Group ID - - This parameter indicates the ID of the work

group.
Polarization - - This parameter indicates the IF port to which

direction-V the polarization direction V corresponds.
Link ID-V - - This parameter indicates the link ID to

which the polarization direction V
corresponds.

direction-H the polarization direction H corresponds.
Link ID-H - - This parameter indicates the link ID to

which the polarization direction H
corresponds.
IF Channel 28M - l IF Channel Bandwidth refers to the

Bandwidth 40M channel spacing of the corresponding
radio links.
56M
NOTE
The IFX2 board does not support the value
40M.

Power to Be -90.0 to -20.0 -10.0 l This parameter is used to set the

Received -V(dBm) expected receive power of the ODU and
is mainly used in the antenna alignment
stage. After this parameter is set, the NE
automatically enables the antenna
misalignment indicating function.
l When the antenna misalignment
indicating function is enabled, if the
actual receive power of the ODU is 3 dB
lower than the power expected to be
received, the ODU indicator on the IF
board connected to the ODU blinks
yellow (300 ms on, 300 ms off),
indicating that the antenna is not aligned.
l After the antenna alignment, after the
state that the antenna is aligned lasts for
30 minutes, the NE automatically
disables the antenna misalignment
indicating function.
l When this parameter takes the default
value, the antenna misalignment
indicating function is disabled.

Power to Be -90.0 to -20.0 -10.0 l This parameter is used to set the

Received -H(dBm) expected receive power of the ODU and
is mainly used in the antenna alignment
stage. After this parameter is set, the NE

modulation module.
exceed this value.

Transmit Power - - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

(dBm) transmit power of the ODU. This
parameter cannot be set to a value that
exceeds the nominal power range of the
ODU.
l It is recommended that you set the
transmit power of the ODU to the same
value at both ends of a radio link.
Transmission - - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Frequency(MHz) transmit frequency of the ODU, namely,
the channel central frequency.
less than the sum of the lower TX
between the upper TX frequency limit
supported by the ODU and a half of the
channel spacing.
l The difference between the transmit
frequencies of both the ends of a radio
link should be one T/R spacing.
to the planning information.

T/R Spacing(MHz) - - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

spacing between the transmit frequency
and receive frequency of the ODU to
prevent mutual interference between the
transmitter and receiver.
l If the ODU is a Tx high station, the
transmit frequency is one T/R spacing
higher than the receive frequency. If the
ODU is a Tx low station, the transmit
frequency is one T/R spacing lower than
the receive frequency.
spacing, this parameter is set to 0,
indicating that the T/R spacing
supported by the ODU is used.
set to the same value at both ends of a
radio link.
Transmission unmute unmute l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Status mute transmit status of the ODU.
l If this parameter is set to mute, the
transmitter of the ODU does not work
but can normally receive microwave
signals.
l If this parameter is set to unmute, the
ODU can normally transmit and receive
microwave signals.
unmute.
Parameters for Hybrid/AM Configuration

Group ID - - This parameter indicates the ID of the work

group.

direction the polarization direction H or the
polarization direction V corresponds.

AM Enable Status Disabled Disabled l When this parameter is set to Disabled,

Enabled the radio link uses only the specified
modulation scheme. In this case, you
need to select Manually Specified
Modulation Mode.
l When this parameter is set to Enabled,
the radio link uses the corresponding
modulation scheme according to the
channel conditions.
Hence, the Hybrid radio can ensure the
reliable transmission of the E1 services and
provide bandwidth adaptively for the
Ethernet services when the AM function is
enabled.
Modulation Mode QPSK - This parameter specifies the highest-gain

of the Guarantee 16QAM modulation scheme that the AM function
AM Capacity supports. This parameter is set according to
32QAM the planning information. Generally, the
64QAM value of this parameter is determined by the
128QAM bandwidth of the services that need to be
transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the
256QAM availability of the radio link that
corresponds to this modulation scheme.
NOTE
Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity
must be higher than Modulation Mode of the
Guarantee AM Capacity.
This parameter is valid only when AM
Enable Status is set to Enabled.
Modulation Mode QPSK - This parameter specifies the highest-gain

of the Full AM 16QAM modulation scheme that the AM function
Capacity supports. This parameter is set according to
32QAM the planning information. Generally, the
64QAM value of this parameter is determined by the
128QAM bandwidth of the services that need to be
transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the
256QAM availability of the radio link that
NOTE
Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity
must be higher than Modulation Mode of the
Guarantee AM Capacity.

Manually Specified QPSK QPSK This parameter specifies the modulation

Modulation Mode 16QAM scheme that the radio link uses for signal
transmission.
32QAM
64QAM Enable Status is set to Disabled.
128QAM
256QAM
Transmit-End - - Displays the modulation mode at the

Modulation Mode transmit end.
Receive-End - - Displays the modulation mode at the receive

Modulation Mode end.
Guarantee E1 - - l When AM Enable Status is set to

Capacity Enabled, this parameter depends on IF
Channel Bandwidth and Modulation
Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity
and cannot be set.
l When AM Enable Status is set to
Disabled, this parameter depends on IF
Channel Bandwidth and Manually
Specified Modulation Mode and
cannot be set.
Full E1 Capacity 1 to 75 - This parameter specifies the number of E1

services that can be transmitted in Hybrid
work mode. The value of this parameter
cannot exceed the Guarantee E1
Capacity.
The Full E1 Capacity must be set to the
same value at both ends of a radio link.
Parameters for ATPC Management

Group ID - - This parameter indicates the object to be set.

ATPC Enable Disabled - l This parameter specifies whether the

Status Enabled ATPC function is enabled.
l If this parameter is set to Enabled and if
the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB higher
or lower than the central value between
the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC
lower threshold at the receive end, the
receiver notifies the transmitter to
decrease or increase the transmit power
until the RSL is within the range that is
2 dB higher or lower than the central
value between the ATPC upper threshold
and the ATPC lower threshold.
attributes.
ATPC Upper - - l Set the central value between the ATPC

threshold to a value for the expected
ATPC Lower - - receive power.
Threshold(dBm)
ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC
lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC
Lower Threshold(dBm) o the
and the ATPC lower threshold and 10
dB.
l You can set this parameter only when
ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable
Status is set to Disabled.

ATPC Automatic Disabled - l This parameter specifies whether the

Threshold Enable Enabled ATPC automatic threshold function is
Status enabled.
l If this parameter is set to Enabled, the
link.
l If this parameter is set to Disabled, you
need to manually set ATPC Upper
Threshold(dBm) and ATPC Lower
Threshold(dBm).
A.2.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF N+1 protection group.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > N+1
Protection from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create.

WTR time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter specifies the wait-to-
restore (WTR) time.
l When the time after the former working
channel is restored to normal reaches the
set WTR time, a revertive switching
occurs.
l It is recommended that you use the
default value.
Enabled Enabled Enabled l This parameter specifies whether the SD

Disabled switching function of N+1 protection is
enabled.
the SD condition is considered as a
trigger condition of protection
switching.
l It is recommended that you set this
parameter to Enabled.

Slot Mapping Relation Parameters

Select Mapping Work Unit Work Unit l This parameter specifies the mapping
Direction Protection Unit direction of N+1 protection.
Select Mapping - - l In the case of N+1 protection, map N IF

Way ports as Work Unit and map the
remaining IF port as Protection Unit.
Mapped Board - - This parameter indicates the working unit

and protection unit that have been set.
A.2.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection

This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF N+1 protection.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > N+1
Protection Group Parameters

Protection Group - - This parameter indicates the ID of the

ID protection group.
WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

WTR time.
occurs.
default value.

SD Enable Enabled - l This parameter indicates or specifies

Disabled whether the SD switching function of N
+1 protection is enabled.
the SD condition is considered as a
trigger condition of protection
switching.
Protocol Status - - This parameter indicates the status of the

switching control protocol.
Protection Unit Parameters

Protection Unit - - This parameter indicates the protection unit.
Line - - This parameter indicates the information

about the working board or protection
board.
Switching Status - - This parameter indicates the switching state.
Protected Unit - - This parameter indicates the protected unit.
Remote/Local End - - This parameter indicates the local end or

Indication remote end.
A.2.5 Parameter: IF 1+1 Protection_Create

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF 1+1 protection group.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1
2. Click Create.

Parameters
Working Mode HSB HSB l This parameter specifies the working

FD mode of the IF 1+1 protection.
SD l In HSB mode, the equipment provides a
1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF
board and ODU at both ends of each hop
of a radio link to realize the protection.
l In FD mode, the system uses two
channels that have a frequency spacing
between them, to transmit and receive
the same signal. The remote end selects
signals from the two received signals.
With FD protection, the impact of the
fading on signal transmission is reduced.
l In SD mode, the system uses two
antennas that have a space distance
between them, to receive the same
signal. The equipment selects signals
from the two received signals. With SD
protection, the impact of the fading on
signal transmission is reduced.
l The FD mode and SD mode are
compatible with the HSB switching
function.
Revertive Mode Revertive Mode Revertive Mode l This parameter specifies the revertive
Non-Revertive mode of the IF 1+1 protection.
l When this parameter is set to Revertive
Mode, the NE that is in the switching
state releases the switching and enables
the former working channel to return to
the normal state some time after the
former working channel is restored to
normal.
l When this parameter is set to Non-
Revertive, the NE that is in the
switching state keeps the current state
unchanged unless another switching
occurs even though the former working
channel is restored to normal.
parameter to Revertive Mode.

WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter specifies the wait-to-
restore (WTR) time.
occurs.
l You can set WTR Time(s) only when
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive
Mode.
default value.
Enable Reverse Enabled Enabled l This parameter indicates whether the

Switching Disabled reverse switching function is enabled.
l When both the main IF board and the
standby IF board at the sink end report
service alarms, they send the alarms to
the source end by using the MWRDI
overhead in the microwave frame. When
this parameter at the source end is set to
Enabled and the reverse switching
conditions are met, the IF 1+1 protection
switching occurs at the source end.
l This parameter is valid only when
Working Mode is set to HSB or SD.
l Generally, if Working Mode is set to
HSB, it is recommended that you set this
parameter to Disabled; if Working
Mode is set to SD, it is recommended
that you set this parameter to Enabled.
Working Board - - This parameter specifies the working board

of the protection group.
Protection Board - - This parameter specifies the protection

board of the protection group.
NOTE
Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time(s), and Enable Reverse
Switching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.
A.2.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection

This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF 1+1 protection.

Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1


Working Mode HSB - l This parameter indicates the working

FD mode of the created IF 1+1 protection
group.
SD
l In HSB mode, the equipment provides a
1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF
board and ODU at both ends of each hop
of a radio link to realize the protection.
l In FD mode, the system uses two
channels that have a frequency spacing
between them, to transmit and receive
the same signal. The remote end selects
signals from the two received signals.
With FD protection, the impact of the
fading on signal transmission is reduced.
l In SD mode, the system uses two
antennas that have a space distance
between them, to receive the same signal.
The equipment selects signals from the
two received signals. With SD
protection, the impact of the fading on
signal transmission is reduced.
l The FD mode and SD mode are
compatible with the HSB switching
function.

Revertive Mode Revertive Mode - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Non-Revertive revertive mode of the protection group.
Mode l When this parameter is set to Revertive
Mode, the NE that is in the switching
state releases the switching and enables
the former working channel to return to
the normal state some time after the
former working channel is restored to
normal.
Revertive Mode, the NE that is in the
parameter to Revertive Mode.

WTR time.
occurs.
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive
Mode.
default value.
Enable Reverse Enabled - l This parameter indicates or specifies

Switching Disabled whether the reverse switching function is
enabled.
l When both the main IF board and the
standby IF board at the sink end report
service alarms, they send the alarms to
the source end by using the MWRDI
overhead in the microwave frame. When
this parameter at the source end is set to
Enabled and the reverse switching
conditions are met, the IF 1+1 protection
switching occurs at the source end.
Working Mode is set to HSB or SD.

Switching Status of - - l This parameter indicates the switching

Device state on the equipment side.
l Unknown is displayed when the
switching state on the channel side is not
queried or not obtained after a query.
Switching Status of - - l This parameter indicates the switching

Channel state on the channel side.
l Unknown is displayed when the
switching state on the channel side is not
queried or not obtained after a query.
Active Board of - - This parameter indicates the current

Device working board on the equipment side.
Active Board of - - This parameter indicates the current

Channel working board on the channel side.
NOTE
Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, and WTR Time(s) must be set to the same
value at both ends of a radio hop.

Unit - - This parameter indicates the working board

and protection board.
Slot Mapping - - This parameter indicates the names and

Relation ports of the working board and protection
board.
Working Status of - - This parameter indicates the working state

Device on the equipment side.
Signal Status of - - This parameter indicates the status of the

Channel link signal.
A.2.7 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IF/ODU.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link

2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.
Parameters for Configuring the IF

Work Mode 1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

2,4E1,3.5MHz, work mode of the radio link in "work
16QAM mode number, service capacity, channel
spacing, modulation mode" format.
3,8E1,14MHz,QPS
K l This parameter is set according to the
planning information. The work modes
4,8E1,7MHz, of the IF boards at the two ends of a radio
16QAM link must be the same.
5,16E1,28MHz,QP NOTE
SK The IF1 board supports this parameter.
6,16E1,14MHz,
16QAM
7,STM-1,28MHz,
128QAM
8,E3,28MHz,QPSK
9,E3,14MHz,
16QAM
10,22E1,14MHz,
32QAM
11,26E1,14MHz,
64QAM
12,32E1,14MHz,
128QAM
13,35E1,28MHz,
16QAM
14,44E1,28MHz,
32QAM
15,53E1,28MHz,
64QAM

Link ID 1 to 4094 1 l This parameter indicates or specifies the

ID of a radio link. As the identifier of a
radio link, this parameter is used to
prevent incorrect connections of radio
links between sites.
l If the value of Received Radio Link
ID does not match the preset value of
Link ID at the local end, the local end
inserts the AIS signal to the downstream
direction of the service. At the same
time, the local end reports MW_LIM
alarm to the NMS, indicating that the
link IDs do not match.
l Each radio link of an NE should have a
unique link ID, and the link IDs at both
ends of a radio link should be the same.
Received Link ID - - l This parameter indicates the received ID

of the radio link.
Radio Link ID at the local end, the local
end inserts the AIS signal to the
downstream direction of the service. At
the same time, the local end reports an
alarm to the NMS, indicating that the
link IDs do not match.
l When the radio link becomes faulty, this
parameter is displayed as an invalid
value.
IF Service Type Hybrid(Native E1 Hybrid(Native E1 l Displays or specifies the type of services

+ETH) +ETH) carried by the IF board.
Hybrid(Native l If the Integrated IP radio transmits
STM-1+ETH) Native E1 services, set this parameter to
SDH Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).
l If the Integrated IP radio transmits
Native STM-1 services, set this
parameter to Hybrid(Native STM-1
+ETH).
l If the SDH radio transmits SDH services,
set this parameter to SDH.
NOTE
The ISU2 and ISX2 boards support this
parameter.

IF Channel 7M - IF Channel Bandwidth indicates the

Bandwidth 14M channel spacing of the corresponding radio
link. This parameter is set according to the
28M planning information.
40M NOTE
56M l This parameter is not applicable to the IF1
board.
l The IFU2 board does not support the value
40M.
l The IFX2 board does not support the values
7M, 14M, and 40M.
l The ISX2 board does not support the values
7M and 14M.
AM Mode - - This parameter is not applicable to the

OptiX RTN 980.

Modulation Mode.
channel conditions.
l Hence, the Integrated IP radio can ensure
the reliable transmission of the E1
services and provide bandwidth
adaptively for the Ethernet services
when the AM function is enabled.
l The ISX2/ISU2 does not support the AM
function when IF Service Type is
SDH.
NOTE
This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.
Manually Specified QPSK QPSK l This parameter specifies the modulation

Modulation Mode 16QAM scheme that the radio link uses for signal
transmission.
32QAM
l This parameter is valid only when AM
64QAM
Enable Status is set to Disabled.
128QAM
NOTE
256QAM This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

Modulation Mode QPSK QPSK l This parameter is valid only when AM

of the Guarantee 16QAM Enable Status is set to Enabled.
AM Capacity l This parameter specifies the lowest-gain
32QAM
modulation scheme that the AM function
64QAM supports. This parameter is set according
128QAM to the planning information. Generally,
256QAM the value of this parameter is determined
by the service transmission bandwidth
that the Hybrid radio must ensure and the
availability of the radio link that
NOTE

of the Full AM 16QAM Enable Status is set to Enabled.
Capacity l This parameter specifies the highest-
32QAM
gain modulation scheme that the AM
64QAM function supports. This parameter is set
128QAM according to the planning information.
256QAM Generally, the value of this parameter is
determined by the bandwidth of the
services that need to be transmitted over
the Hybrid radio and the availability of
the radio link that corresponds to this
modulation scheme.
NOTE
Modulation Mode of the Full AM
Capacity must be higher than Modulation
Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity.
NOTE
STM-1 Capacity - - l Specifies the STM-1 capacity of the IF

board.
l This parameter is available only when
IF Service Type is set to Hybrid(Native
STM-1+ETH) and SDH.
l If IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native
STM-1+ETH), this parameter can be set
to 0 or 1.
l If IF Service Type is SDH, this
parameter can be set to 1 or 2.
NOTE
The IF1, IFU2, and IFX2 boards do not support
this parameter.

Guarantee E1 - - l If AM Enable Status is set to

Capacity Enabled, this parameter needs to be set
according to IF Channel Bandwidth,
Modulation Mode of the Guarantee
AM Capacity, and the actually
transmitted services.
l If AM Enable Status is set to
Disabled, this parameter needs to be set
Manually Specified Modulation
Mode, and the actually transmitted
services.
l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this
parameter is available when IF Service
Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).
NOTE
Guarantee E1 - - Displays the E1 capacity range of the IF

Capacity Range board in guarantee capacity modulation
mode.
Data Service - - Displays the data service bandwidth of the

Bandwidth(Mbit/ IF board.
s)
Enable E1 Priority Disabled Disabled l This parameter specifies whether to

Enabled enable the E1 priority function.
NOTE

Full E1 Capacity - - l This parameter specifies the number of

transmitted E1 services in Modulation
Mode of the Full AM Capacity.
l This parameter is valid if Enable E1
Priority is set to Enabled.
l E1 service bandwidth in full capacity
mode ≤ Service bandwidth in full
capacity mode - Service bandwidth in
guarantee capacity mode + E1 service
bandwidth in guarantee capacity mode.
In addition, the number of E1 services in
full capacity modulation mode should be
smaller than or equal to the maximum
number of E1 services in full capacity
modulation mode.
l The Full E1 Capacity must be set to the
NOTE
Full E1 Capacity - - Displays the E1 capacity range of the IF

Range board in full capacity modulation mode.
Parameters for Configuring the RF

TX Frequency - - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

(MHz) transmit frequency of the ODU, namely,
the channel central frequency.
less than the sum of the lower TX
between the upper TX frequency limit
supported by the ODU and a half of the
channel spacing.
frequencies of both the ends of a radio
link should be one T/R spacing.

Range of TX - - l This parameter indicates the range of the

Frequency(MHz) transmit frequency of the ODU.
l The Range of Frequency(MHz)
depends on the specifications of the
ODU.
Actual TX - - This parameter indicates the actual transmit

Frequency(MHz) frequency of the ODU.
Actual RX - - This parameter indicates the actual receive

T/R Spacing(MHz) - - l This parameter specifies the spacing

between the transmit frequency and the
receive frequency of an ODU to prevent
interference between them.
l If Station Type of the ODU is TX
high, the TX frequency is one T/R
spacing higher than the receive
frequency. If Station Type of the ODU
is TX low, the TX frequency is one T/R
spacing lower than the receive
frequency.
spacing, set this parameter to 0,
indicating that the T/R spacing supported
by the ODU is used.
set to the same value at both the ends of
a radio link.
Actual T/R - - This parameter indicates the actual T/R

Spacing(MHz) spacing of the ODU.

Parameters for Configuring the Power

TX Power(dBm) - - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

transmit power of the ODU. This
parameter cannot be set to a value that
exceeds the nominal power range of the
ODU.
l This parameter cannot take a value
greater than the preset value of
Maximum Transmit Power(dBm).
l The transmit power of the ODU should
be set to the same value at both ends of a
radio link.
Range of TX - - This parameter indicates the range of the

Power(dBm) transmit power of the ODU.
Actual TX Power - - l This parameter indicates the actual

(dBm) transmit power of the ODU.
l If the ATPC function is enabled, the
queried actual transmit power may be
different from the preset value.

Power to Be -90.0 to -20.0 -10.0 l This parameter is used to set the expected
Received(dBm) receive power of the ODU and is mainly
used in the antenna alignment stage.
After this parameter is set, the NE
indicating function is enabled, When the
antenna non-alignment indication
function is enabled, if the actual receive
power of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the
power expected to be received, the ODU
indicator on the IF board connected to
the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on, 300
ms off), indicating that the antenna is not
aligned.
Actual RX Power - - This parameter indicates the actual receive

(dBm) power of the ODU.
TX Status Unmute Unmute l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Mute transmit status of the ODU.
l When this parameter is set to Mute, the
signals.
l When this parameter is set to Unmute,
the ODU can normally transmit and
receive microwave signals.
l In normal cases, it is recommended that
you set this parameter to unmute.
Actual TX Status - - This parameter indicates the actual transmit

status of the ODU.

Equipment Information
Frequency(GHz) - - This parameter indicates the frequency band

where the ODU operates.
Equip Type - - l This parameter indicates the equipment

type of the ODU.
l PDH and SDH indicate the transmission
capacity only and are irrelevant to the
type of transmitted service.
Station Type - - l This parameter indicates whether the

ODU is a Tx high station or a Tx low
station.
l The transmit frequency of a Tx high
station is one T/R spacing higher than the
transmit frequency of a Tx low station.
Produce SN - - This parameter indicates the manufacturing

serial number and the manufacturer code of
the ODU.
Transmission - - This parameter indicates the level of the

Power Type output power of the ODU.
A.3 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to multiplex section protection (MSP).
A.3.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating linear MSP groups.
A.3.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP
This topic describes the parameters that are related to linear MSP groups.
A.3.3 Parameter Description: Ring MSP_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating ring MSP groups.
A.3.4 Parameter Description: Ring MSP
This topic describes the parameters that are related to ring MSP.
A.3.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating linear MSP groups.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Linear
MS from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create.


Protection Type 1+1 Protection 1+1 Protection l This parameter specifies the protection
1:N Protection type of the linear MSP group.
l In the case of 1+1 linear MSP, one
working channel and one protection
channel are required. When the working
channel fails, the service is switched
from the working channel to the
protection channel.
l In the case of 1:N linear MSP, N working
channels and one protection channel are
required. Normal services are
transmitted on the working channels and
extra services are transmitted on the
protection channel. When one working
channel fails, the services are switched
from this working channel to the
protection channel, and the extra
services are interrupted.
l If extra services need to be transmitted
or several working channels are
required, select 1:N Protection.
Switching Mode Single-Ended Single-Ended l This parameter specifies the switching

Switching Switching (1+1 mode of the linear MSP.
Dual-Ended Protection) l In single-ended mode, the switching
Switching Dual-Ended occurs only at one end and the state of
Switching (1:N the other end remains unchanged.
Protection) l In dual-ended mode, the switching
occurs at both ends at the same time.
l If the linear MSP type is set to 1:N
Protection, Switching Mode can be set
to Dual-Ended Switching only.

Revertive Mode Non-Revertive Non-Revertive (1+1 l This parameter specifies the revertive
Revertive Protection) mode of the linear MSP.
Revertive (1:N l When this parameter is set to
Protection) Revertive, the NE that is in the
switching state releases the switching
and enables the former working channel
to return to the normal state some time
after the former working channel is
restored to normal.
parameter to Revertive.
Protection, Revertive Mode can be set
to Revertive only.
WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter specifies the WTR time.
preset WTR time, a revertive switching
occurs.
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive.
default value.
SD Enable Enabled Enabled l This parameter indicates or specifies

Disabled whether the switching at the SD alarm of
the linear MSP is enabled.
the B2_SD alarm is considered as a
switching condition.

Protocol Type New Protocol New Protocol l The new protocol is supported at the
Restructure Protocol early stage, and the mainstream protocol
version is used currently.
l The restructure protocol optimizes the
new protocol and provides better
measures to protect the new protocol,
thus ensuring that the new protocol runs
in a better manner.
l The new protocol is more mature, and
the restructure protocol complies with
the standard. It is recommended that you
use the new protocol.
l You must ensure that the interconnected
NEs run the protocols of the same type.

Select Mapping West Working Unit West Working Unit This parameter specifies the mapping
Direction West Protection direction of the linear MSP.
Unit
Select Mapping - - l This parameter specifies the mapping

Mode board and port in the mapping direction.
l If the protection type is set to 1+1
Protection, only one line port can be
mapped as West Working Unit.
l Only one line port can be mapped as
West Protection Unit.
l The line port mapped as West
Protection Unit and the line port
mapped as West Working Unit should
be configured for different boards if
possible.
Mapped Board - - This parameter indicates the preset slot

mapping relations, including the mapping
direction and the corresponding mapping
mode.
A.3.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP

This topic describes the parameters that are related to linear MSP groups.

Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Linear MS
from the Function Tree.


Protection Type - - l This parameter indicates the protection

- type of the linear MSP group.
l In the case of 1+1 linear MSP, one
working channel and one protection
channel are required. When the working
channel fails, the service is switched
from the working channel to the
protection channel.
l In the case of 1:N linear MSP, N working
channels and one protection channel are
required. Normal services are
transmitted on the working channels and
extra services are transmitted on the
protection channel. When one working
channel fails, the services are switched
from this working channel to the
protection channel, and the extra
services are interrupted.
l If extra services need to be transmitted
or several working channels are
required, select 1:N Protection.
Switching Mode Single-Ended - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Switching switching mode of the linear MSP.
Dual-Ended l In single-ended mode, the switching
Switching occurs only at one end and the state of
the other end remains unchanged.
l In dual-ended mode, the switching
occurs at both ends at the same time.
Protection, Switching Mode can be set
to Dual-Ended Switching only.

Revertive Mode Non-Revertive - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Revertive revertive mode of the linear MSP.
l When this parameter is set to
switching state releases the switching
and enables the former working channel
to return to the normal state some time
after the former working channel is
restored to normal.
Protection, Revertive Mode can be set
to Revertive only.

WTR time.
occurs.
default value.
SD Enable Enabled - l This parameter indicates or specifies

Disabled whether the reverse switching function
is enabled.
the B2_SD alarm is considered as a
switching condition.

Protocol Type New Protocol - l The new protocol is supported at the

Restructure Protocol early stage, and the mainstream protocol
version is used currently.
l The restructure protocol optimizes the
new protocol and provides better
measures to protect the new protocol,
thus ensuring that the new protocol runs
in a better manner.
l You must ensure that the interconnected
NEs run the protocols of the same type.
l The new protocol is more mature, and
the restructure protocol complies with
the standard. It is recommended that you
use the new protocol.
Protocol Status - - This parameter indicates the protocol status

of the linear MSP.
Protection Subnet - - This parameter displays the protection

subnet where the MS protection is
configured.

Protection Unit - - This parameter indicates that which of the

units, namely, the west protection unit or the
west working unit, is currently in the
protection status.
West Line - - This parameter indicates the west protection

- unit and the west working unit of the linear
MSP.
West Switching - - This parameter indicates the switching

Status status of the line.
Protected Unit - - This parameter indicates the working

channel protected by the current protection
channel.
Remote/Local End - - When Switching Mode is set to Dual-

Indication Ended Switching, the central office end
that issues the switching command is
displayed.

A.3.3 Parameter Description: Ring MSP_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating ring MSP groups.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Ring MS from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create.
A dialog box is displayed, prompting for confirmation.
3. Click OK.

Level STM-4 STM-4 Specifies the transmission level of ring MSP

services. The parameter value is always
STM-4.
Protection Type 2-fiber Bidirectional 2-fiber Bidirectional Specifies the ring MSP protection type. The
Multiplex Section Multiplex Section parameter value is always 2-fiber
Bidirectional Multiplex Section.
Local Node 0-15 0 Specifies the node ID that the local NE uses
on the MSP ring. Node IDs of NEs on the
ring must be different from each other.
West Node 0-15 0 Specifies the node ID of the NE that is

connected to the west line board on the local
NE. The parameter value must be different
from Local Node.
East Node 0-15 0 Specifies the node ID of the NE that is

connected to the east line board on the local
NE. The parameter value must be different
from Local Node.
WTR Time(s) 300-720 600 l Specifies the WTR time for the local NE.
After the working channel recovers,
services are switched back from the
protection channel to the working
channel when the WTR time expires.
l Prevents frequent service switches. The
default value is recommended.

SD Enable Enabled Enabled l Specifies whether the B2_SD alarm on

Disabled the local NE functions as a switching
trigger condition. When the parameter
value is Enabled, the B2_SD alarm on
the local NE functions as a switching
trigger condition.
Protocol Type New Protocol New Protocol l The new MSP protocol is supported
Restructure Protocol from an early stage, and is still widely
used.
l Compared with the new MSP protocol,
the restructure MSP protocol is
optimized and more stable,
incorporating better protection
measures.
l The new MSP protocol has higher
technology maturity than the restructure
MSP protocol, and therefore is generally
recommended. The restructure MSP
protocol, however, features higher
standard compliance than the new MSP
protocol. Therefore, the restructure MSP
protocol is used when the new MSP
protocol fails to support interconnection
between Huawei RTN equipment and
third-party equipment.
l Two interconnected NEs must use the
same MSP protocol type.
Parameters for Slot Mapping Relationships

Select Mapping West Line 1 West Line 1 Specifies the mapping direction of a
Direction East Line 1 member in a ring MSP protection group.
Select Mapping - - l Specifies the mapped board and port in

Mode the mapping direction.
l It is recommended that you map the
SL4D-1 port to West Line 1 and map the
SL4D-2 port to East Line 1.
Mapped Board - - Displays the configured slot mapping

relationship, including the mapping
direction and the mapping mode.

A.3.4 Parameter Description: Ring MSP

This topic describes the parameters that are related to ring MSP.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration >
Ring MS from the Function Tree.

Protection Group - - Displays the ID of a ring MSP protection

ID group.
Level - - Displays the transmission level of ring MSP

services. The parameter value is always
STM-4.
Protection Type - - Displays the ring MSP protection type. The

parameter value is always 2-fiber
Bidirectional Multiplex Section.
Local Node - - Displays the node ID that the local NE uses

on the MSP ring.
West Node - - Displays the node ID of the NE that is

connected to the west line board on the local
NE.
East Node - - Displays the node ID of the NE that is

connected to the east line board on the local
NE.
WTR Time(s) - - Displays the wait-to-restore (WTR) time of

the local NE. After the working channel is
restored, revertive switching occurs when
the WTR time expires.
SD Enable - - Displays whether SD Enable is Enabled for

the local NE. If SD Enable is Enabled, the
B2_SD alarm is regarded as a switching
trigger condition.

Protocol Type - - l Displays the protocol type used by the

local NE.
l The new MSP protocol is supported
from an early stage, and is still widely
used.
l Compared with the new MSP protocol,
the restructure MSP protocol is
optimized and more stable,
incorporating better protection
measures.
Protocol Status - - Displays the current protocol status of the

local NE.
Protection Subnet - - Displays the current protection subnet.
Parameters for Slot Mapping Relationships

Mapping Direction - - Displays the direction of an MSP ring.
Slot Mapping - - Displays the slot mapping relationship in a

ring MSP protection group.
Switching Status - - Displays the current switching status of the

local NE.
A.4 SDH/PDH Service Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to SDH/PDH services.
A.4.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating point-to-point cross-
connections.
A.4.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP Service Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating SNCP services.
A.4.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Converting Normal Services Into
SNCP Services
This topic describes the parameters that are used for converting normal services into SNCP
services.
A.4.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring SDH services (namely,
configuring cross-connections).
A.4.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control
This topic describes the parameters that are used for controlling SNCP services.

A.4.6 Parameter Description: TU_AIS Insertion

This section describes the parameters for TU_AIS insertion.
A.4.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating point-to-point cross-
connections.
Navigation Path
l Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH
Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
l Click Options to change the VC-12 timeslot numbering policy used by the cross-
connection.
l Click Create.
Parameters
Level VC12 VC12 l This parameter specifies the level of the

VC3 service to be created.
VC4 l If the service is an E1 service or a data
service that is bound with VC-12
channels, set this parameter to VC12.
l If the service is a data service that is
bound with VC-3 channels, set this
parameter to VC3.
l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass
through the NE, set this parameter to
VC4.
Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional l When this parameter is set to

Unidirectional Unidirectional, create only the cross-
connections from the service source to
the service sink.
Bidirectional, create the cross-
connections from the service source to
the service sink and the cross-
connections from the service sink to the
service source.
you set this parameter to Bidirectional.
Source Slot - - This parameter specifies the slot of the

service source.

Source VC4 - - l This parameter specifies the number of

the VC-4 channel where the service
source is located.
l This parameter cannot be set when
Source Slot is set to the slot of the
tributary board.
Source Timeslot - - l This parameter indicates the timeslot

Range(e.g.1,3-6) range of the service source.
l This parameter can be set to a number or
several numbers. When setting this
parameter to several numbers, use the
comma (,) to separate the discrete
numbers, or use the endash (-) to
represent a consecutive number. For
example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
Sink Slot - - This parameter specifies the slot of the

service sink.
Sink VC4 - - l This parameter specifies the number of

the VC-4 channel where the service sink
is located.
l This parameter cannot be set when Sink
Slot is set to the slot of the tributary
board.
Sink Timeslot - - l This parameter specifies the timeslot

Range(e.g.1,3-6) range of the service sink.
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.

E1 Priority High - l This parameter specifies the priority of

Low an E1 service.
None l This parameter is available only if the E1
priority function is enabled for the ports
configured in the cross-connections.
l If E1 Priority is set to High,
transmission of the E1 service is ensured
in any modulation scheme.
l If E1 Priority is set to Low, transmission
of the E1 service is ensured only in full-
capacity modulation scheme
l If the service priority is not specified
during service creation, E1 Priority is
None. In this case, the E1 priority of a
service needs to be changed after the
service is created.
Activate Yes Yes l This parameter specifies whether to

Immediately No immediately activate the configured
service.
l To immediately deliver the configured
SDH service to the NE, set this parameter
to Yes.
A.4.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP

Service Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating SNCP services.
Navigation Path
l Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH
l Click Options to change the VC-12 timeslot numbering policy used by the cross-
connection.
l Click Create SNCP Service.

Service Type SNCP SNCP This parameter indicates that the type of the
service to be created is SNCP.

Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional l When this parameter is set to

Unidirectional Unidirectional, create only the cross-
connections from the SNCP service
source to the SNCP service sink.
Bidirectional, create the cross-
connections from the SNCP service
source to the service sink and the cross-
connections from the SNCP service sink
to the service source.
you set this parameter to Bidirectional.
Level VC12 VC12 l This parameter specifies the level of the

VC3 SCNP service to be created.
channels, set this parameter to VC12.
bound with VC-3 channels, set this
parameter to VC3.
through the NE, set this parameter to
VC4.

Hold-off Time 0 to 100 0 l This parameter specifies the duration of

(100ms) the hold-off time.
l When a line is faulty, SNCP switching
can be performed on the NE after a delay
of time to prevent the situation where the
NE performs SNCP switching and other
protection switching at the same time.
l Hold-off Time(100ms) is generally set
to prevent SNCP protection switching,
when SNCP works with N+1 protection.
Hold-off Time(100ms) must be longer
than the switching time of any protection
mode that works with SNCP. Generally,
Hold-off Time(100ms) is set to 200 ms.
l When SNCP works with 1+1 FD/SD,
trigger conditions for HSM switching or
SNCP switching trigger HSM switching
but do not trigger SNCP switching.
Therefore, Hold-off Time(100ms) does
not need to be set in this case.
l The switching time of 1+1 HSB/FD/SD
protection is much longer than that of
SNCP. Therefore, to shorten service
interruptions, it is recommended that you
do not set Hold-off Time(100ms) when
SNCP works with 1+1 HSB/FD/SD
protection.
l If only the SNCP scheme is available, it
is recommended that you set the hold-off
time to 0.
Revertive Mode Non-Revertive Non-Revertive l This parameter specifies whether to

Revertive switch the service to the original working
channel after the fault is rectified.
l If this parameter is set to Revertive, the
service is switched from the protection
channel to the original working channel.
If this parameter is set to Non-
Revertive, the service is not switched
from the protection channel to the
original working channel.

occurs.
default value.

service source.

source is located.
tributary board.

1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.

service sink.

is located.
board.


1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
Configure SNCP Selected Deselected l After the Configure SNCP Tangent

Tangent Ring Deselected Ring checkbox is selected, you can
quickly configure the SNCP service for
the SNCP ring tangent point.
you do not select this checkbox.
Activate Selected Selected l This parameter specifies whether to

Immediately Deselected immediately activate the configured
SNCP service.
l After the Activate Immediately
checkbox is selected, you can
immediately activate the created SNCP
service.
A.4.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service

Configuration_Converting Normal Services Into SNCP Services
This topic describes the parameters that are used for converting normal services into SNCP
services.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH
2. If a bidirectional SDH service is created, select this service in Cross-Connection. Right-
click the selected service and choose Expand to Unidirectional from the shortcut menu.
3. Select the unidirectional service. Right-click the selected service and choose Convert to
SNCP Service from the shortcut menu.


Service Type SNCP SNCP This parameter indicates that the type of the
service to be created is SNCP.
Direction Unidirectional - This parameter indicates the direction of the

SNCP service.
Level - - l This parameter indicates the level of the

SNCP service.
l If the service is an E1 service or a data
channels, the parameter value is VC12.
bound with VC-3 channels, the
parameter value is VC3.
through the NE, the parameter value is
VC4.

Hold-off Time 0 to 100 0 l This parameter specifies the duration of

protection.
time to 0.
Revertive Mode Non-Revertive Non-Revertive l This parameter specifies whether to

Revertive switch the service to the original working
channel after the fault is rectified. If this
parameter is set to "Revertive", the

occurs.
default value.

service source.

source is located.
tributary board.

1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.

service sink.

is located.
board.


1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
Configure SNCP - - After the Configure SNCP Tangent Ring

Tangent Ring checkbox is selected, you can quickly
configure the SNCP service for the SNCP
ring tangent point.
Activate - - l This parameter indicates whether to

Immediately immediately activate the configured
SNCP service.
l After the Activate Immediately
checkbox is selected, you can
immediately activate the created SNCP
service.
A.4.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring SDH services (namely,
configuring cross-connections).
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service

Cross-Connection Parameters
Level VC12 - l This parameter indicates the level of the

VC3 service.
channels, VC12 is displayed.
bound with VC-3 channels, VC3 is
displayed.
through the NE, VC4 is displayed.
Source Slot - - This parameter indicates the slot of the

service source.
Source Timeslot/ - - This parameter indicates the timeslot or

Path timeslot range of the service source.
Sink Slot - - This parameter indicates the slot of the

source sink.
Sink Timeslot/ - - This parameter indicates the timeslot or

Path timeslot range of the service sink.
E1 Priority High - l This parameter specifies the priority of

Low an E1 service.
None l This parameter is available only if the E1
priority function is enabled for the ports
configured in the cross-connections.
l If E1 Priority is set to High,
transmission of the E1 service is ensured
in any modulation scheme.
l If E1 Priority is set to Low, transmission
of the E1 service is ensured only in full-
capacity modulation scheme
l If the service priority is not specified
during service creation, E1 Priority is
None. In this case, the E1 priority of a
service needs to be changed after the
service is created.
Activation Status Yes - This parameter indicates whether to activate

No the service.
Bound Group - - The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this
Number parameter.
Lockout Status - - The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this
parameter.

Trail Name - - The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this
parameter.
Schedule No. - - The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this
parameter.
Parameters for Automatically Generated Cross-Connections


VC3 service.
displayed.
Source Slot - - This parameter indicates the slot of the

service source.
Source Timeslot/ - - This parameter indicates the timeslot or

Path timeslot range of the service source.
Sink Slot - - This parameter indicates the slot of the

source sink.
Sink Timeslot/ - - This parameter indicates the timeslot or

Path timeslot range of the service sink.
Lockout Status - - The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this
parameter.
Trail Name - - The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this
parameter.
Schedule No. - - The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this
parameter.
A.4.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control

This topic describes the parameters that are used for controlling SNCP services.

Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SNCP Service

Service Type - - This parameter indicates the service

protection type of the protection group.
Source - - This parameter indicates the timeslots where

the working service source and protection
service source of the protection group are
located.
Sink - - This parameter indicates the timeslots where

the working service sink and protection
service sink of the protection group are
located.

VC3 service.
displayed.
Current Status - - This parameter indicates the current

switching mode and switching status of the
services of the protection group.
Revertive Mode Revertive - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Non-Revertive revertive mode of the service.
l This parameter determines whether to
switch the service from the protection
channel to the original working channel
after the fault is rectified.


WTR time.
occurs.
default value.
Hold-off Time 0 to 100 - l This parameter specifies the duration of

protection.
time to 0.

SD Initiation TIM Null l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Condition EXC conditions that trigger the protection
switching of the service.
SD
l If TIM is selected, the SNCP service
UNEQ considers the HP_TIM alarm as an
Null automatic switching condition.
l If EXC is selected, the SNCP service
considers the B3_EXC or BIP_EXC
alarm as an automatic switching
condition.
l If SD is selected, the SNCP service
considers the B3_SD or BIP_SD alarm
as an automatic switching condition.
l If UNEQ is selected, the SNCP service
considers the HP_UNEQ or LP_UNEQ
alarm as an automatic switching
condition.
l It is recommended that you set SD
Initiation Condition to the same
condition for Working Service and
Protection Service.
l The protection switching conditions in
SD Initiation Condition are optional
values not included in the default values,
and they are set according to the planning
information.
Trail Status - - This parameter indicates the status of the

working service and protection service of
the protection group.
Service Grouping - - The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this
parameter.
Active Channel - - This parameter indicates whether the

working service or protection service is
currently received by the protection group.
Trail Name - - Displays the trail name.
A.4.6 Parameter Description: TU_AIS Insertion

This section describes the parameters for TU_AIS insertion.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the IF board from the Object Tree and choose Alarm > Triggered
Alarm Insertion from the Function Tree.

Table A-1 Parameters on the main interface

Port - - Displays the slot ID of the IF board and the

ID of the IF port.
High Channel - - Displays the higher order path number of the

IF board.
Low Channel - - Displays the lower order path number of the

IF board.
Insert TU_AIS to Enable Disable If this parameter is set to Enable for an E1

E1_AIS Disable path and the E1 path detects the E1_AIS
alarm, the TU_AIS alarm is inserted into
this path.
A.5 Parameters for Board Interfaces

This topic describes the parameters that are related to board interfaces.
A.5.1 PDH Port Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to PDH ports supported by Smart E1 interface
boards.
A.5.2 Parameters for the Ports on Ethernet Boards
This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet ports on the packet plane.
A.5.3 Serial Port Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to serial ports.
A.5.4 Microwave Interface Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF_ETH interfaces.
A.5.5 IF Board Parameters
This topic describes parameters that are related to IF boards.
A.5.6 ODU Parameters
This topic describes parameters that are related to ODUs.
A.5.7 Parameters for SDH Interface Boards
This topic describes parameters that are related to SDH interface boards.
A.5.8 Parameters for PDH Interface Boards
This topic describes parameters that are related to PDH interface boards.
A.5.9 Parameters for Overhead
This topic describes the parameters that are related to overhead.

A.5.1 PDH Port Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to PDH ports supported by Smart E1 interface
boards.
Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Basic Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of PDH ports.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration >
Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the General Attributes tab.

Port - - Displays the ID of a

service port.
Name - - Specifies or displays the

customized port name.
Port Mode Layer 1 Layer 3 l Specifies the working

Layer 2 mode of a PDH port.
Layer 3 l When this parameter is
set to Layer 1, the port
can transmit TDM
signals. A port can
transmit CES and
serial services only if
Layer 1.
set to Layer 2, the port
can transmit ATM
signals.
l For a PDH port, this
parameter cannot be
set to Layer 3.

Encapsulation Type - - l Displays

Encapsulation Type
of a PDH port.
l When Port Mode is
Layer 1,
Encapsulation Type
takes its default value
Null.
l When Port Mode is
Layer 2,
Encapsulation Type
takes its default value
ATM.
Related Concepts
Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Advanced Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the advanced attributes of PDH ports.
Navigation Path
Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.

Port - - Displays the name of a

service port.

Frame Format Unframe CRC-4 Multiframe l Specifies the frame

Double Frame format.
CRC-4 Multiframe l If a CES service uses
the emulation mode of
CESoPSN, this
parameter can assume
the value CRC-4
Multiframe or
Double Frame. The
value CRC-4
Multiframe is
recommended.
l If a CES service uses
the emulation mode of
SAToP, this parameter
needs to assume the
value Unframe.
l The value of Frame
Format must be the
same at the local and
opposite ends.
Line Encoding Format - - Displays the line encoding

format. The parameter
value is always HDB3.

Loopback Mode Non-Loopback Non-Loopback l Specifies the loopback

Inloop status for a port.
Outloop l Non-Loopback
indicates that
loopbacks are
cancelled or not
performed.
l Inloop indicates that
the signals that need to
be transmitted to the
opposite end are
looped back.
l Outloop indicates that
the received signals are
looped back.
l This function is used
for fault locating for
the PDH ports. This
function affects
services over related
ports. Therefore,
exercise precaution
before starting this
function.
l Generally, this
parameter is set to
Non-Loopback.
Impedance - - Displays the port

impedance.

Frame Mode 30 31 l 30 timeslots: In an E1

31 frame format,
timeslots 1 to 15 and 17
to 31 are used to
transmit service data,
and timeslot 16 is used
to transmit signaling.
l 31 timeslots: In an E1
frame format,
timeslots 1 to 31 are
used to transmit
service data.
l This parameter is
unavailable if Frame
Format is Unframe.
l The port frame modes
need to be the same at
the local and opposite
ends.
Related Concepts
A.5.2 Parameters for the Ports on Ethernet Boards

This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet ports on the packet plane.
Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of an Ethernet interface.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.

Port - - This parameter indicates

the port name.
Name - - This parameter specifies

the port name.

Enable Port Enabled Enabled This parameter indicates

Disabled the working mode of the
port.
Port Mode Layer 2 Layer 2 l Specifies the mode of

Layer 3 the Ethernet port.
l If Port Mode is Layer
2, Encapsulation
Type can be set to
Null, 802.1Q, or
QinQ.
l If Port Mode is Layer
3, Encapsulation
Type can be set to
802.1Q only and the
port can carry tunnels.
Encapsulation Type Null - l This parameter

802.1Q specifies the method of
the port to process the
QinQ received packets.
l If you set this
parameter to Null, the
port transparently
transmits the received
packets.
l If you set this
parameter to 802.1Q,
the port identifies the
packets that comply
with the IEEE 802.1q
standard.
l If you set this
parameter to QinQ,
the port identifies the
packets that comply
with the IEEE 802.1ad
QinQ standard.

Working Mode Auto-Negotiation Auto-Negotiation l The Ethernet ports of

10M Half-Duplex different types support
different working
10M Full-Duplex modes.
100M Half-Duplex l When the equipment
100M Full-Duplex on the opposite side
1000M Full-Duplex works in auto-
negotiation mode, set
the working mode of
the equipment on the
local side to Auto-
Negotiation.
l When the equipment
on the opposite side
works in full-duplex
mode, set the working
mode of the equipment
on the local side to
10M Full-Duplex,
100M Full-Duplex, or
1000M Full-Duplex
depending on the port
rate of the equipment
on the opposite side.
l When the equipment
on the opposite side
works in half-duplex
mode, set the working
mode of the equipment
on the local side to
10M Half-Duplex,
100M Half-Duplex,
or Auto-Negotiation
depending on the port
rate of the equipment
on the opposite side.
l GE electrical ports
support 10M full-
duplex, 10M half-
duplex, 100M full-
duplex, 100M half-
duplex, 1000M full-
duplex, and auto-
negotiation.
l GE optical ports
support 1000M full-
duplex and auto-
negotiation.


NOTE
The logical EG2D board
does not support half-
duplex.
Max Frame Length 1518 to 9600 1522 The value of this

(byte) parameter should be
greater than the length of
any frame to be
transported.
Auto-Negotiation Auto-Negotiation FE: 100M Full-Duplex l This parameter

Ability 10M Half-Duplex GE: 1000M Full-Duplex specifies the auto-
negotiation capability
10M Full-Duplex of the Ethernet port.
100M Half-Duplex l For GE optical ports,
100M Full-Duplex this parameter can be
1000M Full-Duplex set to 1000M Full-
Duplex only.
only when Working
Mode is set to Auto-
Negotiation.
Logical Port Attribute Optical Port - l This parameter

Electrical Port specifies the attribute
of the logical port.
l The SFP on the
EM6F, CSHN board
supports the optical
port and electrical
port.
Physical Port Attribute - - This parameter indicates

the attribute of the
physical port.
Related Concepts
Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control

This topic describes the parameters that are related to flow control.
Navigation Path

2. Click the Flow Control tab.


the port name.
Non-Autonegotiation Disabled Disabled l This parameter is valid

Flow Control Mode Enabled only when Working
Mode is not set to
Auto-Negotiation.
l The non-
autonegotiation flow
control mode of the
equipment on the local
side must be consistent
with the non-
autonegotiation flow
control mode of the
equipment on the
opposite side
Auto-Negotiation Flow Disabled Disabled l This parameter is valid

Control Mode Enable Symmetric Flow only when Working
Control Mode is set to Auto-
Negotiation.
l The auto-negotiation
flow control mode of
the equipment on the
local side must be
consistent with the
auto-negotiation flow
control mode of the
equipment on the
opposite side
Related Concepts
Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Layer 2 Attributes tab.


NOTE
The parameter Layer 2 Attributes is meaningful only when Port Mode is set to Layer 2.

the port name.
QinQ Type Domain - - l This parameter

specifies the QinQ
type domain.
l When Encapsulation
Type in the General
Attributes tab page is
set to QinQ, you need
to set QinQ Type
Domain. The default
value is 88A8.
l When Encapsulation
Type in the General
Attributes tab page is
set to Null or 802.1Q,
you cannot set QinQ
Type Domain. In this
case, QinQ Type
Domain is displayed
as FFFF and cannot be
changed.
l QinQ Type Domain
should be set to the
same value for all the
ports on the EM6T/
EM6F board or the
EG2D logical board.

TAG Tag Aware Tag Aware l This parameter

Access specifies the TAG flag
of a port. For details
Hybrid about the TAG flags
and associated frame-
processing methods,
see Table A-2.
l If all the accessed
services are frames
with the VLAN tag
(tagged frames), this
parameter is set to Tag
Aware.
l If all the accessed
services are frames
without the VLAN tag
(untagged frames),
Access.
l If the accessed
services contain
tagged frames and
untagged frames, this
parameter is set to
Hybrid.
Default VLAN ID 1 to 4094 1 l This parameter is valid

only when TAG is set
to Access or Hybrid.
l For details about the
functions of this
parameter, see Table
A-2.
situations.

VLAN Priority 0 to 7 0 l This parameter is valid

only when TAG is set
to Access or Hybrid.
l For details about the
functions of this
parameter, see Table
A-2.
l When the VLAN
priority is required to
divide streams or to be
used for other
purposes, this
parameter is set
according to the
In normal cases, it is
use the default value.
Table A-2 Methods used by Ethernet interfaces to process data frames

Port Type of Data Processing Method
Frame
Tag Aware Access Hybrid
Ingress UNI Tagged frame The port receives the The port discards The port receives
frame. the frame. the frame.
Untagged frame The port discards the The ports add the The ports add the
frame. VLAN tag, to which VLAN tag, to which
Default VLAN ID Default VLAN ID
and VLAN and VLAN
Priority Priority
correspond, to the correspond, to the
frame and receive frame and receive
the frame. the frame.

Port Type of Data Processing Method

Frame
Egress UNI Tagged frame The port transmits The port strips the l If the VLAN ID
the frame. VLAN tag from the in the frame is
frame and then Default VLAN
transmits the frame. ID, the port
strips the VLAN
tag from the
frame and then
transmits the
frame.
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is
not Default
VLAN ID, the
port directly
transmits the
frame.
Related Concepts
Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Layer 3 Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 3 attributes of Ethernet ports.
Navigation Path
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.

Port - - Displays the port name.
Enable Tunnel Disabled Disabled l If Enable Tunnel is set

Enabled Enabled, a port
identifies and
processes MPLS
labels.
l Enable Tunnel is
available if you set
Port Mode to Layer 3
in the General
Attributes tab.

Specify IP Address Manually Unspecified l Specifies the method of

Unspecified setting the IP address
of a port.
l The value
Unspecified indicates
that the IP addresses do
not need to be
configured.
l The value Manually
indicates that the IP
address of the port can
be manually
configured.
IP Address - 0.0.0.0 l Specifies the IP

address of a port.
l This parameter is
available when Specify
IP Address is
Manually.
l The IP addresses of
different ports on the
NE cannot be in the
same network
segment, but the IP
addresses of the ports
at both ends of the
MPLS tunnel must be
in the same network
segment.
IP Mask - 255.255.255.252 l Specifies the subnet

mask of a port.
l This parameter is
available when Specify
IP Address is
Manually.
Related Concepts
Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes.

Navigation Path


the port name.
Port Physical - - This parameter indicates

Parameters the physical parameters of
the port.
MAC Loopback Non-Loopback Non-Loopback l This parameter

Inloop specifies the loopback
state at the MAC layer.
When this parameter is
set to Inloop, the
Ethernet signals
transmitted to the
opposite end are
looped back.
l In normal cases, it is
PHY Loopback Non-Loopback Non-Loopback l This parameter

Inloop specifies the loopback
state at the PHY layer.
When this parameter is
set to Inloop, the
Ethernet physical
signals transmitted to
the opposite end are
looped back.
l In normal cases, it is
MAC Address - - This parameter indicates

the MAC address of the
port.
Transmitting Rate(kbit/ - - This parameter indicates

s) the rate at which the data
packets are transmitted.
Receiving Rate(kbit/s) - - This parameter indicates

the rate at which the data
packets are received.

Loopback Check Enabled Disabled This parameter specifies

Disabled whether to enable loop
detection, which is used to
check whether a loop
exists on the port.
Loopback Port Enabled Disabled This parameter indicates

Shutdown Disabled whether to enable the loop
port shutdown function.
Egress PIR Bandwidth - - This parameter indicates

(Kbit/s) the egress PIR bandwidth.
Enabling Broadcast Disabled Disabled l This parameter

Packet Suppression Enabled specifies whether to
limit the traffic rate of
the broadcast packets
according to the
proportion of the
broadcast packets in
the total packets.
When the equipment at
the opposite end may
encounter a broadcast
storm, this parameter
is set to Enabled.
l If Ethernet services are
E-LAN services, the
recommended value is
Enabled.
l This parameter takes
effect only for E-LAN
services in the ingress
direction.
Broadcast Packet 0 to 100 30 When the proportion of

Suppression Threshold the broadcast packets in
the total packets exceeds
the value of this
parameter, the received
broadcast packets are
discarded. The value of
this parameter should be
more than the proportion
of the broadcast packets in
the total packets before
the broadcast storm
occurs. In normal cases,
default value.

Related Concepts
A.5.3 Serial Port Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to serial ports.
Parameter Description: Serial Port_Basic Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of series ports.
Navigation Path
Configuration > Interface Management > Serial Port from the Function Tree.

Port - - Displays the name of the

port where a serial service
is configured.

Level - - l Specifies or displays

the serial port level.
l 64K Timeslot: 64 kbit/
s timeslots of E1
signals can be bound.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980
supports 64K Timeslot
only.
Used Port - - Displays the physical port

that carries a serial
service.
64K Timeslot - - Displays the timeslots that

a serial service occupies.
The timeslots can be
consecutive or not.

Port Mode Layer 2 Layer 3 l Displays or specifies

Layer 3 the port mode.
l A port supports ATM
encapsulation if its
Port Mode is Layer
2. A port does not
support encapsulation
if its Port Mode is
Layer 3.
Encapsulation Type - - l Displays and specifies

the encapsulation type
of a PW.
l When Port Mode is
Layer 2, this
parameter displays
ATM; when Port
Mode is Layer 3, this
parameter displays
Null.
Parameter Description: Serial Port_Creation of Serial Ports

This topic describes parameters that are used for creating serial ports.
Navigation Path
Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the New tab.

Port Number(e.g:1,3-6) - - Specifies the port where

the serial service is
configured.
Name - - Specifies the customized

port name.

Level 64K Timeslot 64K Timeslot l Specifies the serial

port level.
set to 64K Timeslot ,
E1 timeslots can be
bound.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980
supports only the parameter
value 64K Timeslot .
Used Board - - Specifies the board where

a serial port is located.
Used Port - - Displays the board where

a serial port is located.
High Channel - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

not support this parameter.
Low Channel(e.g:1,3-6) - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

64K Timeslot(e.g:1,3-6) - - Specifies the 64 kbit/s

timeslots to be bound with
the serial port. The
timeslots can be
consecutive or not.
A.5.4 Microwave Interface Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF_ETH interfaces.
Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of microwave
interfaces.
Navigation Path
Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.

Parameters
Port - - This parameter indicates the corresponding

IF port.
Name - - This parameter indicates or specifies the

Port Mode Layer 2 Layer 2 l This parameter specifies the IF port

Layer 3 mode.
l If Port Mode is Layer 2, Encapsulation
Type can be set to Null, 802.1Q, or
QinQ.
l If Port Mode is Layer 3, Encapsulation
Type can be set to 802.1Q only and the
port can carry tunnels.
Encapsulation Null 802.1Q l This parameter specifies the method of

Type 802.1Q the port to process the received packets.
QinQ l If this parameter is set to Null, the port
transparently transmits the received
packets.
l If this parameter is set to 802.1Q, the port
identifies the packets that comply with
the IEEE 802.1Q standard.
l If this parameter is set to QinQ, the port
identifies the packets that comply with
the IEEE 802.1ad QinQ standard.
MTU (byte) 1518 to 9600 1522 Set this parameter to a value greater than the
maximum length of all the data frames to be
transmitted.
Related Concepts
Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes of microwave
interfaces.
Navigation Path

Parameters for Layer 2 Attributes

NOTE
The parameter Layer 2 Attributes is meaningful only when Port Mode is set to Layer 2.

IF port.
QinQ Type - - l This parameter specifies the QinQ type

Domain domain.
l This parameter can be set only when
Encapsulation Type in General
Attributes is set to QinQ.
Tag Tag Aware Tag Aware l This parameter specifies the TAG flag of
Access a port. For details about the TAG flags
and associated frame-processing
Hybrid methods, see Table A-3.
l If all the accessed services are frames
that contain the VLAN tag (tagged
frames), set this parameter to "Tag
Aware".
l If all the accessed services are frames
that do not contain the VLAN tag
(untagged frames), set this parameter to
"Access".
l If the accessed services contain tagged
frames and untagged frames, set this
parameter to "Hybrid".
Default VLAN ID 1 to 4094 1 l This parameter is valid only when

TAG is set to Access or Hybrid.
l For details about the functions of this
parameter, see Table A-3.
to the actual situations.
VLAN Priority 0 0 l This parameter is valid only when

1 TAG is set to Access or Hybrid.
l For details about the functions of this
2
parameter, see Table A-3.
3
l When the VLAN priority is required to
4 divide streams or to be used for other
5 purposes, this parameter needs to be set
according to the planning information. In
6 normal cases, it is recommended that you
7 use the default value.

Table A-3 Data frame processing

Status Type of Data Processing Method
Frame
Ingress Port Tagged frame The port receives the The port discards The port receives
frame. the frame. the frame.
Untagged frame The port discards the The port receives The port receives
frame. the frame after the the frame after the
VLAN tag that VLAN tag that
corresponds to corresponds to
"Default VLAN ID" "Default VLAN ID"
and "VLAN and "VLAN
Priority" is added to Priority" is added to
the frame. the frame.
Egress Port Tagged frame The port transmits The port strips the l If the VLAN ID
the frame. VLAN tag from the in the frame is
frame and then "Default VLAN
transmits the frame. ID", the port
strips the VLAN
tag from the
frame and then
transmits the
frame.
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is
not "Default
VLAN ID", the
port directly
transmits the
frame.
Related Concepts
Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 3 attributes of an IF_ETH port.
Navigation Path
Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.


Port - - Displays the

corresponding IF port.
Enable Tunnel Disabled Disabled l A port identifies and

Enabled processes MPLS
labels, if its Enable
Tunnel is set
Enabled.
l Enable Tunnel is
available if you set
Port Mode to Layer
3 in the General
Attributes tab.
Specify IP Address Manually Unspecified l Specifies the method

Unspecified of setting the IP
address of a port.
l The value
Unspecified indicates
that the IP addresses do
not need to be
configured for a port.
l The value Manually
indicates that the IP
address of a port can be
manually configured.
IP Address - 0.0.0.0 l Specifies the IP

address for a port.
l This parameter is
available when
Specify IP Address is
Manually.
l The IP addresses of
different ports on the
NE cannot be in the
same network
segment, but the IP
addresses of the ports
at both ends of the
MPLS tunnel must be
in the same network
segment.

IP Mask - 255.255.255.252 l Specifies the subnet

mask of a port.
l This parameter is
available when
Specify IP Address is
Manually.
Related Concepts
Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the advanced attributes of microwave
interfaces.
Navigation Path
Parameters for Advanced Attributes


IF port.
Radio Link ID 1 to 4094 1 l This parameter specifies the ID of the

radio link. As the identifier of a radio
link, this parameter is used to prevent
incorrect connections of radio links
between sites.
l The ID of each radio link of an NE must
be unique, and the link IDs at both ends
of a radio link must be the same.

Received Radio - - l This parameter indicates the received ID

Link ID of the radio link.
ID does not match with the preset value
of Radio Link ID at the local end, the
local end inserts the AIS signal to the
alarm to the NMS, indicating that the link
IDs do not match.
IF Port Loopback Non-Loopback Non-Loopback l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Inloop loopback status of the IF interface.
Outloop l Non-Loopback indicates that the
loopback is cancelled or not performed.
l Inloop indicates that the IF signals
transmitted to the opposite end are
looped back.
l Outloop indicates that the received SDH
signals are looped back.
l Generally, this parameter is used to
locate the faults that occur at each IF
interface. The IF loopback is used for
diagnosis. If this function is enabled, the
services at the related ports are affected.
In normal cases, this parameter is set to
Non-Loopback.
Composite Port Non-Loopback Non-Loopback l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Loopback Inloop loopback status on the composite
interface.
Outloop
l Non-Loopback indicates that the
l Inloop indicates that the composite
signals transmitted to the opposite end
are looped back.
l Outloop indicates that the received
composite signals are looped back.
Non-Loopback.

Error Frame Enabled Enabled l This parameter indicates or specifies

Discard Enabled Disabled whether to discard the Ethernet frame
when a CRC error occurs in an Ethernet
frame.
l If the Ethernet service transmitted on the
IF_ETH port is a voice service or a video
service, you can set this parameter to
Disabled.
MAC Address - - This parameter indicates the MAC address

of the port.
Transmitting Rate - - This parameter indicates the transmit rate of

(Kbit/s) the local port.
Receiving Rate - - This parameter indicates the receive rate of

(Kbit/s) the local port.
MAC Loopback Non-Loopback Non-Loopback l This parameter specifies the loopback

Inloop state at the MAC layer. When this
parameter is set to Inloop, the Ethernet
signals transmitted to the opposite end
are looped back.
you use the default value.
Switch Errored Bit Disabled Disabled l This parameter specifies whether to

Enabled enable the switching triggered by bit
errors.
MW_BER_SD alarm will trigger the
LAG switching at the air interface.
Speed Disabled Disabled l If this parameter is set to Enabled, the

Transmission at Enabled Layer-2 Ethernet packets transmitted at
L2 microwave ports will be compressed to
improve transmission efficiency.
l If the Layer 2 header compression
function can be enabled for the ISU2 or
ISX2 board, it is recommended that you
set Speed Transmission at L2 to
Enabled.
l The settings of Speed Transmission at
L2 must be the same at both ends of a
radio link.
NOTE
parameter.

Speed Disabled Disabled l If this parameter is set to Enabled, the IP

Transmission at Enabled packets transmitted at microwave ports
L3 will be compressed to improve
transmission efficiency.
l If the Layer 3 header compression
function can be enabled for the ISU2 or
ISX2 board, it is recommended that you
set Speed Transmission at L3 to
Enabled.
l The settings of Speed Transmission at
L3 must be the same at both ends of a
radio link.
NOTE
parameter.
Loopback Check Disabled Disabled This parameter specifies whether to enable

Enabled loop detection, which is used to check
whether a loop exists on the port.
Loopback Port Disabled Disabled This parameter indicates whether to enable

Shutdown Enabled the automatic shut-down of looped ports.
Enabling Disabled Disabled l This parameter specifies whether to limit

Broadcast Packet Enabled the traffic rate of the broadcast packets
Suppression according to the proportion of the
broadcast packets in the total packets.
When the equipment at the opposite end
may encounter a broadcast storm, this
parameter is set to Enabled.
l If Ethernet services are E-LAN services,
the recommended value is Enabled.
Enabling 0 to 100 30 When the proportion of the broadcast

Broadcast Packet packets in the total packets exceeds the value
Suppression of this parameter, the received broadcast
Threshold packets are discarded. The value of this
parameter should be more than the
proportion of the broadcast packets in the
total packets before the broadcast storm
occurs. In normal cases, this parameter is set
to default value.
Related Concepts

A.5.5 IF Board Parameters

This topic describes parameters that are related to IF boards.
Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute

This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF attributes.
Navigation Path
l Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.
l Click the IF Attributes tab.
Parameters

IF interface.

Radio Link IDa 1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

2,4E1,3.5MHz, work mode of the radio link in "work
16QAM mode number, service capacity, channel
spacing, modulation mode" format.
3,8E1,14MHz,QPS
K l This parameter is set according to the
planning information. The work modes
4,8E1,7MHz, of the IF boards at the two ends of a radio
16QAM link must be the same.
5,16E1,28MHz,QP NOTE
SK The IF1 board supports this parameter.
6,16E1,14MHz,
16QAM
7,STM-1,28MHz,
128QAM
8,E3,28MHz,QPSK
9,E3,14MHz,
16QAM
10,22E1,14MHz,
32QAM
11,26E1,14MHz,
64QAM
12,32E1,14MHz,
128QAM
13,35E1,28MHz,
16QAM
14,44E1,28MHz,
32QAM
15,53E1,28MHz,
64QAM
IF Service Type Hybrid(Native E1 Hybrid(Native E1 l Displays or specifies the type of services

+ETH) +ETH) carried by the IF board.
Hybrid(Native l If the Integrated IP radio transmits
STM-1+ETH) Native E1 services, set this parameter to
SDH Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).
l If the Integrated IP radio transmits
Native STM-1 services, set this
parameter to Hybrid(Native STM-1
+ETH).
l If the SDH radio transmits SDH services,
set this parameter to SDH.
NOTE
parameter.

Radio Link ID 1 to 4094 1 l This parameter indicates or specifies the

ID of a radio link. As the identifier of a
radio link, this parameter is used to
prevent incorrect connections of radio
links between sites.
Link ID at the local end, the local end
inserts the AIS signal to the downstream
direction of the service. At the same
time, the local end reports MW_LIM
IDs do not match.
l Each radio link of an NE should have a
unique link ID, and the link IDs at both
ends of a radio link should be the same.
Received Radio - - l This parameter indicates the received ID

Link ID of the radio link.
Radio Link ID at the local end, the local
end inserts the AIS signal to the
IDs do not match.
l When the radio link becomes faulty, this
parameter is displayed as an invalid
value.
IF Port Loopback Non-Loopback Non-Loopback l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Inloop loopback status of the IF interface.
l Inloop indicates that the IF signals
looped back.
l Outloop indicates that the received IF
l Generally, this parameter is used to
locate the faults that occur at each IF
interface. The IF loopback is used for
diagnosis. If this function is enabled, the
services at the related ports are affected.
In normal cases, this parameter is set to
Non-Loopback.

2M Wayside Disabled Disabled l This parameter indicates or specifies

Enable Statusa Enabled whether the radio link transmits the
wayside E1 service.
l The wayside E1 service can be supported
by the IF1 board in the
7,STM-1,28MHz,128QAM,
8,E3,28MHz,QPSK, or 9,E3,14MHz,
16QAM mode.
2M Wayside Input - - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Boarda slot in which the 2M wayside service is
accessed.
l This parameter can be set only when 2M
Wayside Enable Status is set to
Enabled.
l The wayside E1 service can be supported
by the IF1 board in the
7,STM-1,28MHz,128QAM,
8,E3,28MHz,QPSK, or 9,E3,14MHz,
16QAM mode.
350 MHz Stop Stop l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Consecutive Wave Start status of transmitting the 350 MHz
Status carrier signals at the IF interface.
l This parameter can be set to Start in the
commissioning process only. In normal
cases, this parameter is set to Stop.
Otherwise, the services are interrupted.
XPIC Enabledb Enabled Enabled l This parameter indicates or specifies

Disabled whether the XPIC function of the IFX2
board is enabled.
l If the IFX2 board does not perform the
XPIC function, this parameter should be
set to Disabled. In this case, the XPIC
cable is required to perform self-loop for
the XPIC port on the IFX2 board.
Enable IEEE-1588 Enabled Disabled If the OptiX RTN 980 is interconnected with
Timeslotc Disabled the packet radio equipment, this parameter
should be set to Enabled. Otherwise, this
parameter should be set to Disabled.
NOTE
l a. The IFU2, IFX2, ISU2, and ISX2 boards do not support way-side services.
l b. The IFU2, ISU2, and IF1 boards do not support the XPIC function.
l c. The IF1 board does not support the IEEE-1588 timeslot function.

Parameters for Hybrid/AM Configuration

NOTE
The IF1 board does not support Hybrid/AM configuration.

IF port.
IF Channel 7M - IF Channel Bandwidth indicates the

Bandwidth 14M channel spacing of the corresponding radio
link. This parameter is set according to the
28M planning information.
40M NOTE
56M l This parameter is not applicable to the IF1
board.
l The IFU2 board does not support the value
40M.
l The IFX2 board does not support the values
7M, 14M, and 40M.
l The ISX2 board does not support the values
7M and 14M.

Modulation Mode.
channel conditions.
l Hence, the Integrated IP radio can ensure
the reliable transmission of the E1
services and provide bandwidth
adaptively for the Ethernet services
when the AM function is enabled.
l The ISX2/ISU2 does not support the AM
function when IF Service Type is
SDH.


of the Guarantee 16QAM Enable Status is set to Enabled.
AM Capacity l This parameter specifies the lowest-gain
32QAM
by the service transmission bandwidth
that the Hybrid radio must ensure and the
availability of the radio link that

of the Full AM 16QAM Enable Status is set to Enabled.
Capacity l This parameter specifies the highest-gain
32QAM
by the bandwidth of the services that
need to be transmitted over the Hybrid
radio and the availability of the radio link
that corresponds to this modulation
scheme.
NOTE
Modulation Mode of the Full AM
Capacity must be higher than Modulation
Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity.
Manually QPSK QPSK l This parameter specifies the modulation

Specified 16QAM scheme that the radio link uses for signal
Modulation Mode transmission.
32QAM
64QAM Enable Status is set to Disabled.
128QAM
256QAM

STM-1 Capacity 1 1 l Specifies the STM-1 capacity of the IF

board.
l This parameter is available only when IF
Service Type is set to Hybrid(Native
STM-1+ETH) and SDH.
l If IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native
STM-1+ETH), this parameter can be set
to 0 or 1.
l If IF Service Type is SDH, this
parameter can be set to 1 or 2.
NOTE
The IFU2 and IFX2 boards do not support this
parameter.
Enable E1 Priority Disabled Disabled l This parameter specifies whether to

Enabled enable the E1 priority function.
Guarantee E1 - - l If AM Enable Status is set to Enabled,

Capacity this parameter needs to be set according
to IF Channel Bandwidth, Modulation
Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity,
and the actually transmitted services.
l If AM Enable Status is set to
Disabled, this parameter needs to be set
Manually Specified Modulation
Mode, and the actually transmitted
services.
Guarantee E1 - - Displays the E1 capacity range of the IF

Capacity Range board in guarantee capacity modulation
mode.
Data Service - - Displays the data service bandwidth of the

Bandwidth(Mbit/ IF board.
s)

Full E1 Capacity - - l This parameter specifies the number of

transmitted E1 services in Modulation
Mode of the Full AM Capacity.
l This parameter is valid if Enable E1
Priority is set to Enabled.
l E1 service bandwidth in full capacity
mode ≤ Service bandwidth in full
capacity mode - Service bandwidth in
guarantee capacity mode + E1 service
bandwidth in guarantee capacity mode.
In addition, the number of E1 services in
full capacity modulation mode should be
smaller than or equal to the maximum
number of E1 services in full capacity
modulation mode.
l The Full E1 Capacity must be set to the
Full E1 Capacity - - Displays the E1 capacity range of the IF

board in full capacity modulation mode.
Transmit-End - - Displays the modulation mode at the

Modulation Mode transmit mode.
Receive-End - - Displays the modulation mode at the receive

Modulation Mode mode.
Guarantee AM - - Displays the guarantee AM service capacity.

Service Capacity
(Mbit/s)
Full AM Service - - Displays the full AM service capacity.

Capacity(Mbit/s)
Transmitted AM - - Displays the transmitted AM service

Service Capacity capacity.
(Mbit/s)
Received AM - - Displays the received AM service capacity.

Service Capacity
(Mbit/s)
E1 Capacity For - - Displays the number of configured high-

High Priority priority E1s.
Related Concepts

Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the ATPC attributes.
Navigation Path
Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.
l Click the ATPC Attributes tab.
Parameters

IF interface.
ATPC Enable Disabled Disabled l This parameter specifies whether the

Status Enabled ATPC function is enabled.
l When this parameter is set to Enabled
and if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB
higher or lower than the central value
between the ATPC upper threshold and
the ATPC lower threshold at the receive
end, the receiver notifies the transmitter
to decrease or increase the transmit
power until the RSL is within the range
that is 2 dB higher or lower than the
central value between the ATPC upper
threshold and the ATPC lower threshold.
attributes.
ATPC Upper - -45.0 l Set the central value between the ATPC
threshold to a value for the expected
receive power.

ATPC Lower - -70.0 ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC

Threshold(dBm) lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC
Lower Threshold(dBm) to the
and the ATPC lower threshold and 10
dB.
l You can set the ATPC upper threshold
only when ATPC Automatic
Threshold(dBm) is set to Disabled.
ATPC Automatic Enabled Disabled l This parameter specifies whether the

Threshold Enable Disabled ATPC automatic threshold function is
Status enabled.
link.
l If this parameter is set to Disabled, you
need to manually set ATPC Upper
Threshold(dBm) and ATPC Lower
Threshold(dBm).
ATPC Upper - - l This parameter indicates that the

Automatic equipment automatically uses the preset
Threshold(dBm) ATPC upper and lower thresholds.
l This parameter is valid only when ATPC
ATPC Lower - -
Automatic Threshold Enable Status is
Automatic
set to Enabled.
Threshold(dBm)
Related Concepts
Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes

This section describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes.

Navigation Path
l In the NE Explorer, select the IF board, and then choose Configuration > IF Interface
l Click the AM Advanced Attributes tab.
Parameters

IF interface.
Modulation Mode - - Displays the modulation schemes.
E1 Capacity - - l You can specify the number of E1s that

can be transmitted in intermediate
modulation scheme, by setting the
advanced attributes correspondingly.
l Generally, it is recommended that this
parameter takes the default value. To
ensure that a specific number of E1s can
be transmitted in intermediate
modulation scheme, adjust the E1
capacity in each modulation scheme
according to the network planning
information.
l If the E1 priority function is enabled, the
maximum number of allowed E1
services in the current mode = Min
{[Bandwidth of the air interface in the
current mode - (Bandwidth for the
assured capacity - Assured E1 number x
2Mbps)]/2Mbps, E1 number in the
highest-gain modulation mode}.
Data Service - - Displays the data service bandwidth.

Bandwidth(Mbit/
s)
Related Concepts
Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment Records

This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATPC adjustment records.

Navigation Path
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > ATPC Adjustment Records from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Port - - This parameter indicates the port for the

ATPC adjustment.
Event NO. - - This parameter indicates the number of the

ATPC adjustment event.
Adjustment Time - - This parameter indicates the time of the

ATPC adjustment.
Adjustment - - This parameter indicates the direction of the

Direction adjustment at the port.
Switchover - - This parameter indicates the switching

operation at the port.
Transmitted - - This parameter indicates the transmitted

Power(dBm) power of the port to be switched.
Received Power - - This parameter indicates the received power

(dBm) of the port to be switched.
Parameter Description: PRBS Test

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS)
test.
Navigation Path
Configuration > PRBS Test from the Function Tree.
Parameters

PRBS test.

Direction Cross Cross l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Tributary direction of the PRBS test.
l In the tributary direction, the PRBS test
is performed to check the connectivity of
the cable from the tributary board to the
DDF.
l In the cross-connect direction, the PRBS
test is performed to check the processing
of the service from the tributary board to
the NE at the remote end.
Duration 1 to 255 1 This parameter indicates or specifies the

duration of the PRBS test.
Measured Time s s This parameter indicates or specifies the

10min time unit used for the PRBS test.
h
Start Time - - This parameter indicates the start time of the

PRBS test.
Progress - - This parameter indicates the progress

percentage of the PRBS test.
Total PRBS - - This parameter indicates the number of bit

errors that occur in the PRBS test.
Accumulating Selected Deselected This parameter specifies whether to display

Mode Deselected the values in accumulative mode. If
Accumulating Mode is selected, it
indicates that the values are displayed in
accumulative mode.
A.5.6 ODU Parameters

This topic describes parameters that are related to ODUs.
Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio Frequency Attribute

This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio frequency attributes of an ODU.
Navigation Path
l Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU
Interface from the Function Tree.
l Click the Radio Frequency Attributes tab.

Parameters
Board - - This parameter indicates the corresponding

ODU.
Transmit - - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Frequency(MHz) transmit frequency of the ODU, namely,
the central frequency of the channel.
less than the sum of the minimum
transmit frequency supported by the
ODU and a half of the channel spacing,
and must not be more than the difference
between the maximum transmit
frequency supported by the ODU and a
half of the channel spacing.
frequencies at both ends of a radio link
should be one T/R spacing.
T/R Spacing(MHz) - - l This parameter indicates or specifies the

spacing between the transmit frequency
and receive frequency of the ODU to
prevent mutual interference of the
transmitter and receiver.
l If the ODU is a Tx high station, the
transmit frequency is one T/R spacing
higher than the receive frequency. If the
ODU is a Tx low station, the transmit
frequency is one T/R spacing lower than
the receive frequency.
spacing, this parameter is set to 0,
indicating that the T/R spacing supported
by the ODU is used.
set to the same value at both ends of a
radio link.
Actual Transmit - - This parameter indicates the actual transmit

Actual Receive - - This parameter indicates the actual receive


Actual T/R - - This parameter indicates the actual T/R

Spacing(MHz) spacing of the ODU.
The range of - - This parameter indicates the working range

frequency point of the frequency of the ODU.
(MHz)
Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the power attributes of the
ODU.
Navigation Path
l Click the Power Attributes tab.
Parameters

ODU.

modulation module.
exceed this value.

Transmit Power - - l This parameter specifies the transmit

(dBm) power of the ODU. This parameter
cannot be set to a value that exceeds the
nominal power rang of the ODU or a
value that exceeds Maximum Transmit
Power(dBm).
l The transmit power of the ODU should
be set to the same value at both ends of a
radio link.
Power to Be -90.0 to -20.0 -10.0 l This parameter is used to set the expected
Received(dBm) receive power of the ODU and is mainly
used in the antenna alignment stage.
After this parameter is set, the NE
TX High - - l If the value of the actual transmit power

Threshold(dBm) of the ODU is greater than the preset
value of TX High Threshold(dBm), the
system separately records the duration
when the value of the actual transmit
power of the ODU is greater than the

TX Low Threshold - - preset value of TX High Threshold

(dBm) (dBm) and the duration when the value
of the actual transmit power of the ODU
is greater than the preset value of TX
Low Threshold(dBm) in the
performance events.
l If the value of the actual transmit power
of the ODU is greater than the preset
value of TX Low Threshold(dBm) and
is lower than the preset value of TX High
Threshold(dBm), the system records
the duration when the value of the actual
transmit power of the ODU is greater
than the preset value of TX Low
Threshold(dBm) in the performance
events.
l If the value of the actual transmit power
of the ODU is lower than the preset value
of TX Low Threshold(dBm), the
system does not record it.
l TX High Threshold(dBm) and TX
Low Threshold(dBm) are valid only
when the ATPC function is enabled.
RX High - - l If the value of the actual receive power

Threshold(dBm) of the ODU is lower than the preset value
of RX Low Threshold(dBm), the
system records the duration when the
value of the actual receive power of the
ODU is lower than the preset value of
RX Low Threshold(dBm) and duration
when the value of the actual transmit
power of the ODU is lower than the
preset value of RX High Threshold
(dBm)in the performance events.
l If the value of the actual receive power
value of RX Low Threshold(dBm) and
is lower than the preset value of RX High
Threshold(dBm), the system records
the duration when the value of the actual
receive power of the ODU is Lower than
the preset value of RX High Threshold
(dBm) in the performance events.
l If the value of the actual receive power

RX Low Threshold - - value of RX High Threshold(dBm), the

(dBm) system does not record it.
Actual Transmit - - l This parameter indicates the actual

Power(dBm) transmit power of the ODU.
l If the ATPC function is enabled, the
queried actual transmit power may be
different from the preset value.
Actual Receive - - This parameter indicates the actual receive

Power(dBm) power of the ODU.
Actual range of - - This parameter indicates the range of the

Power(dBm) actual transmit power of the ODU.

Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Equipment Information

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the equipment information of
the ODU.
Navigation Path
Configuration > ODU Interface from the Function Tree.
l Click the Equipment Information tab.

Parameters

ODU.
Frequency(GHz) - - This parameter indicates the frequency band

where the ODU operates.
Equipment Type - - l This parameter indicates the equipment

type of the ODU.
l PDH and SDH indicate the transmission
capacity only and are irrelevant to the
type of transmitted service.
T/R Spacing(MHz) - - This parameter indicates the T/R spacing of

the ODU.
Intermediate - - This parameter indicates the IF frequency

Frequency bandwidth of the ODU.
Bandwidth (MHz)
IF Bandwidth - - Displays the IF bandwidth type.

Type
Station Type - - l This parameter indicates whether the

ODU is a Tx high station or a Tx low
station.
l The transmit frequency of a Tx high
station is one T/R spacing higher than the
transmit frequency of a Tx low station.

Produce Time - - This parameter indicates the manufacturing

time of the ODU.
Produce SN - - This parameter indicates the manufacturing

serial number and the manufacturer code of
the ODU.
Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes of the
ODU.
Navigation Path
l Click the Advanced Attributes tab.

Parameters

ODU.
RF Loopback Non-Loopback Non-Loopback l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Inloop loopback status of the RF interface of the
ODU.
loopback is canceled or not performed.
l Inloop indicates that the RF signals
looped back.
l This function is used for fault locating
for the RF interfaces. The RF
Loopback function is used for diagnosis
and may affect the services that are
transmitted over the interfaces. Hence,
exercise precaution before starting this
function.
Non-Loopback.
Configure unmute unmute l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Transmission mute transmit status of the ODU.
Status l If this parameter is set to mute, the
signals.
l If this parameter is set to unmute, the
ODU can normally transmit and receive
microwave signals.
unmute.
Actual - - Displays the ODU manufacturer

Transmission information.
Status
Factory - - This parameter indicates the manufacturer

Information information about the ODU.
Remarks - - Specifies the remarks of the ODU. No

Chinese character is allowed.
A.5.7 Parameters for SDH Interface Boards

This topic describes parameters that are related to SDH interface boards.

Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the SDH interfaces.
Navigation Path
Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.
l Select By Board/Port(Channel), and select Port or VC4 Channel from the list box.
Parameters

SDH interface.
Optical Interface - - This parameter indicates or specifies the

Namea name of the optical interface.
Laser Switcha On On l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Off on/off state of the laser.
l This parameter is set for SDH optical
interfaces only.
On.
Optical(Electrical) Non-Loopback Non-Loopback l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Interface Inloop loopback status on the SDH interface.
Loopbacka l Non-Loopback indicates that the
Outloop
l Inloop indicates that the SDH signals
looped back.
l Outloop indicates that the received SDH
for the SDH interfaces. The Optical
(Electrical) Interface Loopback
function is used for diagnosis and may
affect the services that are transmitted
over the interfaces. Hence, exercise
precaution before starting this function.
Non-Loopback.

VC4 Loopbackb Non-Loopback Non-Loopback l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Inloop loopback status in the VC-4 path.
l Inloop indicates that the VC-4 signals
looped back.
l Outloop indicates that the received
VC-4 signals are looped back.
for the VC-4 paths. The VC4
Loopback function is used for diagnosis
and may affect the services that are
transmitted over the interfaces. Hence,
exercise precaution before starting this
function.
Non-Loopback.
NOTE
l a: Indicates the parameters that are supported when Port is selected from the list box.
l b: Indicates the parameters that are supported when VC4 Channel is selected from the list box.
Related Concepts
Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the automatic laser shutdown (ALS)
function.
Navigation Path
Configuration > Automatic Laser Shutdown from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Optical Interface - - This parameter indicates the corresponding

optical interface.

Automatic Disabled Disabled l This parameter indicates or specifies

Shutdown Enabled whether the Automatic Laser
Shutdown function is enabled or
disabled for the laser.
l The ALS function allows the laser to shut
down automatically when an optical port
does not carry services, an optical fiber
is broken, or no optical signal is received.
l You can set On Period(ms), Off Period
(ms), and Continuously On-test Period
(ms) only when this parameter is set to
Enabled.
On Period(ms) 1000 to 3000 2000 This parameter indicates or specifies the

period when a shutdown laser automatically
starts up and tests whether the optical fiber
is normal.
Off Period(ms) 2000 to 300000 60000 This parameter indicates or specifies the
period when the laser does not work (with
the ALS function being enabled).
Continuously On- 2000 to 300000 90000 This parameter indicates or specifies the
test Period(ms) period when a shutdown laser is manually
started up and tests whether the optical fiber
is normal.
A.5.8 Parameters for PDH Interface Boards

This topic describes parameters that are related to PDH interface boards.
Parameter Description: PDH Interfaces

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PDH interfaces.
Navigation Path
Configuration > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.
l Select By Board/Port(Channel).
l Select Port from the list box.

Parameters

port.
Port Name - - This parameter indicates or specifies the

name of the port.
Tributary Non-Loopback Non-Loopback l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Loopback Inloop loopback status in the associated path of
the tributary unit.
Outloop
l Inloop indicates that the PDH signals
looped back.
l Outloop indicates that the received PDH
for the paths of the tributary unit. The
Tributary Loopback function is used
for diagnosis and may affect the services
that are transmitted over the interfaces.
Hence, exercise precaution before
starting this function.
Non-Loopback.
Port Impedance - - This parameter indicates the impedance of a

path, which depends on the tributary unit.
Service Load Load Load l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Indication Non-Loaded service loading status in a specific path.
l When this parameter is set to Load, the
board detects whether alarms exist in the
path.
Loaded, the board does not detect
whether there are alarms in the path.
l If a path does not carry any services, you
can set this parameter to Non-Loaded
for the path to mask all the alarms. If a
path carries services, you need to set this
parameter to Load for the path.

Retiming Mode Normal Normal l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Retiming Mode of retiming mode of a specific path.
Tributary Clock l By using the retiming function, the
Retiming Mode of retiming reference signal from the SDH
Cross-Connect network and the service data signal are
Clock combined and then sent to the client
equipment, thus decreasing the output
jitter in the signal. In this way, the
retiming function ensures that the service
code flow can normally transfer the
retiming reference signal.
l When this parameter is set to Normal,
the retiming function is not used.
l When this parameter is set to Retiming
Mode of Tributary Clock, the retiming
function is used with the clock of the
upstream tributary unit traced.
l When this parameter is set to Retiming
Mode of Cross-Connect Clock, the
retiming function is used with the clock
of the cross-connect unit traced.
l It is recommended that the external
clock, instead of the retiming function,
should be used to provide reference
clock signals for the equipment.
l If the retiming function is required, it is
recommended that you set this parameter
to Retiming Mode of Cross-connect
Clock.
Port Service Type - - This parameter indicates the type of services

that are processed in a path. It depends on
the services that are transmitted in a path.
Input Signal Unequalized Unequalized l This parameter indicates whether the

Equalization Equalized input signals are equalized.
parameter to default value.
Parameter Description: PRBS Test

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS)
test.
Navigation Path
Configuration > PRBS Test from the Function Tree.

Parameters

PRBS test.
Direction Cross Cross l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Tributary direction of the PRBS test.
l In the tributary direction, the PRBS test
is performed to check the connectivity of
the cable from the tributary board to the
DDF.
l In the cross-connect direction, the PRBS
test is performed to check the processing
of the service from the tributary board to
the NE at the remote end.
Duration 1 to 255 1 This parameter indicates or specifies the

duration of the PRBS test.
Measured Time s s This parameter indicates or specifies the

10min time unit used for the PRBS test.
h
Start Time - - This parameter indicates the start time of the

PRBS test.
Progress - - This parameter indicates the progress

percentage of the PRBS test.
Total PRBS - - This parameter indicates the number of bit

errors that occur in the PRBS test.
Accumulating Selected Deselected This parameter specifies whether to display

Mode Deselected the values in accumulative mode. If
Accumulating Mode is selected, it
indicates that the values are displayed in
accumulative mode.
A.5.9 Parameters for Overhead

This topic describes the parameters that are related to overhead.
Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the regenerator section overheads
(RSOHs).

Navigation Path
1. Select an SDH interface board in the NE Explorer Choose Configuration > Overhead
Management > Regenerator Section Overhead from the Function Tree.
2. Choose Display in Text Format or Display in Hexadecimal.
Parameters for Setting the Display Format

Display in Text Selected Selected This parameter specifies the display in the
Format Deselected text format.
Display in Selected Deselected This parameter specifies the display in the

Hexadecimal Deselected hexadecimal format.

Object - - This parameter indicates the object to be set.
J0 to be Sent - [16 Bytes]HuaWei If the NE at the opposite end reports the

([Mode]Content) SBS J0_MM alarm, this parameter is set
according to the J0 byte to be received at the
opposite end.
J0 to be Received - [Disabled] l This parameter specifies the J0 byte to be

([Mode]Content) received.
l If this parameter is set to [Disabled], the
board does not monitor the received J0
byte.
default value.
J0 Received - - This parameter indicates the J0 byte that is

([Mode]Content) actually received.
Related Concepts
Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the VC-4 path overheads (POHs).

Navigation Path
1. Select SDH interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > Overhead Management > VC4 Path Overhead from the Function Tree.


Parameters for the Trace Byte J1


([Mode]Content) SBS HP_TIM or LP_TIM alarm, this parameter
is set according to the J1 byte to be received
at the opposite end.
J1 to be Received - [Disabled] l If this parameter is set to [Disabled], the

([Mode]Content) board does not monitor the received J1
byte.
default value.
J1 Received - - This parameter displays the J1 byte that is

([Mode]Content) actually received.
Parameters for the Signal Flag C2

C2 to be Sent - - If the NE at the opposite end reports the

HP_SLM alarm, this parameter is set
according to the C2 byte to be received at the
opposite end.

C2 to be Received - - If the NE at the local end reports the

HP_SLM alarm, this parameter is set
according to the C2 byte to be sent at the
opposite end.
C2 Received - - This parameter displays the C2 byte that is

actually received.
Parameters for Overhead Termination

VC4 Overhead Termination Auto l If this parameter is set to Pass-

Termination Pass-Through Through, the NE forwards the original
overhead after monitoring the VC-4 path
Auto overhead regardless of the C2 byte.
l If this parameter is set to Termination,
the NE generates the new VC-4 path
overhead according to the board setting
after monitoring the VC-4 path overhead
regardless of the C2 byte.
l If this parameter is set to Auto, the VC-4
path overhead in the VC-4 pass-through
service is passed through, and the VC-4
path overhead in the VC-12 service is
terminated.
default value.
Related Concepts
Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the VC-12 path overheads (POHs).
Navigation Path
1. Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > Overhead Management > VC12 Path Overhead from the Function
Tree.



Parameters for the Trace Byte


SBS LP_TIM or LP_TIM_VC12 alarm, this
parameter is set according to the J2 byte to
be received by the NE at the opposite end.
J2 to be Received - [Disabled] l If this parameter is set to [Disabled], the

board does not monitor the received J2
byte.
default value.
NOTE
IF boards do not support this parameter.
J2 Received - - This parameter displays the J2 byte that is

actually received.
Parameters for the Signal Flag

Signal Label - - If the NE at the opposite end reports the

(L1,L2,L3 of V5) to LP_SLM or LP_SLM_VC12 alarm, this
be Sent parameter is set according to the V5 byte to
be received at the opposite end.

Signal Label - - If the NE at the local end reports the

(L1,L2,L3 of V5) to LP_SLM or LP_SLM_VC12 alarm, this
be Received parameter is set according to the V5 byte to
be sent at the opposite end.
NOTE
IF boards do not support this parameter.
Signal Label - - This parameter displays the V5 byte that is

(L1,L2,L3 of V5) actually received.
Received
Related Concepts
A.6 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet

Featureson the Packet Plane
This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet services and Ethernet featureson the packet
plane, including service parameters, protocol parameters, OAM parameters, Ethernet port
parameters, and QoS parameters.
A.6.1 Parameters for Ethernet Services

This topic describes the parameters that are related to Ethernet services.
A.6.2 Parameters for Ethernet Protocols
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet protocol.
A.6.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet operation, administration and
maintenance (OAM).
A.6.4 QoS Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to QoS.
A.6.1 Parameters for Ethernet Services

This topic describes the parameters that are related to Ethernet services.
Parameter Description: E-Line Service_Creation

This topic describes the interface parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet line (E-Line)
service.

Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.
2. Click New.
Table A-4 Service direction of UNI-UNI

Service ID 1 to 4294967294 - This parameter specifies

the ID of the E-Line
service.
Service Name - - This parameter specifies

the name of the E-Line
service.
Direction UNI-UNI UNI-UNI l This parameter

UNI-NNI specifies the direction
of the E-Line service.
NNI-NNI
l Set this parameter to
UNI-UNI.

BPDU Not Transparently Not Transparently l This parameter

Transmitted Transmitted specifies the
Transparently transparent
Transmitted transmission ID of the
bridge protocol data
unit (BPDU) packets.
It is used to indicate
whether the E-Line
service transparently
transmits the BPDU
packets.
l If the BPDU packets
are used as the service
packets and
transparently
transmitted to the
opposite end, set this
parameter to
Transparently
Transmitted. That is,
the parameter value
Transparently
Transmitted takes
effect only if
Encapsulation Type
of the source and sink
ports of the E-Line
service are Null.
l In other cases, set this
parameter to Not
Transparently
Transmitted.
according to the
MTU(byte) - - This parameter cannot be

set here.
Service Tag Role - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

not support this
parameter.

Source Port - - l Before setting this

parameter, check and
ensure that the
attributes in Ethernet
Interface of the port
are set correctly and
are the same as the
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
the same as the value
of sink port.
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
used for the E-LAN
port.
according to the

Source VLANs 1 to 4094 - l This parameter can be

set to null, a number,
or several numbers.
When setting this
parameter to several
numbers, use the
comma (,) to separate
the discrete numbers,
or use the endash (-) to
represent a
consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and
6.
l The number of
VLANs must be the
same value of Sink
VLANs. Otherwise,
you need to create a
VLAN forwarding
table for swapping
VLAN IDs.
to null, all the services
at the source port are
used as the service
source.
l If this parameter is not
set to null, only the
service that contains
the VLAN ID at the
source port can be used
as the service source.

Sink Port - - l Before setting this

ensure that the
are the same as the
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
of Source Port.
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
used for the E-LAN
port.
according to the

Sink VLANs 1 to 4094 - l This parameter can be

or several numbers.
When setting this
numbers, use the
represent a
consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
6.
l The number of
VLANs must be the
same value of Source
VLANs.
at the sink port are
used as the service
sink.
the VLAN ID at the
sink port can be used
as the service sink.
Table A-5 Service direction of UNI-NNI (carried by PWs)


service.

service.

NNI-NNI
UNI-NNI.

BPDU Not Transparently Not Transparently For UNI-NNI ETH

Transmitted Transmitted PWE3 services, the
Transparently parameter value is always
Transmitted Not Transparently
Transmitted
.

set here.

not support this
parameter.

ensure that the
are the same as the
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
of sink port.
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
used for the E-LAN
port.
according to the


or several numbers.
When setting this
numbers, use the
represent a
consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
6.
used as the service
source.
the VLAN ID at the
source port can be
used as the service
source.
PRI - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

not support this
parameter.
Bearer Type QinQ Link PW For UNI-NNI ETH

PW PWE3 services, the
parameter value is always
PW.

Protection Type No Protection No Protection l If this parameter is set

PW APS to PW APS, working
and protection PWs
Slave Protection Pair need to be configured.
to Slave Protection
Pair, you need to bind
the slave PW APS
protection group with
the master PW APS
protection group. The
switching of the
master PW APS
protection group
triggers the switching
of the slave PW APS
protection group
simultaneously.
Table A-6 Service direction of UNI-NNI (carried by QinQ links)

service.

service.

NNI-NNI
UNI-NNI.
BPDU Not Transparently Not Transparently For UNI-NNI QinQ

Transmitted Transmitted services, the parameter
Transparently value is always
Transmitted
.

set here.

not support this
parameter.


ensure that the
are the same as the
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
of sink port.
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
used for the E-LAN
port.
according to the

or several numbers.
When setting this
numbers, use the
represent a
consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
6.
used as the service
source.
the VLAN ID at the
source port can be used
as the service source.

Bearer Type QinQ Link PW For NNI-NNI QinQ

PW services, the parameter
value is always QinQ
Link.
QinQ Link ID - - Selects or specifies the ID

of a QinQ link.
Table A-7 Service direction of NNI-NNI


service.

service.

NNI-NNI
NNI-NNI.
BPDU Not Transparently Not Transparently For NNI-NNI QinQ

Transmitted Transmitted services, the parameter
Transparently value is always
Transmitted
.

set here.

not support this
parameter.
Bearer Type 1 QinQ Link QinQ Link Uses the QinQ link to
carry the E-Line service.
QinQ Link ID 1 - - l Selects the QinQ link

ID of the first QinQ
link.
l The QinQ link ID is
preset in QinQ Link.
Bearer Type 2 QinQ Link QinQ Link Uses the QinQ link to
carry the E-Line service.

QinQ Link ID 2 - - l Selects the QinQ link

ID of the second QinQ
link.
l The QinQ link ID is
QinQ Link ID - - Selects or specifies the ID

of a QinQ link.
Parameters of PWs
NOTE
l Parameters of PWs need to be configured only when Direction is UNI-NNI and Bearer Type is PW.
l If the parameter Protection Type of PWs is set to PW APS or Slave Protection Pair, all the parameters
of working and protection PWs need to be configured. This section considers the parameters of the working
PW as an example.
PW ID - - Specifies the ID of the PW

that carries services.
PW Signaling Type Static Static Labels for static PWs need

to be manually assigned.
PW Type Ethernet Ethernet l Specifies the type of

Ethernet Tagged Mode the PW.
l PW Type indicates
whether P-TAG is
added to Ethernet
frames that are
encapsulated for
transmission on PWs.
If it is not required to
add VLAN IDs, set this
parameter to
Ethernet. If it is
required to add VLAN
IDs, set this parameter
to Ethernet Tagged
Mode and then set
Request VLAN in the
Advanced Attributes
tab.
Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional Displays the direction of

the PW.

PW Encapsulation Type MPLS MPLS Displays the

encapsulation type of the
packets on the PW.
PW Ingress Label/ 16 to 1048575 - Specifies the PW Ingress

Source Port label.
PW Egress Label/Sink 16 to 1048575 - Specifies the PW Egress

Port label.
Tunnel selection mode - - Displays the method to

select tunnels.
Tunnel Type MPLS MPLS Displays the type of the

tunnel that carries the PW.
Tunnel - - A tunnel needs to be

selected. If no tunnel is
available, creation of a
PW will fail.
Opposite LSR ID - - Specifies the LSR ID of

the PW at the remote end.
If an existing tunnel is
selected, the LSR ID will
be automatically assigned.
Egress Tunnel - - For a bidirectional tunnel,

the system will configure
the reverse tunnel
automatically.
QoS Parameters
NOTE
QoS parameters need to be configured only when Direction is UNI-NNI and Bearer Type is PW.

Bandwidth Limit - - Specifies whether the

bandwidth limit function
is enabled.
l This function limits the
bandwidth of one or
more PWs in an MPLS
tunnel.
l An ETH PWE3 service
corresponds to a PW.
Therefore, this
function can also limit
the bandwidth of ETH
PWE3 services in an
MPLS tunnel.
Policy - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

CIR(Kbit/s) - - Specifies the committed

information rate (CIR) of
a PW.
It is recommended that
you set this parameter to
the same value as PIR.
CBS(byte) - - Specifies the committed

burst size (CBS) of a PW.
PIR(Kbit/s) - - Specifies the peak

information rate (PIR) of a
PW.
the same value as CIR.
PBS(byte) - - Specifies the peak burst

size (PBS) of a PW.
EXP - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

LSP Mode Pipe Pipe Pipe: When stripping

MPLS tunnel labels from
packets, an egress node
does not update the
scheduling priority for the
packets.

Parameters of Advanced Attributes

Control Word No Use No Use For ETH PWE3 services,

the parameter value is
always No Use.
Control Channel Type None Alert Label l Specifies the mode of

Alert Label PW connectivity
check.
l None indicates that
VCCV is not used.
l Alert Label indicates
VCCV packets in
Alert Label
encapsulation mode.
VCCV Verification Ping Ping l Specifies the VCCV

Mode None verification mode. The
VCCV verification is
used for PW
connectivity check.
l If the VCCV-Ping test
is required, set this
parameter to Ping.
Request VLAN - - l Set this parameter

when PW Type is
Ethernet Tagged
Mode.
l If the received packets
do not carry any
VLAN IDs, the PW
will add VLAN IDs to
the packets as required
by the setting of this
parameter.
TPID - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

not support request VLAN
TPID of the PW level.
Protection Group Parameters (PW APS)

NOTE
The parameters of the PW APS protection group need to be configured if the Protection Type of PWs is set to
PW APS.

Protection Type - - Specifies the protection

type.
Protection Group ID - - Specifies the protection

group ID.
Enabling Status Disabled Disabled l Specifies the enabling

Enabled status of the PW
protection group.
l During the creation of
a protection group, set
Enabling Status to
Disabled. After the
APS protection group
is configured at both
ends, set Enabling
Status to Enabled.
Protection Mode - - Displays the protection

mode.
Working PW ID - - Displays the ID of the

working PW.
Protection PW ID - - Displays the ID of the

protection PW.
Switching Mode - - Displays the switching

mode to be used when a
PW fails.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980 support
dual-ended switching.
Revertive Mode Non-revertive Revertive l This parameter

Revertive specifies whether to
switch services back to
the original working
PW after it recovers.
l The value Revertive
indicates that services
are switched to the
original working PW
and the value Non-
revertive indicates
that services are not
switched to the
original working PW.
l The value Revertive is
recommended.

Switchover Restoration 1 to 12 1 l Specifies the WTR

Time(min) time of the protection
group.
l When the preset WTR
time expires after the
original working PW
recovers, services are
switched to the
l This parameter is
available only when
Restoration Mode is
Revertive.
l The default value is
recommended.
Switchover Delay Time 0 to 100 0 l Specifies the hold-off

(100ms) time of the protection
group.
to a value other than 0,
the protection group
does not trigger
switching once it
detects faults, but waits
until the hold-off time
expires, and then
detects whether any
faults persist. If any
faults persist, the
switching is triggered;
otherwise, no
switching is triggered.
recommended.
Detection mode - - Displays the detection

mode of the PW APS
protection group.
OAM Parameters
NOTE
l The OAM parameters of the PW APS protection group need to be configured if the Protection Type of
PWs is set to PW APS.
l To configure PW OAM parameters, choose Configuration > MPLS Management > PW Management >
PW OAM Parameter from the Function Tree.

OAM Status - - Displays the enabling

status of PW OAM.
Detection Mode Auto-Sensing Auto-Sensing l Specifies the detection

Manual mode of OAM packets.
l Manual: The
connectivity check
(CC) packets are sent
at the interval specified
by the user.
l Auto-Sensing: The
connectivity check
at the interval of
receiving PW OAM
packets.
l If Detection Mode is
set to Manual, you
need to set the PW
OAM detection
packets to be received
and transmitted.
l The value Auto-
Sensing is
recommended.

Detection Packet Type CV CV l CV: The detection

FFD packets are sent at a
fixed interval.
l FFD: The detection
packets are sent at the
interval specified by
the user.
set to Auto-Sensing,
this parameter
specifies the PW OAM
detection packets to be
transmitted.
set to Manual, this
parameter specifies the
PW OAM detection
and transmitted.
l The value FFD is
assumed for PW APS
and the value CV is
assumed for
continuous
connectivity check on
PWs.
Detection Packet Period 3.3 50 l Specifies the period of

(ms) 10 detection packets.
20 l This parameter is
configurable when
50 Detection Packet
100 Type is FFD and
200 assumes the fixed
value of 1000 when
500
Detection Packet
Type is CV.
3.3 for PW APS.
LSR ID to be Received - - Specifies the LSR ID to be

received.
PW ID to be Received - - Specifies the PW ID to be

received.

Protection Group Parameters (Slave Protection Pair)

NOTE
Slave Protection Pair.

mode.
Protection Group ID - - Specifies the ID of the

slave protection pair. The
switching of the master
PW APS protection group
triggers the switching of
the slave PW APS
protection group
simultaneously.

working PW in the slave
protection pair.

protection PW in the slave
protection pair.
Parameter Description: E-Line Service

This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-Line services.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet

Service ID 1 to 4294967294 - This parameter indicates

service.
Service Name - - This parameter indicates

or specifies the name of
the E-Line service.
Source Node - - This parameter indicates

the source node.

Sink Node - - This parameter indicates

the sink node.

not support this
parameter.

set here.
BPDU Not Transparently - This parameter indicates

Transmitted the transparent
Transparently transmission tag of the
Transmitted bridge protocol data unit
(BPDU) packets. This
parameter is used to
indicate whether the
Ethernet line
transparently transmits
the BPDU packets.
Deployment Status - - This parameter indicates

whether E-Line service is
deployed.
Parameters Associated with UNI Ports


the UNI port.

VLANs 1 to 4094 - This parameter indicates

or specifies the VLAN ID
of the UNI port.
l This parameter can be
or several numbers.
When setting this
numbers, use the
represent a
consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
6.
only when Direction
is set to UNI-UNI or
UNI-NNI in the
process of creating an
E-Line service.
of the UNI work as the
service source or
service sink.
services of the UNI
port whose VLAN IDs
are included in the set
value of this parameter
work as the service
source or service sink.
NNI Parameters (PW)

PW ID - - Displays the PW ID.
Working Status - - Displays the working

status of a PW.

Enable Status - - Displays whether a PW is

enabled.
PW Signaling Type - - Displays the PW signaling

type.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980 uses
static PWs only.
PW Type - - Displays the configured

PW type.
Direction - - Displays the direction of

the PW.
PW Encapsulation Type - - Displays the PW

encapsulation type.
NOTE
MPLS only.
PW Ingress Label/ - - Displays the configured

Source Port PW ingress label.
PW Egress Label/Sink - - Displays the configured

Port PW egress label.

tunnel that carries a PW.
Tunnel - - Displays the tunnel ID.
Opposite LSR ID - - Displays the opposite

LSR ID.
Control Word - - For ETH PWE3 services,

always No Use.
Control Channel Type - - Displays the control

channel type.
VCCV Verification - - Displays the VCCV

Mode mode.
Local Working Status - - Displays the working

status of the PW at the
local end.
Remote Working Status - - Displays the working

remote end.

Compositive Working - - Displays the

Status comprehensive working
status of the PW.
Request VLAN - - Displays the request

VLAN.
Deployment Status - - Displays the deployment

status.
Tunnel Automatic - - Displays the automatic

Selection Policy tunnel selection policy.

not support request
VLAN TPID of the PW
level.
Parameters Associated with NNI Ports

QinQ Link ID 1 to 4294967295 - l This parameter

indicates the QinQ link
ID of the QinQ link
connected to the NNI
port.
only when Direction
UNI-NNI in the
E-Line service.
Port - - l This parameter

indicates the NNI port.
only when Direction
UNI-NNI in the
E-Line service.

S-VLAN ID - - l This parameter

indicates or specifies
the VLAN ID of the
NNI port.
only when Direction
is set to UNI-NNI or
NNI-NNI in the
E-Line service.
l This parameter is
QoS Parameters
Direction - - l Displays the direction

of the PW.
l Egress indicates the
egress direction of the
PW.
l Ingress indicates the
ingress direction of the
PW.
Bandwidth Limit - - Displays or specifies

whether the bandwidth
limit function is enabled
for a PW to prevent
network congestion.
l Regarding
transmission channels,
this function can be
used to limit the
bandwidth of one or
more PWs in an MPLS
tunnel.
l An ETH PWE3
service corresponds to
a PW. Therefore, this
PWE3 services in an
MPLS tunnel.


not support this
parameter.
CIR (Kbit/s) - - Displays or specifies the

committed information
rate (CIR) of a PW.
CBS (kbyte) - - Displays or specifies the

committed burst size
(CBS) of a PW.
PIR (kbit/s) - - Displays or specifies the

peak information rate
(PIR) of a PW.
PBS (kbyte) - - Displays or specifies the

peak burst size (PBS) of a
PW.

not support this
parameter.

does not update the
packets.
Parameters for the Port Attributes

Port - - Displays the port

information.

Enable Port - - l This parameter

indicates whether to
enable the port.
l This parameter is
preset in General
Attributes of
Ethernet Interface.
Encapsulation Type Null - l This parameter

802.1Q indicates the
encapsulation type of
QinQ the port.
only when Direction
UNI-NNI in the
E-Line service.
to Null, the port
transparently
transmits the received
packets.
to 802.1Q, the port
identifies the packets
that comply with the
IEEE 802.1Q
standard.
to QinQ, the port
identifies the packets
that comply with the
IEEE 802.1 QinQ
standard.
l This parameter is
preset in General
Attributes of
Ethernet Interface.
TAG Tag Aware l This parameter

Access indicates the tag of the
port.
Hybrid
l This parameter is
preset in Layer 2
Attributes of
Ethernet Interface .


NOTE
The following parameters are available only after the PW APS protection group is configured.
Protection Group ID - - Displays the ID of the

protection group to be
created.

working PW.

protection PW.

mode.
Enabling Status Enabled - l Displays or specifies

Disabled the enabling status of
the PW protection
group.
Enabling Status to
Disabled. After the
ends, set Enabling
Status to Enabled.
Switchover Mode - - Displays the switching

PW fails.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980
supporting dual-ended
switching.

Restoration Mode Non-revertive - l Specifies whether to

Revertive switch services to the
original working PW
after the fault is
rectified.
are switched to the
original working PW
and the value Non-
revertive indicates
switched to the
recommended.
Switchover Restoration 1 to 12 - l Displays or specifies

Time(min) the WTR time of the
protection group.
original working PW
switched to the
l This parameter is
available only when
Restoration Mode is
Revertive.
Switchover Delay Time 0 to 100 - l Displays or specifies

(100ms) the hold-off time of the
protection group.
does not trigger
switching once it
expires, and then
detects whether any
faults persist, the
otherwise, no

Deployment Status - - Display the deployment

status of the protection
group.
Switchover Status - - Displays the switchover

group.
Protocol Status - - Displays the enabling

status of the protocol.
Working Path Status - - Displays the status of the

current working path.
Protection Path Status - - Display the status of the

current protection path.

NOTE
The following parameters are available only after the slave protection pair is configured.

the slave PW APS
protection group
simultaneously.

protection pair.

protection pair.
DNI PW ID - - Displays the DNI PW ID.
PW Type - - Displays the PW type.

status of the slave
protection pair.

Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding Table Item_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating VLAN forwarding table items.
Navigation Path
2. Click the VLAN Forwarding Table Item tab.
3. Click New.
Parameters for VLAN Forwarding Table Item

Source Interface Type V-UNI V-UNI This parameter specifies

the network attribute of
the source interface.
Source Interface - - This parameter specifies

the source interface.
Source VLAN ID 1 to 4094 - This parameter specifies

the VLAN ID of the
source service.
Sink Interface Type V-UNI V-UNI This parameter specifies

the network attribute of
the sink interface.
Sink Interface - - This parameter specifies

the sink interface.
Sink VLAN ID 1 to 4094 - This parameter specifies

the VLAN ID of the sink
service.
NOTE
l The VLAN ID of the UNI-UNI E-Line service can be converted after a VLAN forwarding table item is
created. In this case, a service from Source Interface to Sink Interface carries the VLAN ID specified in
Sink VLAN ID when the service is transmitted from Sink Interface.
l The VLAN ID in a VLAN forwarding table item is converted unidirectionally and can be converted from
Source VLAN ID to Sink VLAN ID only. The VLAN ID can be converted bidirectionally only when the
other VLAN forwarding table item is configured reversely.
l In normal cases, Ethernet services are bidirectional. Hence, you need to set bidirectional conversion of
VLAN IDs.
Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet local area network (E-
LAN) service.

Navigation Path
Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.
2. Click New.

Service ID 1 to 4294967294 - l This parameter

specifies the ID of the
E-LAN service.
l The OptiX RTN 980
supports simultaneous
creation of an E-LAN
service only.

the name of the E-LAN
service.
BPDU - - l This parameter

indicates the
transparent
transmission tag of the
BPDU packets.
l In the case of an E-
LAN service, this
parameter supports
only Not
Transparently
Transmitted and
cannot be set
manually.
l Not Transparently
Transmitted
indicates that the
BPDU packets are
used as the protocol
packets to compute the
spanning tree topology
of the network.

Tag Type C-Awared C-Awared l C-Awared indicates

S-Awared that the packets are
learnt according to C-
Tag-Transparent Tag (the VLAN tag on
the client-side). To
create the 802.1q
bridge, set this
parameter to C-
Awared.
l S-Awared indicates
that the packets are
learnt according to S-
Tag (the VLAN tag at
the carrier service
layer). To create the
802.1ad bridge, set this
parameter to S-
Awared.
l Tag-Transparent
indicates that only the
Ethernet packets that
do not contain VLAN
tags are accessed. To
create the 802.1d
bridge, set this
parameter to Tag-
Transparent.
according to the

Self-Learning MAC Enabled Enabled l This parameter

Address Disabled specifies whether to
enable the MAC
address self-learning
function.
l If the MAC self-
learning function of an
Ethernet LAN is
enabled, the Ethernet
LAN learns an MAC
address according to
the original MAC
address in the packet
and automatically
refreshes the MAC
address forwarding
table.
l If the MAC self-
Ethernet LAN is
disabled, a static MAC
address forwarding
table is recommended
to be configured.
MAC Address Learning - - l This parameter

Mode indicates the mode
used to learn an MAC
address.
l When the bridge uses
the SVL mode, all the
VLANs share one
MAC address table. If
the bridge uses the IVL
mode, each VLAN has
an MAC address table.
Deployment Status - - This parameter indicates

whether E-LAN service is
deployed.

set here.

not support this
parameter.

Parameters for UNIs


the UNI port.
SVLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameter

specifies the S-VLAN
ID of the UNI port.
only when Tag Type
is set to S-Awared.
according to the
VLANs/CVLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameter

specifies the VLAN ID
of the UNI port.
or several numbers.
When setting this
numbers, use the
represent a
consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
6.
of the UNI work as the
service source or
service sink.
services of the UNI
port whose VLAN IDs
are included in the set
work as the service
source or service sink.

Parameters of NNIs

only when Tag Type
is set to S-Awared.
SVLANs - - l This parameter

ID of the NNI port.
only when Tag Type
is set to S-Awared.
Parameters for the Split Horizon Group

Split Horizon Group ID - 1 l This parameter

indicates the ID of the
split horizon group.
l The default split
horizon group ID is 1
and cannot be set
manually.

Split Horizon Group - - l A split horizon group

Member member indicates the
logical port member in
the split horizon
group.
l The port members that
are added to the same
split horizon group
cannot communicate
with each other.
l The OptiX RTN 980
supports only the
division of the split
horizon group
members according to
the Ethernet physical
port.
l If a UNI or NNI logical
port of the 802.1ad
bridge is added to a
split horizon group
member, the physical
port that is mounted
with the logical port is
automatically added to
the split horizon group
member.
Parameter Description: E-LAN Service

This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-LAN services.
Navigation Path
Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.


Service ID 1 to 4294967294 - l This parameter

E-LAN service.
l The supports
simultaneous creation
of an E-LAN service
only.

the name of the E-LAN
service.
BPDU - - l This parameter

indicates the
transparent
transmission tag of the
BPDU packets.
l In the case of an E-
LAN service, this
parameter supports
only Not
Transparently
Transmitted and
cannot be set
manually.
l Not Transparently
Transmitted
indicates that the
BPDU packets are
used as the protocol
packets to compute the
spanning tree topology
of the network.

Tag Type C-Awared C-Awared l C-Awared indicates

S-Awared that the packets are
learnt according to C-
Tag-Transparent Tag (the VLAN tag on
the client-side). To
create the 802.1q
bridge, set this
parameter to C-
Awared.
l S-Awared indicates
learnt according to S-
Tag (the VLAN tag at
the carrier service
layer). To create the
802.1ad bridge, set this
parameter to S-
Awared.
l Tag-Transparent
indicates that only the
Ethernet packets that
do not contain VLAN
tags are accessed. To
create the 802.1d
bridge, set this
parameter to S-
Awared.

Self-Learning MAC Enabled Enabled l This parameter

Address indicates whether to
enable the MAC
address self-learning
function.
l If the MAC self-
Ethernet LAN is
enabled, the Ethernet
LAN learns an MAC
address according to
the original MAC
address in the packet
and automatically
refreshes the MAC
address forwarding
table.
l If the MAC self-
Ethernet LAN is
disabled, a static MAC
address forwarding
table is recommended
to be configured.
MAC Address Learning - - l This parameter

Mode indicates the mode
used to learn an MAC
address.
l When the bridge uses
the SVL mode, all the
VLANs share one
MAC address table. If
the bridge uses the IVL
mode, each VLAN has
an MAC address table.

queried here.

not support this
parameter.

Parameters for UNIs


the UNI port.

ID of the UNI port.
only when Tag Type
is set to S-Awared.
according to the
VLANs/CVLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameter

of the UNI port.
or several numbers.
When setting this
numbers, use the
represent a
consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
6.
to null, the E-LAN
service exclusively
uses the corresponding
UNI physical port.
That is, the entire port
is mounted to the
bridge.
to a non-null value,
only the
corresponding UNI
port whose service
packets contain this
VLAN ID works as the
logical port and is
mounted to the bridge.

Parameters for NNIs


only when Tag Type
is set to S-Awared.
SVLANs - - l This parameter

ID of the UNI port.
only when Tag Type
is set to S-Awared.
or several numbers.
When setting this
numbers, use the
represent a
consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
6.

Parameters for Static MAC Addresses

VLAN ID - - l This parameter is

invalid if MAC
Address Learning
Mode is SVL. That is,
the preset static MAC
address entries are
valid for all VLANs.
l If MAC Address
Learning Mode is set
to IVL, the preset
static MAC address
entries are valid for
only the VLANs
whose VLAN ID is
equal to the preset
VLAN ID.
according to the
MAC Address - - l This parameter

the static MAC
address.
l A static MAC address
is an address that is set
manually. It is not
aged automatically
and needs to be deleted
manually.
l Generally, a static
MAC address is used
for the port that
receives but does not
forward Ethernet
service packets or the
port whose MAC
address need not be
aged automatically.
Egress Interface - - l This parameter

specifies the Ethernet
port that corresponds
to the MAC address.
according to the

Parameters for Self-Learning MAC Address

VLAN ID - - l This parameter is

invalid if MAC
Address Learning
Mode is SVL. That is,
the preset self-learning
MAC address entries
are valid for all
VLANs.
l If MAC Address
Learning Mode is set
to IVL, the preset self-
learning MAC address
entries are valid for
only the VLANs
whose VLAN ID is
equal to the preset
VLAN ID.
according to the

the self-learning MAC
address. A self-
learning MAC address
is also called a
dynamic MAC
address.
l A self-learning MAC
address is an entry
obtained by a bridge in
SVL or IVL learning
mode. A self-learning
MAC address can be
aged.
Egress Interface - - l This parameter

specifies the Ethernet
port that corresponds
to the MAC address.
according to the

Parameters Associated with MAC Address Learning

Aging Ability Enabled Enabled The OptiX RTN 980

Disabled supports enabling/
disabling of the aging
Aging Time(min) 1 to 65535 5 function and aging time
for the MAC address
table.
If one routing entry is not
updated in a certain
period, that is, if no new
packet from this MAC
address is received to
enable the re-learning of
this MAC address, this
routing entry is
automatically deleted.
This mechanism is called
aging, and this period is
called aging time. The
aging time of a MAC
address table is 5 minutes
by default.
Parameters for Disabled MAC Addresses

VLAN ID - - This parameter indicates

or specifies the VLAN ID
of the service. A disabled
MAC address is valid for
the VLAN whose VLAN
ID is equal to the preset
VLAN ID.


specifies or indicates
the disabled MAC
address. A disabled
MAC address is also
called a blacklisted
MAC address.
l This parameter is used
for discarding an
entry, also called a
black hole entry,
whose data frame that
contains a specific
destination MAC
address. A disabled
MAC address needs to
be set manually and
cannot be aged.
Parameters for Unknown Frame Processing

Frame Type Unicast - This parameter indicates

Multicast the type of the received
unknown frame.
Handing Mode Discard Broadcast Selects the method of

Broadcast processing the unknown
frame. If this parameter is
set to Discard, the
unknown frame is directly
discarded. If this
parameter is set to
Broadcast, the unknown
frame is broadcast at the
forwarding port.

Parameters for the Split Horizon Group

Split Horizon Group ID - 1 l This parameter

split horizon group.
l The default split
horizon group ID is 1
and cannot be set
manually.
Split Horizon Group - - l A split horizon group

Member member indicates the
logical port member in
the split horizon
group.
l The port members that
are added to different
split horizon groups
cannot communicate
with each other.
l The supports only the
division of the split
horizon group
members according to
the Ethernet physical
port.
l If a UNI or NNI logical
port of the 802.1ad
bridge is added to a
split horizon group
member, the physical
port that is mounted
with the logical port is
automatically added to
the split horizon group
member.
Maintenance Association Parameters

Maintenance - - This parameter indicates the maintenance

Domain Name domain of the created maintenance
association.

Maintenance - - l This parameter specifies the name of the

Association Name maintenance association, which is a
domain related to a service. Through
maintenance association division, the
connectivity check (CC) can be
performed on the network that transmits
a service instance.
l This parameter can contain a maximum
of eight bytes.
CC Test Transmit 1s 1s l This parameter specifies the interval for

Period 10s transmitting packets in the CC test.
1m l The CC is performed to check the
availability of the service.
10m
Parameters for the MEP


Domain Name domain of the created MEP.

Association Name association of the created MEP.
Node - - This parameter indicates the MEP node.
VLAN - - This parameter indicates the VLAN ID of

the current service.
MEP ID 1 to 2048 1 l This parameter specifies the MEP ID.

l Each MEP needs to be configured with
an MEP ID, which is unique in the
maintenance association. The MEP ID is
required in the OAM operation.
Direction Ingress Ingress l This parameter specifies the direction of

Egress the MEP.
l "Ingress" indicates the direction in
which the packets are transmitted to the
port, and "Egress" indicates the direction
in which the packets are transmitted
from the port.
CC Status Active Active l This parameter specifies whether to

Inactive enable the CC function of the MEP.
l In the case of the tests based on the MP
IDs, CC Status must be set to Active.

Parameter Description: QinQ Link_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a QinQ link.
Navigation Path
Service Management > QinQ Link from the Function Tree.
2. Click New.
Parameters for the General Attributes

QinQ Link ID 1 to 4294967295 - This parameter specifies

the ID of the QinQ link.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980
supports 1024 QinQ links,
whose IDs must be different
from each other.
Board - - This parameter specifies

the board where the QinQ
link is located.
Port - - This parameter specifies

the port where the QinQ
link is located.
S-Vlan ID 1 to 4094 - l This parameter

(at the network
operator side) for the
QinQ link.
according to the
A.6.2 Parameters for Ethernet Protocols

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet protocol.
Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating ERPS management tasks.
Navigation Path
Protection > ERPS Management.

2. Click New.
Parameters
ERPS ID 1 to 8 - l This parameter

specifies the ID of the
Ethernet ring
protection switching
(ERPS) instance.
l The IDs of ERPS
instances on an NE
must be different from
each other.
East Port - - This parameter specifies

the east port of the ERPS
instance.
West Port - - This parameter specifies

the west port of the ERPS
instance.
RPLOwner Ring Node Yes No l This parameter

Flag No specifies whether the
node on the ring is the
ring protection link
(RPL) owner.
l Only one node on the
ring can be set as the
RPL owner for each
Ethernet ring.
RPL Port - - l This parameter

specifies the RPL port.
l There is only one RPL
port and this RPL port
must be the east or
west port on the RPL
owner node.

Control VLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameter

of Control VLAN.
l Each node on the
Ethernet ring transmits
the R-APS packets on
the dedicated ring APS
(R-APS) channel to
ensure consistency
between the nodes
when the ERPS
switching is
performed. Control
VLAN is used for
isolating the dedicated
R-APS channel.
Therefore, the VLAN
ID in Control VLAN
cannot be duplicate
with the VLAN IDs
that are contained in
the service packets.
l The Control VLAN
must be set to the same
value for all the NEs
on an ERPS ring.
Destination Node 01-19-A7-00-00-01 01-19-A7-00-00-01 This parameter indicates

destination node. The
default destination MAC
address in the R-APS
packets is always 01-19-
A7-00-00-01.
Parameter Description: ERPS Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS)
management.
Navigation Path
Protection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree.

Parameters
ERPS ID 1 to 8 - This parameter indicates

the ID of the ERPS
instance.
East Port - - This parameter indicates

the east port of the ERPS
instance.
West Port - - This parameter indicates

the west port of the ERPS
instance.
RPL Owner Ring Node Yes - This parameter indicates

Flag No whether a node on the ring
is the ring protection link
(RPL) owner.
RPL Port - - This parameter indicates

the RPL port.
Control VLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameter

the VLAN ID of
Control VLAN.
l Each node on the
Ethernet ring transmits
the R-APS packets on
the dedicated ring APS
(R-APS) channel to
ensure consistency
between the nodes
when the ERPS
switching is
performed. Control
VLAN is used for
isolating the dedicated
R-APS channel.
Therefore, the VLAN
ID in Control VLAN
cannot be duplicate
with the VLAN IDs
that are contained in
the service packets or
inband DCN packets.
l The Control VLAN
must be set to the same
value for all the NEs
on an ERPS ring.

Destination Node 01-19-A7-00-00-01 - This parameter indicates

destination node. The
default destination MAC
address in the R-APS
packets is always 01-19-
A7-00-00-01.
Hold-Off Time(ms) 0 to 10000, in step of 100 - l This parameter

the hold-off time of the
ERPS hold-off timer.
l The hold-off timer is
used for negotiating
the protection
switching sequence
when the ERPS
coexists with other
protection schemes so
that the fault can be
rectified in the case of
other protection
switching (such as
LAG protection)
before the ERPS
occurs. When a node
on the ring detects one
or more new faults, it
starts up the hold-off
timer if the preset
hold-off time is set to a
value that is not 0.
During the hold-off
time, the fault is not
reported to trigger an
ERPS. When the hold-
off timer times out, the
node checks the link
status regardless
whether the fault that
triggers the startup of
the timer exists. If the
fault exists, the node
reports it to trigger an
ERPS. This fault can
be the same as or
different from the fault
that triggers the initial
startup of the hold-off
timer.

Guard Time(ms) 10 to 2000, in step of 10 - l This parameter

the guard time of the
ERPS guard timer.
l The nodes on the ring
continuously forward
the R-APS packets to
the Ethernet ring. As a
result, the outdated R-
APS packets may exist
on the ring network.
After a node on the
ring receives the
outdated R-APS
packets, an incorrect
ERPS may occur. The
ERPS guard timer is an
R-APS timer used for
preventing a node on
the ring from receiving
outdated R-APS
packets. When a faulty
node on the ring
detects that the
switching condition is
cleared, the node starts
up the guard timer and
starts to forward the R-
APS (NR) packets.
During this period, the
R-APS packets
received by the node
are discarded. The
received R-APS
packets are forwarded
only after the time of
the guard timer
expires.

WTR Time(mm:ss) 5 to 12, in step of 1 - l This parameter

the WTR time of the
WRT timer in the case
of ERPS protection.
l The WTR time refers
to the duration from
the time when the
working channel is
restored to the time
when the switching is
released. When the
working channel is
restored, the WTR
timer of the RPL
owner starts up. In
addition, a signal that
indicates the operation
of the WTR timer is
continuously output in
the timing process.
When the WTR timer
times out and no
switching request of a
higher priority is
received, the signal
indicating the
operation of the WTR
timer is not
transmitted. In
addition, the WTR
release signal is
continuously output.
l The WTR timer is used
to prevent frequent
switching caused by
the unstable working
channel.
Packet Transmit 1 to 10 - This parameter displays or

Interval(s) specifies the interval for
sending R-APS packets
periodically.
Entity Level 0 to 7 - This parameter indicates

or specifies the level of the
maintenance entity.
Last Switching Request - - This parameter indicates

the last switching request.

RB Status - - This parameter indicates

the RB (RPL Blocked)
status of the packets
received by the working
node.
l noRB: The RPL is not
blocked.
l RB : The RPL is
blocked.
DNF Status - - This parameter indicates

the DNF status of the
packets received by the
working node.
l noDNF: The R-APS
packets do not contain
the DNF flag. In this
case, the packets are
forwarded by the node
that detects the fault on
a non-RPL link, and
the node that receives
the packets is
requested to clear the
forwarding address
table.
l DNF: The R-APS
packets contain the
DNF flags. In this
case, the packets are
forwarded by the node
that detects the fault on
an RPL link, and the
node that receives the
packets is informed
not to clear the
forwarding address
table.

Status of State Machine - - This parameter indicates

the status of the state
machine at the working
node.
l Idle: The Ethernet ring
is in normal state. For
example, no node on
the Ethernet ring
detects any faults or
receives the R_APS
(NR, RB) packets.
l Protection: The
Ethernet ring is in
protected state. For
example, a fault on the
node triggers the
ERPS, or a node on the
ring is in the WTR
period after the fault is
rectified.
Node Carried with - - This parameter indicates

Current Packet the MAC address carried
in the R-APS packets
received by the current
node. The MAC address
refers to the MAC address
of the source node that
initiates the switching
request.
East Port Status - - Displays the status of the

east port.
West Port Status - - Displays the status of the

west port.
Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating MSTP port groups.
Navigation Path
Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Port Group Parameters tab.
3. Click Create. The Create Port Group dialog box is displayed.


Protocol Type MSTP MSTP This parameter specifies

STP the protocol type.
l MSTP: stands for
Multiple Spanning
Tree Protocol. The
OptiX RTN 980
supports the CIST
MSTP only.
l STP: stands for
Spanning Tree
Protocol.
Enable Protocol Enabled Disabled l This parameter

Disabled specifies whether to
enable the protocol of
the port group or a
member port in the
port group.
l If the STP or MSTP is
enabled, the spanning
tree topology is
automatically re-
configured. As a
result, the services are
interrupted.
Parameters for Application Ports


the board where the
member of port group is
located.
Available Port List - - This parameter indicates

the available port list in
which a port can be added
to the port group.
Selected Port List - - This parameter indicates

the selected ports that can
be added to the port group.

Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Configuration

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating MSTP port groups.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Port Group Parameters tab.
3. On the main interface, select the port group to be configured.
4. Click Config. The Configure Port Group dialog box is displayed.
Parameters for the Added Port


the board where the
member of port group is
located.
Available Port List - - This parameter indicates

the available port list in
which a port needs to be
added to the port group.
Selected Port List - - This parameter indicates

the selected ports that
need to be added to the
port group.
Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ Bridge Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to MSTP bridges.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Bridge Parameters tab.


Port Group ID - - l This parameter

port group.
set to only the port
group ID that is
automatically
allocated.
MST Domain Name - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

not support this
parameter.
Redaction Level - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

not support this
parameter.
Mapping List - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

not support this
parameter.
Bridge Parameters
Port Group ID - - l This parameter

port group.
set to only the port
Group ID that is
automatically
allocated.
MST Domain Max Hop - 20 Specifies the maximum

Count hop count of the MSTP.

Network Diameter 2 to 7 7 l This parameter

specifies the MSTP
network diameter.
l Network Diameter is
related to the link
whose number of
switches is the most
and is indicated by the
number of switches
that are connected to
the link. When you set
Network Diameter
for the switches, the
MSTP automatically
sets Max Age(s),
Hello Time(s), and
Forward Delay(s) to
the more appropriate
values for the
switches.
l If the value of
Network Diameter is
greater, the network is
in a larger scale.
Hello Time(s) 1 to 10 2 l This parameter

specifies the interval
for transmitting the
CBPDU packets
through the bridge.
l The greater the value
of this parameter, the
less the network
resources that are
occupied by the
spanning tree. The
topology stability,
however, decreases.

Max Age(s) 6 to 40 20 l This parameter

specifies the
maximum age of the
CBPDU packet that is
recorded by the port.
l The greater the value,
the longer the
transmission distance
of the CBPDU, which
indicates that the
network diameter is
greater. When the
is greater, it is less
possible that the bridge
detects the link fault in
a timely manner and
thus the network
adaptation ability is
reduced.
Forward Delay(s) 4 to 30 15 l This parameter

specifies the holdoff
time of a port in the
listening state and in
the learning state.
the longer the delay of
the network state
change. Hence, the
topology changes are
slower and the
recovery in the case of
faults is slower.
Port Parameters

the port in the port group.

Enable Edge Attribute Disabled Disabled l This parameter

Enabled specifies the
management edge
attributes of the port.
l This parameter
specifies whether to
set the port as an edge
port. The edge port
refers to the bridge
port that is connected
to the LAN. In normal
cases, this port does
not receive or transmit
BPDU messages.
set to Enabled only
when the port is
directly connected to
the data
communications
terminal equipment,
such as a computer. In
other cases, it is
Actual Edge Attribute - - This parameter indicates

the actual management
edge attributes of the port.

Point-to-Point Attribute false auto l This parameter

true specifies the point-to-
point attribute of the
auto port.
l false: forced non-
point-to-point link
attribute
l true: forced point-to-
point link attribute
l auto: automatically
detected point-to-
to auto, the bridge
determines Actual
Point-to-Point
Attribute of the port
working mode. If the
actual working mode
is full-duplex, the
actual point-to-point
attribute is true. If the
actual working mode
is half-duplex, Actual
Point-to-Point
Attribute is false.
l Only the designated
port whose Actual
Point-to-Point
Attribute is "True"
can transmit the rapid
state migration request
and response.
you use the default
value.
Actual Point-to-Point - - This parameter indicates

Attribute the actual point-to-point
attribute of the port.

Max Transmit Packet 1 to 255 3 l This parameter

Count specifies the
maximum number of
packets to be
transmitted.
l The maximum number
of packets to be
transmitted by the port
refers to the maximum
number of MSTP
packets that the port
can transmit within 1s.
l This parameter needs
to be set according to
the planning
information.
Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CIST Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the MSTP CIST.
Navigation Path
2. Click the CIST&MSTI Parameters tab.

Port Group - - This parameter specifies

the port group.
MSTI ID 0 0 This parameter indicates

the MSTI ID. The value 0
indicates common and
internal spanning tree
(CIST). The OptiX RTN
980 supports only the
MSTP that uses CIST.

Bridge Priority 0 to 61440, in step of 4096 32768 l The most significant

16 bits of the bridge ID
indicates the priority
of the bridge.
l When the value is
smaller, the priority is
higher. As a result, the
bridge is more possible
to be selected as the
root bridge.
l If the priorities of all
the bridges in the STP/
MSTP network use the
same value, the bridge
whose MAC address is
the smallest is selected
as the root bridge.
Port Parameters

Priority 0 to 240, in step of 16 128 l The most significant

eight bits of the port ID
indicate the port
priority.
l When the value is
higher.
Path Cost 1 to 200000000 200000 l This parameter

indicates the status of
the network that the
port is connected to.
l In the case of the
bridges on both ends of
the path, set this
parameter to the same
value.

Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running Information About the

CIST
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the running information about the MSTP
CIST.
Navigation Path
2. Click the CIST Running Information tab.

Port Group ID - - This parameter indicates

the ID of the port group.
Protocol Running Mode MSTP - l This parameter

STP indicates the running
mode of the protocol.
l MSTP: stands for
Multiple Spanning
Tree Protocol. The
OptiX RTN 980
supports only the
CIST-based MSTP.
l STP: stands for
Spanning Tree
Protocol.

Bridge Priority 0 to 61440, in step of 4096 32768 l This parameter

of the bridge.
l The most significant
of the bridge.
l When the value is
root bridge.
the bridges in the STP
network use the same
value, the bridge
as the root bridge.
Bridge MAC Address - - This parameter indicates

bridge.
Root Bridge MAC - - This parameter indicates

Address the MAC address of the
root bridge.
External Path Cost - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

ERPC not support this
parameter.
Domain Root Bridge - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

Priority not support this
parameter.
Domain Root Bridge - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

MAC Address not support this
parameter.
Internal Path Cost IRPC - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

not support this
parameter.

Root Port Priority 0 to 240, in step of 16 128 l This parameter

of the root port.
l The most significant
eight bits of the ID of
the root port indicate
the priority of the root
port.
l When the value is
higher.
Root Port - - This parameter indicates

the root port.
Hello Time(s) - 2 l This parameter

indicates the interval
for transmitting
CBPDU packets
through the bridge.
less the network
resources that are
occupied by the
spanning tree. The
topology stability,
however, decreases.

specifies the
maximum age of the
the longer the
of the CBPDU, which
indicates that the
network diameter is
greater. When the
a timely manner and
thus the network
reduced.


specifies the holdoff
the learning state.
the network state
change. Hence, the
slower and the
faults is slower.
MST Domain Max Hop - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

Count not support this
parameter.
Topology Change Count - - This parameter indicates

the identifier of the
topology change.
Last Topology Change - - This parameter indicates

Time(s) the duration of the last
topology change.
Topology Change Count - - This parameter indicates

the count of the topology
changes.
Port Parameters

Enable Protocol Enabled Disabled This parameter indicates

Disabled whether the protocol of
the port group or a
member of the port group
is enabled.
Port Role - Disabled This parameter indicates

the role of a port.

Port Status Discarding Discarding This parameter indicates

Learning the state of a port.
Forwarding l Discarding: receives
only BPDU packets
l Learning: only
receives or transmits
BPDU packets
l Forwarding: forwards
user traffic, and
transmits/receives
BPDU packets
Priority 0 to 240, in step of 16 128 l The most significant

indicate the port
priority.
l When the value is
higher.
Path Cost 1 to 200000000 200000 l This parameter

indicates the status of
the network that the
port is connected to.
l In the case of the
bridges on both ends of
the path, set this
parameter to the same
value.
Bridge Priority 0 to 61440, in step of 4096 32768 l The most significant

of the bridge.
l When the value is
root bridge.
the bridges in the STP
network use the same
value, the bridge
as the root bridge.

Bridge MAC Address - - This parameter indicates

bridge.
Designated Port Priority 0 to 240, in step of 16 0 l The most significant

indicate the port
priority.
l When the value is
higher.
Design Port - 0 This parameter indicates

the designated port.
Edge Port Attribute Disabled Disabled l This parameter

Enabled specifies the
management edge
attributes of the port.
l This parameter
specifies whether to
set the port as an edge
port. The edge port
refers to the bridge
port that is connected
to the LAN. In normal
cases, this port does
not receive or transmit
BPDU messages.
set to Enabled only
when the port is
directly connected to
the data
communications
terminal equipment,
such as a computer. In
other cases, it is
Actual Edge Port - Disabled This parameter indicates

Attribute the actual management
edge attributes of the port.

Point to Point false auto l This parameter

true specifies the point-to-
point attribute of the
auto port.
l false: forced non-
point-to-point link
attribute
l true: forced point-to-
l auto: automatically
detected point-to-
to auto, the bridge
determines Actual
Point to Point
Attribute of the port
working mode. If the
actual working mode
is full-duplex, the
actual point-to-point
attribute is true. If the
actual working mode
is half-duplex, Actual
Point to Point
Attribute is false.
l Only the designated
port whose Actual
Point-to-Point
Attribute is "True"
can transmit the rapid
state migration request
and response.
you use the default
value.
Actual Point to Point - - This parameter indicates

the actual point-to-point
attribute of the port.

Max Count of 1 to 255 3 l This parameter

Transmitting Message indicates the
maximum number of
packets to be
transmitted.
l The maximum number
of packets to be
transmitted by the port
refers to the maximum
number of MSTP
packets that the port
can transmit within 1s.
Protocol Running Mode STP - l This parameter

MSTP indicates the running
mode of the protocol.
l MSTP: stands for
Multiple Spanning
Tree Protocol. The
OptiX RTN 980
supports only the
CIST-based MSTP.
l STP: stands for
Spanning Tree
Protocol.
Hello Time(s) 1 to 10 2 l This parameter

indicates the interval
for transmitting the
CBPDU packets
through the bridge.
less the network
resources that are
occupied by the
spanning tree. The
topology stability,
however, decreases.


specifies the
maximum age of the
the longer the
of the CBPDU, which
indicates that the
network diameter is
greater. When the
a timely manner and
thus the network
reduced.

specifies the holding
the learning state.
the network state
change. Hence, the
slower and the
faults is slower.
Remain Hop - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

not support this
parameter.
Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation Management_LAG Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a link aggregation group (LAG).
Navigation Path
Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab.

3. Click New.

LAG No. - 1 l This parameter

specifies the LAG
number to be set
manually.
only when
Automatically
Assign is not selected.
Automatically Assign Selected Selected l This parameter

Deselected indicates whether
LAG No. is allocated
automatically.
l When Automatically
Assign is selected,
LAG No. cannot be
set.
LAG Name - - This parameter specifies

the LAG name.

LAG Type Static Static l Static: You can create

Manual a LAG. When you add
or delete a member
port to or from the
LAG, the Link
Aggregation Control
Protocol (LACP)
protocol is required. In
a LAG, a port can be in
selected, standby, or
unselected state. The
aggregation
information is
exchanged among
different equipment
through the LACP
protocol to ensure that
the aggregation
information is the
same among all the
nodes.
l Manual: You can
create a LAG. When
you add or delete a
member port, the
LACP protocol is not
required. The port can
be in the up or down
state. The system
determines whether to
aggregate a port
according to its
physical state (UP or
DOWN), working
mode, and rate.
Switch Protocol - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

not support this
parameter.
Switch Mode - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

not support this
parameter.
Link Trace Protocol - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

not support this
parameter.

Revertive Mode Revertive Non-Revertive l This parameter can be

Non-Revertive set only when Load
Sharing is set to Non-
Sharing.
l When a LAG is set to
Revertive, the
services are switched
back to the former
working channel after
this channel is restored
to normal.
l When a LAG is set to
Non-Revertive, the
status of the LAG does
not change after the
former working
channel is restored to
normal. That is, the
services are still
transmitted on the
protection channel.
Load Sharing Sharing Non-Sharing l Sharing: Each member

Non-Sharing link of a LAG
processes traffic at the
same time and shares
the traffic load. The
sharing mode can
increase a bandwidth
utilization for the link.
When the LAG
members change, or
certain links fail, the
system automatically
re-allocates the traffic.
l Non-Sharing: Only
one member link of a
LAG carries traffic,
and the other link is in
the standby state. In
this case, a hot backup
mechanism is
provided. When the
active link of a LAG is
faulty, the system
activates the standby
link, thus preventing
link failure.

Load Sharing Hash Source MAC Source MAC l This parameter is valid
Algorithm Destination MAC only when Load
Sharing of a LAG is
Source and Destination set to Sharing.
MAC
l The load sharing
Source IP computation methods
Destination IP include computation
Source and Destination IP based on MAC
addresses (based on
MPLS Label
the source MAC
address, based on the
destination MAC
address, and based on
the source MAC
address + sink MAC
address), computation
based on IP addresses
(based on the source IP
address, based on the
destination IP address,
and based on the
source IP address and
sink IP address), and
computation based on
MPLS labels.

System Priority 0 to 65535 32768 l This parameter

of a LAG. The smaller
the value of System
Priority, the higher
the priority.
l When a local LAG
negotiates with an
opposite LAG through
LACP packets, both
LAGs can obtain the
system priorities of
each other. Then, the
LAG of the higher
system priority is
considered as the
comparison result of
both LAGs so that the
aggregation
information is
consistent at both
LAGs. If the priorities
of both LAGs are the
same, the system MAC
addresses are
compared. Then, the
comparison result
based on the LAG with
smaller system MAC
address is considered
as the result of both
LAGs and is used to
ensure that the
aggregation
information is
consistent at both
LAGs.
WTR Time(min) 1 to 30 10 l Specifies the WTR

time for the LAG.
l This parameter takes
effect only when
Revertive Mode is
Revertive.

Port Settings Parameters

Main Board - - l This parameter

specifies the main
board in a LAG.
according to the
Main Port - - l This parameter

specifies the main port
in a LAG.
l After a LAG is created,
you can add Ethernet
services to the main
port only. Services
cannot be added to a
slave port. When Load
Sharing is set to Non-
Sharing, the link
connected to the main
port is used to transmit
the services, and the
link connected to the
slave port is used for
protection.
Board (Available Slave - - l This parameter

Ports) specifies the slave
board in a LAG.
according to the
Port (Available Slave - - l This parameter

Ports) specifies the salve port
in a LAG.
l The slave ports in a
LAG are fixed. Unless
they are manually
modified, the system
does not automatically
add them to or delete
them from the LAG.
Selected Slave Ports - - This parameter indicates

the selected slave ports.

Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link Aggregation

This section describes the parameters for port priorities and system priorities.
Navigation Path
Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Port Priority tab.


the port whose priority can
be set.
Port Priority 0 to 65535 32768 l This parameter

indicates the priorities
of the ports in a LAG
as defined in the LACP
protocol. The smaller
the value, the higher
the priority.
l When ports are added
into a LAG, the port of
the highest priority is
preferred for service
transmission.
Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Point LPT

This topic describes the parameters that are related to point-to-point LPT.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > LPT
2. Click the Point-to-Point LPT tab.
Parameters on the main interface

Binding Status - - This parameter displays

the binding status of point-
to-point services.

Primary Function Point - - This parameter displays

the port where the primary
point of point-to-point
LPT resides.
Secondary Function - - This parameter displays

Point Type the type of secondary
point for point-to-point
LPT.
Secondary Function - - This parameter displays

Point the port where the
secondary point of point-
to-point LPT resides.
LPT Instance Status - - This parameter displays

the status of point-to-point
LPT.
LPT Enabled Enabled Disabled This parameter displays or

Disabled specifies the enabling
status of point-to-point
LPT.
The LPT function can take
effect only when LPT
Enabled is set to
Enabled.
Recovery Times(s) 1-600 1 This parameter displays or

specifies the recovery time
of point-to-point LPT.
Hold-Off Times(ms) 0-10000 1000 This parameter displays or

specifies the hold-off time
of point-to-point LPT.
Switching Mode - - This parameter displays

the switching mode of
point-to-point LPT. Point-
to-point LPT is available
only in strict mode.

Fault Detection PW OAM - This parameter displays

LPT OAM the fault detection mode of
point-to-multipoint LPT.
l LPT-enabled NEs
periodically transmit
LPT OAM packets in
specific formats to
check the status of an
L2 service network or
QinQ service network.
If the LPT OAM
packets are absent for
3.5 fault detection
periods or the number
and contents of
received LPT OAM
packets are incorrect,
the NEs consider that a
network-side fault
occurred and the LPT
l To detect a network-
side fault on a PSN,
LPT OAM or PW
OAM packets can be
used. Note that the PW
OAM function must be
enabled on NEs before
usage of PW OAM
packets.
Fault Detection Period 3-100 3 This parameter displays or

(100ms) specifies the fault
detection period of point-
to-point LPT.
User-Side Port - - This parameter displays

the status of a user-side
port.
L2 net ID-L2 Peer net ID - - This parameter displays

the NET IDs of LPT
packet out ports at both
ends.
Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Point LPT

This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating point-to-point LPT.

Navigation Path
2. Click the Point-to-Point LPT tab.
3. Click Bind in the lower right corner of the pane based on the type of service network.
4. Choose PW+QinQ or L2 net from the shortcut menu based on the type of service network.

L2 net ID 1-4294967295 - This parameter specifies

the NET ID of LPT packet
out port at the local end.
L2 Peer net ID 1-4294967295 - This parameter specifies

the NET ID of LPT packet
out port at the opposite
end.
Primary Function Point - - This parameter specifies

point of point-to-point
LPT resides.
VLAN ID 1-4094 - This parameter specifies

the VLAN ID that is
carried by a point-to-point
LPT packet to traverse an
L2 network.
LPT package out port - - This parameter specifies

the out port of a point-to-
point LPT packet.
Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Multipoint LPT

This topic describes the parameters that are related to point-to-multipoint LPT.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Point-to-Multipoint LPT tab.

Parameters of Primary Point


Type the type of primary point
for point-to-multipoint
LPT.

point of point-to-
multipoint LPT resides.
LPT Instance Status - - This parameter displays

the status of point-to-
multipoint LPT.
LPT Enabled Enabled Disabled This parameter displays

Recovery Times(s) 1-600 1 This parameter displays or

specifies the recovery time
of point-to-multipoint
LPT.
Hold-Off Times(ms) 0-10000 1000 This parameter displays or

specifies the hold-off time
of point-to-multipoint
LPT.
Switching Mode Strict mode Strict mode This parameter displays

Non-strict mode the switching mode of
Point-to-point LPT is
available only in strict
mode.
l Strict mode
A primary point
triggers LPT switching
when all its secondary
points detect faults.
l Non-strict mode
A primary point
triggers LPT switching
when anyone of its
secondary points
detects a fault.

Fault Detection PW OAM - This parameter displays

LPT OAM the fault detection mode of
l LPT-enabled NEs
periodically transmit
LPT OAM packets in
specific formats to
check the status of an
L2 service network or
QinQ service network.
If the LPT OAM
packets are absent for
3.5 fault detection
periods or the number
and contents of
received LPT OAM
packets are incorrect,
the NEs consider that a
network-side fault
occurred and the LPT
l To detect a network-
side fault on a PSN,
LPT OAM or PW
OAM packets can be
used. Note that the PW
OAM function must be
enabled on NEs before
usage of PW OAM
packets.
Fault Detection Period 3-100 3 This parameter displays or

(100ms) specifies the fault
detection period of point-
to-multipoint LPT.
User-Side Port - - This parameter displays

port.

the NET IDs of LPT
ends, when the service
network is an L2 network.

Parameters of Secondary Point

Access Point Type - - This parameter displays

the type of second point
LPT.
Access Point - - This parameter displays

the port or PW ID for the
to-multipoint LPT.
User-Side Port Status - - This parameter displays

port.

the NET IDs of LPT
ends, when the service
network is an L2 network.
Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Multipoint LPT

This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating point-to-multipoint LPT.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Point-to-Multipoint LPT tab.
3. Click New in the lower right corner of the pane based on the type of service network.
4. Choose PW, QinQ, or L2 net from the shortcut menu based on the type of service network.

Parameters of primary point

Point Type UNI - This parameter specifies

PW the type of primary point
QinQ LPT. The value range of
L2 net this parameter pertains to
the type of service
network.
If the primary point is on
the access side, select
UNI; if the primary point
is on the network side, set
the parameter as follows.
l If the service network
is a PSN, select PW.
is a QinQ network,
select QinQ.
is an L2 network,
select L2 net.

the board where the
primary point of point-to-
This parameter is valid
only when Point Type is
set to UNI.

point of point-to-
set to UNI.
Point ID - - This parameter specifies

the service ID for the
primary point of point-to-
multipoint LPT.
set to PW or QinQ.


the NET ID of a local NE.
only when Point Type of
the primary point is set to
UNI, and when Point
Type of the secondary
point is set to L2 net.

the NET ID of an opposite
NE.
set toL2 net.

the VLAN ID that is
carried by an LPT packet
to traverse an L2 network.
set toL2 net.
LPT package out port - - This parameter specifies

the out port of an LPT
packet.
set toL2 net.
Parameters of secondary point

Point Type UNI - This parameter displays or

PW specifies the type of
secondary point for point-
QinQ to-multipoint LPT.
L2 net


the board where the
to-multipoint LPT resides.
set to PW, QinQ, or L2
net.
Available Points - - This parameter displays

the available ports where
the secondary point of
point-to-multipoint LPT
can reside.
net.
Selected Points - - This parameter displays

the selected port where the
to-multipoint LPT resides.
net.

the NET ID of a local NE.
set to UNI.

the NET ID of an opposite
NE.
UNI, and when Point


the VLAN ID that is
carried by an LPT packet
to traverse an L2 network.
UNI, and when Point
LPT Package out port - - This parameter specifies

the out port of an LPT
packet.
UNI, and when Point
A.6.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet operation, administration and
maintenance (OAM).
Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance

Domain Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance domains.
Navigation Path
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Maintenance Association tab.
3. Choose New > New Maintenance Domain.


Maintenance - default l This parameter specifies the name of the

Domain Name maintenance domain.
l The maintenance domain refers to the
network for the Ethernet OAM.
of eight bytes.
Maintenance 0 4 l This parameter specifies the level of the

Domain Level 1 maintenance domain.
2 l The values 0-2 indicate the carrier level,
the values 3-4 indicate the supplier level,
3 and the values 5-7 indicate the user level.
4 l When the value is set to 0, the
5 maintenance domain is at the lowest
6 level. The values 0-7 indicate that the
level increases in a sequential order.
7
l The OAM packets whose level is higher
than the preset value are transparently
transmitted by the MEPs. The OAM
packets whose level is lower than the
preset value are directly discarded by the
MEPs. The OAM packets whose level is
the same as the preset value are
responded to or terminated by the MEPs
according to the message type.
Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance

Association Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance associations.
Navigation Path
3. Select the maintenance domain in which a maintenance association needs to be created.
Choose New > New Maintenance Association.



Domain Name domain of the created maintenance
association.
Maintenance - - l This parameter specifies the name of the

Association Name maintenance association, which is a
domain related to a service. Through
maintenance association division, the
connectivity check (CC) can be
performed on the network that transmits
a service instance.
of eight bytes.
Relevant Service - - This parameter specifies the service

instance that is related to the maintenance
association.
CC Test Transmit 1s 1s l This parameter specifies the interval for

Period 10s transmitting packets in the CC.
1m l The CC is performed to check the
availability of the service.
10m
Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MEP Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association end
point (MEP).
Navigation Path
3. Select the maintenance association in which an MEP needs to be created. Choose New >
New MEP Point.


Domain Name domain of the created MEP.


Board - - This parameter specifies the board where

the MEP is located.
Port - - This parameter specifies the port where the

MEP is located.
VLAN - - This parameter indicates the VLAN ID of

the current service.
MEP ID 1 to 2048 1 l This parameter specifies the MEP ID.

l Each MEP needs to be configured with
an MEP ID, which is unique in the
maintenance association. The MEP ID is
Direction Ingress Ingress l This parameter specifies the direction of

Egress the MEP.
l Ingress indicates the direction in which
the packets are transmitted to the port,
and Egress indicates the direction in
which the packets are transmitted from
the port.
CC Status Active Active l This parameter specifies whether to

Inactive enable the CC function of the MEP.
l In the case of the tests based on the MP
IDs, CC Status must be set to Active.
Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Remote MEP

Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a remote MEP.
Navigation Path
3. Choose OAM > Manage Remote MEP Point. Then, the Manage Remote MEP Point
dialog box is displayed.
4. Click New.


Domain Name domain of the MEP.


Remote 1 to 2048 - l This parameter specifies the ID of the

Maintenance Point remote MEP.
ID(e.g:1,3-6) l If other MEPs may initiate OAM
operations to an MEP in the same MA,
set the other MEPs to be the remote
MEPs.
Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MIP Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association
intermediate point (MIP).
Navigation Path
2. Click the MIP Point tab.
3. Select the maintenance domain in which an MIP needs to be created, and then click New.


Domain Name domain of the MIP.
Board - - This parameter specifies the board where

the MIP is located.
Port - - This parameter specifies the port where the

MIP is located.
MP ID 1 to 2048 1 l This parameter specifies the MIP ID.

l Each MIP needs to be configured with an
MIP ID, which is unique in the
maintenance domain. The MIP ID is
NOTE
To create MEPs and MIPs in a service at a
port, ensure that only one MIP can be created
and the level of the MIP must be higher than
the level of the MEP.

Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LB Enabling

This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LB.
Navigation Path
3. Select the maintenance domain and maintenance association for the LB test.
4. Choose OAM > Start LB.

Destination Selected Deselected This parameter needs to be selected if the

Maintenance Point Deselected LB test is performed on the basis of
ID Destination Maintenance Point IDs.
Destination Selected Selected This parameter needs to be selected if the

Maintenance Point Deselected LB test is performed on the basis of MAC
MAC Address addresses.
Maintenance - - This parameter indicates the name of the

Domain Name maintenance domain for the LB test.

Association Name maintenance association for the LB test.
Source - - l This parameter specifies the source

Maintenance Point maintenance point in the LB test.
ID l Only the MEP can be set to the source
maintenance point.
Destination - - l This parameter specifies the destination

Maintenance Point maintenance point in the LB test.
ID l Only the MEP can be set to the
destination maintenance point.
l Destination Maintenance Point ID can
be set only when MP ID is selected.
Destination - 00-00-00-00-00-00 l This parameter specifies the MAC

Maintenance Point address of the port where the destination
MAC Address maintenance point is located in the LB
test.
l Only the MAC address of the MEP can
be set to the MAC address of the
l Destination Maintenance Point MAC
Address can be set only when Sink
Maintenance Point MAC Address.

Transmitted 1 to 255 3 l This parameter specifies the number of

Packet Count packets transmitted each time in the LB
test.
l When the value is greater, the required
duration is longer.
Transmitted 64 to 1400 64 l This parameter specifies the length of a

Packet Length transmitted LBM packet.
l If the packet length is different, the test
result may be different. In normal cases,
it is recommended that you use the
default value.
Transmitted 0 to 7 7 l This parameter specifies the priority of

Packet Priority transmitting packets.
l 0 indicates the lowest priority, and 7
indicates the highest priority. In normal
cases, this parameter is set to the highest
priority.
Detection Result - - This parameter indicates the relevant

information and result of the LB test.
Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LT Enabling

This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LT.
Navigation Path
3. Select the maintenance domain and maintenance association for the LT test.
4. Choose OAM > Start LT.
Test Node Parameters

Destination Selected Deselected This parameter needs to be selected if the LT

Maintenance Point Deselected test is performed on the basis of MP IDs.
ID
Destination Selected Selected This parameter needs to be selected if the LT

Maintenance Point Deselected test is performed on the basis of MAC
MAC Address addresses.


Domain Name maintenance domain for the LT test.

Association Name maintenance association for the LT test.
Source - - l This parameter specifies the source

Maintenance Point maintenance point in the LT test.
ID l Only the MEP can be set to the source
maintenance point.
Destination - - l This parameter specifies the destination

ID l Only the MEP can be set to the
l Destination Maintenance Point ID can
be set only when MP ID is selected.
Destination - 00-00-00-00-00-00 l This parameter specifies the MAC

Maintenance Point address of the port where the destination
MAC Address maintenance point is located in the LT
test.
l Only the MAC address of the MEP can
be set to the MAC address of the
l Destination Maintenance Point MAC
Address can be set only when Sink
Maintenance Point MAC Address.
Parameters for the Detection Result

Source - - This parameter indicates the source

ID
Destination - - This parameter indicates the MAC address

Maintenance Point of the port where the destination
ID/MAC maintenance point is located in the LT test.
Response - - This parameter indicates the MAC address

Maintenance Point of the port where the responding
ID/MAC maintenance point is located in the LT test.

Hop Count 1 to 64 - l This parameter indicates the number of

hops from the source maintenance point
to the responding maintenance point or
to the destination maintenance point in
the LT test.
l The number of hops indicates the
adjacent relation between the responding
maintenance point to the source
maintenance point. The number of hops
increases by one when a responding
point occurs on the link from the source
maintenance point to the destination
maintenance point.
Test Result - - This parameter indicates the result of the LT

- test.
Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Parameter

This topic describes the OAM parameters that are related to Ethernet ports.
Navigation Path
OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the OAM Parameter tab.


port.
Enable OAM Enabled Disabled l This parameter indicates or specifies

Protocol Disabled whether to enable the OAM protocol.
l After the OAM protocol is enabled, the
current Ethernet port starts to use the
preset mode to create the OAM
connection with the opposite end.

OAM Working Active Active l This parameter indicates or specifies the

Mode Passive working mode of the OAM.
l The port whose OAM working mode is
set to Active can initiate the OAM
connection.
l The port whose OAM working mode is
set to Passive can only wait for the
opposite end to send the OAM
connection request.
l The OAM working mode of the
equipment at only one end can be
Passive.
Link Event Enabled Enabled l This parameter indicates or specifies

Notification Disabled whether the local link events can be
notified to the opposite end.
l If the alarms caused by link events can
be reported, that is, if the number of
performance events (for example, error
frame period, error frame, error frame
second, and error frame signal cycle) at
the local end exceeds the preset
threshold, these performance events are
notified to the port at the opposite end
through the link event notification
function.
Remote Side Disabled Disabled l This parameter indicates or specifies

Loopback Enabled whether the port responds to the remote
Response loopback.
l Remote loopback indicates that the local
OAM entity transmits packets to the
remote OAM entity for loopback. The
local OAM entity can locate the fault and
test the link performance through
loopback data analysis.
l If a port does not support remote
loopback response, this port does not
respond to the loopback request from the
remote port regardless of the OAM port
status.

Loopback Status Non-Loopback - This parameter indicates the loopback status

Initiate Loopback at at the local end.
Local NOTE
Loopback Status is valid only after you choose
Respond Loopback OAM > Enable Remote Loopback.
of Remote
OAM Discovery FAULT - This parameter indicates the OAM

Status ACTIVE_SEND_L discovery status at the local end.
OCAL
PASSIVE_WAIT
SEND_LOCAL_R
EMOTE
SEND_LOCAL_R
EMOTE_OK
SEND_ANY
Port Transmit FWD - l This parameter indicates the status of

Status DISCARD transmitting packets at the local end.
l When a port is in the FWD state, the port
forwards the non-OAM packets. When a
port is in the DISCARD state, the port
discards the non-OAM packets.
Port Receive Status FWD - l This parameter indicates the status of

DISCARD receiving packets at the local end.
LB l In the FWD state, the port forwards the
non-OAM packets. In the LB state, the
port loopback the non-OAM packets. In
the DISCARD state, the port discards
the non-OAM packets.
Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Error Frame

Monitoring
This topic describes the parameters that are used for monitoring the OAM error frames at the
Ethernet port.
Navigation Path
OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the OAM Error Frame Monitor tab.



port.
Error Frame 1000 to 60000, in 1000 This parameter specifies the duration of
Monitor Window step of 100 monitoring error frames.
(ms)
Error Frame 1 to 4294967295, in 1 l This parameter specifies the threshold of

Monitor Threshold step of 1 monitoring error frames.
(frame) l Within the specified value of Error
Frame Monitor Window(ms), if the
number of error frames on the link
exceeds the preset value of Error
Frame Monitor Threshold(frame), an
alarm is reported.
Error Frame 1488 to 892800000, 1488 This parameter specifies the window of
Period Window in step of 1 monitoring the error frame period.
(frame)

Period Threshold step of 1 monitoring the error frame period.
(frame) l Within the specified value of Error
Frame Period Window(frame), if the
Frame Period Threshold(frame), an
alarm is reported.
Error Frame 10 to 900, in step of 60 This parameter specifies the time window of
Second Window(s) 1 monitoring the error frame second.
Error Frame 10 to 900, in step of 1 l This parameter specifies the threshold of

Second Threshold 1 monitoring error frame seconds.
(s) l If any error frame occurs in one second,
this second is called an errored frame
second. Within the specified value of
Error Frame Second Window(s), if the
Frame Second Threshold(s), an alarm
is reported.
Error Frame 1 to 60, in step of 1 1 This parameter specifies the window of

Signal Periodic monitoring the error frame signal period.
Monitor Window
(Entries)


Signal Periodic step of 1 monitoring the error frame signal period.
Monitor Threshold l Within the specified value of Error
(Entries) Frame Signal Periodic Monitor
Window(Entries), if the number of
error signals exceeds the preset value of
Error Frame Signal Periodic Monitor
Threshold(Entries), an alarm is
reported.
A.6.4 QoS Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to QoS.
Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing DiffServ domains.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree.

Mapping Relation ID 1 to 8 1 This parameter indicates

the ID of the mapping
relation between DiffServ
domains.
Mapping Relation Name - Default Map This parameter indicates

the name of the mapping
relation between DiffServ
domains.
NOTE
If one default DiffServ domain exists on the OptiX RTN 980 equipment, Mapping Relation ID is set to 1, and
Mapping Relation Name is set to Default Map. If these parameters are not set, all the ports belong to this
domain.

Parameters for Ingress Mapping Relation

CVLAN 0 to 7 - l This parameter

of the C-VLAN of the
ingress packets.
l C-VLAN indicates the
client-side VLAN, and
the value 7 indicates
the highest priority.

of the S-VLAN of the
ingress packets.
l S-VLAN indicates the
server-side VLAN,
and the value 7
indicates the highest
priority.
IP DSCP 0 to 63 - l This parameter

indicates the DSCP
priority of the IP
addresses of the
ingress packets.
l The differentiated
services code point
(DSCP) refers to bits
0-5 of the
differentiated services
(DS) field in the packet
and indicates the
service class and
discarding priority of
the packet.

MPLS EXP 0 to 7 - l Displays the MPLS

EXP value of ingress
packets.
l When a packet in an
egress queue leaves an
NNI port, the NNI port
obtains the packet
priority value
according to the
mappings between
PHB service classes of
egress queues and
egress packet
priorities (MPLS EXP
values), and writes the
obtained priority value
into the EXP field of
the egress MPLS
packet.
NOTE
The MPLS EXP value can
be modified in the default
Diffserv domain (Default
Map) only.

PHB BE - l This parameter

AF1 indicates the per-hop
behavior (PHB)
AF2 service class of the
AF3 DiffServ domain.
AF4 l The PHB service class
EF refers to the
forwarding behavior
CS6
of the DiffServ node
CS7 on the behavior
aggregate (BA)
operation. The
forwarding behavior
can meet the specific
requirements.
l The PHB service
classes are BE, AF1,
AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,
CS6, and CS7. The
priorities (C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
priority, DSCP value,
and MPLS EXP value)
contained in the
packets of the DiffServ
domain and the eight
PHB service classes
meet the requirements
of the specified or
default mapping
relation.
NOTE
The AF1 is classified into
three sub service classes,
namely, AF11, AF12, and
AF13, only one of which is
valid. It is the same case
with the AF2, AF3, and
AF4.

Parameters for Egress Mapping Relation


AF1 indicates the PHB
service class of the
AF2 DiffServ domain.
AF4 refers to the
EF forwarding behavior
of the DiffServ node
CS6
on the behavior
CS7 aggregate (BA)
operation. The
forwarding behavior
requirements.
l The PHB service
AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,
CS6, and CS7. The
priorities (C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
priority, DSCP value
and MPLS value)
contained in the
packets of the DiffServ
PHB service classes
of the specified or
default mapping
relation.
NOTE
AF4.

of the C-VLAN of the
egress packets.


of the S-VLAN of the
egress packets.
server-side VLAN,
and the value 7
priority.

indicates the DSCP
priority of the IP
addresses of the
ingress packets.
l The DSCP refers to
bits 0-5 of the DS field
in the packet and
indicates the service
class and discarding
priority of the packet.
MPLS EXP 0 to 7 - l Displays the MPLS

EXP value of egress
packets.
l When a packet arrives
at an NNI port, the
NNI port obtains the
packet priority value
depending on its
trusted priority type
(MPLS EXP value)
and specifies the PHB
service class of the
packet according to the
mappings between
packet priorities and
PHB service classes.
NOTE
Map) only.



the port that uses the
DiffServ domain.
Packet Type CVLAN CVLAN The packets trusted by the

SVLAN OptiX RTN 980 are the
C_VLAN, S_VLAN and
IP-DSCP IP DSCP packets that
MPLS-EXP contain the C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
priority, DSCP value or
MPLS value. By default,
the untrusted packets are
mapped to the BE service
class for best-effort
forwarding.
NOTE
l The trusted packet
priorities of a UNI port
include DSCP value, C-
VLAN priority, and S-
VLAN priority. For the
E-Line services that are
transparently
transmitted end to end
(UNI-UNI), a UNI port
only trusts DSCP value.
l An NNI port carrying
MPLS/PWE3 services
trusts only packets with
MPLS EXP values.
priorities of a QinQ link
NNI port are configured
according to the
Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Management_Create

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating DiffServ (DS) domains.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Diffserv Domain Management > Diffserv Domain Management from
the Function Tree.
2. Click New.


Mapping Relation ID 2 to 8 - This parameter specifies

the ID of the mapping
relation of a DS domain.
Mapping Relation Name - - This parameter specifies

Parameters for Ingress Mapping Relation


specifies the C-VLAN
priority of the ingress
packets.

priority of the ingress
packets.
server-side VLAN,
and the value 7
priority.

specifies the DSCP
priority of the IP
addresses of the
ingress packets.
services code point
0-5 of the
and indicates the
service class and
the packet.

MPLS EXP - - l Displays the MPLS

EXP value of ingress
packets.
obtains the packet
priority value
according to the
mappings between
egress queues and
egress packet
the egress MPLS
packet.
NOTE
Map) only.


service class of the DS
AF2 domain.
AF4 refers to the
of the DS node on the
CS6
behavior aggregate
CS7 (BA) operation. The
forwarding behavior
requirements.
l The PHB service
AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,
CS6, and CS7. The
priorities (C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
and MPLS EXP value)
contained in the
packets of the DS
PHB service classes
of the specified or
default mapping
relation.
NOTE
AF4.

Parameters for Egress Mapping Relation


service class of the DS
AF2 domain.
AF4 refers to the
of the DS node on the
CS6
behavior aggregate
CS7 (BA) operation. The
forwarding behavior
requirements.
l The PHB service
AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,
CS6, and CS7. The
priorities (C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
and MPLS EXP value)
contained in the
packets of the DS
PDB service classes
of the specified or
default mapping
relation.
NOTE
AF4.

specifies the C-VLAN
priority of the egress
packets.


priority of the egress
packets.
server-side VLAN,
and the value 7
priority.

specifies the DSCP
priority of the IP
addresses of the egress
packets.
services code point
0-5 of the
and indicates the
service class and
the packet.
MPLS EXP - - l Displays the MPLS

EXP value of egress
packets.
obtains the packet
priority value
according to the
mappings between
egress queues and
egress packet
the egress MPLS
packet.
NOTE
Map) only.



the board that uses the
mapping relations
between DS domains.
Available Port - - This parameter displays

the available port list from
which you can select the
port that uses the mapping
relations between DS
domains.
Port - - This parameter displays

the selected port list. The
ports in the list use the
mapping relations
between DS domains.

Packet Type cvlan cvlan l This parameter

svlan specifies the type of
the packet.
ip-dscp
l The packets trusted by
mpls-exp the OptiX RTN 980
are the C_VLAN,
S_VLAN, IP DSCP
and MPLS packets that
contain the C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
priority, or DSCP
value or MPLS EXP
value. By default, the
untrusted packets are
mapped to the BE
service class for best-
effort forwarding.
NOTE
transparently
MPLS/PWE3 services
MPLS EXP values.
according to the
Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Applied Port_Modification

This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing DiffServ (DS) domain applied
ports.
Navigation Path
Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree.
2. Select the DS domain to be changed in the main interface.
3. Click the Apply Port tab.

4. Click Modify.
Parameters for Configuring the Applied Ports

Mapping Relation Name - - This parameter indicates

Packet Type CVLAN CVLAN The packets trusted by the

SVLAN OptiX RTN 980 are the C-
VLAN, S-VLAN, IP
IP-DSCP DSCP packets, and MPLS
MPLS-EXP packets that respectively
contain the C-VLAN
priority, S-VLAN
priority, IP DSCP value
and MPLS EXP value. By
default, the untrusted
packets are mapped to the
BE service class for best-
effort forwarding.
NOTE
transparently
MPLS/PWE3 services
MPLS EXP values.
according to the

the board where the port is
located.
Available Port - - This parameter indicates

the available port.
Selected Port - - This parameter indicates

the selected port.
The selected port is
applied to the DS domain.

NOTE
If one default DS domain exists on the OptiX RTN 980, Mapping Relation ID is set to 1, and Mapping Relation
Name is set to Default Map. If these parameters are not set, all the ports belong to this domain.
Parameter Description: Policy Management

This topic describes the parameters that are related to port policies.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Policy Management from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Policy ID 1 to 36 - l This parameter

indicates the policy ID
of the port.
l The OptiX RTN 980
supports a maximum
number of 36 policies.
Policy Name - - This parameter indicates

or specifies the policy
name of the port.

CoS CS7 - l The BE, AF1, AF2,

CS6 AF3, AF4, EF, CS6,
and CS7 service
EF classes respectively
AF4 map eight queuing
AF3 entities. The OptiX
RTN 980 provides
AF2
different QoS policies
AF1 for the queues at
BE different service
classes.
l CS6-CS7: indicates
the highest service
grade, which is mainly
involved in signaling
transmission.
l EF: indicates fast
forwarding. This
service class is
applicable to the traffic
whose delay is small
and packet loss ratio is
low, for example,
voice and video
services.
l AF1-AF4: indicates
assured forwarding.
This service class is
that requires rate
guarantee but does not
require delay or jitter
limit.
l BE: indicates that the
traffic is forwarded in
best-effort manner
without special
processing.

Grooming Police After SP CS7, CS6, EF, BE: SP l The strict priority (SP)
Reloading WRR AF4, AF3, AF2, AF1: scheduling algorithm
WRR is designed for the key
services. One
important
characteristic of the
key services is that
higher priorities are
required to minimize
the response delay in
the case of congestion
events.
l The weighted round
robin (WRR)
scheduling algorithm
divides each port into
multiple output sub-
queues. The polling
scheduling is
performed among the
output sub-queues to
ensure that each sub-
queue has a certain
period of service time.
l The OptiX RTN 980
supports the setting of
the SP+WRR
of the CoS queue
according to the
requirement, and
provides one or more
queues that comply
with the SP algorithm.
Except for the default
value, however, the
value of the WRR
and the value of the SP
cannot be interleaved.
That is, except for the
default value,
Grooming Police
After Reloading can
be changed from SP to
WRR according to the
queue priorities in a
descending order
(CS7-BE).


according to the
Policy Weight(%) 1 to 100 25 l This parameter

specifies the weight of
the policy in the WRR
queue. The weight
indicates the
percentage of the
bandwidth resources
obtained by the WRR
queue.
set only when
Grooming Police
After Reloading is set
to WRR.
according to the
Bandwidth Limit Disabled Disabled l This parameter

Enabled indicates or specifies
whether traffic
shaping is enabled for
an egress queue
corresponding to a
PHB service class.
l CIR (kbit/s), PIR
(kbit/s), CBS (byte),
and PBS (byte) can be
set only when
Bandwidth Limit is
set to Enabled.
according to the
CIR(kbit/s) - - Traffic shaping for an

egress queue uses the
single token bucket two
color marker algorithm.
The value of the CIR must
be equal to the value of the
PIR. In actual traffic
shaping processing, only
the PIR is valid.

PIR(kbit/s) - - l When the buffer queue

is empty, the packets
are processed as
follows: If the rate of a
packet is equal to or
lower than the PIR, it
is directly forwarded;
if the rate of a packet is
higher than the PIR, it
enters the buffer queue
and then is forwarded
at a rate equal to the
PIR.
l When the buffer queue
is not empty, the
packets whose rate
passes the restriction
of the PIR directly
enter the buffer queue
and then are forwarded
PIR.
according to the
CBS(byte) - - l It is recommended that

you set the value of the
CBS equal to the value
of the PIR. In actual
traffic shaping
processing, only the
PBS is valid.
according to the

PBS(byte) - - l When the buffer queue

is empty, certain burst
packets can be
forwarded if the rate of
the packets is equal to
or lower than the PIR
in a certain period. The
maximum traffic of the
burst packets is
determined by the
PBS.
according to the
Parameter Description: Port Policy

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port policies.
Navigation Path
Management > Policy Management > Port Policy from the Function Tree.
2. Click the CoS Queue Configuration tab.
3. Click New. The Create Port Policy dialog box is displayed.
Parameters
Policy ID - - This parameter specifies

the policy ID of the port.
Automatically Assign Selected Deselected This parameter specifies

Deselected whether to automatically
allocate the policy ID of
the port policy. After this
parameter is selected, the
system automatically
allocates the policy ID,
and then the policy ID
cannot be set manually.
Policy Name - - This parameter specifies

the policy name of the
port.

CoS CS7 - l The BE, AF1, AF2,

CS6 AF3, AF4, EF, CS6,
and CS7 service
EF classes respectively
AF4 map eight queuing
AF3 entities. The OptiX
RTN 980 provides
AF2
different QoS policies
AF1 for the queues at
BE different service class.
l CS6-CS7: indicates
the highest service
grade, which is mainly
transmission.
l EF: indicates fast
forwarding. This
service class is
whose delay is small
and packet loss ratio is
low, for example,
voice and video
services.
l AF1-AF4: indicates
assured forwarding.
This service class is
that requires rate
guarantee but does not
require delay or jitter
limit.
l BE: indicates that the
traffic is forwarded in
best-effort manner
without special
processing.

Grooming Police After SP CS7, CS6, EF, BE: SP l The strict priority (SP)
Reloading WRR AF4, AF3, AF2, AF1: scheduling algorithm
WRR is designed for the key
services. One
important
characteristic of the
key services is that
higher priorities are
required to minimize
the response delay in
the case of congestion
events.
l The weighted round
robin (WRR)
divides each port into
multiple output sub-
queues. The polling
scheduling is
performed among the
output sub-queues to
ensure that each sub-
queue has a certain
period of service time.
l The OptiX RTN 980
the SP+WRR
of the CoS queue
according to the
requirement, and
provides one or more
queues that comply
with the SP algorithm.
Except for the default
value, however, the
value of the WRR
and the value of the SP
cannot be interleaved.
That is, except for the
default value,
Grooming Police
After Reloading can
be changed from SP to
WRR according to the
queue priorities in a
descending order
(CS7-BE).


according to the
Policy Weight(%) 1 to 100 25 l This parameter

specifies the weight of
the policy in the WRR
queue. The weight
indicates the
percentage of the
bandwidth resources
obtained by the WRR
queue.
set only when
Grooming Police
After Reloading is set
to WRR.
according to the
Bandwidth Limit Disabled Disabled l This parameter

whether traffic
shaping is enabled for
an egress queue
corresponding to a
PHB service class.
l CIR (kbit/s), PIR
set only when
Bandwidth Limit is
set to Enabled.
according to the
CIR(kbit/s) - - Traffic shaping for an

single token bucket two
color marker algorithm.
the PIR is valid.

PIR(kbit/s) - - l When the buffer queue

are processed as
PIR.
is not empty, the
packets whose rate
of the PIR directly
PIR.
according to the
CBS(byte) - - l It is recommended that

you set the value of the
CBS equal to the value
of the PIR. In actual
traffic shaping
processing, only the
PBS is valid.
according to the

PBS(byte) - - l When the buffer queue

packets can be
burst packets is
determined by the
PBS.
according to the
Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic Classification Configuration

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating traffic classification.
Navigation Path
Management > Policy Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Traffic Classification Configuration tab.
3. Click New. The Create Traffic Classification dialog box is displayed.

Traffic Classification ID 1 to 1024 - This parameter specifies

the ID of the traffic
classification.

ACL Action Permit Permit l The access control list

Deny (ACL) determines
whether to forward or
discard the packets
that enter the port
according to the
specified matching
rules.
l When ACL Action is
set to Permit, the
ingress port accepts
and then performs QoS
processing for only the
packets that meet the
specified mapping
rules.
l When ACL Action is
set to Deny, the
ingress port discards
the packets that meet
the specified mapping
rules.
Ingress Parameters
Logical Relation And And l This parameter

Between Matched Rules specifies the logical
relationship between
the traffic
classification
matching rules.
l The OptiX RTN 980
the logical AND
between multiple
matching rules.

Match Type DSCP Value - l After you click Add or

CVlan ID Delete, complex
traffic classification
CVlan priority can be performed on
SVlan ID the traffic that enters
SVlan priority the ingress port
according to the preset
matching rules.
l In the case a specific
service, complex
traffic classification
can be divided into
basic traffic types
according to the DSCP
value, C_VLAN ID,
C_VLAN priority,
S_VLAN ID, or
S_VLAN priority.
Traffic type is based
on the associated
Ethernet packets.
Therefore, this
parameter is set
according to the packet
type and the planning
information.
Match Value DSCP Value: 0 to 63 - l If the matching value

CVlan ID: 1 to 4094 of the packets is the
same as the preset
CVlan priority: 0 to 7 Match Value, the
SVlan ID: 1 to 4094 packets match the
SVlan priority: 0 to 7 rules of complex
traffic classification.
according to the

CoS - - l This parameter

CS7 specifies the PHB
service class queue
CS6 mapped by the traffic
EF classification packets.
AF4 l If this parameter is set
AF3 to empty (-), the traffic
classification packets
AF2
map the PHB service
AF1 class queue according
BE the mapping relation
specified in the topic
about Diffserv domain
management.
according to the
Bandwidth Limit Disabled Enabled l This parameter

whether the CAR
operation is performed
for the flow in the
ingress direction.
l CIR (kbit/s), PIR
set only when
Bandwidth Limit is
set to Enabled.
according to the

CIR(kbit/s) - - l When the rate of the

packets is not more
than the CIR, the
packets are marked
blue and pass the CAR
policing. These
packets are first
forwarded in the case
of network congestion.
l When the rate of the
packets is more than
the CIR but not more
than the PIR, the
packets whose rate is
more than the CIR can
pass the restriction of
the CAR and are
marked yellow. The
processing method of
the packets marked
yellow can be set to
"Pass" or "Remark".
"Remark" indicates
mapped into another
specified queue of a
higher priority (this is
equal to changing the
priority of the packets)
and then forwarded to
the next port. If a
network congestion
event occurs again, the
packets marked
yellow can be
processed according to
the new priority.
according to the

PIR(kbit/s) - - l When the rate of the

the PIR, the packets
that exceed the rate
restriction are marked
red and directly
discarded.
l When the rate of the
the CIR but not more
than the PIR, the
packets whose rate is
more than the CIR can
pass the restriction of
the CAR and are
marked yellow. The
processing method of
the packets marked
yellow can be set to
"Pass" or "Remark".
"Remark" indicates
mapped into another
the next port. If a
network congestion
event occurs again, the
packets marked
yellow can be
processed according to
the new priority.
according to the

CBS(byte) - - l During a certain

period, if the rate of the
packets whose
processing method is
marked "Pass" is not
more than the CIR,
certain burst packets
are allowed and can be
first forwarded in the
case of network
congestion. The
burst packets is
determined by the
CBS.
according to the
PBS(byte) - - l During a certain

period, if the rate of the
packets whose
processing method is
marked "Pass" is more
than the CIR but not
more than the PIR,
certain burst packets
are allowed and
marked yellow. The
burst packets is
determined by the
PBS.
according to the

Coloration Mode Color Blindness Color Blindness l This parameter

specifies the CAR
operation performed
by the equipment on
the packets. The
packets are dyed
according to the result
of the CAR operation.
The dying rule is
determined by the
comparison between
the rate of the packets
and the preset CAR
value.
l The OptiX RTN 980
supports Color
Blindness only.
Packet Color Red - Packets can be dyed in

Yellow three colors: red, yellow,
and green. The packets in
Green red are first discarded.
Handling Mode Discard - l This parameter

Pass specifies the method of
handling the packets.
Remark
l Discard: The packets
are discarded.
l Pass: The packets are
forwarded.
l Remark: The packets
are remarked.
"Remark" indicates
mapped into another
the next port.

Relabeled CoS CS7 - If the handling method is

CS6 set to "Remark", you can
reset the CoS of the
EF packets.
AF4
AF3
AF2
AF1
BE
Egress Parameters
Bandwidth Limit Disabled Enable l This parameter

Enable indicates or specifies
whether the traffic
shaping is performed
in the egress function.
l CIR (kbit/s), PIR
set only when
Bandwidth Limit is
set to Enabled.
according to the

CIR(kbit/s) - - l In the case that no

packets exist in the
egress queue: When
the rate of the packets
is not more than the
CIR, these packets
directly enter the
egress queue.
l In the case that certain
egress queue: The
packets whose rate
of the PIR directly
enter the egress queue,
which forwards the
packets to the next port
at the CIR.
according to the

PIR(kbit/s) - - l In the case that no

egress queue: If the
rate of the packets is
more than the CIR but
is not more than the
PIR, the packets
whose rate is more
than the CIR enter the
egress queue, which
forwards the packets to
the next port at the
CIR. If the rate of the
the PIR, the packets
are directly discarded.
l In the case that certain
egress queue: The
packets whose rate
of the PIR directly
enter the egress queue,
which forwards the
packets to the next port
at the CIR.
according to the
CBS(byte) - - l If the rate of the

packets is not more
than the CIR during a
certain period, the
burst packets are
directly transmitted.
The maximum traffic
of the burst packets is
determined by the
CBS.
according to the

PBS(byte) - - l If the rate of the

the CIR but is not more
than the PIR during a
certain period, the
burst packets enter the
egress queue. The
burst packets is
determined by the
PBS.
according to the
Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port shaping management tasks.
Navigation Path
Management > Port Shaping Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click New.
Parameters for Port Shaping Management

Slot No. - - This parameter specifies

the slot ID.

the port.
CIR (kbit/s) - - Traffic shaping for an

CBS (byte) - - single token bucket two
PIR (kbit/s) - - color marker algorithm.
the PIR is valid.
If the traffic shaping
function is enabled, OptiX
RTN 980 processes the
packets in the buffer

PBS (byte) - - queue through the

following methods when
no packets are available in
the queue.
are processed as
PIR.
packets can be
burst packets is
determined by the
PBS.
is not empty, the
packets whose rate
of the PIR directly
PIR.

A.7 RMON Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON performances.
A.7.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics Group

This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON statistics groups.
A.7.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Group
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history groups.
A.7.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Control Group
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history control groups.
A.7.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON setting.
A.7.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics Group

This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON statistics groups.
Navigation Path
Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Statistics Group tab.
Parameters
Object - - This parameter specifies the object to be

monitored.
Sampling Period 5 to 150 5 This parameter specifies the duration of the

monitoring period.
Display Selected Deselected l This parameter specifies the method of

Accumulated Deselected displaying the performance events.
Value l If this parameter is not selected, the
displayed value is an increment
compared to the value that is collected in
last sampling period and stored in the
register.
l If this parameter is selected, the
displayed value is an absolute value that
is currently stored in the register.

Display Mode Graphics List l This parameter specifies the method of

List displaying the performance events.
l If this parameter is set to Graphics, the
number of performance events to be
monitored at each time cannot be more
than 10, and the unit should be the same.
Legend Color - l This parameter indicates the description

Description of different colors.
Display Mode is set to Graphics.
Event - - l This parameter indicates the queried

performance events.
Display Mode is set to List.
A.7.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Group

This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history groups.
Navigation Path
2. Click the History Group tab.
Parameters
Object - - The parameter indicates the object to be

monitored.
Ended from/to - - This parameter specifies the start time and

end time of the monitoring period.
History Table 30-Second 30-Second This parameter specifies the monitoring

Type 30-Minute period.
Custom Period 1
Custom Period 2

Display Mode Graphics List l This parameter specifies the method of

List displaying the performance events.
l If this parameter is set to Graphics, the
number of performance events to be
monitored at each time cannot be more
than 10, and the unit should be the same.
Legend Color - l This parameter indicates the description

Description of different colors.
Display Mode is set to Graphics.
Event - - l This parameter indicates the queried

performance events.
Display Mode is set to List.
Statistical Item - - This parameter indicates the performance

items to be monitored.
Statistical Value - - This parameter indicates the statistical value

of the monitored performance items.
Time Flag - - This parameter indicates the time point of

each performance event.
A.7.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Control

Group
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history control groups.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON History
Control Group.
Parameters
30-Second Enabled Disabled This parameter indicates or specifies

Disabled whether to enable the 30-Second
monitoring function.
30-Minute Enabled Enabled This parameter indicates or specifies

Disabled whether to enable the 30-Minute

Custom Period 1 Enabled Disabled This parameter indicates or specifies

Disabled whether to enable Custom Period 1.

Disabled whether to enable Custom Period 2.
Period Length(s) 300 to 43200 900(Custom Period l This parameter indicates or specifies the
(Custom Period 1) 1) monitoring period in Custom Period 1
300 to 86400 86400(Custom and Custom Period 2.
(Custom Period 2) Period 2) l The value must be an integer multiple of
30.
History Register 1 to 50 16 This parameter indicates or specifies the

Count 6(Custom Period 2) quantity of the history registers.
A.7.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting

This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON setting.
Navigation Path
l Click the RMON Setting tab.
Object Parameters
Object - - This parameter indicates the object to be

collected.
30-Second Enabled - This parameter indicates or specifies

Disabled whether to enable the 30-Second
NOTE
In the case of Object, 30-Second cannot be set.
30-Minute Enabled Disabled l This parameter indicates or specifies

l In RMON History Control Group of
the NE, if 30-Minute is set to Disabled,
Not Supported is displayed for this
parameter.

Custom Period 1 Enabled - l This parameter indicates or specifies

Disabled whether to enable the monitoring
function based on Custom Period 1.
the NE, if Custom Period 1 is set to
Disabled, Not Supported is displayed
for this parameter.
Custom Period 2 Enabled - l This parameter indicates or specifies

Disabled whether to enable the monitoring
function based on Custom Period 2.
the NE, if Custom Period 2 is set to
Disabled, Not Supported is displayed
for this parameter.
Event Parameters
Event - - This parameter indicates the performance

event to be monitored.
30-Second Enabled Disabled This parameter indicates or specifies

Disabled whether to enable the monitoring function
based on 30-Second.
30-Minute Enabled - This parameter indicates or specifies


based on Custom Period 1Custom Period
1 Monitor.

based on Custom Period 2Custom Period
2 Monitor.
Threshold Detect Report All Report All l This parameter indicates or specifies the
Do Not Detect threshold detection method.
Report Only the l If the number of detected events reaches
Upper Threshold the preset threshold, the events are
reported to the NMS. Otherwise, the
Report Only the events are not reported to the NMS.
Lower Threshold
l If an event does not support this
parameter, Not Supported is displayed.

Upper Threshold - - This parameter indicates or specifies the

upper threshold. If the number of
performance events exceeds the preset
upper threshold, the corresponding
performance events are reported.
Lower Threshold - - This parameter indicates or specifies the

lower threshold. If the number of
performance events is less than the preset
lower threshold, the corresponding
performance events are reported.
Threshold Unit - - This parameter indicates the unit of each

threshold of the performance events.
A.8 Parameters for MPLS/PWE3 Services

This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS/PWE3 services.
NOTE
For parameters for PW-carried E-Line services, see A.6 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet
Featureson the Packet Plane.
A.8.1 MPLS Tunnel Parameters

This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS tunnels.
A.8.2 CES Parameters
This topic describes parameters that are related to CES services.
A.8.3 ATM Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM services.
A.8.1 MPLS Tunnel Parameters

This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS tunnels.
Parameter Description: Basic Configurations of MPLS Tunnels

This topic describes parameters that are related to the basic configurations of MPLS tunnels.
Navigation Path
MPLS Management > Basic Configuration from the Function Tree.


LSR ID - 0.0.0.0 l Specifies or displays

the LSR ID of an NE.
On a PSN, each NE is
assigned a unique LSR
ID.
l This parameter must
be set in IPv4 address
format.
Start of Global Label 0-1015808 0 l Specifies the start

Space value of a global label
space. The OptiX RTN
980 supports a step of
2048.
l The start value of a
global label space is
the smallest unicast
tunnel label. When
Start of Global Label
Space is 0, the smallest
unicast tunnel label is
16, with values 0 to 15
reserved.
l On an MPLS-enabled
network, global label
spaces of NEs are
recommended to
overlap each other if
possible.
Global Label Space Size - - Displays the size of a

global label space.
Start of Multicast Label - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

Space not support this parameter.
Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Static Tunnel

This topic describes parameters that are related to static tunnels.
Navigation Path
Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function
Tree.
2. Click the Static Tunnel tab.

3. Click Query.

ID - - Displays the tunnel ID.

customized tunnel name.
Enable State Enabled Enabled l Specifies or displays

Disabled whether a tunnel is
enabled.
l For a unidirectional
tunnel, this parameter
can be set only if Node
Type is Ingress.
l For a bidirectional
cannot be set if Node
Type is Transit.
Node Type - - l Displays the node type.

l For bidirectional
tunnels, this parameter
displays the node types
of forward tunnels.
Direction - - Displays the direction of a

tunnel.
CIR(kbit/s) No Limit No Limit l Specifies or displays

1024-1024000 the committed
information rate (CIR)
of a tunnel.
l Generally, it is
set this parameter to No
Limit. If you need to
enable the CES CAC
function or limit the
PW bandwidth, set this
parameter to be the
same as the planned
tunnel bandwidth.
CBS(kbit/s) - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

PIR(byte) - - The OptiX RTN 980 does


PBS(byte) - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

Bandwidth Remaining - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

(kbit/s) not support this parameter.
In Port - - Displays the ingress port

of a forward tunnel, which
is also the egress port of
the mapping reverse
tunnel.
Forward In Label - - Displays the MPLS label

that a forward tunnel
carries when entering a
node.
Reverse Out Label - - Specifies the MPLS label

that a reverse tunnel
tunnel.
Out Port - - Displays the egress port of

a forward tunnel, which is
also the ingress port of the
mapping reverse tunnel.
Forward Out Label - - Displays the MPLS label

that a forward tunnel
carries when leaving a
node.
Reverse In Label - - Displays the MPLS label

that a reverse tunnel
node.
Forward Next Hop - - Displays the IP address of

Address the next-hop port of a
forward tunnel.
Reverse Next Hop - - Displays the IP address of

Address the next-hop port of a
reverse tunnel.
Source Node - - Displays the LSR ID of the

ingress node.
Sink Node - - Displays the LSR ID of the

egress node.
Tunnel Type - - Displays the tunnel type.

EXP 0-7 - l Specifies or displays

None the value of the EXP
field in the packets
transmitted through
MPLS tunnels.
l For unidirectional
is available only if
Node Type is Ingress.
l For bidirectional
Type is Transit.
to a value from 0 to 7,
the EXP field takes its
fixed value.
l If this parameter takes
its default value None,
the EXP field varies
based on the DiffServ
mappings.
LSP Mode Pipe Pipe l Displays or specifies

the LSP mode.
l Pipe: When stripping
MPLS tunnel labels
from packets, an egress
node does not update
the scheduling priority
for the packets.
l For bidirectional
is available only if
Node Type is Egress.
l For bidirectional
Type is Transit.
NOTE
On the OptiX RTN 980, this
parameter can be set to
Pipe only.
MTU(byte) - - The OptiX RTN 980 does


Protection Group - - Displays the MPLS APS

protection group to which
a tunnel belongs.
VlAN ID - - l Specifies or displays

the VLAN ID that
Ethernet packets carry
when transmitted over
MPLS tunnels.
l If packets need to
traverse a Layer 2
network, set the VLAN
ID for the tunnel
carried by the NNI port
according to the
VLAN planning
requirements on the
Layer 2 network.
the same value for both
ends of a tunnel.
Deployment - - Displays the deployment

status of the tunnel.
Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of Unidirectional

Tunnels
This topic describes parameters that are used for creating unidirectional tunnels.
Navigation Path
Tree.
3. Click New and choose Unidirectional Tunnel from the drop-down list.
The New Unicast Unidirectional Tunnel dialog box is displayed.
4. Select New Reverse Tunnel.


Tunnel ID 1-65535 - l Specifies the tunnel ID.

l The total number of
tunnels and PWs must
be equal to or less than
1024. The number of
tunnels that carry PWs
are not included in the
total.
Tunnel Name - - Specifies the tunnel name.
Node Type Ingress Ingress Specifies the node type of

Egress a forward tunnel.
Transit
Direction - - Indicates the direction of a

tunnel.
CIR(kbit/s) No Limit No Limit l Specifies the

1024-1024000 committed information
rate (CIR) of a tunnel.
l Generally, it is
enable the CES CAC
parameter to be the
same as the planned
tunnel bandwidth.

PIR(Byte) - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

PBS(Byte) - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

In Board/Logic - - Specifies the board where

Interface Type the ingress port of a
forward tunnel is located.
In Port - - Specifies the ingress port

the mapping reverse
tunnel.

In Labela 16-1048575 - l Specifies the MPLS

label that a tunnel
node.
set for only egress and
transit nodes.
Out Board/Logic - - Specifies the board where

Interface Type the egress port of a
Out Port - - Specifies the egress port of

Out Labela 16-1048575 - l Specifies the MPLS

label that a tunnel
node.
set for only ingress and
transit nodes.
Next Hop Address - - l Specifies the port IP

address of the next-hop
node for a tunnel.
transit nodes.
Source Node - - l Specifies the LSR ID

of the ingress node.
set for only egress
nodes and transit
nodes.
Sink Node - - l Specifies the LSR ID

of the egress node.
transit nodes.

Tunnel Type E-LSP E-LSP l Specifies the tunnel

L-LSP type.
l The value E-LSP
indicates that the EXP
field is used to identify
packet scheduling
priorities of PWs. An
E-LSP tunnel can
contain PWs of eight
packet scheduling
priorities.
l The value L-LSP
indicates that the
MPLS label value is
used to identify packet
scheduling priorities of
PWs. An L-LSP tunnel
can contain PWs of the
same packet
scheduling priority.
EXP 0-7 None l Specifies the value of

None the EXP field in the
packets transmitted
through MPLS
tunnels.
l This parameter is
available only if Node
Type is Ingress.
the EXP field takes its
fixed value.
its default value None,
the EXP field varies
based on the DiffServ
mappings.

LSP Mode Pipe Pipe l Pipe: When stripping

MPLS tunnel labels
for the packets.
l This parameter is
available only if Node
Type is Egress.
NOTE
Pipe only.
MTU - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

NOTE
At an MPLS node, in labels must be different from each other, out labels must also be different from each
other, but out labels can be the same as in labels.
Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of Bidirectional

Tunnels
This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating bidirectional tunnels.
Navigation Path
Tree.
3. Click New and choose Bidirectional Tunnel from the drop-down list.

Tunnel ID 1 to 65535 - l Specifies the tunnel ID.

l The total number of
tunnels and PWs must
be equal to or less than
1024. The number of
tunnels that carry PWs
is not included in the
total.
Tunnel Name - - Specifies the tunnel name.

Node Type Ingress Ingress Specifies the node type of

Egress a forward tunnel.
Transit
Direction - - Indicates the direction of a

tunnel.
CIR(kbit/s) No Limit No Limit l Specifies the

1024-1024000 committed information
rate (CIR) of a tunnel.
l Generally, it is
enable the CES CAC
parameter to be the
same as the planned
tunnel bandwidth.

PIR(Byte) - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

PBS(Byte) - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

In Board/Logic - - Specifies the board where

Interface Type the ingress port of a
In Port - - Specifies the ingress port

the mapping reverse
tunnel.
Forward In Labela 16 to 1048575 - l Specifies the MPLS

label that data carries
when entering a
forward tunnel.
transit nodes.

Reverse Out Labela 16 to 1048575 - l Specifies the MPLS

when leaving a reverse
tunnel.
transit nodes.
Out Board/Logic - - Specifies the board where

Interface Type the egress port of a
Out Port - - Specifies the egress port of

Forward Out Labela 16 to 1048575 - l Specifies the MPLS

when leaving a
forward tunnel.
transit nodes.
Reverse In Labela 16 to 1048575 - l Specifies the MPLS

when entering a
reverse tunnel.
transit nodes.
Forward Next Hop - - l Indicates or specifies

Address the IP address of the
next hop in a forward
tunnel.
transit nodes.
Reverse Next Hop - - l Indicates or specifies

Address the IP address of the
next hop in a reverse
tunnel.
transit nodes.

Source Node - - l Specifies the LSR ID

of the ingress node.
set for only egress
nodes and transit
nodes.
Sink Node - - l Specifies the LSR ID

of the egress node.
transmit nodes.
Tunnel Type E-LSP E-LSP l Specifies the tunnel

L-LSP type.
l The value E-LSP
indicates that the EXP
field is used to identify
packet scheduling
priorities of PWs. An
E-LSP tunnel can
contain PWs of eight
packet scheduling
priorities.
l The value L-LSP
indicates that the
MPLS label value is
used to identify packet
scheduling priorities of
PWs. An L-LSP tunnel
can contain PWs of the
same packet
scheduling priority.

EXP 0 to 7 None l Specifies the value of

None the EXP field in the
packets transmitted
through MPLS
tunnels.
l This parameter cannot
be set if Node Type is
Transit.
the EXP field assumes
the fixed value.
the default value
None, the EXP field is
set based on the
DiffServ mappings.
LSP Mode Pipe Pipe l Pipe: When stripping

MPLS tunnel labels
for the packets.
l This parameter cannot
be set if Node Type is
Transit.
NOTE
Pipe only.
MTU - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

NOTE
At an MPLS node, in labels must be different from each other, out labels must also be different from each
other, but out labels can be the same as in labels.
Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_OAM Parameters

This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS OAM.
Navigation Path
Tree.

2. Click the OAM Parameter tab.

Tunnel ID - - Displays the tunnel ID.
Tunnel Name - - Displays the tunnel name.
Node Type - - l Displays the node type.

l For bidirectional
displays the node types
of forward tunnels.
Tunnel Direction - - Displays the direction of a

tunnel.
OAM Status Enabled Disabled l Specifies or displays

Disabled whether the local node
can perform and
respond to OAM
operations.
l If OAM Status is
Enabled, the local NE
can perform and
respond to OAM
operations.
l If OAM Status is
Disabled, the local NE
cannot perform and
respond to OAM
operations.
l If MPLS APS
protection needs to be
configured or a CC test
needs to be performed
for the tunnel, OAM
Status needs to be set
to Enabled.

Detection Mode Auto-Sensing Auto-Sensing l Specifies or displays

Manual the MPLS OAM
detection mode.
l Manual: During a CC
test, MPLS OAM
the user.
l Auto-Sensing: During
a CC test, MPLS OAM
interval for receiving
MPLS OAM packets.
can be set for its egress
node only.
tunnel, if Detection
Mode is set to
Manual, you need to
set the MPLS OAM
received and
transmitted.
l Generally, the value
Auto-Sensing is
recommended.


fixed interval.
the user.
l For the egress node of
a unidirectional tunnel,
if Detection Mode is
set to Manual, this
type of MPLS OAM
received.
Sensing, this
type of MPLS OAM
transmitted.
Mode is set to
Manual, this
types of MPLS OAM
received and
transmitted.
l The value FFD is
assumed for MPLS
APS and the value
CV is assumed for
continuous
MPLS tunnels.

Detection Packet Period 3.3 50 l Displays or specifies

(ms) 10 the OAM detection
period.
20
l This parameter is
50 available only when
100 Detection Packet
200 Type is FFD. It takes
its fixed value of 1000
500
ms when Detection
Packet Type is CV.
3.3 for MPLS APS.
Reverse Tunnel - - l Specifies the mapping

reverse tunnel of a
forward tunnel.
cannot be set.
CV/FFD Status - - Displays whether CV/

FFD is enabled.
LSP Status - - Displays whether an LSP

is available.
LSP Defect Type - - Displays the LSP defect

type.
Disable LSP Duration - - Displays the duration

(ms) when an LSP is
unavailable.
LSP Defect Location - - Displays the LSR ID of a

node where LSP defects
are detected.

SD Threshold 0-100 0 l Specifies or displays

the SD threshold.
When the OAM packet
loss ratio is higher than
the parameter value,
the corresponding
alarm is reported.
node only.
set to 0, SD threshold
detection is not
supported.
SF Threshold 0-100 0 l Specifies or displays

the SF threshold.
When the OAM packet
the corresponding
alarm is reported.
node only.
set to 0, SF threshold
detection is not
supported.
l The SD threshold is not
higher than the SF
threshold.
Source Node - - Displays the source node

of a tunnel.
Sink Node - - Displays the sink node of

a tunnel.
Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_FDI

This topic describes FDI parameters.

Navigation Path
Tree.
2. Click the FDI tab.

Enable FDI Selected Selected l Specifies or displays

Not selected whether Enable FDI is
selected.
l If the FDI function is
enabled for a transit
node, the transit node
inserts an FDI packet
to all LSPs that travel
through the transit
node when a fault
occurs on the link
between the ingress
and transit nodes. On
reception of the FDI
packet, the egress node
reports an alarm. In
this case, if MPLS APS
is configured
correctly, protection
switching is triggered
before the egress node
detects an LSP defect
within a detection
period.
l Generally, the default
parameter value is
recommended.
Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP Ping

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the LSP Ping test.
Navigation Path
Tree.
2. Click the OAM Parameters tab.

3. Select the required tunnel, click OAM Operation in the lower right corner, and choose
Ping Test from the drop-down list.

Packet Count 1 to 4294967295 3 Specifies the number of

test request packets.
EXP Value 0 to 7 7 l Specifies the EXP

value of the MPLS
label in test request
packets. The value 7
priority.
recommended.
TTL 1 to 255 255 l Specifies the time-to-

live (TTL) value of the
MPLS label in test
request packets.
recommended.
Transmit Interval 1 to 1000 100 l Specifies the interval

(10ms) for transmitting test
request packets.
recommended.
Packet Length 64 to 1400 64 l Specifies the length of

recommended.
Wait-to-Response 1 to 6000 300 l Specifies the wait-to-

Timeout Time(10ms) response timeout
value.
recommended.

Response Mode IPv4 UDP Response IPv4 UDP Response l Specifies the response
No Response mode of test request
packets.
Application Control
Channel l The value No
Response indicates
that the test
performance event is
reported without
sending response
packets.
l The value Application
Control Channel
indicates that response
is performed through
the reverse channel.
l The value IPv4 UDP
Response indicates
that the IPv4 UDP
packets encapsulating
MPLS echo reply
messages are sent as
response packets.
Response is reserved
for scenarios where all
nodes on an LSP
communicate with
each other over a DCN
running IP protocols.
l Set this parameter
based on the situation
of the egress node. If
the egress node
supports reverse
channel response, set
this parameter to
Application Control
Channel. If the egress
node does not support
reverse channel
response but supports
DCN channel response
by means of IP
protocols, set this
parameter to IPv4
UDP Response.


NOTE
For a unidirectional
tunnel, Response
Mode cannot be set to
Application Control
Channel.
Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP Traceroute

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the LSP Traceroute test.
Navigation Path
Tree.
2. Click the OAM Parameters tab.
3. Select the required tunnel, click OAM Operation in the lower right corner, and choose
Traceroute Test from the drop-down list.


value of the MPLS
label in test request
packets. The value 7
priority.
recommended.

MPLS label in test
request packets.
recommended.

recommended.


value.
recommended.

packets.
Application Control
Response indicates
that the test
reported without
sending response
packets.
Control Channel
Response indicates
that the IPv4 UDP
packets encapsulating
MPLS echo reply
messages are sent as
response packets.
Response is reserved
for scenarios where all
nodes on an LSP
communicate with
each other over a DCN
running IP protocols.
of the egress node. If
the egress node
supports reverse
channel response, set
this parameter to
Application Control
Channel. If the egress
node does not support
reverse channel
by means of IP
protocols, set this
parameter to IPv4
UDP Response.


NOTE
For a unidirectional
tunnel, Response
Mode cannot be set to
Application Control
Channel.
Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Management

This topic describes parameters that are related to PW management.
Navigation Path
Configuration > MPLS Management > PW Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the PW Management tab.

PW ID - - Displays the ID of the PW that carries a

service.
Enable State - - Displays whether a PW is enabled.
PW Signaling - - Displays the PW signaling type.

Type NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980 uses only static PWs.
PW Type - - l Displays the PW type. Different PW types

perform different service processing
modes.
l When a PW transmits E-Line services, set
PW Type to Ethernet or Ethernet
Tagged Mode.
l If a PW transmits CES services, set PW
Type to CESoPSN or SATop.
l If a PW transmits ATM services, set PW
Type to ATM n-to-one VCC Cell
transport, ATM one-to-one VCC Cell
Mode, ATM n-to-one VPC Cell
transport, or ATM one-to-one VPC Cell
Mode.
Direction - - Displays the direction of a PW.
PW Ingress - - Displays the ingress label at the source port of

Label/Source a PW.
Port

PW - - Displays the encapsulation type of the packets

Encapsulation on a PW.
Type NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980 supports only MPLS
encapsulation.
PW Egress - - Displays the egress label at the sink port of a

Label/Sink PW.
Port
Opposite LSR - - Displays the LSR ID of the node at the other

ID end of a PW.
Local - - Displays the working status of the PW at the

Working local end.
Status
Remote - - Displays the working status of the PW at the

Working remote end.
Status
Compositive - - Displays the working status of the entire PW.

Working
Status
Tunnel Type - - Displays the type of the tunnel that carries a

PW.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980 supports only MPLS tunnels.
Tunnel - - Displays the ID of the tunnel that carries a PW.
Deployment - - Displays the deployment status of a PW.

Status
Tunnel - - The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this

Automatic parameter.
Selection
Policy
QoS Parameters
Table A-8 CES services

PW ID - - Displays the ID of the PW

that carries the service.


the PW that carries the
service.
CIR(kbit/s) - - The OptiX RTN 980 does


Table A-9 E-Line services



service.
Bandwidth Limit - - Displays whether the

bandwidth is limited.
CIR(kbit/s) - - Displays the CIR.
CBS(byte) - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

PIR(kbit/s) - - The OptiX RTN 980 does



LSP Mode - - Displays the LSP mode.

NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980
supports only Pipe.


Table A-10 ATM services



service.
Bandwidth Limit - - Displays whether the

bandwidth is limited.






RTP Head - - Displays whether the CES

service packets carry an
RTP header.
Packet Loading Time - - Displays the packet

(us) loading time.
Jitter Compensation - - Displays the jitter buffer

Buffering Time(us) time for the received CES
packets.
Ingress Clock Mode - - Displays the mode for

extracting clock
information from CES
services.

Egress Clock Mode - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

Enable CES Service - - Displays whether CES

Alarm Transparent service alarms are
Transmission transparently transmitted.
Threshold of Entering R - - Displays the threshold of

bit Inserting Status the packet loss ratio of
CES services. The
corresponding alarm will
be reported if the actual
packet loss ratio crosses
this threshold.
Threshold of Exiting R - - Displays the threshold of

bit Inserting Status received CES service
packets. The
be cleared after the actual
number of received CES
service packets crosses
this threshold.
Sequence Number Mode - - Displays the sequence

number mode.

Control Word - - Displays whether the

control word is used to
transfer packet
information. For ETH
PWE3 services, this
parameter is always not
used.

channel type.
VCCV Verification - - Displays the VCCV mode.

Mode

Request VLAN - - When PW Type is

Ethernet Tag, this
parameter displays the
VLAN ID to be added to
packets that are sent from
the opposite end and do
not carry any VLAN IDs.
TPID - - When PW Type is

Ethernet Tag, this
TPID.

transfer packet
information.

channel type.

Mode
Max Concatenated Cell - - Displays the maximum

Count number of concatenated
cells.

(us) loading time.
Parameter Description: PW Management_MS-PW Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are related to MS-PW creation.
Navigation Path
2. Click the MS PW tab.
3. Click New.


ID - - Specifies the ID of MS-PW.
Name - - Specifies the name of MS-PW.
MTU(byte) - - The OptiX RTN 980 does not support this

parameter.
Service Type ETH Service ETH Service l Specifies the type of services carried by the
CES Service MS-PW.
ATM Service l Set this parameter according to the
Connection Port Transparent Port Transparent l This parameter is available only when
Type PVP Service Type is ATM Service.
PVC l PVP: Only the VPIs of the source and sink
are exchanged.
l PVP: The VPIs and VCIs of the source and
sink are exchanged.
l Port Transparent: ATM transparent
transmission refers to the transparent
transmission of ATM cells that are
encapsulated into PWs as payloads.
Parameters for the Basic Attributes of PWs

PW ID - Specifies the ID of the PW

PW Signaling Type Static Static Specifies the signaling

type of the PW. Labels for
static PWs need to be
manually assigned.

PW Type - - l Specifies the type of

the PW.
Ethernet if Service
Type is ETH Service
and no VLAN IDs
need to be added. If it
is required to add
VLAN IDs, set this
parameter to Ethernet
Tag Mode and then set
Request VLAN in the
Advanced Attribute
tab.
l If Service Type is
CES Service, the
value CESoPSN
indicates structure-
aware emulation,
which allows timeslot
compression; the value
SAToP indicates
structure-agnostic
emulation, which does
not allow timeslot
compression.
l If Service Type is
ATM Service, set this
parameter according to
the value of
Connection Type.

the PW.
PW Encapsulation Type - - Displays the

PW.

Source Port label.

Port label.
Tunnel Selection Mode Manually Manually Specifies the method to

select tunnels.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980
supports only the value
Manually.

Tunnel Type MPLS MPLS Specifies the type of the

Tunnel - - A created tunnel needs to

be selected. If no tunnel is
available, no PW can be
created.


the reverse tunnel
automatically.
QoS Parameters
CES Services

Ethernet services

bandwidth limit function
is enabled.
bandwidth of one or
more PWs in an MPLS
tunnel.
Therefore, this
PWE3 services in an
MPLS tunnel.


CIR(Kbit/s) - - Specifies the committed

a PW.
CBS(byte) - - Specifies the committed

burst size (CBS) of a PW.
PIR(Kbit/s) - - Specifies the peak

information rate (PIR) of a
PW.
PBS(byte) - - Specifies the peak burst

size (PBS) of a PW.


does not update the
packets.

ATM services


bandwidth limit is
enabled.
l This function can be
used to limit the
bandwidth of one or
more PWs, or the
bandwidth of one or
more ATM PWE3
services, in an MPLS
tunnel. (One ATM
PWE3 service
corresponds to one
PW.)
l

CIR (Kbit/s) - - Specifies the committed

the PW.
CBS (kbyte) - - Specifies the excess burst

size of the PW.
PIR (kbit/s) - - Specifies the peak

information rate (PIR) of
the PW.
PBS (kbyte) - - Specifies the maximum

excess burst size of the
PW.


Parameters for the Advanced Attributes of PWs
CES Services
RTP Header Disable Disable l Specifies the RTP

Enable header.
l The RTP header
carries time stamps.
recommended.
Jitter Compensation 375 to 16000 8000 l Specifies the jitter

Buffering Time(us) buffer time for the
received CES packets.
l A greater value of this
parameter means
fewer impacts of
transmission jitters on
CES services, greater
delays of CES
services, and more
resources occupied by
CES services.
recommended.
NOTE
Set Jitter Compensation
Buffering Time(us) to a
value greater than the value
of Packet Loading Time
(us) at the opposite end.
Packet Loading Time 125 to 5000 1000 l Specifies the length of

(us) fragments in the TDM
data stream. Each
fragment is
encapsulated into one
PW packet.
parameter means
higher encapsulation
efficiency but greater
delays of CES
services.
recommended.

Ingress Clock mode Null Null l Specifies the mode in

Adaptive Clock Mode which CES services
extract clocks from
TDM services.
l The value Null
indicates that no clocks
are extracted. If this
value is assumed, CES
services do not
transmit clocks.
l The value Adaptive
Clock Mode indicates
that CES services
extract clocks from
TDM services. If this
services transmit TDM
line clocks to the
downstream.
l You need to determine
the end of master
clock. This parameter
assumes the value
Adaptive Clock
Mode at the end of
master clock and
assumes the value
Null at the end of slave
clock.
Egress Clock mode - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

64K Timeslot Number 1 to 31 1 l Specifies the number

of 64 kbit/s timeslots
that transmit service
traffic. The value of
this parameter must
include 16 if Frame
Mode is 30.
l On the two ends of a
radio link, the timeslot
lists can be different
but the numbers of
timeslots must be the
same.
l This parameter is
unavailable if PW
Type is SAToP.

Sequence Number Mode Huawei Mode Huawei Mode Specifies the sequence
Standard Mode number mode.
Ethernet services and PTP clock services

Control Word No Use No Use For ETH PWE3 services,

always No Use.
Control Channel Type None Alert Label l Specifies the mode of

Alert Label PW connectivity
check.
l None indicates that
VCCV is not used.
l Alert Label indicates
VCCV packets in
Alert Label
encapsulation mode.

used for PW
connectivity check.
parameter to Ping.
Request VLAN - - l Set this parameter

when PW Type is
Ethernet Tagged
Mode.
l If the received packets
do not carry any
VLAN IDs, the PW
will add VLAN IDs to
the packets as required
by the setting of this
parameter.

not support request VLAN
TPID of the PW level.

ATM services
Control Word Must Use Must Use Specifies whether to use

No Use the control word. In the
MPLS packet switching
network, the control word
is used to transmit packet
information.
Control Channel Type CW CW l Specifies the mode of

None PW connectivity
check.
l The value None
indicates that the
control word is not
supported. That is, the
PW connectivity check
is not supported.
l The value CW
indicates that the
control word is
supported.
l Set Control Word to
Must Use if PW
Type is ATM 1:1.

used for PW
connectivity check.
parameter to Ping.
Max. Concatenated Cell 1 to 31 10 l Specifies the

Count maximum number of
concatenated cells.
l If the value 1 is
assumed, only one
ATM cell is
encapsulated in one
packet. If the value
from 2 to 31 is
assumed, a maximum
of 2 to 31 ATM cells
are encapsulated into
one packet.

Packet Loading Time 100 to 50000 1000 l Specifies the packet

(us) loading time. Once the
packet loading time
expires, the packet is
sent out even if the
concatenated cells are
less than the
maximum.
l If Max. Concatenated
Cell Count assumes
the value 1, this
parameter is
ineffective. That is, the
packet will be sent out
once the cell is loaded.
Parameter Description: PW Management_PW OAM

This topic describes parameters that are related to PW OAM.
Navigation Path
2. Click the PW OAM Parameter tab.


PW Type - - Displays the type of the

PW that carries the
service.

OAM Status Enabled Disabled l Specifies or displays

Disabled whether the local node
can perform and
respond to OAM
operations.
l If OAM Status is
Enabled, the local NE
can perform and
respond to OAM
operations.
l If OAM Status is
Disabled, the local NE
cannot perform and
respond to OAM
operations.
l If PW APS protection
needs to be configured
or a CC test needs to be
performed for the
tunnel, OAM Status
needs to be set to
Enabled.
Associate AC State - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

Detection Mode Auto-Sensing Auto-Sensing l Specifies or displays

Manual the detection mode for
PW OAM packets.
l Manual: During a CC
test, PW OAM packets
are sent at the interval
specified by the user.
l Auto-Sensing: During
a CC test, PW OAM
interval for receiving
PW OAM packets.
set to Manual, you
need to set the type of
PW OAM detection
and transmitted.
l The value Auto-
Sensing is
recommended.


fixed interval.
the user.
this parameter
specifies the type of
PW OAM detection
packets to be
transmitted.
set to Manual, this
type of PW OAM
received and
transmitted.
l The value FFD is
assumed for PW APS
and the value CV is
assumed for
continuous
PWs.
Detection Packet Period 3.3 50 l Displays or specifies

(ms) 10 the OAM detection
period.
20
l If Detection Packet
50 Type is FFD, this
100 parameter can be set; if
200 Detection Packet
Type is CV, the value
500
is always 1000.
3.3 for PW APS.

SD Threshold (%) 0-100 0 l Specifies or displays

the SD threshold.
When the OAM packet
the corresponding
alarm is reported.
set to 0, SD threshold
detection is not
supported.
SF Threshold (%) 0-100 0 l Specifies or displays

the SF threshold.
When the OAM packet
the corresponding
alarm is reported.
set to 0, SF threshold
detection is not
supported.
l The SD threshold is not
higher than the SF
threshold.
LSR ID to Be Received - - l Specifies or displays

the LSR ID to be
received.
l This parameter is
available only if OAM
Status is Disabled.
PW ID to be Received - - l Specifies or displays

the PW ID to be
received.
l This parameter is
available only if OAM
Status is Disabled.
Local Working Status - - Displays whether PWs at

the local end are available.
Local PW Defect Type - - Displays the local PW

defect type.
Local Disable PW - - Displays the duration

Duration(ms) when the local PW is
unavailable.

Local PW Defect - - Displays the local PW

Location defect location.
Remote Working Status - - Displays whether PWs at

the remote end are
available.
Remote PW Defect Type - - Displays the remote PW

defect type.
Remote Disable PW - - Displays the duration

Duration(ms) when the remote PW is
unavailable.
Remote PW Defect - - Displays the remote PW

Location defect location.
Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Ping

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PW Ping test.
Navigation Path
3. Select the required PW and click OAM Operation > Ping Test.

Packet Count 1 to 4294967295 3 Specifies the number of


value of the PW label
in test request packets.
The value 7 indicates
recommended.

PW label in test request
packets.
recommended.

Transmit Interval 1 to 1000 100 l Specifies the interval

(10ms) for transmitting test
request packets.
recommended.

recommended.

value.
recommended.

packets.
Application Control
Response indicates
that the test
reported without
sending response
packets.
Control Channel
indicates that the IPv4
UDP packets
encapsulating MPLS
echo reply messages
are sent as response
packets.
l The value IPv4 UDP is
reserved for scenarios
where all nodes on an
LSP communicate
with each other over a
DCN running IP
protocols.
of the remote PE. If the
remote PE supports
reverse channel
response, set this
parameter to
Application Control
Channel. If the remote
PE does not support
reverse channel
by means of IP
protocols, set this
parameter to IPv4
UDP Response.

Control Channel Type Control Word - Specifies the control

Alert Label channel type.
NOTE
ETH-PWE3 services do not
support Control Word.
Peer PW ID - - Specifies the PW ID of the

peer end.
Peer IP - - Specifies the IP address of

the peer port.
Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_PW Traceroute

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PW Traceroute test.
Navigation Path
3. Select the required PW, click OAM Operation in the lower right corner, and choose
Traceroute Test from the drop-down list.


value of the PW label
in test request packets.
The value 7 indicates
recommended.

PW label in test request
packets.
recommended.

recommended.


value.
recommended.

packets.
Application Control
Response indicates
that the test
reported without
sending response
packets.
Control Channel
indicates that the IPv4
UDP packets
encapsulating MPLS
echo reply messages
are sent as response
packets.
l The value IPv4 UDP is
reserved for scenarios
where all nodes on an
LSP communicate
with each other over a
DCN running IP
protocols.
of the remote PE. If the
remote PE supports
reverse channel
response, set this
parameter to
Application Control
Channel. If the remote
PE does not support
reverse channel
by means of IP
protocols, set this
parameter to IPv4
UDP Response.

Parameter Description: MPLS APS Protection Management

This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS APS protection management.
Navigation Path
Configuration > APS Protection Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Tunnel APS Management tab.

Protection Group ID - - l Displays the protection

group ID.
l The system
automatically assigns
IDs to the protection
groups according to
their creation
sequence.
Protection Type - - Displays the protection

group type.
Switching Mode Dual-Ended - l Displays or specifies

Single-Ended the switching mode of
a protection group.
l The value Single-End
are switched only in
the direction where
faults occur.
l The value Dual-End
in both positive and
reverse directions are
switched to their
protection channels
when faults occur.
you set this parameter
to Dual-Ended.

BDI Status Disabled - l Specifies or displays

Enabled whether the protection
switching is triggered
upon receiving BDI
packets.
l This parameter is
available only when
Switching Mode is set
to Single-End.
l If BDI Status is set to
Enabled, the egress
node notifies the
ingress node of any
detected faults by
sending BDI packets;
upon receiving BDI
packets, the ingress
node triggers
protection switching.
Transmit and receive - - Displays the protocol

Status of Protocol Packet packet status.
Revertive Mode Non-Revertive - l Specifies or displays

Revertive whether to switch
services to the original
working tunnel after
the fault is rectified.
indicates to perform
the switching; the
value Non-Revertive
indicates not to
perform the switching.
to Revertive.

WTR Time(min) 1-12 - l Specifies and displays

the WTR time of the
protection group.
original working
tunnel recovers,
to the original working
tunnel.
l This parameter is
available only when
Revertive Mode is
Revertive.
to 5.
Hold-Time(100ms) 0-100 - l Specifies the hold-off

time of the protection
group.
does not trigger
switching once it
detects faults, but wait
expires, and then
detect whether any
faults persist, the
otherwise, no
to 0.
Protocol Status - - Displays the protocol

status.
Switching Status - - Displays the switching

group.

group.

Unit - - Displays whether a tunnel

is a working or protection
tunnel.
Active Tunnel - - Displays the currently

used tunnel.
Tunnel Status - - Displays the tunnel status.
Tunnel Type - - Displays the tunnel type.
Tunnel Direction - - Displays the direction of a

tunnel.
Ingress Tunnel - - Displays the ingress

tunnel.
Egress Tunnel - - Displays the egress tunnel.
Parameter Description: Tunnel Protection Group_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating a tunnel protection group.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > APS
Protection Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Tunnel APS Management tab.
3. Click New.

Protection Type 1:1 1:1 Specifies the protection

type of the tunnel
protection group.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980
supports only the value 1:1.

Switching Mode Single-End Dual-End l Specifies the switching

Dual-End mode to be adopted
when a tunnel fails.
l The value Single-End
are switched only in
the direction where
faults occur.
l The value Dual-End
are switched to the
protection channel in
both directions when
faults occur.
l The value Dual-End is
recommended.
BDI Status Enabled Disabled l Specifies whether the

Disabled protection switching is
triggered upon
receiving BDI packets.
l This parameter is
available only when
Switching Mode is set
to Single-End.
l If BDI Status is set to
Enabled, the egress
node notifies the
ingress node of any
detected faults by
sending BDI packets;
upon receiving BDI
packets, the ingress
node triggers the
protection switching.
Working Tunnel Type MPLS Tunnel MPLS Tunnel Specifies the type of the
working tunnel.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980
supports only the value
MPLS Tunnel.

Working Ingress Tunnel - - l Specifies the working

ID tunnel of the protection
group in the ingress
direction.
for a bidirectional
tunnel, a value is
automatically assigned
to the parameter
Working Egress
Tunnel ID.
Working Ingress Tunnel - - Displays the name of the

Name working tunnel in the
ingress direction.
Working Egress Tunnel - - l Specifies the working

ID tunnel of the protection
group in the egress
direction.
tunnel, if the parameter
Working Ingress
Tunnel ID is set, a
value is automatically
assigned to the
parameter Working
Egress Tunnel ID.
Working Egress Tunnel - - Displays the name of the

Name working tunnel in the
egress direction.
Protection Tunnel Type - - Displays the type of

protection tunnel, which is
the same as the type of
working tunnel.
Protection Ingress - - l Specifies the working

Tunnel ID tunnel of the protection
group in the ingress
direction.
for a bidirectional
tunnel, a value is
automatically assigned
to the parameter
Protection Egress
Tunnel ID.

Protection Ingress - - Displays the name of the

Tunnel Name protection tunnel in the
ingress direction.
Protection Egress - - l Specifies the

Tunnel ID protection tunnel of the
protection group in the
egress direction.
tunnel, if the parameter
Protection Ingress
Tunnel ID is set, a
value is automatically
assigned to the
parameter Protection
Egress Tunnel ID.
Protection Egress - - Displays the name of the

Tunnel Name protection tunnel in the
egress direction.
Revertive Mode Non-Revertive Non-Revertive l This parameter

tunnel after it recovers.
indicates to switch
services back to the
original working
tunnel after it recovers;
the value Non-
Revertive indicates
not to switch services
back to the original
working tunnel after it
recovers.
recommended.

WTR Time(min) 1 to 12 5 l Specifies the WTR

group.
original working
tunnel recovers,
to the original working
tunnel.
l This parameter is
available only when
Restoration Mode is
Revertive.
recommended.
Hold-Time(100ms) 0 to 100 0 l Specifies the hold-off

group.
does not trigger
switching once it
expires, and then
detects whether any
faults persist, the
otherwise, no
recommended.
Protocol Status Disabled Disabled l Specifies the protocol

Enabled status.
Protocol Status to
Disabled. After the
ends, set Protocol
Status to Enabled.

Parameter Description: PW APS Protection Group_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a PW APS protection group.
Navigation Path
The navigation path for CES services is as follows:
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > CES
Service Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Protection Group tab.
3. Click the PW APS tab.
4. Click New.
The navigation path for E-Line services is as follows:
4. Click New.
The navigation path for ATM services is as follows:
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATM
4. Click New.



manually assigned.

the PW.

PW.

Source Port label.


Port label.

select tunnels.


PW will fail.


the reverse tunnel
automatically.
QoS Parameters




Bandwidth Limit Disabled - Specifies whether the

Enabled bandwidth limit function
is enabled.
bandwidth of one or
more PWs in an MPLS
tunnel.
Therefore, this
PWE3 services in an
MPLS tunnel.






NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980
supports only Pipe.



is enabled.
bandwidth of one or
more PWs in an MPLS
tunnel.
l An ATM PWE3
the bandwidth of ATM
PWE3 services in an
MPLS tunnel.







RTP header.

(us) loading time.

packets.


extracting clock
services.



CES services. The
this threshold.

packets. The
this threshold.

number mode.


transfer packet
PWE3 services, this
used.

channel type.

Mode


Ethernet Tag, this

not support VLAN TPID
of the PW level.


transfer packet
information.

channel type.

Mode

cells.

(us) loading time.


type.

group ID.


protection group.
Enabling Status to
Disabled. After the
ends, set Enabling
Status to Enabled.

mode.

working PW.

protection PW.

PW fails.
NOTE

are switched to the
original working PW
and the value Non-
revertive indicates
switched to the
recommended.


group.
original working PW
switched to the
l This parameter is
available only when
Restoration Mode is
Revertive.
recommended.

group.
does not trigger
switching once it
expires, and then
detects whether any
faults persist, the
otherwise, no
recommended.

mode of the PW APS
protection group.
OAM Parameters

status of PW OAM.


l Manual: The
connectivity check
by the user.
l Auto-Sensing: The
connectivity check
at the interval of
receiving PW OAM
packets.
set to Manual, you
need to set the PW
OAM detection
and transmitted.
l The value Auto-
Sensing is
recommended.


fixed interval.
the user.
this parameter
transmitted.
set to Manual, this
PW OAM detection
and transmitted.
l The value FFD is
assumed for PW APS
and the value CV is
assumed for
continuous
PWs.

configurable when
50 Detection Packet
100 Type is FFD and
value of 1000 when
500
Detection Packet
Type is CV.
3.3 for PW APS.

received.

received.

Parameter Description: Slave Protection Pair of a PW APS Protection

Group_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a slave protection pair of a PW
APS protection group.
Navigation Path
The navigation path for CES services is as follows:
3. Click the Slave Protection Pair tab.
4. Click New.
The navigation path for E-Line services is as follows:
4. Click New.
The navigation path for ATM services is as follows:
4. Click New.



manually assigned.

the PW.

PW.


Source Port label.

Port label.

select tunnels.


PW will fail.


the reverse tunnel
automatically.
QoS Parameters





is enabled.
bandwidth of one or
more PWs in an MPLS
tunnel.
Therefore, this
PWE3 services in an
MPLS tunnel.






NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980
supports only Pipe.



is enabled.
bandwidth of one or
more PWs in an MPLS
tunnel.
l An ATM PWE3
the bandwidth of ATM
PWE3 services in an
MPLS tunnel.







RTP header.

(us) loading time.

packets.


extracting clock
services.



CES services. The
this threshold.

packets. The
this threshold.

number mode.


transfer packet
PWE3 services, this
used.

channel type.

Mode


Ethernet Tag, this

not support VLAN TPID
of the PW level.

transfer packet
information.

channel type.

Mode

cells.

(us) loading time.


mode.

the slave PW APS
protection group
simultaneously.


protection pair.

protection pair.
A.8.2 CES Parameters

This topic describes parameters that are related to CES services.
Parameter Description: CES Service Management

This topic describes the parameters that are related to CES service management.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > CES

Service ID - - Displays the ID of the CES

service to be created.
Service name - - Displays or specifies the

service name.
Level - - Displays the level of the

received TDM frames.
Source Board - - Displays the source board

of the CES service.
Source High Channel - - For the OptiX RTN 980,

this parameter cannot be
configured.
Source Low Channel - - Displays the source lower

order path.
Source 64K Timeslot - - Displays the source 64

kbit/s timeslot.

Priority List CS7 - l Specifies the priority

CS6 of a CES service. This
parameter is available
EF only when Mode is set
AF4 to UNI-UNI.
AF3 l This parameter needs
AF2 to be configured if QoS
processing needs to be
AF1
performed for different
BE CES services.
l CS6-CS7: indicate the
highest service classes,
which are mainly
transmission.
l EF: indicates the
expedited forwarding
of service, which is
applicable to services
of low transmission
delay and low packet
loss rate, for example,
voice and video
services.
l AF1-AF4: indicate the
assured forwarding
classes of service,
which are applicable to
services that require an
assured rate but no
delay or jitter limit.
l BE: is applicable to
services that need not
be processed in a
special manner.
recommended.

that carries the CES
service. This parameter is
meaningful when the CES
service type is UNI-NNI.

Tunnel - - Displays the tunnel that

carries the PW. The tunnel
must have been
configured in advance.
This parameter is
service type is UNI-NNI.
Sink Board - - Displays the sink board of

the CES service. This
parameter is meaningful
when the CES service type
is UNI-UNI.
Sink High Channel - - For the OptiX RTN 980,

configured.
Sink Low Channel - - Displays the sink lower

order path. This parameter
is meaningful when the
CES service type is UNI-
UNI.
Sink 64K Timeslot - - Displays the sink 64 kbit/s

timeslot. This parameter is
service type is UNI-UNI.

status of the CES service.


that carries the CES
service.
Working Status - Displays working status of

the PW.
Enable State - Displays the enabling

status of the PW.
PW Signaling Type - - Displays the PW signaling

type.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980
supports static PWs only.

PW Type - - Displays the PW type for

CES service
encapsulation.
CESoPSN: Indicates
structure-aware TDM
circuit emulation service
over packet switched
network. Timeslot
compression can be set.
SAToP: Indicates
structure-agnostic TDM
over packet. Timeslot
compression cannot be
set.
PW Encapsulation Type - - Displays the tunnel type

for PW encapsulation.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980
supports MPLS only.
PW Ingress Label/ - - Displays the Ingress label

Source Port of the PW that carries the
CES service.
PW Egress Label/Sink - - Displays the Egress label

Port of the PW that carries the
CES service.
Opposite LSR ID - - Displays the LSR ID of the

PW at the remote end.
Local Working Status - - Displays the working

local end.
Remote Working Status - - Displays the working

remote end.
Compositive Working - - Displays the compositive

Status working status of the PW.
The compositive working
status is up when both
ends are up, and is down
when one end is down.
Tunnel type - - Displays the type of the

NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980
supports MPLS tunnels
only.

Tunnel - - Displays the ID of the

tunnel that carries the CES
service.

status of the tunnel.
Tunnel Automatic - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

Selection Policy not support this parameter.
QoS Parameters

the PW.
CIR(kbit/s) - - The OptiX RTN 980 does



RTP Header - - Displays the RTP header.

The RTP header carries
time stamps.
Jitter Compensation 375 to 16000 - l Displays or specifies

Buffering Time(us) the jitter buffer time.
l The jitter buffer time
guarantees the real-
time performance of
the CES service.
NOTE
(us) at the opposite end and
the local end.


(us) loading time.
Ingress Clock Mode - - Displays the mode in

which the CES service
extracts the clock signal.
This mode ensures that the
CES service can be
correctly recovered on the
sink NE.

Enable CES Service Enabled Displays or specifies the

Alarm Transparent Disabled enabling status of the
Transmission transparent transmission
of CES service alarms. If
this function is enabled,
the fault on the AC side of
the CES service is notified
to the remote end. Upon
receiving the fault
notification from the
network side or the remote
end, the local NE inserts
the corresponding alarm to
the AC side.
Threshold of Entering R 1-65535 - Displays or specifies the

Bit Inserting Status threshold of packet loss
ratio of CES services. The
be reported once the actual
this threshold. This
only when the transparent
transmission of CES
service alarms is enabled.

Threshold of Exiting R 1-65535 - Displays or specifies the

Bit Inserting Status threshold of received CES
service packets. The
this threshold. This
only when the transparent
transmission of CES
service alarms is enabled.
Sequence Number Mode Huawei Mode - Specifies the sequence

Standard Mode number mode. The
Sequence Number
Mode must be set to the
same value at both ends of
a radio link.

NOTE

created.

working PW.

protection PW.

mode.


the PW protection
group.
Enabling Status to
Disabled. After the
ends, set Enabling
Status to Enabled.

PW fails.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980
switching.

original working PW
after the fault is
rectified.
are switched to the
original working PW
and the value Non-
revertive indicates
switched to the
recommended.


protection group.
original working PW
switched to the
l This parameter is
available only when
Restoration Mode is
Revertive.

protection group.
does not trigger
switching once it
expires, and then
detects whether any
faults persist, the
otherwise, no

group.

group.





NOTE
The following parameters are available only after the slave protection pair is configured.

the slave PW APS
protection group
simultaneously.

protection pair.

protection pair.
DNI PW ID - - Displays the DNI PW ID.

status of the slave
protection pair.
Parameter Description: CES Service Management_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating CES services.
Navigation Path
2. Click New.

Service ID(e.g.1,3-6) 1 to 4294967295 - Specifies the service ID.
Service name - - Specifies the service

name.

Level E1 E1 The value E1 indicates

that the CES service is
used to transmit the TDM
services from E1 ports.
Mode UNI-NNI UNI-NNI l Specifies the mode of

UNI-UNI CES service.
l The value UNI-NNI
indicates that the CES
service is carried by a
PW. Therefore, the
information about the
PW needs to be
configured.
Source Board - - Specifies the board where

the source (UNI) of the
CES service is located.
Source High Channel - - For the OptiX RTN 980,

configured.
Source Low Channel - - If Level is set to E1, this

(e.g.1,3-6) parameter indicates the E1
port where the service
source is located. If
Mode is set to UNI-NNI,
this parameter can assume
only one value.
Source 64K Timeslot 1-31 1-31 l Specifies the 64 kbit/s

(e.g.1,3-6) timeslot that transmits
data. This parameter
can assume multiple
values. The values of
this parameter must
include 16 if Frame
Mode is 30.
l On the two ends of a
but the numbers of
timeslots must the
same.
l This parameter does
not need to be set if
Mode is UNI-NNI and
PW Type is SAToP.

Priority List CS7 EF l Specifies the priority

CS6 of a CES service. This
EF only when Mode is set
AF4 to UNI-UNI.
AF3 l This parameter needs
AF2 to be configured if QoS
processing needs to be
AF1
performed for different
BE CES services.
l CS6-CS7: indicate the
highest service classes,
which are mainly
transmission.
l EF: indicates the
expedited forwarding
of service, which is
of low transmission
delay and low packet
loss rate, for example,
voice and video
services.
l AF1-AF4: indicate the
assured forwarding
classes of service,
which are applicable to
services that require an
assured rate but no
delay or jitter limit.
l BE: is applicable to
services that need not
be processed in a
special manner.
recommended.

PW Type CESoPSN CESoPSN l Specifies the type of

SAToP the PW. This
only when Mode is
UNI-NNI.
l CESoPSN: Indicates
structure-aware TDM
circuit emulation
service over packet
switched network.
Timeslot compression
can be set. SAToP:
Indicates structure-
agnostic TDM over
packet. Timeslot
compression cannot be
set.
Protection Type No Protection No Protection l Specifies the

PW APS protection mode of the
PW. This parameter is
Slave Protection Pair available only when
Mode is UNI-NNI.
to PW APS, working
and protection PWs
need to be configured.
set to
Slave Protection Pair
, you need to bind the
slave PW APS
protection group with
the master PW APS
protection group. The
PW APS protection
group triggers the
switching of the slave
PW APS protection
group simultaneously.
Sink Board - - l Specifies the board

where the sink of the
CES service is located.
l This parameter is
available only when
Mode is set to UNI-
UNI.

Sink High Channel - - For the OptiX RTN 980,

configured.
Sink Low Channel(e.g. - - l If Level is set to E1,

1,3-6) this parameter
indicates the E1 port
where the service sink
is located.
l This parameter is
available only when
Mode is set to UNI-
UNI.
Sink 64K Timeslot(e.g. 1-31 1-31 l Specifies the 64 kbit/s

1,3-6) timeslot that the
service sink occupies.
On the two ends of a
but the numbers of
timeslots must the
same.
l This parameter is
available only when
Mode is set to UNI-
UNI.

NOTE
If the parameter Protection Type of PWs is set to PW APS or Slave Protection Pair, all the parameters of
working and protection PWs need to be configured. This section considers the parameters of the working PW
as an example.


manually assigned.

the PW.


PW.

Source Port label.

Port label.

select tunnels.


PW will fail.


the reverse tunnel
automatically.
QoS Parameters


Parameters for the Advanced Attributes of PWs

RTP Header Disable Disable l Specifies the RTP

Enable Huawei RTP header.
l The RTP header
carries time stamps.
recommended.
Jitter Compensation 375 to 16000 8000 l Specifies the jitter

Buffering Time (us) buffer time for the
received CES packets.
The step is 125.
parameter means
fewer impacts of
transmission jitters on
CES services, greater
delays of CES
services, and more
resources occupied by
CES services.
recommended.
NOTE
(us) at the opposite end and
the local end.
Packet Loading Time 125 to 5000 1000 l Specifies the length of

(us) fragments in the TDM
data stream. The step is
125.
parameter means
higher encapsulation
efficiency but greater
delays of CES
services.
recommended.

Ingress Clock Mode Null Null l Specifies the mode in

Adaptive Clock Mode which CES services
extract clocks from
TDM services.
l The value Null
indicates that no clocks
are extracted. If this
services do not
transmit clocks.
l The value Adaptive
Clock Mode indicates
that CES services
extract clocks from
TDM services. If this
services transmit TDM
line clocks to the
downstream.
l You need to determine
the end of master
clock. This parameter
assumes the value
Adaptive Clock
Mode at the end of
master clock and
assumes the value
Null at the end of slave
clock.

Enable CES Service Disabled Disabled If this function is enabled,

Alarm Transparent Enabled the fault on the AC side of
Transmission the CES service is notified
to the remote end. On
receiving the fault
notification from the
network side or the remote
end, the local NE inserts
the corresponding alarm
to the AC side.

Threshold of Entering R 1-65535 100 l The corresponding

Bit Inserting Status alarm will be reported
if the number of
consecutive lost
packets crosses the
threshold specified by
this parameter.
l This function is
available only when
the transparent
transmission of CES
service alarms is
enabled.
Threshold of Exiting R 1-65535 5 l The corresponding

Bit Inserting Status alarm will be cleared if
the number of
consecutive received
packets crosses the
threshold specified by
this parameter.
l This function is
available only when
the transparent
transmission of CES
service alarms is
enabled.
Sequence Number Mode Huawei Mode Standard Mode Specifies the sequence
Standard Mode number mode. The
Sequence Number
Mode must be set to the
same value at both ends of
a radio link.

NOTE
PW APS.

type.

group ID.


protection group.
Enabling Status to
Disabled. After the
ends, set Enabling
Status to Enabled.

mode.

working PW.

protection PW.

PW fails.
NOTE

are switched to the
original working PW
and the value Non-
revertive indicates
switched to the
recommended.


group.
original working PW
switched to the
l This parameter is
available only when
Restoration Mode is
Revertive.
recommended.

group.
does not trigger
switching once it
expires, and then
detects whether any
faults persist, the
otherwise, no
recommended.

mode of the PW APS
protection group.
OAM Parameters
NOTE


status of PW OAM.

l Manual: The
connectivity check
by the user.
l Auto-Sensing: The
connectivity check
at the interval of
receiving PW OAM
packets.
set to Manual, you
need to set the PW
OAM detection
and transmitted.
l The value Auto-
Sensing is
recommended.


fixed interval.
the user.
this parameter
transmitted.
set to Manual, this
PW OAM detection
and transmitted.
l The value FFD is
assumed for PW APS
and the value CV is
assumed for
continuous
PWs.

configurable when
50 Detection Packet
100 Type is FFD and
value of 1000 when
500
Detection Packet
Type is CV.
3.3 for PW APS.

received.

received.


NOTE

mode.

the slave PW APS
protection group
simultaneously.

protection pair.

protection pair.
A.8.3 ATM Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM services.
Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group Management

This topic describes the parameters that are related to IMA group management.
Navigation Path
Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the IMA Group Management tab.

VCTRUNK - - Displays the ATM

TRUNK.

IMA Protocol Enable Enabled Disabled l Specifies the IMA

Status Disabled protocol enable status.
Enabled if the links
bound in the ATM
TRUNK requires the
IMA protocol;
otherwise, set this
parameter to
Disabled.
l After this parameter is
set to Enabled, the E1
links or Fractional E1
timeslots bound in the
ATM TRUNK start
running the IMA
protocol.
Minimum Number of 1 to 16 1 l The links of the IMA

Active Transmitting group can carry
Links services only when the
number of activated
links in the transmit/
receive direction is not
smaller than the value
of Minimum Number
of Active
Transmitting Links/
Minimum Number of
Active Receiving
Links.
l The values of
Minimum Number of
Active Transmitting
Links and Minimum
Number of Active
Receiving Links must
be the same because
the OptiX RTN 980
supports Symmetrical
Mode and
Symmetrical
Operation only. The
parameters Minimum
Number of Active
Transmitting Links
and Minimum
Number of Active
Receiving Links must

Minimum Number of 1 to 16 1 assume the same value

Active Receiving Links on the two ends of an
IMA link.
recommended.
IMA Protocol Version 1.0 1.1 l Specifies the IMA

1.1 protocol version.
l The parameter IMA
Protocol Version
must assume the same
value on the two ends
of an IMA link.
recommended.

IMA Transmit Frame 32 128 l Specifies the IMA

Length 64 transmit frame length.
128 l Based on the IMA
frame format, the
256 receive end rebuilds
the ATM cell stream
with the cells arriving
from diversely-
delayed links. Longer
IMA frames result in
higher transmission
efficiency and occupy
more resources. Once a
member link fails, the
impact on the entire
IMA group increases
as the length of IMA
frames increases.
l The parameter IMA
Transmit Frame
Length must assume
the same value on the
two ends of an IMA
link.
recommended.

IMA Symmetry Mode Symmetrical Mode and Symmetrical Mode and l Specifies the
Symmetrical Operation Symmetrical Operation symmetrical mode of
the IMA group.
l If the symmetrical
mode and symmetrical
operation is adopted,
the bandwidth of the
IMA group is always
consistent in the
transmit direction and
in the receive
direction, even when
some member links
fail. In symmetrical
mode:
– Bandwidth of the
IMA group = min
{bandwidth in the
transmit direction,
bandwidth in the
receive direction}
– The unidirectional
failure of one
member link is
equivalent to the
bidirectional
failure of one
member link.

Maximum Delay 1 to 120 25 l Specifies the

Between Links (ms) maximum differential
delay that is allowed
between the member
links.
l If the differential delay
between a member link
and the other member
links exceeds the
value, this link will be
deactivated and
deleted from the IMA
group.
to a value higher than
the normal value
range, the delay of
IMA services will be
prolonged and even
packet loss will occur;
if this parameter is set
to a value lower than
the normal value
range, a working link
will be deleted by
mistake.
l The parameter
Maximum Delay
Between Links (ms)
must assume the same
value on the two ends
of an IMA link.
recommended.
Clock Mode CTC Mode CTC Mode l Specifies the clock

ITC Mode mode of the IMA
group.
l This parameter is set to
the same value for the
interconnected ends of
IMA links.
Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_Bound Path Configuration

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the bound paths in the ATM TRUNK.

Navigation Path
2. Click the Binding tab.
3. Click Configuration.

Available Boards - - Selects the available

boards.
Configuration Ports - - Selects the available ports.

l For ATM/IMA E1
services, you need to
set Port Mode in PDH
Interface to Layer 2 in
advance.
l For Fractional ATM/
IMA services, set Port
Mode in PDH
Interface to Layer 1
and configure Setting
Serial Port Parameters.
Level E1 E1 Specifies the level of

Fractional E1 bound paths.
l If ATM/IMA services
need to be mapped into
the ATM TRUNK that
binds one or more E1
ports, select E1 in
Level.
l If ATM/IMA services
need to be mapped into
the ATM TRUNK that
binds one or more
serial ports, select
Fractional E1 in
Level.

bound paths. The fixed
value is bidirectional.
Optical Interface - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

Available Resources - - Displays the ports that

carry the available paths
for IMA services.

Available Timeslots - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

Selected Bound Paths - - Displays the bound paths.
VCTRUNK - - Displays the name of the

ATM TRUNK.
Level - - Displays the level of

bound paths.

Bound Paths - - Displays the bound paths.
Number of Bound Paths - - Displays the number of

bound paths.
Display in Combination Selected Selected Specifies whether to

Not selected display bound paths in
combination.
Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group Status

This topic describes the parameters that are related to IMA group status.
Navigation Path
2. Click the IMA Group States tab.

VCTRUNK - - Displays the VCTRUNK.
Near-End Group Status - - Displays the status of the

near-end group.
Far-End Group Status - - Displays the status of the

far-end group.
Transmit Rate (cell/s) - - Displays the cell

transmission rate.
Receive Rate (cell/s) - - Displays the cell receiving

rate.

Number of Transmit - - Displays the number of

Links transmit links.
Number of Receive - - Displays the number of

Links receive links.
Number of Activated - - Displays the number of

Transmit Links activated transmit links.
Number of Activated - - Displays the number of

Receive Links activated receive links.
Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Link Status

This topic describes the parameters that are related to IMA link status.
Navigation Path
2. Click the IMA Link States tab.

E1 Link - - Displays E1 links.
Differential Delay Check - - Displays the status of the

Status deferential delay check.
Near-End Receiving - - Displays the near-end

Status receiving status.
Near-End Transmitting - - Displays the near-end

Status transmitting status.
Far-End Receiving - - Displays the far-end

Status receiving status.
Far-End Transmitting - - Displays the far-end

Status transmitting status.
Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_ATM Interface Management

This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM interface management.

Navigation Path
2. Click the ATM Interface Management tab.

Port - - Displays the port.
Name - - Displays or specifies the

name of port.
Port Type UNI UNI Specifies the type of ATM

NNI port.
l UNI: the port
connecting user-side
devices. For example,
the UNI port applies to
the user-side interface
on the common ATM
network or to the user-
side interface of the PE
on the PSN network
that transmits ATM
PWE3 services.
l NNI: the port
connecting network-
side devices. For
example, the NNI port
applies to the network-
side interface on the
common ATM
network.

ATM Cell Payload Disabled Enabled Specifies whether to

Scrambling Enabled enable payload
scrambling of ATM cells.
l The ITU-T G.804
stipulates that the
payload (48 bytes) of
ATM cells must be
scrambled before it is
mapped into E1
signals. Therefore, you
need to set this
l ATM Cell Payload
Scrambling must
assume the same value
on the two ends of an
ATM link. Otherwise,
packet loss will occur.
Min. VPI - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

Max. VPI - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

Min. VCI - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

Max. VCI - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

VCC-Supported VPI - - The OptiX RTN 980 does

Count not support this parameter.
Loopback No Loopback Inloop Specifies the loopback

Outloop status of the port.
Inloop
Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping Table

This topic describes the parameters that are related to configuration of the ATM service class
mapping table.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Diffserv domain Management > ATM COS Mapping Configuration from
the Function Tree.


Mapping Relation ID - - Specifies the ID of the

mapping table.
Mapping Relation Name - - Specifies the name of the

mapping relationship.
UBR BE UBR: BE Displays or specifies the

AF11 CBR: EF PHB service classes that
CBR correspond to different
AF12 RT-VBR: AF31
RT-VBR ATM service types.
AF13 NRT-VBR: AF21
l Eight PHB service
NRT-VBR AF21 UBR+: AF11 classes are available:
AF22 PORT-TRANS: BE BE, AF1, AF2, AF3,
UBR+
AF23 AF4, EF, CS6, and
PORT-TRANS CS7. The OptiX RTN
AF31
980 provides different
AF32 QoS policies for the
AF33 queues of different
AF41 service classes.
AF42 l CS6 to CS7: highest
AF43 service classes, mainly
applicable to signaling
EF transmission.
CS6 l EF: fast forwarding,
CS7 applicable to services
of low transmission
delays and low packet
loss rates.
l AF1 to AF4: assured
forwarding, applicable
to services that require
an assured
transmission rate
rather than delay or
jitter limits.
NOTE
The AF1 class includes
three subclasses: AF11,
AF12, and AF13. Only
one of these subclasses
can take effect for one
queue. It is the same
case with AF2, AF3, and
AF4.
l BE: best effort,
that do not require
special processing.

Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping

Table_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are related to creation of the ATM service class mapping
table.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Diffserv domain Management > ATM COS Mapping Configuration
2. Click New.

Mapping Relation ID 2 to 8 - Specifies the ID of the

mapping table.
Mapping Relation Name - - Specifies the name of the

mapping relationship.
UBR BE UBR: BE Specifies the PHB service

AF11 CBR: EF classes that correspond to
CBR different ATM service
AF12 RT-VBR: AF31
RT-VBR types.
AF13 NRT-VBR: AF21 l Eight PHB service
NRT-VBR AF21 classes are available:
UBR+: AF11
AF22 BE, AF1, AF2, AF3,
UBR+ PORT-TRANS: BE
AF23 AF4, EF, CS6, and
CS7. The OptiX RTN
AF31
980 provides different
AF32 QoS policies for the
AF33 queues of different
AF41 service classes.
AF42 l CS6 to CS7: highest
AF43 service classes, mainly
applicable to signaling
EF transmission.
CS6 l EF: fast forwarding,
CS7 applicable to services
of low transmission
delays and low packet
loss rates.
l AF1 to AF4: assured
forwarding, applicable
to services that require
an assured
transmission rate
rather than delay or
jitter limits.

PORT-TRANS NOTE
The AF1 class includes
three subclasses: AF11,
AF12, and AF13. Only
one of these subclasses
can take effect for one
queue. It is the same
case with AF2, AF3, and
AF4.
l BE: best effort,
that do not require
special processing.
Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management

This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM policy management.
Navigation Path
Management > Policy Management > ATM Policy from the Function Tree.
2. Click the ATM Policy tab.


Policy ID - 1 Displays the policy ID of

the ATM service.
Policy Name - - Displays or specifies the

policy name of the ATM
service. The maximum
length of the value is 64
bytes.

Parameters for Configuring ATM Traffic

Service Type UBR UBR Displays or specifies the

CBR type of the ATM service.
RT-VBR l The UBR service is
characterized by non-
NRT-VBR real-time applications
UBR+ and many bursts. The
UBR service does not
specify traffic-related
service guarantees. To
be specific, the UBR
service only requires
that the network side
provides the service
with the best effort.
The network side does
not provide any
assured QoS for the
UBR service. In the
case of network
congestion, the UBR
cells are discarded
first.
l The CBR service
requires tightly
constrained delay
variation and requires
that data be transmitted
at a constant rate. In
addition, the CBR
service requests a
static amount of
bandwidth and the
highest priority. The
CBR service is
characterized by stable
traffic and few bursts.
l The rt-VBR service
requires tightly
constrained delay and
delay variation.
Compared with the
CBR service, the rt-
VBR service allows
sources to transmit
data at a rate that varies
with time.
Equivalently, the
sources can be

described as bursty. In
addition, the rt-VBR
service does not
require a static amount
of bandwidth.
l Compared with the rt-
VBR service, the nrt-
VBR service does not
require tightly
constrained delay or
delay variation, and is
intended for non-real-
time applications.
l The UBR+ service is
supplementary to the
UBR service and is
intended for
applications that
require assured
minimum cell rate,
which is indicated by
the minimum cell rate
(MCR) parameter. The
other characteristics of
the UBR+ service are
the same as the
corresponding
characteristics of the
UBR service.
Traffic Type - - The Table A-27 lists the

ATM service type, traffic
Clp01Pcr(cell/s) 90 to 74539 - type descriptor, and the
Clp01Scr(cell/s) 90 to 74539 - related traffic parameters.
ATM policies are
Clp0Pcr(cell/s) 90 to 74539 - configured based on these
mapping relationships.
Clp0Scr(cell/s) 90 to 74539 -
Max. Cell Burst Size 2 to 200000 -

(cell)
Cell Delay Variation 7 to 13300000 -

Tolerance (0.1us)
Discard Traffic Frame Enabled Disabled Displays or specifies the

Disabled frame discarding mark in
ATM policies. This
parameter is effective to
AAL5 traffic.

UPC/NPC Enabled Disabled Displays or specifies

Disabled UPC/NPC.
l UPC is user-side
parameter control and
NPC is network-side
parameter control.
l After UPC/NPC is
enabled, the cells with
a frame discarding
mark will be discarded
in network congestion.
Table A-27 Mapping relationship between ATM service types, traffic types, and traffic parameters
ATM ATM Traffic Type Traffic Traffic Traffic Traffic
Service Descriptor Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4
Type
UBR NoTrafficDescriptor - - - -
NoClpTaggingNoScr Clp01Pcr CDVT - -
NoClpNoScr Clp01Pcr - - -
NoClpNoScrCdvt Clp01Pcr CDVT - -
CBR ClpTransparentNoScr Clp01Pcr CDVT - -
ClpNoTaggingNoScr Clp01Pcr Clp0Pcr - -
ClpTaggingNoScr Clp01Pcr Clp0Pcr - -
nrtVBR NoClpScr Clp01Pcr Clp01Scr MBS -
ClpNoTaggingScr Clp01Pcr Clp0Scr MBS -
ClpTaggingScr Clp01Pcr Clp0Scr MBS -
rtVBR ClpTransparentScr Clp01Pcr Clp01Scr MBS CDVT
NoClpScrCdvt Clp01Pcr Clp01Scr MBS CDVT
ClpNoTaggingScrCdvt Clp01Pcr Clp0Scr MBS CDVT
ClpTaggingScrCdvt Clp01Pcr Clp0Scr MBS CDVT
UBR+ atmnotrafficdescriptormcr Clp01Mcr - - -
atmnoclpmcr Clp01Pcr Clp01Mcr - -


Type
atmnoclpmcrcdvt Clp01Pcr Clp01Mcr CDVT -
Parameters for the application object

Service ID - - Displays the ID

configured for the ATM
service.
Service Name - - Displays the name

configured for the ATM
service.
Link ID - - Displays the link ID.

the service.
Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are related to creation of ATM policies.
Navigation Path
Management > Policy Management > ATM Policy from the Function Tree.
2. Click New.

Policy ID - 1 Specifies the policy ID of

the ATM service. The
policy ID can also be
automatically allocated.

Policy Name Synchronous signal Synchronous signal Specifies the policy name
Signaling of the ATM service. The
maximum length of the
Voice value is 64 bytes.
Data NOTE
Video You can select one of the
five ATM service policy
names from the drop-down
list or enter the policy name.

Service Type UBR UBR Specifies the type of the

CBR ATM service.
RT-VBR l The UBR service is
characterized by non-
NRT-VBR real-time applications
UBR+ and many bursts. The
UBR service does not
specify traffic-related
service guarantees. To
be specific, the UBR
service only requires
that the network side
provides the service
with the best effort.
The network side does
not provide any
assured QoS for the
UBR service. In the
case of network
congestion, the UBR
cells are discarded
first.
l The CBR service
requires tightly
constrained delay
variation and requires
that data be transmitted
at a constant rate. In
addition, the CBR
service requests a
static amount of
bandwidth and the
highest priority. The
CBR service is
characterized by stable
traffic and few bursts.
l The rt-VBR service
requires tightly
constrained delay and
delay variation.
Compared with the
CBR service, the rt-
VBR service allows
sources to transmit
data at a rate that varies
with time.
Equivalently, the
sources can be
described as bursty. In

addition, the rt-VBR

service does not
require a static amount
of bandwidth.
l Compared with the rt-
VBR service, the nrt-
VBR service does not
require tightly
constrained delay or
delay variation, and is
intended for non-real-
time applications.
l The UBR+ service is
supplementary to the
UBR service and is
intended for
applications that
require assured
minimum cell rate,
which is indicated by
the minimum cell rate
(MCR) parameter. The
other characteristics of
the UBR+ service are
the same as the
corresponding
characteristics of the
UBR service.
Traffic Type - - For the mapping

relationships between
Clp01Pcr(cell/s) 90 to 74539 - ATM service types, ATM
Clp01Scr(cell/s) 90 to 74539 - traffic type descriptors,
and traffic parameters, see
Clp0Pcr(cell/s) 90 to 74539 - Table A-28. ATM
policies are configured
Clp0Scr(cell/s) 90 to 74539 - based on these mapping
relationships.
Max. Cell Burst Size 2 to 200000 -
(cell)
Cell Delay Variation 7 to 13300000 -

Tolerance (0.1us)
Discard Traffic Frame Enabled Disabled Specifies the frame

Disabled discarding mark in ATM
policies. This parameter is
effective to AAL5 traffic.

UPC/NPC Enabled Disabled l UPC is user-side

Disabled parameter control and
NPC is network-side
parameter control.
l After UPC/NPC is
enabled, the cells with
a frame discarding
mark will be discarded
in network congestion.
Table A-28 Mapping relationship between ATM service types, ATM traffic types, and traffic parameters

Type
UBR NoTrafficDescriptor - - - -
NoClpTaggingNoScr Clp01Pcr CDVT - -
CBR ClpTransparentNoScr Clp01Pcr CDVT - -
ClpNoTaggingNoScr Clp01Pcr Clp0Pcr - -
ClpTaggingNoScr Clp01Pcr Clp0Pcr - -
nrtVBR NoClpScr Clp01Pcr Clp01Scr MBS -
ClpNoTaggingScr Clp01Pcr Clp0Scr MBS -
ClpTaggingScr Clp01Pcr Clp0Scr MBS -
rtVBR ClpTransparentScr Clp01Pcr Clp01Scr MBS CDVT
NoClpScrCdvt Clp01Pcr Clp01Scr MBS CDVT
ClpNoTaggingScrCdvt Clp01Pcr Clp0Scr MBS CDVT
ClpTaggingScrCdvt Clp01Pcr Clp0Scr MBS CDVT
UBR+ atmnotrafficdescriptormcr Clp01Mcr - - -
atmnoclpmcr Clp01Pcr Clp01Mcr - -
atmnoclpmcrcdvt Clp01Pcr Clp01Mcr CDVT -

Parameter Description: ATM Service Management

This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM service management.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATM

Service ID - - Displays the service ID.
Service Name - - Displays or specifies the

service name.
Service Type - - Displays the ATM service

type.

status of the ATM service.
Connection Parameters
Connection ID - - Displays the connection

ID of the ATM service.
Connection Name - - Displays or specifies the

connection name of the
ATM service.
Source Port - - Displays the source port of

the ATM service.

that carries ATM PWE3
services, if any.
Sink Port - - Displays the sink board of

the ATM service.
Source VPI - - Displays the VPI of the

source port of the ATM
service.
Source VCI - - Displays the VCI of the

service.

Sink VPI - - Displays the VPI of the

sink port of the ATM
service.
Sink VCI - - Displays the VCI of the

service.
Uplink Policy - - Displays the QoS policy of

the uplink ATM
connection.
Down link Policy - - Displays the QoS policy of

the downlink ATM
connection.
Parameters for Port Attributes

Port - - Displays the port of the

ATM IMA service.
Port Type - - Displays the port type of

the ATM IMA service.
Max. VPI - Displays the maximum

VPI.
Max. VCI - Displays the maximum

VCI.
VCC-Supported VPI - Displays the count of VPIs

Count that are used for VC
exchange.
Parameters for Bound Paths

Level - - Displays the level of

bound paths.

Bound Paths - - Displays the bound paths.

Number of Bound Paths - - Displays the number of

bound paths.
IMA Group Status - - Displays the status of the

IMA group.
Parameters of PWs
Tab Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
General PW ID - - Displays the PW ID.

Attributes
Work Status - - Displays the working
status of a PW.
Enable State - - Displays whether a PW

is enabled.
PW Signaling Type - - Displays the PW

signaling type.
NOTE
static PWs only.
PW Type - - l Displays the

configured PW type.
l This parameter
corresponds to the
connection type.
The encapsulation
type can be 1:1 or N:
1 if the connection
type is PVP or PVC.
Direction - - Displays the direction

of the PW.
PW Encapsulation - - Displays the

Type encapsulation type of
the packets on the PW.
NOTE
MPLS only.
PW Ingress Label / - - Displays the configured

Source Port PW Ingress label.
PW Egress Label / - - Displays the configured

Sink Port PW Egress label.
Opposite LSR ID - - Displays the opposite

LSR ID.

Local Working - - Displays the working

Status status of the PW at the
local end.
Remote Working - - Displays the working

Status status of the PW at the
remote end.
Compositive - - Displays the

Working Status comprehensive
working status of the
PW.
Deployment Status - - Displays the

deployment status.
QoS PW ID - - Displays the PW ID.
Direction - - Displays the direction

of the PW.
Bandwidth Limit - - Displays or specifies

whether the bandwidth
limit is enabled.
used to limit the
bandwidth of one or
more PWs, or the
bandwidth of one or
more ATM PWE3
services, in an
MPLS tunnel. (One
ATM PWE3 service
corresponds to one
PW.)
l
CIR (Kbit/s) - - Displays or specifies

the committed
information rate.
CBS (kbyte) - - Displays or specifies

the excess burst size of
the PW.

PIR (kbit/s) - - Displays or specifies

the peak information
rate.
PBS (kbyte) - - Displays or specifies

the maximum excess
burst size of the PW.
EXP - - The OptiX RTN 980

does not support this
parameter.
Policy - - The OptiX RTN 980

does not support this
parameter.
Advanced Control Word Must Use - Displays or specifies

Attributes No Use whether to use the
control word. In the
network, the control
word is used to transmit
packet information.
Control Channel CW - l Displays or

Type None specifies the mode
of PW connectivity
check.
l The value None
indicates that the
control word is not
supported. That is,
the PW connectivity
check is not
supported.
l The value CW
indicates that the
control word is
supported.
Must Use if PW
Type is ATM 1:1.

VCCV Verification Ping - l Displays or

Mode None specifies the VCCV
verification mode.
The VCCV
verification is used
for PW connectivity
check.
l If the VCCV-Ping
test is required, set
this parameter to
Ping.
Max. Concatenated 1 to 31 - l Displays or

Cell Count specifies the
maximum number
of concatenated
cells.
l If the value 1 is
assumed, only one
ATM cell is
encapsulated in one
from 2 to 31 is
assumed, a
maximum of 2 to 31
ATM cells are
encapsulated into
one packet.
Packet Loading 100 to 50000 - l Displays or

Time (us) specifies the packet
loading time. Once
the packet loading
time expires, the
packet is sent out
even if the
concatenated cells
are less than the
maximum.
l If Max.
Concatenated Cell
Count assumes the
value 1, this
parameter is
ineffective. That is,
the packet will be
sent out once the cell
is loaded.

Parameters for CoS Mapping


CoS Mapping - - Specifies the policy for

mapping different ATM
service levels to CoS
priorities. By setting this
parameter, different
quality measures are
provided for different
ATM services.

NOTE

created.

working PW.

protection PW.

mode.

the PW protection
group.
Enabling Status to
Disabled. After the
ends, set Enabling
Status to Enabled.


PW fails.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 980
switching.

original working PW
after the fault is
rectified.
are switched to the
original working PW
and the value Non-
revertive indicates
switched to the
recommended.

protection group.
original working PW
switched to the
l This parameter is
available only when
Restoration Mode is
Revertive.


protection group.
does not trigger
switching once it
expires, and then
detects whether any
faults persist, the
otherwise, no

group.

group.



Parameter Description: ATM Service Management_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are related to creation of ATM services.
Navigation Path
2. Click New.


Service ID 1 to 4294967295 - Specifies the service ID.
Service Name - - Specifies the service

name.
Service Type UNIs-NNI UNIs-NNI l Specifies the type of

UNI-UNI the ATM service.
l UNIs-NNI: This value
applies to ATM PWE3
services. The attributes
in Connection, PW,
and CoS Mapping
need to be configured.
l UNI-UNI: This value
applies to common
ATM services. Only
the attributes in
Connection need to be
configured.

Connection Type PVC UNIs-NNI:PVC Specifies the connection

PVP UNI-UNI:PVC type of the ATM service.
For common ATM
services (UNI-UNI):
l PVP: Only the VPIs of
the source and sink are
exchanged.
l PVC: The VPIs and
VCIs of the source and
sink are exchanged.
For ATM PWE3 services
(UNIs-NNI):
l PVP: This value
applies to the N-to-1/1-
to-1 VPC
encapsulation mode. It
is recommended that
you set the VPIs to the
same value on the two
ends of the ATM
connection.
l PVC: This value
applies to the N-to-1/1-
to-1 VCC
encapsulation mode. It
is recommended that
you set the VPIs/VCIs
to the same value on
the two ends of the
ATM connection.
Protection Type No Protection No Protection l Specifies the

PW APS protection mode of the
PW. This parameter is
available only when
Service Type is UNIs-
NNI.
according to the
Connection Parameters
Connection Name - - Specifies the name of the

ATM connection.

Source Board - - Specifies the source board

of the ATM service.
Source Port - - Specifies the source port

of the ATM service.
Source VPI(eg.35,36-39) UNI: 0 to 255 - Specifies the VPI of the

NNI: 0 to 4095 source port of the ATM
service.
Source VCI(eg.35,36-39) 32 to 65535 - Specifies the VCI of the

service.
PW ID 1 to 4294967295 - Specifies the ID of the PW

Sink Board - - Specifies the sink board of

the ATM service.
Sink Port - - Specifies the sink board of

the ATM service.
NOTE
This parameter does not
need to be set if Service
Type is UNIs-NNI. This
parameter needs to be set if
Service Type is UNI-UNI
and the value must be
different from that of the
source board.
Sink VPI(eg.35,36-39) UNI: 0 to 255 - Specifies the VPI of the

NNI: 0 to 4095 sink port of the ATM
service.
Sink VCI(eg.35,36-39) 32 to 65535 - Specifies the VCI of the

service.
Uplink Policy - - Specifies the QoS policy

of the uplink ATM
connection.
Down link Policy - - Specifies the QoS policy

of the downlink ATM
connection.
Parameters of PWs
NOTE
If the parameter Protection Type of PWs is set to PW APS, all the parameters of working and protection PWs
need to be configured. This section considers the parameters of the working PW as an example.


Working Status - - Displays the working

status of the PW.
NOTE
This parameter is available
only after the PW
parameters are configured.
Enable Status - - Displays the enabling

status of the PW.
NOTE
This parameter is available
only after the PW
parameters are configured.
PW Signaling Type Static Static Labels for static PWs need

to be manually assigned.
PW Type The ATM connection type The ATM connection type l Specifies the type of
is PVC: is PVC: the PW.
l ATM n to one VCC ATM n to one VCC cell l In the case of ATM
cell transport transport 1_to_1 encapsulation,
l ATM one-to-one VCC The ATM connection type one PW carries one
Cell Mode is PVP: VPC or VCC.
The ATM connection type ATM n to one VPC cell l In the case of ATM
is PVP: transport n_to_1 encapsulation,
one PW carries one or
l ATM n to one VPC cell more VPCs or VCCs.
transport
l ATM one-to-one VPC
Cell Mode
Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional Displays the direction of

the PW.
PW Encapsulation Type MPLS MPLS Displays the

packets on the PW.
PW Ingress Label / 16 to 1048575 - Specifies the PW Ingress

Source Port label.
PW Egress Label / Sink 16 to 1048575 - Specifies the PW Egress

Port label.
Tunnel Selection Mode Manually Manually Displays the method to

select tunnels.



PW will fail.

QoS Parameters


bandwidth limit is
enabled.
used to limit the
bandwidth of one or
more PWs, or the
bandwidth of one or
more ATM PWE3
services, in an MPLS
tunnel. (One ATM
PWE3 service
corresponds to one
PW.)
l

CIR (Kbit/s) - - Specifies the committed

the PW.
CBS (kbyte) - - Specifies the excess burst

size of the PW.

PIR (kbit/s) - - Specifies the peak

information rate (PIR) of
the PW.
PBS (kbyte) - - Specifies the maximum

excess burst size of the
PW.


Control Word Must Use Must Use Specifies whether to use

No Use the control word. In the
network, the control word
is used to transmit packet
information.
Control Channel Type CW CW l Specifies the mode of

None PW connectivity
check.
l The value None
indicates that the
control word is not
supported. That is, the
PW connectivity check
is not supported.
l The value CW
indicates that the
control word is
supported.
l Set Control Word to
Must Use if PW
Type is ATM 1:1.


used for PW
connectivity check.
parameter to Ping.
Max. Concatenated Cell 1 to 31 10 l Specifies the

Count maximum number of
concatenated cells.
l If the value 1 is
assumed, only one
ATM cell is
encapsulated in one
from 2 to 31 is
assumed, a maximum
of 2 to 31 ATM cells
are encapsulated into
one packet.
Packet Loading Time 100 to 50000 1000 l Specifies the packet

(us) loading time. Once the
packet loading time
expires, the packet is
sent out even if the
concatenated cells are
less than the
maximum.
l If Max. Concatenated
Cell Count assumes
the value 1, this
parameter is
ineffective. That is, the
packet will be sent out
once the cell is loaded.

NOTE
PW APS.

type.


group ID.

protection group.
Enabling Status to
Disabled. After the
ends, set Enabling
Status to Enabled.

mode.

working PW.

protection PW.

PW fails.
NOTE

are switched to the
original working PW
and the value Non-
revertive indicates
switched to the
recommended.


group.
original working PW
switched to the
l This parameter is
available only when
Restoration Mode is
Revertive.
recommended.

group.
does not trigger
switching once it
expires, and then
detects whether any
faults persist, the
otherwise, no
recommended.

mode of the PW APS
protection group.
OAM Parameters
NOTE


status of PW OAM.

l Manual: The
connectivity check
by the user.
l Auto-Sensing: The
connectivity check
at the interval of
receiving PW OAM
packets.
set to Manual, you
need to set the PW
OAM detection
and transmitted.
l The value Auto-
Sensing is
recommended.


fixed interval.
the user.
this parameter
transmitted.
set to Manual, this
PW OAM detection
and transmitted.
l The value FFD is
assumed for PW APS
and the value CV is
assumed for
continuous
PWs.

configurable when
50 Detection Packet
100 Type is FFD and
value of 1000 when
500
Detection Packet
Type is CV.
3.3 for PW APS.

received.

received.


NOTE

mode.

the slave PW APS
protection group
simultaneously.

protection pair.

protection pair.
Parameters for CoS Mapping


that carries service.
CoS Mapping - - Specifies the policy for

mapping different ATM
service levels to CoS
priorities. By setting this
parameter, different
quality measures are
provided for different
ATM services.
Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Segment and End Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are related to segment end attributes of ATM OAM.

Navigation Path
OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Segment End Attributes tab.

Source - - Displays the source node

of the ATM/IMA service.
Sink - - Displays the sink node of

the ATM/IMA service.
Connection Direction Source - Displays the direction of

Sink the ATM connection.
l Source: the direction in
which the ATM OAM
cell stream enters the
ATM connection.
l Sink: the direction in
which the ATM OAM
cell stream leaves the
ATM connection.

Segment and End Non segment and Non segment and Specifies the segment and
Attribute Endpoint Endpoint end attributes of the source
Segment point and sink of the ATM
connection.
Endpoint
l Non segment and
Segment and Endpoint endpoint: intermediate
point, which refers to
the OAM node
between two segment
points or two end
points. Therefore,
intermediate points
can be further
classified into
intermediate points
between segment
points, and
intermediate points
between end points.
– Upon detecting a
fault, an
intermediate point
reports the LCD
alarm and inserts
segment AIS cells
and end AIS cells to
the downstream.
Afterwards, the
intermediate point
periodically sends
these cells.
– An intermediate
point does not catch
any AIS/RDI cells.
l Segment point: an end
point of a segment.
One ATM link consists
of multiple segments.
fault, a segment
point reports the
LCD alarm and
inserts segment
AIS cells and end
AIS cells to the
downstream.
Afterwards, the
segment point

periodically sends
these cells.
– A segment point
catches segment
AIS/RDI cells
only.
l End point: an end point
of an ATM link. It is
usually an edge point
on the ATM network.
fault, an end point
reports the LCD
alarm but does not
insert any AIS
cells.
– An end point
catches end AIS/
RDI cells only.
l Segment and endpoint:
a segment-end point,
or an edge point of a
segment and an end.
fault, a segment-
end point reports
the LCD alarm but
does not insert any
AIS cells.
– A segment-end
point catches the
AIS/RDI cells of a
segment and an
end.
Parameter Description: ATM OMA Management_CC Activation Status

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the CC activation status of ATM OAM.
Navigation Path
2. Click the CC Activation Status tab.




Connection Direction Source - Specifies the connection

Sink direction.
which the ATM OAM
ATM connection.
which the ATM OAM
ATM connection.

Segment and End Non segment and Non segment and Specifies the segment and
Attribute Endpoint Endpoint end attributes of nodes.
Segment point l Non segment and
Endpoint endpoint: an
intermediate OAM
Segment and Endpoint point between two end
points or two segment
points. Therefore,
intermediate points
can be further
classified into
intermediate points
between segment
points, and
intermediate points
between end points.
An intermediate point
transparently transmits
CC cells.
l Segment point: an end
point of a segment.
One ATM link consists
of multiple segments.
Segment points are
responsible for
transmitting or
receiving segment CC
cells. Segment CC
cells are terminated at
segment points.
l End point: an end point
of an ATM link. It is
usually an edge point
on an ATM network.
End points are
responsible for
transmitting or
receiving end-to-end
CC cells. End-to-end
CC cells are
terminated at end
points.
l Segment and endpoint:
a segment-end point,
or an edge point of a
segment and an end.
Segment-end points
are responsible for
transmitting or

receiving end-to-end
CC cells and segment
CC cells. A point needs
to be a segment-end
point if it serves as an
end point and a
segment point at the
same time.
CC Activate Flag Deactivate - l Specifies the CC

Source activate activation flag.
Sink activate l Deactivate: This node
does not transmit or
Source + sink activate receive CC cells.
l Source activate: This
point transmits but
does not receive CC
cells.
l Sink activate: This
point receives but does
not transmit CC cells.
If this point does not
receive any service
cells or CC cells within
a time interval of 3.5
(±0.5) seconds, it will
report the LOC alarm
and transmit AIS cells
in the forward
direction.
l Source + sink activate:
This node transmits
and receives CC cells.
If this point does not
receive any service
cells or CC cells within
a time interval of 3.5
(±0.5) seconds, it will
report the LOC alarm
and transmit AIS cells
in the forward
direction.
l Once the node receives
any CC cells or service
cells, the LOC alarm
will be cleared.

Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Remote End Loopback Status

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the remote end loopback status of ATM
OAM.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Remote Loopback Test tab.



Connection Direction Source - Displays the direction of

Sink the ATM connection.
which the ATM OAM
ATM connection.
which the ATM OAM
ATM connection.
Segment and End - - Specifies the segment and

Attribute end attribute.
l Segment LB cells are
looped back only at a
Segment point,
Segment and
Endpoint, or Non
segment and
Endpoint.
l End-to-end LB cells
are looped back only at
an Endpoint or
Segment and
Endpoint.

Loopback Point NE - - l Specifies the NE

where the loopback
point is located.
l Before an end-to-end
LB test, you need to set
end points in the test
domain. After the test,
remove the end points.
l Before a segment-to-
segment LB test, you
need to set segment
points in the test
domain. After the test,
remove the segment
points.
Test Result - - Displays the test result.
Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_LLID

This topic describes the parameters that are related to LLID configuration.
Navigation Path
2. Click the LLID tab.

Country Code - 00 00 Displays or specifies the

(Hexadecimal Code) country code of the ATM
service. The value is 2
bytes in length.
Network Code - 00 01 Displays or specifies the

(Hexadecimal Code) network code of the ATM
service. The value is 2
bytes in length.

NE Code (Hexadecimal - 00 30 00 04 00 00 00 00 00 l Displays or specifies

Code) 00 00 the NE code of the
ATM service. The
value is 11 bytes in
length.
l The default NE code
can be used if it is
unique on the network.
l NE code and NE ID are
associated. Therefore,
each NE on the
network has a unique
NE code.
A.9 Clock Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to clocks.
A.9.1 Parameter Description: Frequency Selection Mode

This topic describes parameters that are related to frequency selection.
A.9.2 Physical Clock Parameters
This topic describes physical clock parameters.
A.9.3 CES ACR Clock Parameters
This topic describes CES ACR clock parameters.
A.9.1 Parameter Description: Frequency Selection Mode

This topic describes parameters that are related to frequency selection.
Navigation Path
Clock > Frequency Selection Mode from the Function Tree.

NE Name - - Displays the NE name.

Select Frequency Source Physical Synchronization Physical Synchronization Specifies the clock
Mode PTP Synchronization synchronization mode of
an NE.
NOTE
l For equipment that
receives an external
clock, set this parameter
to Physical
Synchronization.
l For a 1588 ACR client
or a PTP clock used for
frequency
synchronization, set this
parameter to PTP
Synchronization.
l For IF boards, only
Physical
Synchronization is
supported.
A.9.2 Physical Clock Parameters

This topic describes physical clock parameters.
Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table of a clock source.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >
Physical Clock > Clock Source Priority.
2. Click the System Clock Source Priority List tab.

Parameters
Clock Source - - l The internal clock

source is always at the
lowest priority and
indicates that the NE
works in the free-run
mode.
l The clock sources and
the corresponding
clock source priority
levels are determined
according to the clock
synchronization
schemes.
External Clock Source 2Mbit/s 2Mbit/s l This parameter

Mode 2MHz indicates the type of
the external clock
source signal.
according to the
external clock signal.
In normal cases, the
external clock signal is
a 2 Mbit/s signal.
Synchronous Status Byte SA4 to SA8 SA4 l This parameter is valid

only when External
Clock Source Mode is
set to 2Mbit/s.
l This parameter
indicates which bit of
the TS0 in odd frames
of the external clock
signal is used to
transmit the SSM.
to be set only when the
SSM or extended SSM
is enabled. In normal
cases, the external
clock sources use the
SA4 to transmit the
SSM.
Clock Source Priority - - Displays the priority

Sequence (1 is the sequence of clock sources.
highest) 1 indicates the highest
clock source priority.

Related Concepts
Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Subnet

This topic describes the parameters that are related to a clock subnet.
Navigation Path
Clock Subnet Configuration.
2. Click the Clock Subnet tab.
Parameters for Setting a Clock Subnet

Affiliated Subnet 0 to 255 0 l This parameter is used

when the clock subnet
needs to be created on
the NMS.
l The NEs that trace the
same clock source
should be allocated
with the same clock
subnet ID.

Protection Status Start Extended SSM Stop SSM Protocol l The SSM protocol is a
Protocol scheme used for
Start Standard SSM synchronous
Protocol management on an
SDH network and
Stop SSM Protocol indicates that the SSM
is passed by the lower
four bits of the S1 byte
and can be exchanged
between the nodes.
The SSM protocol
ensures that the
equipment
automatically selects
the clock source of the
highest quality and
highest priority, thus
preventing mutual
clock tracing.
l After the standard
SSM protocol is
started, the NE first
performs the
on the clock source
quality level
information provided
by the S1 byte. If the
quality level of the
clock source is the
same, the NE then
performs the
priority table. That is,
the NE selects an
unlocked clock source
that is of the highest
quality and highest
priority from all the
current available clock
sources as the clock
source to be
synchronized and
traced by the local
station.
l If the SSM protocol is
stopped, it indicates

that the S1 byte is not

used. The NE selects
and switches a clock
source only according
to the sequence
specified in the
priority table. The
clock source of the
highest priority is used
as the clock source to
be traced.
l After the SSM
protocol is stopped,
each NE performs the
on the clock according
to the preset priority
table of the clock
source only when the
clock source of a
higher priority is lost.
Clock Source - - This parameter indicates

the clock source that is
configured for an NE. In
Clock Source Priority,
you can set whether to add
or delete a clock source.

Clock Source ID (None) (None) l This parameter is valid

1 to 15 only when the
extended SSM
protocol is started.
l Clock source IDs are
allocated for the
following clock
sources only:
– External clock
source
– Internal clock
source of the node
that accesses the
external clock
sources
– Internal clock
source of the joint
node of a ring and a
chain or the joint
node of two rings
– Line clock source
that enters the ring
when the intra-ring
line clock source is
configured at the
joint node of a ring
and a chain or the
joint node of two
rings
Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Quality

This topic describes the parameters that are related clock quality.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Clock Quality tab.

Parameters for Clock Source Quality


the name of the
configured clock source.
In Clock Source
Priority, you can set
whether to add or delete a
clock source.
Configuration Quality Unknown Automatic Extraction This parameter specifies

Synchronization Quality the quality level that is
G.811 Clock Signal configured for the clock
source. This function is
G.812 Transit Clock required only in a special
Signal scenario or in a test.
G.812 Local Clock Signal Generally, this parameter
G.813 SDH Equipment need not be set.
Timing Source (SETS)
Signal
Do Not Use For
Synchronization
Automatic Extraction
Clock Quality - - This parameter indicates

the clock source quality
signal received by the NE.
The NE extracts the clock
source quality signal from
the S1 byte of each clock
source.
Parameters for Manual Setting of 0 Quality Level


the name of the NE.

Manual Setting of 0 Do Not Use For Do Not Use For This parameter specifies
Quality Level Synchronization Synchronization the clock quality whose
G.811 Reference Clock level is manually set to
zero.
Between G.811 Reference
Clock and G.812 Transit l Do Not Use For
Clock Synchronization: the
notification
G.812 Transit Clock information in the
Between G.812 Transit reverse direction of the
Clock and G.812 Local selected
Clock synchronization clock
G.812 Local Clock source to avoid direct
mutual locking of
Between G.812 Local
adjacent NEs.
Clock and synchronous
equipment timing source l G.811 Reference
(SETS) Clock: the clock signal
specified in ITU-T G.
SETS Clock
811.
Between synchronous
l Between G.811
equipment timing source
Reference Clock and
(SETS) and quality
G.812 Transit Clock:
unavailable
lower than the quality
level of the clock
signal specified in
ITU-T G.811 but
higher than the quality
level of the transit
exchange clock signal
812.
l G.812 Transit Clock:
the transit exchange
clock signal specified
in ITU-T G.812.
l Between G.812
Transit Clock and G.
812 Local Clock:
level of the transit
exchange clock signal
812 but higher than the
quality level of the
local exchange clock
signal specified in
ITU-T G.812.
l G.812 Local Clock:
the local exchange


in ITU-T G.812.
l Between G.812 Local
Clock and
synchronous
equipment timing
source (SETS): lower
than the quality level
of the local exchange
in ITU-T G.812 but
level of the clock
signal of the SETS.
l SETS Clock: the clock
signal of the SETS.
l Between synchronous
equipment timing
source (SETS) and
quality unavailable:
level of the clock
signal of the SETS but
level unavailable in the
synchronous timing
source.
Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM Output Control

This topic describes the parameters that are related to SSM output control.
Navigation Path
2. Click the SSM Output Control tab.

Parameters
Line Port - - l This parameter

indicates the name of
the line clock port.
l Line Port: indicates
the SSM quality
information output
port of the current
available line clock
source and the external
clock source. This
output port can
transmit the quality
information of the
clock source by
outputting the S1 byte
to the downstream NE.
Control Status Enabled Enabled l This parameter is valid

Disabled only when the SSM
protocol or the
extended SSM
l This parameter
indicates whether the
SSM is output at the
line port.
l When the line port is
connected to an NE in
the same clock subnet,
set this parameter to
Enabled. Otherwise,
Disabled.
Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock ID Enabling Status

This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the clock ID function.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Clock ID Status tab.

Parameters
Line Port - - l This parameter

indicates the name of
the line clock port.
l Line Port: indicates
the SSM quality
information output
port of the current
available line clock
source and the external
clock source. This
output port can
transmit the quality
information of the
clock source by
outputting the S1 byte
to the downstream NE.
Enabled Status Enabled Enabled l This parameter is valid

Disabled only when the
extended SSM
l This parameter
indicates whether the
clock source ID is
output at the line port.
l If the line ports are
connected to the NEs
in the same clock
subnet and if the
extended SSM
protocol is started on
the opposite NE, this
parameter is set to
Enabled. Otherwise,
Disabled.
Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Restoration

Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to clock source restoration.
Navigation Path
Clock Source Switching.

2. Click the Clock Source Reversion Parameter tab.
Parameters

the name of the NE.
Higher Priority Clock Auto-Revertive Auto-Revertive l When the quality of a

Source Reversion Mode Non-Revertive higher-priority clock
source degrades, the
NE automatically
switches the clock
source to a lower-
priority clock source.
If this parameter is set
to Auto-Revertive,
the NE automatically
switches the clock
source to the higher-
priority clock source
when this higher-
priority clock source
restores. If this
parameter is set to
Non-Revertive, the
NE does not
automatically switch
the clock source to the
higher-priority clock
source when this
higher-priority clock
source restores.
l Correct setting of
Clock Source
Switching Condition
ensures the reliability
of the clock source
switching. To improve
the clock quality,
select Auto-
Revertive. Otherwise,
to prevent jitter of the
clock, generally, it is
Non-Revertive.

Clock Source WTR 0 to 12 5 l This parameter

Time(min.) specifies the duration
from the time when the
clock source
restoration is detected
to the time when the
clock source switching
is triggered. This
parameter is used to
avoid frequent
switching of the clock
source due to
instability of the clock
source state within a
short time.
only when Higher
Priority Clock
Source Reversion
Revertive.
Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the switching status of a clock source.
Navigation Path
Clock Source Switching.
2. Click the Clock Source Switching tab.
Parameters

the name of the clock
source.
Effective Status Valid - This parameter indicates

Invalid whether the clock source
is valid.

Lock Status Lock - l This parameter

Unlock specifies the locking
status of the clock
source in the priority
table.
l Lock: A clock source
in the priority table is
in the locked state. The
clock source in the
locked state cannot be
switched.
l Unlock: A clock
source in the priority
table is in the unlocked
state. The clock source
in the unlocked state
can be switched.
Switching Source - - This parameter indicates

the clock source to be
traced by the NE after the
switching.
Switching Status Normal - This parameter indicates

Manual Switching the switching status of the
current clock source.
Forced Switching
Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching

Conditions
This section describes the parameters that are related to the switching conditions of clock sources.
Navigation Path
Clock > Clock Source Switching from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Clock Source Switching Condition tab.
Parameters
NE Name - - Displays the name of the

NE.
Clock Source - - Displays the clock source.

AIS Alarm Generated Yes No l The default value is

No recommended.
set to Yes, it indicates
that clock source
switching occurs if the
clock source reports
the AIS alarm.
set to No, it indicates
that no clock source
the AIS alarm.
B1 BER Threshold- - - The parameter is invalid.

Crossing Generated
RLOS,RLOF,OOF/ Yes Yes This parameter indicates

RLOC Alarms that clock switching
Generated occurs when the clock
source reports the RLOS,
RLOF, OOF, or LOC
alarm.
CV Threshold-Crossing - - The parameter is invalid.

Generated
CV Threshold - - The parameter is invalid.
B2-EXC Alarm Yes No l The default value is

Generated No recommended.
set to Yes, it indicates
that clock source
the B2-EXC alarm.
set to No, it indicates
that no clock source
the B2-EXC alarm.
Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of the External Clock Source

This topic describes the parameters of the output phase-locked source of the external clock
source.

Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >
Phase-Locked Source Output by External Clock.
Parameters
2M Phase-Locked External Clock Source 1 - This parameter indicates

Source Number the number of the external
clock source output of the
NE.
External Clock Output 2Mbit/s 2Mbit/s l This parameter

Mode 2MHz specifies the mode of
the output clock.
to be set according to
the requirements of the
interconnected
equipment. Generally,
the output external
clock signal is a 2
Mbit/s signal.
External Clock Output SA4 to SA8 ALL l This parameter is valid

Timeslot ALL only when External
Clock Output Mode
is set to 2Mbit/s.
l This parameter
indicates which bit of
the TS0 in odd frames
of the output clock
signal is used to
transmit the SSM.
to ALL, it indicates
that all the bits of the
TS0 are used to
transmit the SSM.
you use the default
value.

External Source Output Threshold Disabled Threshold Disabled l This parameter

Threshold Not Inferior to G.813 specifies the lowest
SETS Signal quality of the output
clock. If the clock
Not Inferior to G.812 quality is lower than
Local Signal the value of this
Not Inferior to G.812 parameter, it indicates
Transit Clock Signal that the external clock
Not Inferior to G.811 source does not output
Clock Signal any clock signal.
to Threshold
Disabled, it indicates
that the external clock
source always outputs
the clock signal.
you use the default
value.
2M Phase-Locked No Failure Condition No Failure Condition l This parameter

Source Fail Condition AIS specifies the failure
condition of the 2
LOF Mbit/s phase-locked
AIS OR LOF clock source.
you use the default
value.
2M Phase-Locked Shut Down Output Shut Down Output l This parameter is valid
Source Fail Action 2M Output S1 Byte only when 2M Phase-
Unavailable Locked Source Fail
Condition is not set to
Send AIS No Failure
Condition.
l This parameter
specifies the operation
of the 2 Mbit/s phase-
locked loop (PLL)
when the 2 Mbit/s
phase-locked clock
source meets the
failure conditions.
you use the default
value.

Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the clock synchronization status.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Clock
Synchronization Status.
Parameters

the name of the NE.
NE Clock Working - - This parameter indicates

Mode the working mode of the
NE clock.
S1 Byte Synchronization - - This parameter indicates

Quality Information the synchronization
quality information of the
S1 byte.
S1 Byte Synchronous - - This parameter indicates

Source the clock synchronization
source of the S1 byte.
Synchronous Source - - This parameter indicates

the synchronization
source.

Data Output Method in Normal Data Output Normal Data Output l When all the reference
Holdover Mode Mode Mode timing signals are lost,
Keep the Latest Data the slave clock
changes to the
holdover mode. At this
time, the slave clock
works based on the
latest frequency
information stored
before the reference
timing signals are lost.
Then, the frequency of
the oscillator drifts
slowly to ensure that
the offset between the
frequency of the slave
clock and the reference
frequency is very
small. As a result, the
impact caused by the
drift is limited within
the specified
requirement.
l Normal Data Output
Mode: The slave clock
works based on the
latest frequency
information stored
timing signals are lost,
and the holdover
duration depends on
the size of the phase-
locked clock register
on the equipment. The
holdover duration can
be up to 24 hours.
l Keep the Latest Data:
The slave clock works
in holdover mode all
the time based on the
latest frequency
information stored
timing signals are lost.
Related Concepts

A.9.3 CES ACR Clock Parameters

This topic describes CES ACR clock parameters.
Parameter Description: ACR Clock Source

This topic describes parameters that are related to the ACR clock source.
Navigation Path
Clock > ACR Clock from the Function Tree.

ACR Clock Source - - l Identifies the ACR

clock domain.
l This parameter is
displayed in "slot ID-
board ID-ACR clock
ID" format.
CES Service - - Displays or specifies the

CES service that the
master ACR clock source
uses.
Parameter Description: Clock Domain

This topic describes parameters that are related to clock domains.
Navigation Path
Clock > Clock Domain from the Function Tree.

Clock Domain - - Displays the clock

domain.
Clock Domain Board - - Displays the board where

the clock domain is
located.

Clock Port - - Displays the E1 ports that

are bound to a clock
domain.
Parameter Description: Clock Domain_Creation

This topic describes the parameters for creating a clock domain.
Navigation Path
Configuration > Clock > Clock Domain from the Function Tree.
2. Click New.

Clock Domain System Clock Domain System Clock Domain Specifies the clock
CES ACR1 Clock domain to be bound.
Domain
CES ACR2 Clock
Domain
CES ACR3 Clock
Domain
CES ACR4 Clock
Domain
Clock Domain Board - - Displays the board where

the clock domain is
located.
Board - - Specifies the board where

the E1 port is located.
Available Port - - Displays the E1 ports that

are not bound to a clock
domain.
Selected Port - - Displays the E1 ports that

are bound to a clock
domain.
A.10 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the orderwire and auxiliary interfaces.


This topic describes the parameters that are used for general orderwire features.
A.10.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced
This topic describes the parameters that are used for advanced orderwire features.
This topic describes the parameters that are used for F1 data ports.
This topic describes the parameters that are used for broadcast data ports.
This topic describes the parameters that are used for environment monitoring interfaces.

This topic describes the parameters that are used for general orderwire features.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >
Orderwire from the Function Tree.
2. Click the General tab.
Parameters
Call Waiting Time 1 to 9 9 l This parameter indicates the waiting

(s) time after the local station dials the
number. If the calling station does not
receive the response message from the
called station within the call waiting
time, it automatically removes the
communication connection.
l If less than 30 nodes exist in the
orderwire subnet, it is recommended that
you set this parameter to five seconds. If
more than 30 nodes exist in the orderwire
subnet, it is recommended that you set
this parameter to nine seconds.
l The call waiting time should be set to the
same for all the NEs.
Dialling Mode Pulse Dual-Tone This parameter indicates the dialling mode
Dual-Tone Frequency of the orderwire phone.
Frequency

Conference Call - 888 l This parameter indicates the telephone

number of the network-wide orderwire
conference call.
l When an OptiX RTN 980 dials the
telephone number 888, the orderwire
phones of all the NEs on the orderwire
subnet ring. When an OptiX RTN 980
receives the call, the orderwire phones
on the other NEs do not ring. In this case,
the orderwire point-to-multipoint group
call changes to a point-to-point call
between two NEs.
l The telephone number of the orderwire
conference call should be the same for
all the nodes on the same subnet.
l The telephone number of the orderwire
conference call must have the same
length as the telephone number of the
orderwire phone (phone 1) at the local
site.
Phone 1 100 to 99999999 101 l This parameter specifies the orderwire

phone number of the local station. An
addressing call refers to a point-to-point
call.
l The length of the orderwire phone
number of each NE should be the same.
It is recommended that you set the phone
number to a three-digit number.
l The orderwire phone number of each NE
should be unique. It is recommended that
the phone numbers are allocated from
101 for the NEs in a sequential order
according to the NE IDs.
l The orderwire phone number cannot be
set to the group call number 888 and
cannot start with 888.
Available - - This parameter indicates the available port

Orderwire Port for the orderwire phone.
Selected - - This parameter indicates the selected port

Orderwire Port for the orderwire phone.
Related Concepts

A.10.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced

This topic describes the parameters that are used for advanced orderwire features.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Advanced tab.
Parameters for Bytes Occupied by Orderwire Phones

Orderwire E1 E1 l This parameter specifies the overhead

Occupied Bytes E2 byte that is used to transmit the orderwire
signals.
l Regardless the parameter value, the
radio link always uses a customized
overhead byte to transmit the orderwire
signals. Hence, this parameter should be
set according to the occupied SDH
overhead bytes in the ordinary SDH.

This topic describes the parameters that are used for F1 data ports.
Navigation Path
2. Click the F1 Data Port tab.
Parameters
Available Data - - l This parameter indicates the available F1

Path data channel.
l Two data channels should be selected for
the configuration.
Number - - This parameter indicates the number of the

F1 data port.
Data Channel 1 - - l If an SDH optical or electrical line port

is selected, this parameter corresponds to
the F1 byte in the SDH frame at the line
port.

Data Channel 2 l If an IF port is selected, this parameter

corresponds to the customized F1 byte in
the microwave frame at the IF port.
l If F1 is selected, this parameter
corresponds to the F1/S1 interface on
the . The F1/S1 interface complies with
ITU-T G.703 and operates at the rate of
64 kbit/s.
Related Concepts

This topic describes the parameters that are used for broadcast data ports.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Broadcast Data Port tab.
Parameters for Broadcast Data Ports

Overhead Byte SERIAL1 to SERIAL1 l In the case of an SDH optical/electrical

SERIAL4 line, the preset overhead byte is used to
transmit the asynchronous data services.
l In the case of a radio link, a customized
serial overhead byte in the microwave
frame is used to transmit the
asynchronous data services.
Broadcast Data - No Data l When this parameter is set to the

Source SERIAL1, the F1/S1 interface on the
corresponding is used.
l When this parameter is set to the SDH
optical/electrical line port, the value of
Overhead Byte of this port is used.
l When this parameter is set to the IF port,
the customized Serial byte in the
microwave frame of this port is used.

Available - - This parameter indicates the available

Broadcast Data broadcast data sink.
Sink
Selected Broadcast - - l When this parameter is set to the

Data Sink SERIAL1, the F1/S1 interface on the
corresponding is used.
l When this parameter is set to the SDH
optical/electrical line port, the value of
Overhead Byte of this port is used.
l When this parameter is set to the IF port,
the customized Serial byte in the
microwave frame of this port is used.
Related Concepts

This topic describes the parameters that are used for environment monitoring interfaces.
Navigation Path
Select the AUX board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >
Environment Monitor Configuration > Environment Monitor Interface from the Function
Tree.
Parameters for the Basic Attributes

Operation Object - - This parameter indicates the operation

object.
Relay Control Auto Control Auto Control l Auto Control: If an alarm is reported, the
Mode Manual Control alarming relay is started up
automatically. Otherwise, the alarming
relay is shut down.
l Manual Control: Relay Status in Major
Alarm(K0) and Relay Status in
Critical Alarm(K1) need to be set.

Relay Status in Disabled Disabled l This parameter indicates that the status
Major Alarm(K0) Enabled of the relay is set manually for major
alarms.
l Enable: The relay is set to the "0N" status
for major alarms.
l Disabled: The relay is set to the "OFF"
status for major alarms.
l This parameter is valid only when Relay
Control Mode is set to Manual
Control.
Relay Status in Disabled Disabled l This parameter indicates that the status
Critical Alarm(K1) Enabled of the relay is set manually for critical
alarms.
l Enable: The relay is set to the enabled
status for critical alarms.
l Disabled: The relay is set to the disabled
status for critical alarms.
l This parameter is valid only when Relay
Control Mode is set to Manual
Control.
Parameters for the Input Relay


object.
Path Name - - This parameter indicates or specifies the

name of the channel.
Using Status Unused Unused This parameter specifies whether the alarm
Used interface of the input relay is used.
Alarm Mode Relay Turns Off/ Relay Turns Off/ l If this parameter is set to Relay Turns
High Level High Level Off/High Level, an alarm is generated
Relay Turns On/ when the relay is turned off.
Low Level l If this parameter is set to Relay Turns
On/Low Level, an alarm is generated
when the relay is turned on.
l This parameter is valid only when Using
Status is set to Used.

Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Critical Alarm This parameter specifies the severity of the
Major Alarm alarm that is generated at the input relay.
Minor Alarm
Warning Alarm
Parameters for the Output Relay


object.
Path Name - - This parameter indicates or specifies the

name of the output channel.
Use or Not Unused Unused This parameter specifies whether the alarm
Used interface of the output relay is used.
Parameters for the Temperature Attributes


object.
Monitor Status - - This parameter indicates whether the

temperature attribute is monitored.
Temperature - - This parameter indicates the upper

Upper Threshold temperature threshold of the board. When
(Deg.C) the actual temperature is higher than the
preset value, an alarm is generated.
Temperature - - This parameter indicates the lower

Lower Threshold temperature threshold of the board. When
(Deg.C) the actual temperature is lower than the
preset value, an alarm is generated.

Parameters for the Alarm Relay

Alarm Severity Critical Alarm Critical Alarm This parameter indicates the severity of the
Major Alarm Major Alarm alarm.
Minor Alarm Minor Alarm
Warning Alarm Warning Alarm
Alarm Output CSK-1 CSK-1 This parameter specifies the channel of the
Channel CSK-2 output alarm relay.
CSK-3
CSK-4
Related Concepts

IDU Hardware Description B Board Loopback Types
B Board Loopback Types
Different service interface boards support different loopback types.
Table B-1 Loopback types that service interface boards support

Board Loopback Type Remarks
SL1D/SL4D l Inloops at optical ports The SL4D board described in

l Outloops at optical ports this section refers to the logical
SL4D board to which the
l Inloops on VC-4 paths physical CSHN board is mapped.
l Outloops on VC-4 paths
SP3S/SP3D/ML1/MD1 l Inloops at E1 tributary -

ports
l Outloops at E1 tributary
ports
EM6T/EM6F l Inloops at the MAC layer of The EG2D is the logical Ethernet
EG2D Ethernet ports board to which the physical
l Inloops at the PHY layer of CSHN board is mapped.
Ethernet ports
IF1 l Inloops at IF ports -

l Outloops at IF ports
l Inloops at composite ports
l Outloops at composite
ports
IFU2/ISU2/IFX2/ISX2 l Inloops and outloops at IF -

ports
l Inloops and outloops at
multiplexing ports
l Inloops at the MAC layer of
IF_ETH ports
Issue 01 (2010-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential B-1

IDU Hardware Description C Indicators of Boards
C Indicators of Boards
Indicators of Boards
Table C-1 Status explanation for indicators on the CSHN


board.
PROG Blinks on (green) and off at Software is being loaded to the board
of the board.
of the board.
On (green) The upper layer software is being

initialized.
Blinks on (red) and off at The BOOTROM self-check fails during

board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential C-1

C Indicators of Boards IDU Hardware Description

upper layer software fails during the
power-on or resetting process of the
board.
The logic file or upper layer software is
lost during the running process of the
board.
SYNC On (green) The clock is working properly.
On (red) The clock source is lost or a clock

switchover occurs.

system.

system.
ACT On (green) In a 1+1 protected system, the board

In an unprotected system, the board has
been activated.
Off In a 1+1 protected system, the board

In an unprotected system, the board is not
activated.
LOS1 On (red) The first optical port on the line is

Off The first optical port on the line is free of

R_LOS alarms.
LOS2 On (red) The second optical port on the line is

Off The second optical port on the line is free

of R_LOS alarms.

working properly.

interrupted.
C-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 01 (2010-12-30)


the GE1 port.

at the GE1 port.

working properly.

interrupted.

the GE2 port.

at the GE2 port.
CRIT On (red) A critical alarm occurs on the NE.
MAJ On (orange) A major alarm occurs on the NE.
MIN On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs on the NE.
Table C-2 Status explanation for indicators on the IF1


properly.

l There is no power



configured.


properly.

l There is no power

alarms.

300 ms intervals

reporting defects.

of defects.

active one.
the board has been
activated.

standby one.
Table C-3 Status explanation for indicators on the IFU2



services.


services.
Off The services are not configured.
ODU On (green) The ODU is working properly.
On (red) l The ODU is reporting critical or major

alarms.
l There is no power supplied to the ODU.
On (yellow) The ODU is reporting minor alarms.
Blinks on (yellow) The antennas are not aligned.

and off at 300 ms
intervals
RMT On (yellow) The remote equipment is reporting defects.
Off The remote equipment is free of defects.
ACT On (green) l In a 1+1 protected system, the board

l In an unprotected system, the board has
been activated.
Off l In a 1+1 protected system, the board

l In an unprotected system, the board is not
activated.
Table C-4 Status explanation for indicators on the ISU2


properly.

l There is no power




configured.

properly.

l There is no power

alarms.

300 ms intervals

reporting defects.

of defects.

active one.
the board has been
activated.

standby one.

Table C-5 Status explanation for indicators on the IFX2


normal.

disabled.

properly.

l There is no power



configured.

properly.

l There is no power

alarms.

300 ms intervals

reporting defects.

of defects.


active one.
the board has been
activated.

standby one.
Table C-6 Status explanation for indicators on the ISX2


normal.

disabled.

properly.

l There is no power



configured.


properly.

l There is no power

alarms.

300 ms intervals

reporting defects.

of defects.

active one.
the board has been
activated.

standby one.
Table C-7 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6T/EM6F



system.
On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs in the system.

PROG Blinks on (green) and off at Software is being loaded to the board during
board.
300 ms intervals during the power-on or resetting process of
the board.
On (green) The upper layer software is being initialized.
Blinks on (red) and off at 100 The BOOTROM self-check fails during the
ms intervals power-on or resetting process of the board.

upper layer software fails during the power-
on or resetting process of the board.
The logic file or upper layer software is lost
during the running process of the board.

Blinking (yellow) The GE1 port is receiving or transmitting

data.


Flashing (green) The GE2 port is receiving or transmitting

data.

NOTE
a: The LINK1 and LINK2 indicators are available only on the EM6F and indicate the states of the
corresponding GE optical ports.

Table C-8 Status explanation for indicators on the SL1D

properly.

l There is no power



configured.
LOS1 On (red) The first optical port of the

R_LOS alarm.
Off The first optical port of the

alarms.
LOS2 On (red) The second optical port of the

R_LOS alarm.
Off The second optical port of the

alarms.
Table C-9 Status explanation for indicators on the SP3S/SP3D

properly.

l There is no power




configured.
Table C-10 Status explanation for indicators on the ML1/MD1

properly.

l There is no power



configured.
Table C-11 Status explanation for indicators on the AUX

board.


system.

system.
Table C-12 Status explanation for indicators on the PIU

Indicator Status Description
PWR On (green) The power supply is normal.
Off There is no power supply.
ALM On (orange) The board is in the initialization state.
On (red) An alarm is reported on the PIU.
Off No alarm occurs.
Table C-13 Status explanation for indicators on the FAN

FAN On (green) The fan is working properly.
On (red) The fan is faulty.
Off The fan is not powered on or is not installed.

IDU Hardware Description D Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board
D Weight and Power Consumption of Each

Board
Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board
Table D-1 Weight and power consumption of each board
Board Weight (kg) Power Consumption (W)
CSHN 1.60 kg < 37.0 W
IF1 0.72 kg < 12.0 W
IFU2 0.79 kg < 23.0 W
IFX2 0.80 kg < 33.0 W
ISU2 0.60 kg < 22.0 W
ISX2 0.60 kg < 23.0 W
EM6T 0.37 kg < 10.4 W
EM6F 0.40 kg < 11.3 W
SL1D 0.30 kg < 3.4 W
ML1 0.45 kg < 6.9 W
MD1 0.50 kg < 11.0 W
SP3S 0.50 kg < 5.7 W
SP3D 0.64 kg < 9.6 W
AUX 0.27 kg < 1.3 W
PIU 1.00 kg < 29.7 W
FAN 1.70 kg < 15.8 W (room temperature)

< 151.2 W (high temperature)
Issue 01 (2010-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential D-1

D Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board IDU Hardware Description
Board Weight (kg) Power Consumption (W)
Empty chassis 7.10 kg -

(with only the
backplane)
D-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 01 (2010-12-30)

IDU Hardware Description E Glossary
E Glossary
Terms are listed in an alphabetical order.
E.1 0-9
This section provides the terms starting with numbers.
E.2 A-E
This section provides the terms starting with letters A to E.
E.3 F-J
This section provides the terms starting with letters F to J.
E.4 K-O
This section provides the terms starting with letters K to O.
E.5 P-T
This section provides the terms starting with letters P to T.
E.6 U-Z
This section provides the terms starting with letters U to Z.
Issue 01 (2010-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential E-1

E Glossary IDU Hardware Description
E.1 0-9
This section provides the terms starting with numbers.
1U The standard electronics industries association (EIA) rack unit (44 mm/1.75 in.)
E.2 A-E
This section provides the terms starting with letters A to E.
ABR See available bit rate

ACAP See adjacent channel alternate polarization
access control list A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to have access
to a resource.
ACL See access control list
adaptive modulation A technology that is used to automatically adjust the modulation mode according to the
channel quality. When the channel quality is favorable, the equipment adopts a high-
efficiency modulation mode to improve the transmission efficiency and the spectrum
utilization of the system. When the channel quality is degraded, the equipment adopts
the low-efficiency modulation mode to improve the anti-interference capability of the
link that carries high-priority services.
ADC See analog to digital converter
add/drop multiplexer Network elements that provide access to all or some subset of the constituent signals
contained within an STM-N signal. The constituent signals are added to (inserted), and/
or dropped from (extracted) the STM-N signal as it passed through the ADM.
Address Resolution Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is an Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses to
Protocol MAC addresses. It allows hosts and routers to determine the link layer addresses through
ARP requests and ARP responses. The address resolution is a process in which the host
converts the target IP address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame.
The basic function of the ARP is to query the MAC address of the target equipment
through its IP address.
adjacent channel A channel configuration method, which uses two adjacent channels (a horizontal
alternate polarization polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave) to transmit two signals.
ADM See add/drop multiplexer
administrative unit The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layer
and the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher order
VC) and an AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to
the multiplex section frame start.
AF See assured forwarding
aggregation A collection of objects that makes a whole. An aggregation can be a concrete or
conceptual set of whole-part relationships among objects.
E-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 01 (2010-12-30)

AIS See alarm indication signal

alarm automatic report When an alarm is generated on the device side, the alarm is reported to the Network
Management System (NMS) . Then, an alarm panel prompts and the user can view the
details of the alarm.
alarm cascading The shunt-wound output of the alarm signals of several subracks or cabinets.
Alarm Filtering An NE reports the detected alarm to the element management system (EMS). Based on
the filter state of the alarm, the EMS determines whether to display or save the alarm
information. If the filter state of an alarm is set to Filter, the alarm is not displayed or
stored on the EMS. The alarm, however, is still monitored by the NE.
alarm indication signal A code sent downstream in a digital network as an indication that an upstream failure
has been detected and alarmed. It is associated with multiple transport layers.
alarm suppression A function used not to monitor alarms for a specific object, which may be the
networkwide equipment, a specific NE, a specific board and even a specific function
module of a specific board.
AM See adaptive modulation
analog to digital An electronic circuit that converts continuous signals to discrete digital numbers. The
converter reverse operation is performed by a digital-to-analog converter (DAC).
APS See automatic protection switching
ARP See Address Resolution Protocol
assured forwarding One of the four per-hop behaviors (PHB) defined by the Diff-Serv workgroup of IETF.
It is suitable for certain key data services that require assured bandwidth and short delay.
For traffic within the bandwidth limit, AF assures quality in forwarding. For traffic that
exceeds the bandwidth limit, AF degrades the service class and continues to forward the
traffic instead of discarding the packets.
Asynchronous A protocol for the transmission of a variety of digital signals using uniform 53 byte cells.
Transfer Mode A transfer mode in which the information is organized into cells; it is asynchronous in
the sense that the recurrence of cells depends on the required or instantaneous bit rate.
Statistical and deterministic values may also be used to qualify the transfer mode.
ATM See Asynchronous Transfer Mode
ATM PVC ATM permanent virtual circuit
ATPC See automatic transmit power control
attenuator A device used to increase the attenuation of an Optical Fiber Link. Generally used to
ensure that the signal at the receive end is not too strong.
AU See administrative unit
automatic protection Capability of a transmission system to detect a failure on a working facility and to switch
switching to a standby facility to recover the traffic.
automatic transmit A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmit signal detected
power control at the receiver
available bit rate A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. ABR only provides possible
forwarding service and applies to the connections that does not require the real-time
quality. It does not provide any guarantee in terms of cell loss or delay.

B
backward defect When detecting a defect, the sink node of a LSP uses backward defect indication (BDI)
indication to inform the upstream end of the LSP of a downstream defect along the return path.
bandwidth A range of transmission frequencies that a transmission line or channel can carry in a
network. In fact, it is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies the
transmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer rate.
base station controller A logical entity that connects the BTS with the MSC in a GSM network. It interworks
with the BTS through the Abis interface, the MSC through the A interface. It provides
the following functions: radio resource management, base station management, power
control, handover control, and traffic measurement. One BSC controls and manages one
or more BTSs in an actual network.
base transceiver station A Base Transceiver Station terminates the radio interface. It allows transmission of traffic
and signaling across the air interface. The BTS includes the baseband processing, radio
equipment, and the antenna.
basic input/output A firmware stored in the computer mainboard. It contains basic input/output control
system programs, power-on self test (POST) programs, bootstraps, and system setting
information. The BIOS provides hardware setting and control functions for the computer.
BDI See backward defect indication
BE See best effort
BER See bit error rate
best effort A traditional IP packet transport service. In this service, the diagrams are forwarded
following the sequence of the time they reach. All diagrams share the bandwidth of the
network and routers. The amount of resource that a diagram can use depends of the time
it reaches. BE service does not ensure any improvement in delay time, jitter, packet loss
ratio, and high reliability.
binding strap The binding strap is 12.7 mm wide, with one hook side (made of transparent
polypropylene material) and one mat side (made of black nylon material).
BIOS See basic input/output system
BIP See bit interleaved parity
bit error An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the corresponding
bit in the received digital signal.
bit error rate Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index used to measure the
communications quality of a network.
bit interleaved parity A method of error monitoring. With even parity an X-bit code is generated by the
transmitting equipment over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that the
first bit of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in the
covered portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit of
all X-bit sequences within the specified portion, etc. Even parity is generated by setting
the BIP-X bits so that there is an even number of 1s in each monitored partition of the
signal. A monitored partition comprises all bits which are in the same bit position within
the X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion includes
the BIP-X.
BPDU See bridge protocol data unit

bridge protocol data The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended LAN that
unit uses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on
ports, addresses, priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends up where it was
intended to go. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a
network topology. The loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridges
interfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.
broadcast A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range is
determined by the broadcast address.
BSC See base station controller
BTS See base transceiver station
buffer A storage area used for handling data in transit. Buffers are used in internetworking to
compensate for differences in processing speed between network devices. Bursts of data
can be stored in buffers until they can be handled by slower processing devices. In a
program, buffers are created to hold some amount of data from each of the files that will
be read or written. In a streaming media application, the program uses buffers to store
an advance supply of audio or video data to compensate for momentary delays.
C
cable tie The tape used to bind the cables.
cable tray N/A
cable trough N/A
CAR See committed access rate
CBR See constant bit rate
CBS See committed burst size
CC See connectivity check
CCC See circuit cross connect
CCDP See co-channel dual polarization
CCM See continuity check message
CE See customer edge
central processing unit The computational and control unit of a computer. The CPU is the device that interprets
and executes instructions. The CPU has the ability to fetch, decode, and execute
instructions and to transfer information to and from other resources over the computer's
main data-transfer path, the bus.
CES See circuit emulation service
CF See compact flash
CGMP See Cisco Group Management Protocol
channel A telecommunication path of a specific capacity and/or at a specific speed between two
or more locations in a network. The channel can be established through wire, radio
(microwave), fiber or a combination of the three. The amount of information transmitted
per second in a channel is the information transmission speed, expressed in bits per
second. For example, b/s (100 bit/s), kb/s (103 bit/s), Mb/s (106 bit/s), Gb/s (109 bit/s),
and Tb/s (1012 bit/s).

CIR See committed information rate

circuit cross connect An implementation of MPLS L2VPN through the static configuration of labels.
circuit emulation A function with which the E1/T1 data can be transmitted through ATM networks. At the
service transmission end, the interface module packs timeslot data into ATM cells. These ATM
cells are sent to the reception end through the ATM network. At the reception end, the
interface module re-assigns the data in these ATM cells to E1/T1 timeslots. The CES
technology guarantees that the data in E1/T1 timeslots can be recovered to the original
sequence at the reception end.
Cisco Group N/A
Management Protocol
CIST See common and internal spanning tree
CIST root A switch of the highest priority is elected as the root in an MSTP network.
clock tracing The method to keep the time on each node being synchronized with a clock source in a
network.
co-channel dual A channel configuration method, which uses a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical
polarization polarization wave to transmit two signals. The Co-Channel Dual Polarization is twice
the transmission capacity of the single polarization.
coarse wavelength A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels into
division multiplexing the same fiber. CWDM widely spaces wavelengths at a spacing of several nm. CWDM
does not support optical amplifiers and is applied in short-distance chain networking.
colored packet A packet whose priority is determined by defined colors.
committed access rate A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface.
CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classified
into QoS (Quality of Service) groups, and by which the input or output transmission rate
can be defined.
committed burst size committed burst size. A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is,
the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed
information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this
parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be
forwarded.
committed information The rate at which a frame relay network agrees to transfer information in normal
rate conditions. Namely, it is the rate, measured in bit/s, at which the token is transferred to
the leaky bucket.
common and internal The single spanning tree calculated by STP and RSTP together with the logical
spanning tree continuation of that connectivity by using MST Bridges and regions, calculated by MSTP
to ensure that all LANs in the bridged local area network are simply and fully connected.
compact flash Compact flash (CF) was originally developed as a type of data storage device used in
portable electronic devices. For storage, CompactFlash typically uses flash memory in
a standardized enclosure.
concatenation A process that combines multiple virtual containers. The combined capacities can be
used a single capacity. The concatenation also keeps the integrity of bit sequence.
connectivity check Ethernet CFM can detect the connectivity between MEPs. The detection is achieved by
each MEP transmitting a Continuity Check Message (CCM) periodically.

constant bit rate A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transfers cells based on
the constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that depend on precise
clocking to ensure undistorted transmission.
continuity check CCM is used to detect the link status.
message
corrugated pipe Used to protect optical fibers.
CPU See central processing unit
CRC See cyclic redundancy check
cross polarization A technology used in the case of the Co-Channel Dual Polarization (CCDP) to eliminate
interference the cross-connect interference between two polarization waves in the CCDP.
cancellation
customer edge A part of BGP/MPLS IP VPN model. It provides interfaces for direct connection to the
Service Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host.
CWDM See coarse wavelength division multiplexing
cyclic redundancy A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses
check a complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending
device performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that it
sends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation after
transmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmission
was error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmission
includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.
D
data communication A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the Data
network Communication Function (DCF).
data communications The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal to
channel transmit information on operation, management, maintenance and provision (OAM&P)
between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of bytes D1–D3 is referred to as the
192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel that are composed of bytes D4–D12
is referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel.
Datagram A kind of PDU which is used in Connectionless Network Protocol, such as IP datagram,
UDP datagram.
DC See direct current
DC-C See DC-return common (with ground)
DC-C DC-return common (with ground)
DC-C See DC-return common (with ground)
DC-I See DC-return isolate (with ground)
DC-return common A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with
(with ground) the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line between
the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
DC-return common A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with
(with ground) the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line between
the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.

DC-return isolate (with A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with
ground) the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and is isolated from the PGND
on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
DCC See data communications channel
DCN See data communication network
DDF See digital distribution frame
DDN See digital data network
DE See discard eligible
differentiated services A service architecture that provides the end-to-end QoS function. It consists of a series
of functional units implemented at the network nodes, including a small group of per-
hop forwarding behaviors, packet classification functions, and traffic conditioning
functions such as metering, marking, shaping and policing.
differentiated services A marker in the header of each IP packet that prompts network routers to apply
code point differentiated grades of service to various packet streams. It is specified by the DiffServ
policy proposed by the IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force). This allows Internet and
other IP-based network service providers to offer different levels of service to customers.
DiffServ See differentiated services
digital data network A high-quality data transport tunnel that combines the digital channel (such as fiber
channel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel) and the cross multiplex
technology.
digital distribution A type of equipment used between the transmission equipment and the exchange with
frame transmission rate of 2 to 155 Mbit/s to provide the functions such as cables connection,
cable patching, and test of loops that transmitting digital signals.
digital modulation A digital modulation controls the changes in amplitude, phase, and frequency of the
carrier based on the changes in the baseband digital signal. In this manner, the
information can be transmitted by the carrier.
direct current Electrical current whose direction of flow does not reverse. The current may stop or
change amplitude, but it always flows in the same direction.
discard eligible A bit in the frame relay header. It indicates the priority of a packet. If a node supports
the FR QoS, the rate of the accessed FR packets is controlled. When the packet traffic
exceeds the specified traffic, the DE value of the redundant packets is set to 1. In the
case of network congestion, the packets with DE value as 1 are discarded at the node.
Distance Vector An Internet gateway protocol mainly based on the RIP. The protocol implements a typical
Multicast Routing dense mode IP multicast solution. The DVMRP protocol uses IGMP to exchange routing
Protocol datagrams with its neighbors.
DS boundary node A DS node that connects one DS domain to a node either in another DS domain or in a
domain that is not DS-capable.
DS domain In the DifferServ mechanism, the DS domain is a domain consisting of a group of
network nodes that share the same service provisioning policy and same PHB. It provides
point-to-point QoS guarantees for services transmitted over this domain.
DS interior node A DS node located at the center of a DS domain. It is a non-DS boundary node.
DS node A DS-compliant node, which is subdivided into DS boundary node and ID interior node.
DSCP See differentiated services code point

dual-polarized antenna An antenna intended to radiate or receive simultaneously two independent radio waves
orthogonally polarized.
DVMRP See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol
E
E-Aggr See Ethernet aggregation
E-LAN See Ethernet LAN
E-Line See Ethernet line
E-Tree See Ethernet-tree
EBS See excess burst size
ECC See embedded control channel
EF See expedited forwarding
electromagnetic Electromagnetic compatibility is the condition which prevails when telecommunications
compatibility equipment is performing its individually designed function in a common electromagnetic
environment without causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentional
electromagnetic interference to or from other equipment in the same environment.
electromagnetic Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or
interference limits the effective performance of electronics/electrical equipment.
electrostatic discharge The sudden and momentary electric current that flows between two objects at different
electrical potentials caused by direct contact or induced by an electrostatic field.
embedded control A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer,
channel to enable transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM)
information between NEs.
EMC See electromagnetic compatibility
EMI See electromagnetic interference
Engineering label A mark on a cable, a subrack, or a cabinet for identification.
EPL See Ethernet private line
EPLAN See Ethernet private LAN service
equalization A method of avoiding selective fading of frequencies. Equalization can compensate for
the changes of amplitude frequency caused by frequency selective fading.
ERPS See Ethernet ring protection switching
ESD See electrostatic discharge
ESD jack Electrostatic discharge jack. A hole in the cabinet or shelf, which connect the shelf or
cabinet to the insertion of ESD wrist strap.
Ethernet A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision
Detection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/
s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining.
Ethernet A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision
Detection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/
s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining..

Ethernet aggregation A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual
connection).
Ethernet LAN A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-multipoint EVC (Ethernet
virtual connection).
Ethernet line A type of Ethernet service that is based on a point-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual
connection).
Ethernet private LAN An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a
service dedicated bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or
MPLS server layer networks.
Ethernet private line A type of Ethernet service that is provided with dedicated bandwidth and point-to-point
connections on an SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer network.
Ethernet ring protection switching mechanisms for ETH layer Ethernet ring topologies.
Ethernet virtual An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a shared
private LAN service bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server
layer networks.
Ethernet virtual An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over shared
private line bandwidth, point-to-point connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server
layer networks.
Ethernet-tree An Ethernet service type that is based on a Point-to-multipoint Ethernet Virtual
Connection.
ETS European Telecommunication Standards
ETSI See European Telecommunications Standards Institute
European A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.
Telecommunications
Standards Institute
EVPL See Ethernet virtual private line
EVPLAN See Ethernet virtual private LAN service
excess burst size A parameter related to traffic. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM) mode, the
traffic control is achieved by the token buckets C and E. Excess burst size is a parameter
used to define the capacity of token bucket E, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size
when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter
must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the
maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.
Exercise Switching An operation to check if the protection switching protocol functions normally. The
protection switching is not really performed.
expansion Connecting a storage system to more disk enclosures through connection cables, thus
expanding the capacity of the storage system.
expedited forwarding The highest order QoS in the Diff-Serv network. EF PHB is suitable for services that
demand low packet loss ratio, short delay, and broad bandwidth. In all the cases, EF
traffic can guarantee a transmission rate equal to or faster than the set rate. The DSCP
value of EF PHB is "101110".

E.3 F-J
This section provides the terms starting with letters F to J.
failure If the fault persists long enough to consider the ability of an item with a required function
to be terminated. The item may be considered as having failed; a fault has now been
detected.
fast Ethernet Any network that supports transmission rate of 100Mbits/s. The Fast Ethernet is 10 times
faster than 10BaseT, and inherits frame format, MAC addressing scheme, MTU, and so
on. Fast Ethernet is extended from the IEEE802.3 standard, and it uses the following
three types of transmission media: 100BASE-T4 (4 pairs of phone twisted-pair cables),
100BASE-TX (2 pairs of data twisted-pair cables), and 100BASE-FX (2-core optical
fibers).
fast link pulse The link pulse that is used to encode information during automatic negotiation.
FD See frequency diversity
FDI See forward defect indication
FE See fast Ethernet
FEC See forward error correction
FFD fast failure detection
fiber patch cord A kind of fiber used for connections between the subrack and the ODF, and for
connections between subracks or inside a subrack.
field programmable A type of semi-customized circuit used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit
gate array (ASIC) field. It is developed on the basis of the programmable components, such as the
PAL, GAL, and EPLD. It not only remedies the defects of customized circuits, but also
overcomes the disadvantage of the original programmable components in terms of the
limited number of gate arrays.
FIFO See First in First out
File Transfer Protocol A member of the TCP/IP suite of protocols, used to copy files between two computers
on the Internet. Both computers must support their respective FTP roles: one must be an
FTP client and the other an FTP server.
First in First out A stack management mechanism. The first saved data is first read and invoked.
Forced switch For normal traffic signals, switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless
an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect or SF condition exists on the
protection section, by issuing a forced switch request for that traffic signal.
forward defect Forward defect indication (FDI) is generated and traced forward to the sink node of the
indication LSP by the node that first detects defects. It includes fields to indicate the nature of the
defect and its location. Its primary purpose is to suppress alarms being raised at affected
higher level client LSPs and (in turn) their client layers.
forward error A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload at
correction the transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during
transmission are corrected at the receive end.

Forwarding plane Also referred to as the data plane. The forwarding plane is connection-oriented, and can
be used in Layer 2 networks such as an ATM network.
FPGA See field programmable gate array
fragment Piece of a larger packet that has been broken down to smaller units.
Fragmentation Process of breaking a packet into smaller units when transmitting over a network medium
that can not support the original size of the packet.
frame A frame, starting with a header, is a string of bytes with a specified length. Frame length
is represented by the sampling circle or the total number of bytes sampled during a circle.
A header comprises one or a number of bytes with pre-specified values. In other words,
a header is a code segment that reflects the distribution (diagram) of the elements pre-
specified by the sending and receiving parties.
frequency diversity A diversity scheme that enables two or more microwave frequencies with a certain
frequency interval are used to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then
performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading.
FTP See File Transfer Protocol
full-duplex A full-duplex, or sometimes double-duplex system, allows communication in both
directions, and, unlike half-duplex, allows this to happen simultaneously. Land-line
telephone networks are full-duplex, since they allow both callers to speak and be heard
at the same time. A good analogy for a full-duplex system would be a two-lane road with
one lane for each direction.
G
gateway network A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer and
element the NM application layer
GE See gigabit Ethernet
generic framing A framing and encapsulated method which can be applied to any data type. It has been
procedure standardized by ITU-T SG15.
generic traffic shaping A traffic control measure that initiatively adjusts the output speed of the traffic. This is
to adapt the traffic to network resources that can be provided by the downstream router
to avoid packet discarding and congestion.
GFP See generic framing procedure
gigabit Ethernet GE adopts the IEEE 802.3z. GE is compatible with 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s Ethernet.
It runs at 1000 Mbit/s. Gigabit Ethernet uses a private medium, and it does not support
coaxial cables or other cables. It also supports the channels in the bandwidth mode. If
Gigabit Ethernet is, however, deployed to be the private bandwidth system with a bridge
(switch) or a router as the center, it gives full play to the performance and the bandwidth.
In the network structure, Gigabit Ethernet uses full duplex links that are private, causing
the length of the links to be sufficient for backbone applications in a building and campus.
Global Positioning A global navigation satellite system. It provides reliable positioning, navigation, and
System timing services to worldwide users.
GNE See gateway network element
GPS See Global Positioning System

graphical user interface A visual computer environment that represents programs, files, and options with
graphical images, such as icons, menus, and dialog boxes, on the screen.
GTS See generic traffic shaping
GUI See graphical user interface
guide rail Components to guide, position, and support plug-in boards.
H
HA See high availability
half-duplex A transmitting mode in which a half-duplex system provides for communication in both
directions, but only one direction at a time (not simultaneously). Typically, once a party
begins receiving a signal, it must wait for the transmitter to stop transmitting, before
replying.
HDLC See high level data link control
hierarchical quality of A type of QoS that can control the traffic of users, and perform the scheduling according
service to the priority of user services. HQoS has a perfect traffic statistics function, and the
administrator can monitor the usage of bandwidth of each service. Hence, the bandwidth
can be allocated reasonably through traffic analysis.
high availability Typically, a scheme in which two modules operate in active/standby mode to achieve
high availability. When the active module fails, the standby module automatically takes
over the system functions of the active module.
high level data link The HDLC protocol is a general purpose protocol which operates at the data link layer
control of the OSI reference model. Each piece of data is encapsulated in an HDLC frame by
adding a trailer and a header.
High Speed Downlink A modulating-demodulating algorithm put forward in 3GPP R5 to meet the requirement
Packet Access for asymmetric uplink and downlink transmission of data services. It enables the
maximum downlink data service rate to reach 14.4 Mbit/s without changing the
WCDMA network topology.
higher order path In a SDH network, the higher order path layers provide a server network from the lower
order path layers.
Hold priority The priority of the tunnel with respect to holding resources, ranging from 0 (indicates
the highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the resources occupied by the
tunnel can be preempted by other tunnels.
hop A network connection between two distant nodes. For Internet operation a hop represents
a small step on the route from one main computer to another.
hot standby A mechanism of ensuring device running security. The environment variables and
storage information of each running device are synchronized to the standby device. When
the faults occur on the running device, the standby device can take over the services in
the faulty device in automatic or manual way to ensure the normal running of the entire
system.
HP See higher order path
HQoS See hierarchical quality of service
HSB See hot standby
HSDPA See High Speed Downlink Packet Access

HSM hitless switch mode

HTB high tributary bus
hybrid radio The hybrid transmission of Native E1 and Native Ethernet signals. Hybrid radio supports
the AM function.
I
ICMP See Internet Control Message Protocol
IDU See indoor unit
IEC See International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IETF See Internet Engineering Task Force
IF See intermediate frequency
IGMP See Internet Group Management Protocol
IGMP snooping A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This protocol manages
and controls the multicast group by listening to and analyze the Internet Group
Management Protocol (IGMP) packet between hosts and layer 3 devices. In this manner,
the spread of the multicast data on layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently.
IMA See inverse multiplexing over ATM
indoor unit The indoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements accessing,
multiplexing/demultiplexing, and IF processing for services.
Inloop A method of looping the signals from the cross-connect unit back to the cross-connect
unit.
Institute of Electrical A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States but
and Electronics boasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical,
Engineers electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters.
intermediate frequency The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an RF
signal.
Intermediate System The basic unit in the IS-IS protocol used to transmit routing information and generate
routes.
Intermediate System to A protocol used by network devices (routers) to determine the best way to forward
Intermediate System datagrams or packets through a packet-based network, a process called routing.
routing protocol
internal spanning tree A segment of CIST in a certain MST region. An IST is a special MSTI whose ID is 0.
International The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is an international and non-
Electrotechnical governmental standards organization dealing with electrical and electronical standards.
Commission
International An international association that works to establish global standards for communications
Organization for and information exchange. Primary among its accomplishments is the widely accepted
Standardization ISO/OSI reference model, which defines standards for the interaction of computers
connected by communications networks.

International An international body that develops worldwide standards for telecommunications

Telecommunication technologies. These standards are grouped together in series which are prefixed with a
Union- letter indicating the general subject and a number specifying the particular standard. For
Telecommunication example, X.25 comes from the “X” series which deals with data networks and open
Standardization Sector system communications and number "25" deals with packet switched networks.
Internet Control A network-layer (ISO/OSI level 3) Internet protocol that provides error correction and
Message Protocol other information relevant to IP packet processing. For example, it can let the IP software
on one machine inform another machine about an unreachable destination. See also
communications protocol, IP, ISO/OSI reference model, packet (definition 1).
Internet Engineering A worldwide organization of individuals interested in networking and the Internet.
Task Force Managed by the Internet Engineering Steering Group (IESG), the IETF is charged with
studying technical problems facing the Internet and proposing solutions to the Internet
Architecture Board (IAB). The work of the IETF is carried out by various working groups
that concentrate on specific topics, such as routing and security. The IETF is the publisher
of the specifications that led to the TCP/IP protocol standard.
Internet Group The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups among
Management Protocol the TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish
and maintain multicast group memberships.
Internet Protocol The TCP/IP standard protocol that defines the IP packet as the unit of information sent
across an internet and provides the basis for connectionless, best-effort packet delivery
service. IP includes the ICMP control and error message protocol as an integral part. The
entire protocol suite is often referred to as TCP/IP because TCP and IP are the two
fundamental protocols. IP is standardized in RFC 791.
Internet protocol A update version of IPv4. It is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). The specifications
version 6 and standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering Task
Force (IETF). IPv6 is also called. It is a new version of the Internet Protocol, designed
as the successor to IPv4. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address
has 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits.
Internet protocol A update version of IPv4. It is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). The specifications
version 6 and standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering Task
Force (IETF). IPv6 is also called. It is a new version of the Internet Protocol, designed
as the successor to IPv4. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address
has 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits.
inverse multiplexing The ATM inverse multiplexing technique involves inverse multiplexing and de-
over ATM multiplexing of ATM cells in a cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higher
bandwidth logical link whose rate is approximately the sum of the link rates. This is
referred to as an IMA group.
IP See Internet Protocol
IPV6 See Internet protocol version 6
IPv6 See Internet protocol version 6
IS-IS See Intermediate System to Intermediate System routing protocol
ISO See International Organization for Standardization
IST See internal spanning tree
ITU-T See International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization
Sector

J
Jitter Short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and control system
instability.
E.4 K-O
This section provides the terms starting with letters K to O.
L
L2VPN See Layer 2 virtual private network
label switched path A sequence of hops (R0...Rn) in which a packet travels from R0 to Rn through label
switching mechanisms. A label-switched path can be chosen dynamically, based on
normal routing mechanisms, or through configuration.
label switching router Basic element of MPLS network. All LSRs support the MPLS protocol. The LSR is
composed of two parts: control unit and forwarding unit. The former is responsible for
allocating the label, selecting the route, creating the label forwarding table, creating and
removing the label switch path; the latter forwards the labels according to groups
received in the label forwarding table.
LACP See Link Aggregation Control Protocol
LAG See link aggregation group
LAN See local area network
LAN See local area network
LAPS link access protocol-SDH
Laser A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laser
light has better coherence than ordinary light. The fiber system takes the semi-conductor
laser as the light source.
layer 2 switch A data forwarding method. In LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch transmits
and distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address is the
second layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called layer 2 switch.
Layer 2 virtual private A virtual private network achieved by Layer 2 switching technologies in the packet
network switched (IP/MPLS) network.
LB See loopback
LCAS See link capacity adjustment scheme
LCT local craft terminal
line rate The maximum packet forwarding capacity on a cable. The value of line rate equals the
maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media.
line rate forwarding The line rate equals the maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media.
Link Aggregation A method of bundling a group of physical interfaces together as a logical interface to
Control Protocol increase bandwidth and reliability. For related protocols and standards, refer to IEEE
802.3ad.

link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link
aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it were
a single link.
link capacity LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides a
adjustment scheme control mechanism to hitlessly increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet the
bandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing member links
that have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of capacity initiation,
increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the end-to-end path is the
responsibility of the Network and Element Management Systems.
Link Protection Protection provided by the bypass tunnel for the link on the working tunnel. The link is
a downstream link adjacent to the PLR. When the PLR fails to provide node protection,
the link protection should be provided.
LMSP linear multiplex section protection
local area network A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square
kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet,
FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs
are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/
s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).
local area network A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square
kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet,
FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs
are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/
s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).
Locked switching When the switching condition is satisfied, this function disables the service from being
switched from the working channel to the protection channel. When the service has been
switched, the function enables the service to be restored from the protection channel to
the working channel.
LOF See Loss Of Frame
LOM loss of multiframe
loopback A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the
signal or message can be analyzed for errors.
LOP See loss of pointer
LOS See Loss Of Signal
Loss Of Frame A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the PHY overhead
indicating that the receiving equipment has lost frame delineation. This is used to monitor
the performance of the PHY layer.
loss of pointer Loss of Pointer: A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the
PHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost the pointer to the start of
cell in the payload. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer.
Loss Of Signal Loss of signal (LOS) indicates that there are no transitions occurring in the received
signal.
LP lower order path
LPT link-state pass through
LSP See label switched path

LSR See label switching router
M
MA See maintenance association
MAC See media access control
MAC See media access control
MADM multiple add/drop multiplexer
main topology A interface that displays the connection relation of NEs on the NMS (screen display).
The default client interface of the NMS, a basic component of the human-machine
interactive interface. The topology clearly shows the structure of the network, the alarms
of different NEs, subnets in the network, the communication status as well as the basic
network operation status. All topology management functions are accessed here.
maintenance That portion of a Service Instance, preferably all of it or as much as possible, the
association connectivity of which is maintained by CFM. It is also a full mesh of Maintenance
Entities.
maintenance A MEP is an actively managed CFM Entity, associated with a specific DSAP of a Service
association end point Instance, which can generate and receive CFM frames and track any responses. It is an
end point of a single Maintenance Association, and terminates a separate Maintenance
Entity for each of the other MEPs in the same Maintenance Association.
maintenance domain The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by CFM. The
devices in an MD are managed by a single ISP.
maintenance point Maintenance Point (MP) is one of either a MEP or a MIP.
management A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network. It
information base comprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage entities (such as
routers and switches) in a network.
manual switch Switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless a failure condition exists
on other sections (including the protection section) or an equal or higher priority switch
command is in effect, by issuing a manual switch request for that normal traffic signal.
maximum transmission The largest packet of data that can be transmitted on a network. MTU size varies,
unit depending on the network—576 bytes on X.25 networks, for example, 1500 bytes on
Ethernet, and 17,914 bytes on 16 Mbps Token Ring. Responsibility for determining the
size of the MTU lies with the link layer of the network. When packets are transmitted
across networks, the path MTU, or PMTU, represents the smallest packet size (the one
that all networks can transmit without breaking up the packet) among the networks
involved.
MBS maximum burst size
MCF See message communication function
MD See maintenance domain
MDI See medium dependent interface
Mean Time Between The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. It is a measure
Failures of the reliability of the system.
Mean Time To Repair The average time that a device will take to recover from a failure.

media access control A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the
data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting
the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol
checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control
information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are
transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC
protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted
correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control
information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.
media access control A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the
data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting
the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol
checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control
information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are
transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC
protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted
correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control
information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.
medium dependent The electrical and mechanical interface between the equipment and the media
interface transmission.
MEP See maintenance association end point
MEP maintenance end point
message The MCF is composed of a protocol stack that allows exchange of management
communication information with their prs.
function
MIB See management information base
MIP maintenance intermediate point
mounting ear A piece of angle plate with holes in it on a rack. It is used to fix network elements or
components.
MP See maintenance point
MPID maintenance point identification
MPLS See Multiprotocol Label Switching
MPLS L2VPN The MPLS L2VPN provides the Layer 2 VPN service based on an MPLS network. In
this case, on a uniform MPLS network, the carrier is able to provide Layer 2 VPNs of
different media types, such as ATM, FR, VLAN, Ethernet, and PPP.
MPLS OAM The MPLS OAM provides continuity check for a single LSP, and provides a set of fault
detection tools and fault correct mechanisms for MPLS networks. The MPLS OAM and
relevant protection switching components implement the detection function for the CR-
LSP forwarding plane, and perform the protection switching in 50 ms after a fault occurs.
In this way, the impact of a fault can be lowered to the minimum.
MPLS TE See multiprotocol label switching traffic engineering

MPLS TE tunnel In the case of reroute deployment, or when traffic needs to be transported through
multiple trails, multiple LSP tunnels might be used. In traffic engineering, such a group
of LSP tunnels are referred to as TE tunnels. An LSP tunnel of this kind has two
identifiers. One is the Tunnel ID carried by the SENDER object, and is used to uniquely
define the TE tunnel. The other is the LSP ID carried by the SENDER_TEMPLATE or
FILTER_SPEC object.
MS See multiplex section
MSP See multiplex section protection
MSTP See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
MTBF See Mean Time Between Failures
MTTR See Mean Time To Repair
MTU See maximum transmission unit
Multicast A process of transmitting packets of data from one source to many destinations. The
destination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address, that is, the IP address
ranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Each multicast address represents a multicast
group rather than a host.
Multiple Spanning Multiple spanning tree protocol. The MSTP can be used in a loop network. Using an
Tree Protocol algorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed
as a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided
in the loop network. The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and
multiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded
in a VLAN because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.
multiplex section The trail between and including two multiplex section trail termination functions.
multiplex section A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and
protection including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a
"protection" channel.
Multiprotocol Label A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different link
Switching layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis of
IP routing and control protocols. It improves the cost performance and expandability of
networks, and is beneficial to routing.
multiprotocol label N/A
switching traffic
engineering
N
N+1 protection A radio link protection system composed of N working channels and one protection
channel.
NE See network element
NE Explorer The main operation interface, of the NMS, which is used to manage the
telecommunication equipment. In the NE Explorer, the user can query, manage and
maintain the NE, boards, and ports on a per-NE basis.

network element A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software running on it. One
NE is at least equipped with one system control and communication(SCC) board which
manages and monitors the entire network element. The NE software runs on the SCC
board.
Network Management A system in charge of the operation, administration, and maintenance of a network.
System
network service access A network address defined by ISO, through which entities on the network layer can
point access OSI network services.
network to network An internal interface within a network linking two or more elements.
interface
next hop The next router to which a packet is sent from any given router as it traverses a network
on its journey to its final destination.
NLP normal link pulse
NMS See Network Management System
NNI See network to network interface
node A node stands for a managed device in the network. For a device with a single frame,
one node stands for one device. For a device with multiple frames, one node stands for
one frame of the device. Therefore, a node does not always mean a device.
Node Protection A parameter of the FRR protection. It indicates that the bypass tunnel should be able to
protect the downstream node that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to the
PLR. The node cannot be a merge point, and the bypass tunnel should also be able to
protect the downstream link that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to the
PLR.
non-gateway network A network element whose communication with the NM application layer must be
element transferred by the gateway network element application layer.
non-GNE See non-gateway network element
NSAP See network service access point
NSF not stop forwarding
O
OAM See operation, administration and maintenance
OAM See operation, administration and maintenance
ODF See optical distribution frame
ODU See outdoor unit
One-to-One Backup A local repair method in which a backup tunnel is separately created for each protected
tunnel at a PLR.
open shortest path first A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing. Dijkstra's
algorithm is used to calculate the shortest path tree. It uses cost as its routing metric. A
link state database is constructed of the network topology which is identical on all routers
in the area.

Open Systems A framework of ISO standards for communication between different systems made by
Interconnection different vendors, in which the communications process is organized into seven different
categories that are placed in a layered sequence based on their relationship to the user.
Each layer uses the layer immediately below it and provides a service to the layer above.
Layers 7 through 4 deal with end-to-end communication between the message source
and destination, and layers 3 through 1 deal with network functions.
operation, A group of network support functions that monitor and sustain segment operation,
administration and activities that are concerned with, but not limited to, failure detection, notification,
maintenance location, and repairs that are intended to eliminate faults and keep a segment in an
operational state and support activities required to provide the services of a subscriber
access network to users/subscribers.
operation, A group of network support functions that monitor and sustain segment operation,
administration and activities that are concerned with, but not limited to, failure detection, notification,
maintenance location, and repairs that are intended to eliminate faults and keep a segment in an
operational state and support activities required to provide the services of a subscriber
access network to users/subscribers.
optic fiber connector A device installed at the end of a fiber, optical source or receive unit. It is used to couple
the optical wave to the fiber when connected to another device of the same type. A
connector can either connect two fiber ends or connect a fiber end and a optical source
(or a detector).+
optical distribution A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers.
frame
orderwire A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or
maintenance engineers of different stations.
OSI See Open Systems Interconnection
OSPF See open shortest path first
outdoor unit The outdoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements frequency
conversion and amplification for RF signals.
Outloop A method of looping back the input signals received at an port to an output port without
changing the structure of the signals.
Output optical power The ranger of optical energy level of output signals.
E.5 P-T
This section provides the terms starting with letters P to T.
P
packet switched A telecommunication network which works in packet switching mode.
network
Packing case A case which is used for packing the board or subrack.

Path A performance resource object defined in the network management system. The left end
of a path is a device node whose port needs to be specified and the right end of a path is
a certain IP address which can be configured by the user. By defining a path in the
network management system, a user can test the performance of a network path between
a device port and an IP address. The tested performance may be the path delay, packet
loss ratio or other aspects.
PBS See peak burst size
PCB See printed circuit board
PCI bus PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) bus. A high performance bus, 32-bit or 64-bit
for interconnecting chips, expansion boards, and processor/memory subsystems.
PDH See plesiochronous digital hierarchy
PDU See protocol data unit
PE See provider edge
peak burst size A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the maximum burst
IP packet size when the information is transferred at the peak information rate. This
parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not
less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.
peak information rate A traffic parameter, expressed in bit/s, whose value should be not less than the committed
information rate.
penultimate hop Penultimate Hop Popping (PHP) is a function performed by certain routers in an MPLS
popping enabled network. It refers to the process whereby the outermost label of an MPLS tagged
packet is removed by a Label Switched Router (LSR) before the packet is passed to an
adjacent Label Edge Router (LER).
per-hop behavior IETF Diff-Serv workgroup defines forwarding behaviors of network nodes as per-hop
behaviors (PHB), such as, traffic scheduling and policing. A device in the network should
select the proper PHB behaviors, based on the value of DSCP. At present, the IETF
defines four types of PHB. They are class selector (CS), expedited forwarding (EF),
assured forwarding (AF), and best-effort (BE).
PHB See per-hop behavior
PHP See penultimate hop popping
PIR See peak information rate
plesiochronous digital A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimum
hierarchy rate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s rates.
Point-to-Point Protocol A protocol on the data link layer, provides point-to-point transmission and encapsulates
data packets on the network layer. It is located in layer 2 of the IP protocol stack.
polarization A kind of electromagnetic wave, the direction of whose electric field vector is fixed or
rotates regularly. Specifically, if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is
perpendicular to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called vertically
polarized wave; if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is parallel to the
plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called horizontal polarized wave; if the
tip of the electric field vector, at a fixed point in space, describes a circle, this
electromagnetic wave is called circularly polarized wave.
Power box A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which supplies
power for the subracks in the cabinet.

PPP See Point-to-Point Protocol

PQ See priority queue
PRBS See pseudo random binary sequence
PRC primary reference clock
printed circuit board A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic components
using conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated onto
a non-conductive substrate.
priority queue An abstract data type in computer programming that supports the following three
operations: 1) InsertWithPriority: add an element to the queue with an associated priority
2) GetNext: remove the element from the queue that has the highest priority, and return
it (also known as "PopElement(Off)", or "GetMinimum") 3) PeekAtNext (optional): look
at the element with highest priority without removing it
protection ground A cable which connects the equipment and the protection grounding bar. Usually, one
cable half of the cable is yellow; while the other half is green.
Protection path A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.
protocol data unit It is a data packet at the network layer of the OSI model.
provider edge A device that is located in the backbone network of the MPLS VPN structure. A PE is
responsible for VPN user management, establishment of LSPs between PEs, and
exchange of routing information between sites of the same VPN. During the process, a
PE performs the mapping and forwarding of packets between the private network and
the public channel. A PE can be a UPE, an SPE, or an NPE.
pseudo random binary A sequence that is random in a sense that the value of an element is independent of the
sequence values of any of the other elements, similar to real random sequences.
pseudo wire An emulated connection between two PEs for transmitting frames. The PW is established
and maintained by PEs through signaling protocols. The status information of a PW is
maintained by the two end PEs of a PW.
pseudo wire emulation A type of end-to-end Layer 2 transmitting technology. It emulates the essential attributes
edge-to-edge of a telecommunication service such as ATM, FR or Ethernet in a Packet Switched
Network (PSN). PWE3 also emulates the essential attributes of low speed Time Division
Multiplexed (TDM) circuit and SONET/SDH. The simulation approximates to the real
situation.
PSN See packet switched network
PTN packet transport network
PW See pseudo wire
PWE3 See pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge
Q
QinQ A layer 2 tunnel protocol based on IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation. It encapsulates the tag
of the user's private virtual local area network (VLAN) into the tag of the public VLAN.
The packet carries two layers of tags to travel through the backbone network of the
carrier. In this manner, the layer 2 virtual private network (VPN) is provided for the user.
QoS See quality of service

QPSK See quadrature phase shift keying

quadrature phase shift A modulation method of data transmission through the conversion or modulation and
keying the phase determination of the reference signals (carrier). It is also called the fourth period
or 4-phase PSK or 4-PSK. QPSK uses four dots in the star diagram. The four dots are
evenly distributed on a circle. On these phases, each QPSK character can perform two-
bit coding and display the codes in Gray code on graph with the minimum BER.
quality of service A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel.
Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter, delay, packet loss
ratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to measure the quality of the
transmission system and the effectiveness of the services, as well as the capability of a
service provider to meet the demands of users.
radio frequency A type of electric current in the wireless network using AC antennas to create an
electromagnetic field. It is the abbreviation of high-frequency AC electromagnetic wave.
The AC with the frequency lower than 1 kHz is called low-frequency current. The AC
with frequency higher than 10 kHz is called high-frequency current. RF can be classified
into such high-frequency current.
radio network An equipment in the RNS which is in charge of controlling the use and the integrity of
controller the radio resources.
random early detection A packet loss algorithm used in congestion avoidance. It discards the packet according
to the specified higher limit and lower limit of a queue so that global TCP synchronization
resulted in traditional Tail-Drop can be prevented.
Rapid Spanning Tree An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning tree
Protocol convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with
the STP protocol.
RDI See remote defect indication
received signal level The signal level at a receiver input terminal.
Received Signal The received wide band power, including thermal noise and noise generated in the
Strength Indicator receiver, within the bandwidth defined by the receiver pulse shaping filter, for TDD
within a specified timeslot. The reference point for the measurement shall be the antenna
Receiver Sensitivity Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of average received
power at point R to achieve a 1 x 10-12 BER (The FEC is open).
RED See random early detection
Reed-Solomon-Code A forward error correction code located before interleaving that enables correction of
errors induced by burst noise. Widely used error correction scheme to fight transmission
errors at the receiver site.
REI See remote error indication
remote defect A signal transmitted at the first opportunity in the outgoing direction when a terminal
indication detects specific defects in the incoming signal.
remote error indication A remote error indication (REI) is sent upstream to signal an error condition. There are
two types of REI alarms: Remote error indication line (REI-L) is sent to the upstream
LTE when errors are detected in the B2 byte. Remote error indication path (REI-P) is
sent to the upstream PTE when errors are detected in the B3 byte.

Request For Comments A document in which a standard, a protocol, or other information pertaining to the
operation of the Internet is published. The RFC is actually issued, under the control of
the IAB, after discussion and serves as the standard. RFCs can be obtained from sources
such as InterNIC.
Resource Reservation The Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) is designed for Integrated Service and is
Protocol used to reserve resources on every node along a path. RSVP operates on the transport
layer; however, RSVP does not transport application data. RSVP is a network control
protocol like Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP).
reverse pressure A traffic control method. In telecommunication, when detecting that the transmit end
transmits a large volume of traffic, the receive end sends signals to ask the transmit end
to slow down the transmission rate.
RF See radio frequency
RFC See Request For Comments
RIP See Routing Information Protocol
RMON remote network monitoring
RMON remote network monitoring
RNC See radio network controller
Root alarm An alarm directly caused by anomaly events or faults in the network. Some lower-level
alarms always accompany a root alarm.
route A route is the path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. In a TCP/
IP network, each IP packet is routed independently. Routes can change dynamically.
route table A mapping table that stores the relationship between the original address, destination
address, short message (SM) protocol type and account. The SMSC delivers an SM to
the designated account according to the information set in the route table.
Routing Information A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a route
Protocol based on the smallest hop count between source and destination. RIP is a distance vector
protocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its neighboring routers and is
known to waste bandwidth.
routing table A table that stores and updates the locations (addresses) of network devices. Routers
regularly share routing table information to be up to date. A router relies on the
destination address and on the information in the table that gives the possible routes--in
hops or in number of jumps--between itself, intervening routers, and the destination.
Routing tables are updated frequently as new information is available.
RSL See received signal level
RSSI See Received Signal Strength Indicator
RSTP See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
RSVP See Resource Reservation Protocol
RTN radio transmission node
S
SD See space diversity
SDH See synchronous digital hierarchy

SEMF See synchronous equipment management function

service level agreement A service contract between a customer and a service provider that specifies the
forwarding service a customer should receive. A customer may be a user organization
(source domain) or another differentiated services domain (upstream domain). A SLA
may include traffic conditioning rules which constitute a traffic conditioning agreement
as a whole or partially.
Service Level A management-documented agreement that defines the relationship between service
Agreement * provider and its customer. It also provides specific, quantifiable information about
measuring and evaluating the delivery of services. The SLA details the specific operating
and support requirements for each service provided. It protects the service provider and
customer and allows the service provider to provide evidence that it has achieved the
documented target measure.
SES See severely errored second
Setup Priority The priority of the tunnel with respect to obtaining resources, ranging from 0 (indicates
the highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the tunnel can preempt the
resources required by other backup tunnels.
severely errored second A one-second period which has a bit error ratio >=1 X 10-3 or at least one defect. Time
interval of one second during which a given digital signal is received with an error ratio
greater than 1 X 10 -3 (Rec. ITU R F. 592 needs correction) .
SF See signal fail
SFP See small form-factor pluggable
side trough The trough on the side of the cable rack, which is used to place nuts so as to fix the
cabinet.
signal cable Common signal cables cover the E1 cable, network cable, and other non-subscriber
signal cable.
signal fail A signal that indicates the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect
condition (non-degrade defect) is active.
signal to noise ratio The ratio of the amplitude of the desired signal to the amplitude of noise signals at a
given point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times the logarithm of the power ratio and
is usually expressed in dB (Decibel).
Simple Network A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify
Management Protocol the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the
transmission of management information between any two points. The polling
mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which
can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the
network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control
information about each device is maintained by a management information block.
simplex Designating or pertaining to a method of operation in which information can be
transmitted in either direction, but not simultaneously, between two points.
SLA See service level agreement
SLA* See Service Level Agreement *
Slicing To divide data into the information units proper for transmission.
small form-factor A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers.
pluggable

SNC See subnetwork connection

SNCP See subnetwork connection protection
SNMP See Simple Network Management Protocol
SNR See signal to noise ratio
space diversity A diversity scheme that enables two or more antennas separated by a specific distance
to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the two
signals to ease the impact of fading. Currently, only receive SD is used.
Spanning Tree Protocol STP is a protocol that is used in the LAN to remove the loop. STP applies to the redundant
network to block some undesirable redundant paths through certain algorithms and prune
a loop network into a loop-free tree network.
SSM See Synchronization Status Message
static virtual circuit Static virtual circuit. A static implementation of MPLS L2VPN that transfers L2VPN
information by manual configuration of VC labels, instead of by a signaling protocol.
Statistical multiplexing A multiplexing technique whereby information from multiple logical channels can be
transmitted across a single physical channel. It dynamically allocates bandwidth only to
active input channels, to make better use of available bandwidth and allow more devices
to be connected than with other multiplexing techniques. Compare with TDM.
STM See Synchronous Transport Module
STM-1 See synchronous transport mode-1
STM-N See synchronous transport module of order N
STP See Spanning Tree Protocol
sub-network Sub-network is the logical entity in the transmission network and comprises a group of
network management objects. The network that consists of a group of interconnected or
correlated NEs, according to different functions. For example, protection subnet, clock
subnet and so on. A sub-network can contain NEs and other sub-networks. Generally, a
sub-network is used to contain the equipments which are located in adjacent regions and
closely related with one another, and it is indicated with a sub-network icon on a
topological view. The U2000 supports multilevels of sub-networks. A sub-network
planning can better the organization of a network view. On the one hand, the view space
can be saved, on the other hand, it helps the network management personnel focus on
the equipments under their management.
subnet mask The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets are
destined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine,
server or router and is matched with the IP address.
subnetwork connection A "transport entity" that transfers information across a subnetwork, it is formed by the
association of "ports" on the boundary of the subnetwork.
subnetwork connection A function, which allows a working subnetwork connection to be replaced by a protection
protection subnetwork connection if the working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performance
falls below a required level.
SVC See static virtual circuit
switch To filter, forward frames based on label or the destination address of each frame. This
behavior operates at the data link layer of the OSI model.

Synchronization Status A message that carries quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing link.
Message Nodes on an SDH network and a synchronization network acquire upstream clock
information through this message. Then the nodes can perform proper operations on their
clocks, such as tracing, switching, or converting to holdoff), and forward the
synchronization information to downstream nodes.
synchronous digital A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines the
hierarchy transmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode,
transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and B-
ISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speed
counterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is only used only for signals. SDH is
suitable for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity since
it uses synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure.
synchronous The SEMF converts performance data and implementation specific hardware alarms into
equipment object-oriented messages for transmission over DCCs and/or a Q interface.
management function
synchronous transport Synchronous Transfer Mode at 155 Mbit/s.
mode-1
Synchronous An STM is the information structure used to support section layer connections in the
Transport Module SDH. It consists of information payload and Section Overhead (SOH) information fields
organized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125 . The information is suitably
conditioned for serial transmission on the selected media at a rate which is synchronized
to the network. A basic STM is defined at 155 520 kbit/s. This is termed STM-1. Higher
capacity STMs are formed at rates equivalent to N times this basic rate. STM capacities
for N = 4, N = 16 and N = 64 are defined; higher values are under consideration.
synchronous transport A STM-N is the information structure used to support section layer connections in SDH.
module of order N See ITU-T Recommendation G. 707 for STM modules of order 1, 4, 16 and 64.
tail drop A type of QoS. When a queue within a network router reaches its maximum length,
packet drops can occur. When a packet drop occurs, connection-based protocols such as
TCP slow down their transmission rates in an attempt to let queued packets be serviced,
thereby letting the queue empty. This is also known as tail drop because packets are
dropped from the input end (tail) of the queue.
Tail drop A congestion management mechanism, in which packets arrive later are discarded when
the queue is full. This policy of discarding packets may result in network-wide
synchronization due to the TCP slow startup mechanism.
TCI tag control information
TCP See Transmission Control Protocol
TDM See time division multiplexing
TE See traffic engineering
TEDB See traffic engineering database
Telecommunication A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communications
Management Network network. An architecture for management, including planning, provisioning, installation,
maintenance, operation and administration of telecommunications equipment, networks
and services.

TIM trace identifier mismatch

time division A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time slots
multiplexing (TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3…), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross time slots
in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be transmitted over
one channel.
time to live A technique used in best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets that loop endlessly.
The TTL is set by the sender to the maximum time the packet is allowed to be in the
network. Each router in the network decrements the TTL field when the packet arrives,
and discards any packet if the TTL counter reaches zero.
TMN See Telecommunication Management Network
ToS priority A ToS sub-field (the bits 0 to 2 in the ToS field) in the ToS field of the IP packet header.
TPS See tributary protection switch
traffic engineering A technology that is used to dynamically monitor the traffic of the network and the load
of the network elements, to adjust in real time the parameters such as traffic management
parameters, route parameters and resource restriction parameters, and to optimize the
utilization of network resources. The purpose is to prevent the congestion caused by
unbalanced loads.
traffic engineering TEDB is the abbreviation of the traffic engineering database. MPLS TE needs to know
database the features of the dynamic TE of every links by expanding the current IGP, which uses
the link state algorithm, such as OSPF and IS-IS. The expanded OSPF and IS-IS contain
some TE features, such as the link bandwidth and color. The maximum reserved
bandwidth of the link and the unreserved bandwidth of every link with priority are rather
important. Every router collects the information about TE of every links in its area and
generates TE DataBase. TEDB is the base of forming the dynamic TE path in the MPLS
TE network.
Traffic shaping It is a way of controlling the network traffic from a computer to optimize or guarantee
the performance and minimize the delay. It actively adjusts the output speed of traffic
in the scenario that the traffic matches network resources provided by the lower layer
devices, avoiding packet loss and congestion.
Transmission Control The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets to
Protocol be sent via IP (Internet Protocol), and the reassembly and verification of the complete
messages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliable
in the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer in
the ISO/OSI reference model.
tributary protection Tributary protection switching, a function provided by the equipment, is intended to
switch protect N tributary processing boards through a standby tributary processing board.
trTCM See two rate three color marker
TTL See time to live
TU tributary unit
Tunnel A channel on the packet switching network that transmits service traffic between PEs.
In VPN, a tunnel is an information transmission channel between two entities. The tunnel
ensures secure and transparent transmission of VPN information. In most cases, a tunnel
is an MPLS tunnel.

two rate three color The trTCM meters an IP packet stream and marks its packets based on two rates, Peak
marker Information Rate (PIR) and Committed Information Rate (CIR), and their associated
burst sizes to be either green, yellow, or red. A packet is marked red if it exceeds the
PIR. Otherwise it is marked either yellow or green depending on whether it exceeds or
doesn't exceed the CIR.
E.6 U-Z
This section provides the terms starting with letters U to Z.
U
U-VLAN A VLAN attribute indicating that the current VLAN is a user VLAN of an M-VLAN.
Multicast services are copied from the M-VLAN to the user VLAN.
UAS unavailable second
UBR See unspecified bit rate
UDP See User Datagram Protocol
underfloor cabling The cables connected cabinets and other devices are routed underfloor.
UNI See user network interface
unicast The process of sending data from a source to a single recipient.
unspecified bit rate No commitment to transmission. No feedback to congestion. This type of service is ideal
for the transmission of IP datagrams. In case of congestion, UBR cells are discarded,
and no feedback or request for slowing down the data rate is delivered to the sender.
upload An operation to report some or all configuration data of an NE to the NMS(Network
Management system). The configuration data then covers the configuration data stored
at the NMS side.
User Datagram A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a
Protocol datagram to an application program on another. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) uses IP
to deliver datagrams. UDP provides application programs with the unreliable
connectionless packet delivery service. Thus, UDP messages can be lost, duplicated,
delayed, or delivered out of order. UDP is used to try to transmit the data packet, that is,
the destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet is
received.
user network interface The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (for
example, ATM switches).
V
V-UNI See virtual user-network interface
variable bit rate One of the traffic classes used by ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode). Unlike a
permanent CBR (Constant Bit Rate) channel, a VBR data stream varies in bandwidth
and is better suited to non real time transfers than to real-time streams such as voice calls.
VBR See variable bit rate
VC See virtual container

VCC See virtual channel connection

VCG See virtual concatenation group
VCI See virtual channel identifier
VCTRUNK A virtual concatenation group applied in data service mapping, also called the internal
port of a data service processing board
virtual channel The VC logical trail that carries data between two end points in an ATM network. A
connection logical grouping of multiple virtual channel connections into one virtual connection.
virtual channel A 16-bit field in the header of an ATM cell. The VCI, together with the VPI, is used to
identifier identify the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches on
its way to its destination.
virtual concatenation A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the same
group virtual concatenation link
virtual container The information structure used to support path layer connections in the SDH. It consists
of information payload and path Overhead (POH) information fields organized in a block
frame structure which repeats every 125 or 500 μs.
virtual local area A logical grouping of two or more nodes which are not necessarily on the same physical
network network segment but which share the same IP network number. This is often associated
with switched Ethernet.
virtual path identifier The field in the Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) cell header that identifies to which
virtual path the cell belongs.
virtual private LAN A type of point-to-multipoint L2VPN service provided over the public network. VPLS
service enables geographically isolated user sites to communicate with each other through the
MAN/WAN as if they are on the same LAN.
virtual private network A system configuration, where the subscriber is able to build a private network via
connections to different network switches that may include private network capabilities.
virtual route forward VRF performs the function of establishing multiple virtual routing devices on one actual
routing device. That is, the L3 interfaces of the device are distributed to different VRFs,
performing the function of establishing multiple virtual route forwarding instances on
the device.
virtual user-network A virtual user-network interface, works as an action point to perform service
interface classification and traffic control in HQoS.
VLAN See virtual local area network
voice over IP An IP telephony term for a set of facilities used to manage the delivery of voice
information over the Internet. VoIP involves sending voice information in a digital form
in discrete packets rather than by using the traditional circuit-committed protocols of the
public switched telephone network (PSTN).
VoIP See voice over IP
VPI See virtual path identifier
VPLS See virtual private LAN service
VPN See virtual private network
VRF See virtual route forward

W
wait to restore The number of minutes to wait before services are switched back to the working line.
WAN See wide area network
Web LCT The local maintenance terminal of a transport network, which is located on the NE
management layer of the transport network
weighted fair queuing A fair queue scheduling algorithm based on bandwidth allocation weights. This
scheduling algorithm allocates the total bandwidth of an interface to queues, according
to their weights and schedules the queues cyclically. In this manner, packets of all priority
queues can be scheduled.
weighted random early A packet loss algorithm used for congestion avoidance. It can prevent the global TCP
detection synchronization caused by traditional tail-drop. WRED is favorable for the high-priority
packet when calculating the packet loss ratio.
weighted round Robin N/A
WFQ See weighted fair queuing
wide area network A network composed of computers which are far away from each other which are
physically connected through specific protocols. WAN covers a broad area, such as a
province, a state or even a country.
winding pipe A tool for fiber routing, which acts as the corrugated pipe.
WRED See weighted random early detection
WRR See weighted round Robin
WTR See wait to restore
X
XPIC See cross polarization interference cancellation


RTN 980 IDU Hardware Description (V100R003C00 - 01)

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

RTN 980 IDU Hardware Description (V100R003C00 - 01)

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

OptiX RTN 980 Radio Transmission System

IDU Hardware Description

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2010-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

About This Document

Product Name Version

OptiX RTN 980 V100R003C00

iManager U2000 V100R003C00

l Network planning engineer

l Basics of digital microwave communication

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk,

Issue 01 (2010-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation,

Indicates a tip that may help you solve a

Provides additional information to emphasize

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in

Italic Book titles are in italics.

Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italics.

[] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

iv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 01 (2010-12-30)

[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

Updates in Issue 01 (2010-12-30) Based on Product Version V100R003C00

Issue 01 (2010-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

About This Document...................................................................................................................iii

Issue 01 (2010-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

3.5.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-48

viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 01 (2010-12-30)

3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................3-121

Issue 01 (2010-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix

3.15.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-165

x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 01 (2010-12-30)

A.4.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation..........................................................A-85

B Board Loopback Types............................................................................................................ B-1

Issue 01 (2010-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xi

C Indicators of Boards................................................................................................................. C-1

xii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 01 (2010-12-30)

Issue 01 (2010-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiii

Figure 3-28 Logical slots of the ISU2 on the NMS...........................................................................................3-84

xiv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 01 (2010-12-30)

Figure 4-2 Front view of an E1 port (E1 panel)...................................................................................................4-3

Issue 01 (2010-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xv

Table 1-1 Introduction of the IDU 980.................................................................................................................1-4

Issue 01 (2010-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xvii

Table 3-29 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IF1.......................................................................3-38

xviii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 01 (2010-12-30)

Table 3-71 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem.................................................................3-88

Issue 01 (2010-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xix

Table 3-113 Status explanation for indicators on the ML1/MD1....................................................................3-133

xx Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 01 (2010-12-30)

Table 5-2 Types of fiber jumpers.........................................................................................................................5-7

Issue 01 (2010-12-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxi

Table C-3 Status explanation for indicators on the IFU2....................................................................................C-4

xxii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 01 (2010-12-30)